m2000sp Service Manual

G-series
Service Manual
© 2007 Abbott Laboratories
Abbott Molecular Inc.

1300 E. Touhy Ave.
Des Plaines, IL 60018
200942-103—September 2007
Introduction
NOTES
ii m2000sp G-series Service Manual

200942-103—September 2007
Introduction
Revision Status
Document Revision Section(s) Pages Revised, Software

Control Number Date Revised Added, or Deleted Version
200942-101 11/2005 New Document New Document 1.0

200942-102 12/2006 All Sections All Pages 2.0
200942-103 9/2007 All Sections All Pages 3.0
m2000sp G-series Service Manual iii

200942-103—September 2007
Introduction
Revision Status continued
ISAs Incorporated in this Revision TSBs Incorporated in this Revision
NA NA
iv m2000sp G-series Service Manual

200942-103—September 2007
Introduction
Proprietary Statement
The information, documents and related graphics published
herein (the “Information”) are the sole property of Abbott
Molecular. Permission to use the Information is granted,
provided that:
• the copyright notice appears on all copies
• use of the Information if for operation of ABBOTT
products by Abbott trained personnel or informational use
only
• the Information is not modified in any way
• no graphics are used separate from accompanying text
Each person assumes full responsibility and all risks arising
from use of the Information. The Information is presented “AS
IS” and may include technical inaccuracies or typographical
errors. Abbott Molecular reserves the right to make additions,
deletions, or modifications to the Information at any time
without any prior notification.
Qualifications
• All samples (printouts, graphics, displays, screens, etc.) are
for information and illustration purposes only and shall
not be used for clinical or maintenance evaluations. Data
shown in sample printouts and screens do not reflect
actual patient names or test results.
• The Information was developed to be used by Abbott
Molecular-trained personnel, by other persons
knowledgeable or experienced with the operation and
service of the product identified, or under the direct
supervision and with cooperation from Abbott Molecular
technical sales or service representatives.
• In no event shall Abbott Molecular or its affiliates be liable
for any damages or losses incurred in connection with or
arising from the use of the Information by persons not
fully trained by Abbott Molecular. This limitation shall
not apply to those persons knowledgeable or experienced
with the operation and service of the product identified,
or under the direct supervision and with cooperation from
Abbott Molecular technical sales or service
representatives.
m2000sp G-series Service Manual v

200942-103—September 2007
Introduction
• No part of this media may be reproduced, stored,

retrieved, or transmitted in any form or by any means
without the prior written permission of Abbott Molecular.
• No confidential relationship shall be established in the
event that any user of the Information should make any
oral, written, or electronic response to Abbott Molecular
(such as feedback, questions, comments, suggestions,
ideas, etc.). Such responses and any information
submitted therewith shall be considered non-confidential,
and Abbott shall be free to reproduce, publish, or
otherwise use such information for any purposes
whatsoever including, without limitation, the research,
development, manufacture, service, use, or sale of
products incorporating such information. The sender of
any information to Abbott is fully responsible for its
content, including its truthfulness and accuracy and its
non-infringement of any other person’s proprietary rights.
• Abbott Molecular is not engaged in rendering medical
advice or services.
• Updates to the Information may be provided in either
paper or electronic formats. Always refer to the latest
documents or the most current information.
• Updates to the information in this manual are provided as
ISAs, TSBs, Customer Letters, or Revisions to printed
documents. Always refer to the latest documents for the
most current and up-to-date information.
Warranty Statement
Abbott Laboratories makes no representations or warranties of
any kind or nature with respect to the information. Abbott
Laboratories hereby disclaims all representations and
warranties, whether expressed or implied, created by law,
contract, or otherwise, including without limitation, any
warranties of merchantability, fitness for a particular purpose,
title or non-infringement. In no event shall Abbott
Laboratories be liable for any damages of any kind or nature,
including, without limitation, direct, indirect, special
(including loss of profit) consequential or incidental damages
arising from or in connection with the existence or use of the
Information, regardless of whether Abbott Laboratories has
been advised as to the possibility of such damages.
vi m2000sp G-series Service Manual

200942-103—September 2007
Introduction
Trademark Statements
All Abbott Molecular product names and trademarks are
owned or licensed to Abbott Laboratories, its subsidiaries, or
affiliates. No use of any Abbott trademark, trade name, trade
dress, or product name may be made without the prior written
authorization of Abbott Laboratories, except to identify the
product or services of Abbott Laboratories. All other
trademarks, brands, product names, and trade names are the
property of their respective companies. All rights reserved.
Except as permitted above, no license or right, expressed or
implied, is granted to any person under any patent, trademark,
or other proprietary right of Abbott Laboratories.
Copyright 2005–2007 by Abbott Laboratories.
All rights reserved.
m2000sp G-series Service Manual vii

200942-103—September 2007
Introduction
Introduction
The m2000sp is an automated system designed to perform
nucleic acid sample preparation through the utilization of
general purpose reagents and an automated liquid handling
platform.
Service Manual
The information was developed to be used by Abbott
Molecular-trained personnel, by other persons knowledgeable
or experienced with the operation and service of the product
identified, or under the direct supervision and with
cooperation from Abbott Laboratories technical sales or service
representatives.
m2000sp Operations Manual

The m2000sp Operations Manual is a complete reference to
the operation of the m2000sp system. The m2000sp
Operations Manual is available for review within the m2000sp
Software under the <Help> menu.
viii m2000sp G-series Service Manual

200942-103—September 2007
Introduction
Biosafety Procedures
Use appropriate biosafety practices when handling specimens,
reagents, and contaminated instruments. Refer to Section 2,
Safety for more information.
• Consider all clinical specimens, reagents, controls, and
calibrators that contain human-sourced material and
instrument surfaces or components that have come in
contact with human-sourced material as potentially
infectious. Wear gloves, lab coats, and safety glasses, and
follow other biosafety practices as specified in the OSHA
Bloodborne Pathogens Standard 29 CFR 1910.1030, or
other equivalent biosafety procedures.
• The probes are sharp and potentially contaminated with
infectious materials. Avoid contact with tips (DiTis) of the
probes.
• Dispose of all clinical specimens, reagents, controls,
calibrators, standards (as appropriate), cuvettes, (DiTis)
and other disposables that may be contaminated, in
accordance with local, state, and federal regulations
governing the treatment of regulated medical waste.
Sharps
Sharps, such as contaminated probes, must be placed in an
appropriately marked, puncture-resistant container prior to
treatment and disposal.
Spills
Clean spills of potentially infectious materials and
contaminated instrument components with an appropriate
disinfectant, such as 0.5% sodium hypochlorite, or other
suitable disinfectant.
WARNING: Never use straight household bleach when
cleaning or maintaining the m2000sp. Do not mix any
oxidizing agents, such as sodium hypochlorite in
quantities higher than 0.5%, with the liquid waste of
the m2000sp. Toxic gases could be generated from these
mixtures. Pressure can build up in the closed container
of the mixtures.
Refer to Consumables on page 8–6 of Section 8 for more

information on acceptable cleaning solutions and
disinfectants.
m2000sp G-series Service Manual ix

200942-103—September 2007
Introduction
Operators exposed to biohazardous or potentially infectious

materials should take steps immediately to cleanse the affected
area, as follows:
• Eyes—rinse with water for 15 minutes.
• Mouth—rinse with water.
• Skin—wash the affected area with soap and water.
• Puncture wound—allow to bleed freely. Wash the
affected area with soap and water.
• In all cases, seek medical attention immediately.
CAUTION: Personal Injury Risk. Take care to avoid

injury when using sharp tools.
• Do not direct tool points, such as the blade of a
screw driver, toward the face, body, or hands.
• If cutting of tubing, etc., is required, NEVER cut in
the direction of the face, body, or hands.
Chemical Hazards
Operators may be exposed to hazardous chemicals when
handling reagents, calibrators, controls, or bulk solutions.
Exposure to hazardous chemicals is minimized by following
the instructions provided in the assay-specific package inserts
and product-specific Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS).
Exposure levels are further reduced by the “hands-off” design
features of the instrument when it is used properly.
In general, observe the following precautions when handling
chemicals:
• Consult Material Safety Data Sheets for safe use
instructions and precautions.
• Avoid contact with skin and eyes. If contact with material
is anticipated, wear impervious gloves and protective
eyewear and clothing.
• Always maintain good housekeeping. Do not eat, drink, or
store food and beverages in areas where chemicals are
used.
• If irritation or signs of toxicity occur after exposure, seek
medical attention.
x m2000sp G-series Service Manual

200942-103—September 2007
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Section 1: About This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Section 2: Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Section 3: Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Section 4: Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Section 5: Maintenance and Diagnostic Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Section 6: Upgrade Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Section 7: Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Section 8: Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Section 9: Repair, Replacement of Spare Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
Section 10: Shutdown, Storage, and Shipping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
Section 11: Genesis Setup and Service Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
Section 12: Spare Parts and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
Appendix: Passwords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix-1
m2000sp G-series Service Manual Table of Contents-1

200942-103—September 2007
Table of Contents
NOTES
Table of Contents-2 m2000sp G-series Service Manual

200942-103—September 2007
SECTION 1:
ABOUT THIS MANUAL
m2000sp G-series Service Manual 1-1

200942-103—September 2007
About This Manual Section 1
NOTES
1-2 m2000sp G-series Service Manual

200942-103—September 2007
Section 1 Table of Contents
Table of Contents
TOC
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Purpose of This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Target Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Field Service Engineers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Qualification, Training . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Conventions Used in This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Abbreviations Used in This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Reference Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10

200942-103—September 2007
Introduction
This manual is intended to assist Abbott Field Service

Engineers (FSE) in the installation, service, and support of the
m2000sp G-series instrument.
For users viewing this manual electronically, hyperlinks are
provided from all section Tables of Contents (TOC) and from
appropriate points within certain sections. Users may return to
a previous page by using the Previous View button on the
Adobe PDF bottom navigation bar.
Previous View Next View

200942-103—September 2007
Section 1 Purpose of This Manual
Purpose of This Manual

This manual is a reference guide for experienced FSEs who
have completed service training for the m2000sp instrument,
and are certified to perform the following:
• Site inspection
• Installation
• Initial operation
• Validation
• Site acceptance
• Maintenance
• Repair
• Calibration

200942-103—September 2007
Target Groups
This manual addresses one target group: FSEs who have access
to most implemented functions.
Some functions are only accessible to Abbott production and
developers.
Functions intended only for FSEs are protected by password.
Field Service Engineers

The terms “Field Service Engineer” and “FSE” always refer to
an Abbott-authorized Field Service Engineer. The FSE is
responsible for initiating operation of the instrument and
performing repairs and periodic maintenance.
Initiating instrument operation includes the first mechanical
installation, installation of instrument software, initial setup,
and startup.
Service includes maintenance procedures or installation of
additional optional hardware modules. If additional hardware
modules are installed, appropriate software must also be
installed. Upon completion, operation of the instrument can
be resumed.
In the event of system problems, contact Abbott Molecular
GSS.
Qualification, Training
An FSE must have attended an m2000sp Service Training
course. Installation, servicing, and repair of an instrument
should only be performed by Abbott-authorized service
personnel.
The FSE must be qualified to operate a PC and be familiar with
basic operation of the Windows operating systems.

200942-103—September 2007
Section 1 Conventions Used in This Manual
Conventions Used in This Manual

The following list provides an overview of the conventions
used in this manual.
• Menus and commands are set in bold and within angle
brackets (< >), e.g., Select <OK> to move on.
• Routes to different functions with the m2000sp software
are presented following the bold/bracket menu
convention and separated by commas, e.g., Start the
function with <System>, <Load Worktable>.
• Directory and file names are printed as follows:
– Path and file names are mentioned directly, e.g., the
default path for the instrument software is
C:\Program files\Abbott\Genesis Instrument
Software\
OR
– A placeholder is given for the directory, e.g.,
<install_path>, which refers to the “real” directory
name
• Placeholders for real names are set in angle brackets < >
e.g., Filename:
TeSonic_<serial_number>_<date>_<time>.any.
• References to this and other manuals are set in italics
and bold text, e.g., Refer to the m2000sp Operations
Manual for more information.
Icons
The following informational symbols are used in this manual:
NOTE: This icon indicates important information or an
exception to conventional methods.
Password Protection: This icon indicates a procedure
that is exclusively for FSEs and requires the use of a
password.
IMPORTANT: This icon is used to indicate information
! that is necessary to the proper functioning of the
m2000sp.
Refer to Notices and Symbols on page 2–5 of Section 2 for a
complete listing and description of safety symbols used in this
manual.

200942-103—September 2007
Abbreviations Used in This Manual
Abbreviation Description
APC Active Positioning Carrier
CAN Controller Area Network
CAN-BUS Controller Area Network (pathway) over
which data travels
CCW Counterclockwise
CD Compact Disk
CRC Carrier, Rack, and Container, e.g CRC-Editor
CU Control Unit, e.g., Genesis CU, Device CU
CW Clockwise
DiTi Disposable Tip
DLL Dynamic Link Library
DMSO Dimethyl Sulfur Oxide
EEPROM Electrically Erasable Read-only Memory
FaWa Fast Wash Pump
FSE Field Service Engineer
GSS Abbott Molecular Global Service and Support
ILID Integrated Liquid Detection
Licos Liquid Container Supervisor
LiHa Liquid Handling Arm
LLD Liquid Level Detection
M&D Maintenance and Diagnostics
MIO Monitored Incubator Option
MPO Monitored Pump Option
MSDS Material Safety Data Sheet
NAT Nucleic Acid Testing
NATMBS Nucleic Acid Testing Magnetic Bead
Separation
NPS Nano Pipetting System
ODBC Open Database Connectivity
OPTIBO Option Board
PC Personal Computer (also called “SCC”)
PCB Printed Circuit Board

200942-103—September 2007
Section 1 Abbreviations Used in This Manual
Abbreviation Description
PosID Positive Identification
PWR Power
RAM Random Access Memory
RMP Robotic Microplate Processor
ROM Read-only Memory
RoMa Robotic Manipulator Arm
RSP Robotic Sample Processor
RWS Robotic Workstation
S&S Setup and Service
SMIO Smart Monitored Input/Output
SMIO-SAFY Smart Monitored Input/Output Safety
SN Serial Number
SVGA Super Video Graphics Adapter
Te-MagS (Tecan) Magnetic Separation Module
Te-MO (Tecan) Multipipetting Option
TEMPO Temperature Measuring Option
Te-VacS (Tecan) Vacuum Separator Module
TOC Table of Contents Link
UPS Uninterruptible Power Source
UST Ultrasonic Transducer
VCC Volume Control Center
WRC Wash Refill Center

200942-103—September 2007
Reference Documents
Additional reference documents are listed below but not

enclosed or linked.
• m2000sp Operations Manual Version 3.0, LN 9K20-03
NOTE: The m2000sp Software features an on-line
version of the Operations Manual that is accessible to
all users through the Help menu.

200942-103—September 2007
Section 2: Safety
SECTION 2:
SAFETY

200942-103—September 2007
Safety Section 2
NOTES

200942-103—September 2007
Table of Contents
TOC
Purpose of This Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Significance of These Safety Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Notices and Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
WARNINGS Used in This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
CAUTIONS Used in This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Warning Notices Attached to the Product or Its
Surroundings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Product Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Use of the Product . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Principle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Safety of the Overall System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Instrument-related Hazards and Safety Measures . . . . . 2-8
Other Hazards and Safety Measures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Removal of Safety Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Decontamination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
When to Decontaminate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Decontamination Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Decontamination Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Field Decontamination Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
General Safety Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Legal Regulations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Duty of Maintenance and Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Spare Parts to be Used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16

200942-103—September 2007
Safety Section 2
Purpose of This Section

This section contains specific guidelines for operation and
warnings for hazards with regard to installation, setup,
troubleshooting, maintenance, and repair of the m2000sp.
Significance of These Safety Instructions

Safety of users and personnel can only be ensured if these
safety instructions and safety-related warnings in the other
sections are strictly observed and followed.
Therefore, the m2000sp Service Manual must always be
available to all persons performing the tasks described herein.
In addition to the safety instructions in this Service Manual,
safety instructions in the m2000sp Operations Manual also
apply.
Introduction
This section summarizes the safety instructions applicable to
the m2000sp, and those to be observed when installing,
servicing, or upgrading an instrument. Operation,
maintenance, and servicing of the m2000sp could expose
individuals to potential safety and health hazards. All service
must be performed in accordance with procedures described
herein. This section describes the types and locations of
potential hazards that could cause physical harm to an
operator or service personnel. Warnings and cautions are
provided to alert operators and service personnel of potential
hazards. Standard warning conventions, including hazard
signal words or symbols are described in subsequent sections.

200942-103—September 2007
Section 2 Notices and Symbols
Notices and Symbols

Observe all warning and safety labels applied to the m2000sp.
For an in-depth discussion of these labels, refer to Safety of the
Overall System on page 2–8.
WARNINGS Used in This Manual

WARNING symbols appear as follows:
WARNING: The triangular warning symbol generally
warns of the possibility of personal injury or loss of life
if instructions are not followed. Where possible, the
symbol specifically identifies the hazard.
WARNING: Potential Biohazard.
WARNING: Class 2 Laser Product.
WARNING: Pinch Point.
WARNING: Electrical Shock Hazard.
CAUTIONS Used in This Manual

CAUTION symbols appear as follows:
CAUTION: This indicates the possibility of equipment
damage, malfunctions or incorrect process results, if
instructions are not followed. Other symbols more
specifically indicate the significance of the CAUTION.
CAUTION: Electrostatic Discharge Hazard.
CAUTION: Hot Surface.

200942-103—September 2007
Safety Section 2
Warning Notices Attached to the Product or Its Surroundings

The following table describes significance of the warnings:
Table 2.1: Significance of the Safety Notices
Symbol Significance
Laser Hazard
Identifies a Class 2 laser product that contains an
embedded low power visible Class 2 laser diode bar
code scanner. Warns against direct viewing into the
bar code laser beam or reflections of the beam.
Potentially Infectious
Indicates an area where the FSE or operator could
be exposed to potentially infectious human-sourced
material. Contamination hazards exist if parts of
the instrument are not completely decontaminated.
Wear appropriate personal protective equipment
such as gloves, lab coat, and protective eyewear.
Hot Surface
Indicates an area where the equipment reaches very
high temperatures and caution must be used to
prevent injury.
Pinch Point
Indicates an area where moving parts have the
potential to cause injury if caution is not taken.
Damaged or missing symbols (notices or stickers) must be

replaced immediately. Refer to Section 12, Spare Parts and
Accessories for ordering information.

200942-103—September 2007
Section 2 Product Safety
Product Safety
Use of the Product
The m2000sp instrument is a fully automated system that
performs nucleic acid sample preparation through the use of
general purpose reagents and an automated liquid handling
platform.
Principle
The m2000sp is designed and built in accordance with current
state-of-the-art technology and recognized technical safety
regulations. However, there are risks to users, property, and the
environment if the instrument is used carelessly or improperly.
Warnings in the m2000sp Operations Manual and m2000sp
Service Manual alert the user to these potential dangers.

200942-103—September 2007
Safety Section 2
Safety of the Overall System

In addition to safety instructions included in this manual,
safety instructions of the overall system must also be observed
and followed.
Follow the safety instructions of all instruments used in
conjunction with the m2000sp.
Instrument-related Hazards and Safety Measures

Observe the following safety notices.
CAUTION: Electrostatic Discharge Hazard. Observe
precautions for handling electrostatic-discharge-
sensitive devices.
• Wear a wrist ground strap.
• Discharge static electricity from your body before
touching the instrument.
WARNING: Pinch Point. The instrument requires
accurate positioning of system modules, and carriers
and racks on worktables. When operating the
instrument, it could be necessary to run tests with the
instrument’s safety panels open.
Keep body parts away from moving parts of the
instrument (e.g., LiHa, RoMa, tips, and gripper fingers)
during setup and test procedures.
• Stand back from the worktable surface during
these procedures.
• Fast moving devices could cause injuries.

200942-103—September 2007
Section 2 Safety of the Overall System
WARNING: Electrical Shock Hazard. Possible danger

from electrical shock. Switch off the main power and
disconnect the main power connection of the
instrument before replacing fuses, printed circuit
boards, major sub-assemblies, etc. Replace only fuses
that are externally accessible and labeled. Only use
replacement fuses of the specified type and electrical
rating.
WARNING: Class 2 Laser Product. Identifies a Class 2
laser product that contains an embedded low power
visible Class 2 laser diode bar code scanner. Warns
against direct viewing into the bar code laser beam or
reflections of the beam.
CAUTION: Hot Surface. Labels an area where the

operator could be burned from contact with the lamp
or other hot object, such as heater zone 1 and heater
zone 2.

200942-103—September 2007
Safety Section 2
Other Hazards and Safety Measures

WARNING: Potential Biohazard. Indicates an area
where the FSE or operator could be exposed to
potentially infectious human-sourced material.
Contamination hazard due to parts of instrument that
are not completely decontaminated. Wear appropriate
personal protective equipment such as gloves, lab coat,
and protective eyewear.
CAUTION: Chemical Hazard. The FSE or operator
could be exposed to hazardous chemicals when
handling Abbott Molecular sample preparation
reagents. Exposure to hazardous chemicals is
minimized by following instructions provided in
product-specific labels and product-specific Material
Safety Data Sheets (MSDS). Wear appropriate personal
protective equipment, such as gloves, lab coat, and
protective eyewear.
WARNING: Bleach Restriction. Do not mix any
oxidizing agents such as sodium hypochlorite
(household bleach) with the mLysis, mWash 1,
mMicroparticles, mLysisDNA, mMicroparticlesDNA, and
mWash 1DNA reagents in the Abbott mSample
Preparation System reagents. Do not mix any oxidizing
agents such as sodium hypochlorite (household bleach)
with liquid waste of the m2000sp. Toxic vapors could be
generated from these mixtures, and pressure can build
in the closed container of mixtures. Rinse or clean the
surface initially with water or a weak detergent before
using sodium hypochlorite.
WARNING: Sharp Hazard. The disposable tips (DiTi)

used by the m2000sp have sharp points.
• Take appropriate action when handling DiTis.
• Wear appropriate personal protective equipment,
such as gloves, lab coat, and protective eyewear.

200942-103—September 2007
Section 2 Safety of the Overall System


200942-103—September 2007
Safety Section 2
Removal of Safety Elements
The protective and safety devices installed on the m2000sp

must not be removed or disabled during instrument operation.
If such components are removed (e.g., for maintenance),
operation should only be resumed when all protective and
safety devices are reinstalled completely and checked.
The protective and safety devices include:
• Safety door and panel
• Left and right service access doors
• Top cover
• Door locks
• Arm guide
• Safety symbols
Figure 2.1: Laser Warning Labels
In addition, some G-series models include a hood.

200942-103—September 2007
Section 2 Decontamination
Decontamination
When to Decontaminate
In addition to regular decontamination, the user must
thoroughly decontaminate the instrument according to
standard laboratory regulations in the following cases:
• Before any maintenance or service is performed on the
instrument
• Before an Abbott FSE performs on-site service on the
instrument
• Before the instrument is returned to Abbott (e.g., for
repair)
• Prior to storage of the instrument
• Prior to disposal of the instrument or parts of it
• In most cases, before the instrument or individual parts
leave the user’s site
Decontamination Method
The decontamination method must be adapted to the
respective application and associated substances used by the
operator. The owner assumes full responsibility for appropriate
decontamination of the entire instrument.
Refer to the m2000sp Operations Manual for specific
decontamination instructions.
WARNING: Potential Biohazard. Contamination
hazards exist if parts of the instrument are not
completely decontaminated. Components with direct
contact (or the potential for direct or accidental
contact) with chemical or biological material must be
treated, including the tubing system and all upstream
equipment.

200942-103—September 2007
Safety Section 2
Decontamination Form
Before an Abbott FSE performs any service on the instrument
or before the instrument is returned to Abbott Molecular, the
instrument owner must confirm in writing that
decontamination was performed properly and in accordance
with good laboratory practice guidelines. For this, the owner
must enclose the declaration (Field Decontamination
Checklist), provided below.
Abbott Molecular will refuse any instrument, or part of it, if
the decontamination form is not completed and duly signed.
decontamination instructions.

200942-103—September 2007
Section 2 Field Decontamination Checklist
Abbott Laboratories: Abbott Molecular

Document Type: Form Document Number: AM19-01-003-F02 Revision: 001
Title: Field Decontamination Checklist Approved Date: 27 FEB 2006 Effective Date: 6 MAR 2006
Field Decontamination Checklist

All instruments that have been used to process any potentially infectious materials, which includes Abbott
reagents or controls that contain human serum, must be decontaminated prior to relocation/shipping to minimize
the risk of exposure to personnel involved in the handling or transport of these units.
Please refer to the instrument specific decontamination in the instrument operations manual for more detail.
Complete the following checklist, as applicable, for the instrument and attach it to the instrument so that it is clearly visible
to the Transport Company workers.
Please mark:
I. X for completed
ITEM DESCRIPTION II. N/A if not required by
operations manual
1 Remove all specimens.
2 Remove all reagents.
3 Decontaminate/flush fluid pathways with buffer or other fluid if indicated.
4 Empty and rinse out waste container(s).
5 Remove and drain hoses. Plug drain holes as necessary.
6 Wipe surface of instrument with a detergent solution.
7 Wipe surface of the instrument with an appropriate disinfectant per the
operators manual
8 Affix this Field Decontamination Checklist to the instrument
Completed by:
___________________________ ___________________________ _____________________ ________
Signature Printed Name Title Date
Instrument Serial #: _________________________________
Institution Name: _________________________________
RMA Number: _________________________________
This information is confidential to Abbott. The user is responsible for confirming use of the current Issued Version prior to use.

200942-103—September 2007
Safety Section 2
General Safety Rules

Legal Regulations
Legal regulations, such as local, state, and federal laws which
prescribe the use or application, and the handling of
dangerous materials in connection with the m2000sp, must be
strictly followed.
Duty of Maintenance and Care

The user is responsible for ensuring the m2000sp is only
operated in proper condition, and that maintenance, service,
and repairs are performed appropriately and on schedule.
Spare Parts to be Used

Use only Abbott-authorized spare parts for maintenance and
repair.
Modifications
Modifications to the m2000sp are permitted only after prior
consultation with and written approval from the
manufacturer. Modifications and upgrades shall be carried out
by an authorized field service engineer only. The manufacturer
declines any claims resulting from unauthorized
modifications.

200942-103—September 2007
Section 3: Technical Data
SECTION 3:
TECHNICAL DATA

200942-103—September 2007
Technical Data Section 3
NOTES

200942-103—September 2007
Table of Contents

System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Technical Data and Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Dimensions and Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Environmental Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Address Settings Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Jumper Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Error States CU. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
Cable Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
SMIO/SMIO-SAFY Connection Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
Hood Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38
Signal Tower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43

200942-103—September 2007
This section summarizes the technical data of the m2000sp

instrument and contains an overview of the system,
requirements, settings and hardware, and software and
firmware compatibilities.

200942-103—September 2007
Section 3 System
System
The m2000sp system is a fully automated system for sample
preparation. The system automates nucleic acid sample
preparation through utilization of general purpose reagents
and an automated liquid handling platform. The operator
controls the system with a personal computer (PC) equipped
with service and operating software. There are three distinct
processes involved in amplified nucleic probe technology:
• specimen preparation
• nucleic acid amplification
• automated amplified nucleic acid detection
The m2000sp system performs the first process, specimen
preparation.
The Liquid Handling Arm (LiHa) has eight sampling tips
arranged on one arm. The LiHa moves left and right (X-range),
and is driven by a Servo motor. Each sampling tip is raised or
lowered by its own Servo motor within the arm. Two
additional Servo motors inside the LiHa arm drive the tips
forward and backward and control the Y-spacing of tips. The
LiHa has independent movement in the Z-direction, and also
has equidistant movement in the Y-direction, from 9 to 38
mm maximum (0.31 to 1.5 in) between tips. The resolution is
0.1 mm in all three axes (X, Y, Z).
Disposable filtered 200 µL and 1000 µl pipette tips are used.
Integral detectors (on the LiHa arm) ensure tip attachment.
While using disposable tips, electronics for tip presence check
can control each Z-axis individually, independent of the
presence or absence of a disposable tip.
The liquid system is a central component of the instrument.
Flexible tubing connects the containers, pumps, valves, and
tips. Precision diluters (syringes) ensure accurate aspiration
and dispensing of liquids and air gaps, the latter to separate
various liquids. System liquid is aspirated from the system
liquid container through aspirating tubing, via liquid
distributors to the diluters.

200942-103—September 2007
From the diluters, the system is channeled through the

pipetting tubing to the tips. Each tip is connected to an
Integrated Liquid Detection (ILID) module. Each tip can detect
the surface of a conductive liquid by measurement of changes
in capacitance. When a tip touches the liquid surface, the ILID
detects the change in capacitance and triggers a detection
signal. A signal is produced when moving into a liquid and
when coming out, allowing detection of blood clot aspiration.
The software stores the position at which the liquid detection
signal occurred. It calculates, using aspirated volume and the
vial diameter, the point where the liquid detection signal
should be interrupted. A tolerance for cohesion and hysteresis
effects is considered. If the interruption signal occurs past this
tolerance, it is assumed a clot was aspirated.
The wash/waste station allows washing of tip ends with system
liquid, and also for discarding waste. Surplus liquids are
discarded into the waste container via waste tubing. The
system incorporates the use of a Fast Wash (FaWa) membrane
pump for acceleration of liquid distribution through the
system, and improved reduction of carryover.
Precision pumps are used to distribute liquid using 1 mL
syringes. The resolution of the drive is 3000 steps per full
syringe stroke. Plunger and pipetting speed is controlled by the
software.
A grid position defines the minimal width of carriers. On the
worktable, evenly spaced guides ensure proper positioning of
all carriers according to the grid represented in all software.
The guides also enable sliding of carriers/racks in the
Y-direction, necessary for replacement (loading/unloading) of
carriers/racks during operation, and for PosID identification of
tubes, vessels, etc., on carriers.

200942-103—September 2007
Section 3 System
The PosID module reads both horizontal and vertical bar codes
for positive identification and positioning of carriers, racks,
and containers. With its gripper, it pulls carriers toward the
rear of the instrument for bar code identification on tubes
then pushes the carrier back into position. Commonly
available bar codes can be read. The presence of a check digit
may or may not be required. For tube racks, a tube sensor
detects the presence of a tube.
Table 3.1: Bar Code Specifications
Description Specification
Readable Sample Bar Code 39 (length flexible)
Codes Codabar (length flexible)
Code 128 (length flexible)
2 of 5 Interleaved (length 2-20 even)
Code 93 (length flexible)
UPCA (length flexible)
Bar Code Length Up to 20 characters, depending on
symbology
Bar Code Density (0.127 to 0.381 mm) (5 to 15 mils)
Print Contrast Ratio 70%
PCS
Bar Code Height 욷8 mm
Bar Code Length Max of 64 mm (without quiet zone)
Speed Pos ID version 2 moves in
X-direction along the worktable
with a speed of 40 cm/sec
Wavelength 670 nm
Laser Class Class 2
Quiet Zone 5 mm on either side of bars

200942-103—September 2007
The Robotic Manipulator (RoMa) arm uses grippers to

transport objects, up to 400 g maximum. The resolution is
0.1 mm in all four axes [X, Y, Z, G (Gripper)], and 0.1 for
rotation (R).
Table 3.2: RoMa Arm Specifications
Rotation 270
Angle
Gripper 58 to 140 mm
Range
Precision Below ± 0.4 mm in all directions
Force Maximum force of the RoMa Arm in the
Z-direction is approximately 35 N, gripper
force is adjustable to 4 N maximum. Default
gripper force is 1.4 N.
The RoMa arm moves independently and simultaneously with

respect to the LiHa. The RoMa is mounted on the right side of
the instrument, which reduces the accessible work area of the
LiHa on the right side. Peripheral devices, which must be
accessed by the RoMa, should be positioned at the right side of
the instrument, and in front or at the rear of the system when
possible.
The 1 mL Subsystem is a subassembly which performs
magnetic separation and heating steps during the process. The
subsystem is divided into four zones:
• two heating zones (at 30-80±3°C)
• a magnetic zone
• a room temperature zone
Specimens, calibrators, controls, and reagents are pipetted by
the m2000sp into reaction vessels located in the 1 mL
Subsystem carrier, which is moved to the various locations
within the subsystem for addition of reagents, magnetic
capture, washing, and dispensing to the output deck.

200942-103—September 2007
Section 3 System
The Output Deck is the site of the Peltier chiller, assay reagent
packs, master mix tubes, PCR plates and deep well plates used
during instrument operation. The Output Deck is mounted on
the right side of the instrument. The chiller is maintained at a
temperature range between 5°C and 30°C, ± 3°C, when
required by the Application Specification.
In addition, some instruments include hoods that cover the
worktable. However, hoods are not standard equipment on all
G-series instruments.

200942-103—September 2007
Technical Data and Requirements

Dimensions and Weight
Instrument
Table 3.3: Instrument Dimensions
Length 142.9 cm/56.3 in
Length (side service door 176.5 cm/69.5 in
open)
Depth 76.8 cm/30.3 in
Depth (front lid open) 124.5 cm/49.0 in
Height (RoMa extended) 92.0 cm/36.2 in
Height (with hood) 168.4 cm/66.3 in
Weight* 189.3 kg/417.3 lb
Weight (with hood)* 206 kg/454 lb
* Weight includes accessories packed inside the cabinet and

instrument.
NOTE: Hoods are not standard equipment on all
G-series instruments.
IMPORTANT: The height with the hood includes the
! signal tower. REMOVE the signal tower before
transporting an assembled instrument though
doorways or an elevator.
Table 3.4: Instrument Clearance
Clearance 1 m (39 in) around the
instrument
10.2 cm (4 in) minimum
for rear clearance

200942-103—September 2007
Section 3 Technical Data and Requirements
Cabinet
Table 3.5: Cabinet Specifications
Length 142.9 cm/56.3 in
Depth 79.4 cm/31.3 in
Height 79.5 cm/31.3 in
Weight 103.4 kg/228.0 lb
Worktable Dimensions
Table 3.6: Worktable Dimensions
Accessible X-range (X-travel) 1120 mm/44.1 in
Accessible Y-range (Y-travel) 418 mm/16.5 in
Grid Positions on Worktable 45
Cutout at Grid 18 for Wash/waste Station
Z-Ranges
Table 3.7: Z-Ranges
RoMa Standard 259 mm/10.2 in
LiHa 165 mm/6.5 in (with
standard tips)

200942-103—September 2007
Orientation RoMa Standard
1 2 Screw Position 3 4
RoMa on the m2000sp must be set

to CW.
Right
Figure 3.1: RoMa Orientation
Weights
Table 3.8: Weights
LiHa 8 kg/18 lb
RoMa Standard and Gripper 6 kg/13 lb
PosID 11 kg/24 lb
FaWa 2 kg/4.4 lb

200942-103—September 2007
Electrical Supply
Table 3.9: Electrical Supply
Line Voltage 100-120 VAC/ 220-240
VAC ± 10%
Frequency 50-60 Hz
Power 1200 VA
Equipment and Safety Class I
Circuit Breaker 15 A
Electrical Outlets Required Minimum of 4:
• instrument
• SCC
• monitor
• printer
Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS)

Abbott recommends connection of the instrument to the main
power via a UPS. See the Pre-Installation Checklist on page
4–14 of Section 4 for recomendations.
Use of a switched UPS is not recommended.
Specifications: 1500 VA/1300 WATTS/15 AMP
System Liquid
System liquid is supplied directly from the system liquid
bottle. Use distilled or deionized water.
Environmental Conditions
The m2000sp instrument is intended only for indoor operation
and storage.
Table 3.10: Environmental Conditions
Operation 15 to 30°C/59 to 86°F
Temperature
Operation Humidity 30% to 80% relative (non-
condensing) at 30°C/86°F or below
Pollution Degree 2 (Non-specific environment
described as a typical laboratory)

200942-103—September 2007
Table 3.10: Environmental Conditions

Overvoltage Category II
Operating Altitude Max 2,000 m/6,600 ft
Operating Noise < 85 dBA measured in 1 m distance
Heat Output 4,100 BTU/1200 WA
Storage Conditions
Protect the instrument from dust and debris with a cover.
Recommendation: store the m2000sp in its original packaging.
Computer Requirements
The computer provided by Abbott Molecular meets or exceeds
minimum requirements to operate the instrument.
Site Requirements
Table 3.11: Site Requirements
Loading Dock Present
Load Capacity of At least 411 kg/907 lbs
Elevator
Minimum Size of Refer to Table 3.4: Instrument
Elevator Clearance on page 3–10 and
Table 3.5: Cabinet Specifications
on page 3–11
Door and Entryway Greater than 815 mm/32 in
Openings
Passageway Corners Combined total width of both
passageways around corners must
be greater than 2,794 mm/110 in
Where the instrument is to be located, there must be adequate

space to:
• place instrument and cabinet
• open doors of instrument and cabinet
• move around the instrument for service
• place the computer

200942-103—September 2007
For more information, refer to Table 3.4: Instrument Clearance

on page 3–10

200942-103—September 2007
Settings
Address Settings Overview
Table 3.12: Address Settings
Address
Module Board
Setting
Access SMIO 2
Option SMIO/SAFY 1
LiHa DC Servo 1 (position 1) * 4
DC Servo 2 (position 2) 3
DC Servo power (position 6) 5
RoMa RoMa Freedom Backplane CU 4
Standard RoMa Freedom Backplane PWR 0
RoMa 2 Servo Y/Z 6
RoMa 2 Servo R/G 7
Diluters Diluter 1 0
Diluter 2 1
Diluter 3 2
Diluter 4 3
Diluter 5 4
Diluter 6 5
Diluter 7 6
Diluter 8 7
FaWa MPO 0
PosID DC Servo (CU PosID) 0
Y/B 2
1 mL CC Mags #3 3
Subsystem CC Mags #4 4
* LiHa positions are noted from top to bottom.

NOTE: For repair and replacement details, refer to
Section 9, Repair, Replacement of Spare Parts.

200942-103—September 2007
Section 3 Settings
Figure 3.2: Addresses

200942-103—September 2007
Jumper Settings
m2000sp not terminated
(m2000sp not terminated)
Figure 3.3: Settings CU

200942-103—September 2007
Section 3 Settings
(m2000sp terminated)
Figure 3.4: Settings VCC-Dilback

200942-103—September 2007
Y2 Y1
Z6 (2) Z3 (3)
Z2 (-) Z7 (-)
Z8 (-) Z1 (-)
Z4 (4) Z5 (1)
X1 ---
-----
-----
Figure 3.5: Settings LiHa Freedom Backplane

200942-103—September 2007
Section 3 Settings
SW3
Device CU Adress Switch
#4 = C1
#5 = C3
Figure 3.6: Settings RoMa Freedom Backplane

200942-103—September 2007
Figure 3.7: Settings CU PosID

200942-103—September 2007
Section 3 Settings
SMIO
J2 CAN-BUS
J9 Jumper (outer pins jumpered)
J18 System liquid sensor
J19 Liquid waste sensor
J21 Solid waste sensor
SW1 Address switch
SMIO-SAFY
J2 CAN-BUS to OPTIBO Bd
J3 CAN-BUS to SMIO Bd
J24/J5LLeft door lock
J23/J6RRight door lock
J9 Jumper (inner pins jumpered)
SW1 Address switch
Figure 3.8: Settings SMIO/SMIO-SAFY

200942-103—September 2007
(m2000sp not
terminated)
SW1 and SW2 OFF
Figure 3.9: Settings OPTIBO

200942-103—September 2007
Section 3 Settings
Error States CU
Table 3.13: Error States
Green Red Error
Stays on/off Stays on/off Fatal hardware error
Blinking Off Normal operation
Blinking On Flash not accessible
Blinking Blinking Power fail circuit failure
Blinking fast Blinking fast Firmware download
required
Cable Connections
Table 3.14: Cable Connections: From/To
From To
Connection Cable Connection Board
Power Module (0760510)
24 V 2008664 J2 Power In 1 Optibo
Freedom
24 V 2008664 J14 Power In Optibo
2 Freedom
J1 Line In 100 to 2240
L/N/PE VAC
50/60 Hz

200942-103—September 2007
From To
OPTIBO Freedom (2010113)
J4 2008582 J1 S-CAN IN VCC-DILBACK
Diluter/S-CAN 8 (2008555)
J2 Power In 1 2008664 24V Power Module
(0760510)
J14 Power In 2 2008664 24V Power Module
(0760510)
J1 RS232 2008588 RS232 Multiport
J7 CAN 2008583 J7 O-CAN 1 MPO (FaWa)
Option 1 (2009001)
J8 CAN 2010004 J10 O-CAN 1 CU-PosID
Option 2 (2009457)
J9 CAN 2010406 J1 O-CAN 1 C.C. MagS
Option 3 (2009606)
J10 CAN 2010406 J1 O-CAN 1 C.C. MagS
Option 4 (2009606)
J5 Flex 13 2010278 J1 S-CAN LiHa Freedom
S-CAN Backplane
LiHa only (LiHa)
(2010104)
J15 Flex 13 2010156 J1 Option RoMa
O-CAN (Arm CAN Backplane
R1) (2010111)
J18 O-CAN 2010209 J2 O-CAN SMIO-SAFY
RJ45 (2010225)
VCC-DILBACK 8 (2008555)
J1 S-CAN IN 2008582 J4 Optibo
Diluter/S-CA Freedom
N (2010113)
J38 VCC-1401 2010211 J12 ILID Freedom
(DIL 1-4) (NPS/VCC) (2010158)
(Tip 1-4)
J39 2010211 J13 ILID Freedom
VCC-ILID2 (NPS/VCC) (2010158)
(DIL 5-8) (Tip 5-8)

200942-103—September 2007
Section 3 Settings
From To
LiHa Freedom Backplane (2010104)
J4 Y1 Motor 2008617
J5 Y2 Motor 2008617
J6 Z3 Motor 2008615
J7 Z6 Motor 2008615
J8 Z7 Motor 2008615
J9 Z2 Motor 2008615
J10 Z1 Motor 2008615
J11 Z8 Motor 2008615
J12 Z5 Motor 2008615
J13 Z4 Motor 2008615
J3 Lower Diti 2009603
Eject
J16 X Motor 2010184
J1 SYS-CAN 2010278 J5 (S-CAN) Optibo
Freedom
(2010113)
J2 2010186 J9 ILID Freedom
(2010158)
ILID Freedom (2010158)
J9 2010186 J2 LiHa Freedom
Backplane
(2010104)
J22 NPS/J23 2010183 J1 Tip Adapter
Tip Z1 Board
(2010149)

200942-103—September 2007
From To
Tip Z2 Board
(2010149)
Tip Z3 Board
(2010149)
Tip Z4 Board
(2010149)
Tip Z5 Board
(2010149)
Tip Z6 Board
(2010149)
Tip Board
Z7 (2010149)
Tip Board
Z8 (2010149)
J38 GND
J39 GND
SW1/SW2 set to pos “8”
RoMa Freedom Backplane (2010111)
J10 X-motor X-motor
(2010184)
J1 Option 2010156 J15 O-CAN Optibo
CAN Flex 13 Freedom
(2010113)
J2 Local CAN 2010144 ST1/Local RoMa 2

CAN Backplane
(2008783)

200942-103—September 2007
Section 3 Settings
From To
RoMa 2 Backplane (2008783)
ST1 / Local 2010144 J2 Local CAN RoMa Freedom
CAN Backplane
(2010111)
ST9 / Z-Brake Z Brake
(2008782)
ST4 / Z-Motor Z Motor
(2008808)
ST3 / Y-Motor Y Motor
(2008615)
ST6 / Signal 2008815 J4/Signal Gripper
(RoMa) (2008794)
2010143
(GRoMa)
ST5 / Power 2008815 J3/Power Gripper
(RoMa) (2008794)
2010143
(GRoMa)
Gripper (2008794)
J1 / G-Motor 2009372 G Motor
(2009371)
J2 / R-Motor R Motor
(2008809)
J3 / Power 2008815 ST5/Power RoMa 2
(RoMa) Backplane
2010143 (2008783)
(GRoMa)
J4 / Signal 2008815 ST6/Signal RoMa 2
(RoMa) Backplane
2010143 (2008783)
(GRoMa)

200942-103—September 2007
From To
1 mL Subsystem
J1 O-CAN 1 2010406 J9 O-CAN 3 Optibo
Freedom
(2010113)
J1 O-CAN 1 2010406 J10 O-CAN 4 Optibo
Freedom
(2010113)
J11 Out 2009610 Heating Plate
(2009625)
J11 Out 2009610 Heating Plate
(2009625)
SMIO-SAFY (2010225)
J2 O-CAN 2010209 J18 O-CAN Optibo
RJ45 Freedom
(2010113)
J3 O-CAN 2010407 J2 O-CAN SMIO
(2009706)
J5/J24 Door 2010178 Door lock 1
(left) (0750270)
J6/J23 Door 2010177 Door lock 2
(right)
(0750270)
SMIO (2009706)
J2 O-CAN 2010407 J3 O-CAN SMIO-SAFY
(2010225)
J18 IN 1 level sensor
system liquid
(2010411)
system waste
(2010411)
solid waste
(2010410)

200942-103—September 2007
Section 3 Settings
Table 3.15: Fuses
Fuse Location
Sub-assembly
OPTIBO Board Fuse Size
Protected
(Top to Bottom)
FU1 T 6.3A CU Board
FU6 T 8A Option 1 FaWa
FU7 T 8A Option 2 PosID
FU8 T 8A 1 mL Subsystem
FU9 T 8A 1 mL Subsystem
FU4 T 8A Diluter
FU3 T 8A RoMa/R1 R2
FU2 T 8A LiHa
FU5 T 8A Option 5
FU10 T 8A Arm L1 L2

200942-103—September 2007
3-32
Table 3.16:
LiHa RoMa PosID 2
Parts Qty Motors Pos Address Qty Motors Pos Address Qty Motors Pos Address
Technical Data
619303 5 Y/Ys 1 (Top) 4 2 Y/R Inner 6 2 X Connected to 0

Servo PCB board PosID2 CU board
Z3/Z6 2 3 Z/G Outer 7 Y/B Connected to 2
board Y/B Board
Z2/Z7 3 2
Z1/Z8 4 1
Z5/Z4 5 0
DiTi Eject
Solenoid
626201 1 X 6 5 1 X 0
Servo PWR
PCB
619323 8 1 (Y) 1 (Y)
Motor (Z1-Z8)
619345 1 (R)
Motor
619346 1 (Z)
Motor
619321 2 (Y/Ys) 1 (X)
Motor
619601 1 (B)
Motors, Servo and Servo PWR Boards, and Address Settings
Motor
619854 1 1
X-Drive
Assy
200942-103—September 2007
m2000sp G-series Service Manual
Section 3
Section 3 Diagrams
Diagrams
This section includes all relevant diagrams, such as block
diagrams, wiring diagrams, etc., that are useful for
maintenance or repair.
SMIO/SMIO-SAFY Connection Diagram
Figure 3.10: SMIO/SAFY

200942-103—September 2007
Wiring Diagrams
Figure 3.11: Instrument Wiring

200942-103—September 2007
Diagrams
3-35
Press 1-1
PIEZO-Module Diluter 1
S-CAN
DIL1
J28
J20
J2
2008556
S-CAN IN
XP 3000+ 2008582 (100)

S-CAN J4
729556
J1
2008582 (150)
Optibo freedom
J12
I/O
2008901 (200)
D1 / #0
Press 1-2
S-CAN
DIL2
J21
J29
J3
2008556 XP 3000+
S-CAN OUT
729556
J13
I/O
D2 / #1
J11
Press 1-3
S-CAN
DIL3
J22
J30
J4
2008556 XP 3000+
729556
J14
I/O
D3 / #2
Press 1-4
PIEZO-Module
VCC-ILID2 (DIL5-8)
Diluter 4
S-CAN
DIL4
J23
J31
J5
2008556 XP 3000+
J39
729556 2010211
ILID freedom
J15
I/O
D4 / #3 J13
Press 1-5
Figure 3.12: Diluter

S-CAN
DIL5
J24
J32
J6
VCC-ILID1 (DIL1-4)
2008556 XP 3000+
729556
J16
I/O
ILID freedom
J38
D5 / #4 2010211
J12
Press 1-6
S-CAN
DIL6
J25
J33
J7
2008556 XP 3000+
729556
J17
I/O
D6 / #5
Pressure2
J37
Press 1-7
S-CAN
DIL7
J26
J34
J8
2008556 XP 3000+
729556
J18
I/O
D7 / #6
LVD-Print
2010212
Press 1-8
PIEZO-Module Diluter 8 J1
S-CAN
LoVol
DIL8
J27
J35
J9
J36
2008556 XP 3000+
200942-103—September 2007
729556
Misc Definition Signals Grounding
J19
I/O
D8 / #7
24V => Power 24V
m2000sp G-series Service Manual

VCC-DILBACK-8 5V => Power 5V Protection Earth
=> Not implemented in this phase AC => Power AC connection
2008555
S-CAN => SystemCan Ground connection:
O-CAN => OptionCan Earth Ground (Chassis) and Power
Ground are connected as follows:
L-CAN => LocalCan
through
=> unshielded connection direct
capacitors
=> shielded connection
Section 3
Figure 3.13: LiHa

200942-103—September 2007
Section 3 Diagrams
Figure 3.14: RoMa

200942-103—September 2007
Hood Wiring Diagrams
Figure 3.15: Ballast and ground cable assembly

200942-103—September 2007
Section 3 Diagrams
Figure 3.16: Ballast with connector

200942-103—September 2007
Figure 3.17: Controller to hood jumper cable assembly

200942-103—September 2007
Section 3 Diagrams
Figure 3.18: Light switch jumper cable

200942-103—September 2007
Figure 3.19: Power cable assembly

200942-103—September 2007
Section 3 Diagrams
Signal Tower
Figure 3.20: PCB Diagram

200942-103—September 2007
1. 12 Pos Amp mini universal

mate-n-lock connector plug
housing
2. Amp mini mate-n-lock
connector socket, 18-22
awg, tin crimp
3. Clamp-on ferrite
4. Mount
5. Signal Tower
6. Set screw (M4-0.7 x 4 mm
cup point)
7. Screw (M5-0.8 x 10 mm)
Figure 3.21: Signal tower assembly

200942-103—September 2007
Section 4: Installation
SECTION 4:
INSTALLATION

200942-103—September 2007
Installation Section 4
NOTES

200942-103—September 2007
Table of Contents
TOC
G-series Installation Checklist. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Site Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Pre-Installation Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Cabinet Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Unpacking and Positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Cabinet Leveling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
Instrument Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
Unpacking the Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
Lifting the Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
Instrument Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
CAN-BUS Resistance Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
Instrument Setup Completion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
Installation of 1 mL Subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
Hood Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40
SCC Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41
Printer Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
Installation of Instrument Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43
Hardware Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44
Instrument Status Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45
Genesis Setup and Service Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46
Configure the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47
Configure the LiHa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53
Configure the RoMa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-74
Configuring Sample Bar Code Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-86
Configure the PosID 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-87
Installation of Wash/Waste Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-104
Calibrate and Verify System Liquid, Liquid Waste, and
Solid Waste Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-105
Reinstallation of the Output Deck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-115
Perform Peltier Chiller Temperature Check . . . . . . . . 4-115
Check Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-115
Verify Temperature Performance of 1 mL Subsystem Heater
Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-119
Set Up Liquid System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-121
FaWa Pump Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-121
FaWa Fill/Flush Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-122
Elimination of Bubbles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-123
Perform FaWa Pump Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-123
Perform Liquid Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-127
Perform Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-131
Exiting Setup and Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-133

200942-103—September 2007
LiHa Calibrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-134

Calibrate Tip Adapter Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-136
Calibrate Reference Tip Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-139
Sample Rack and Tube Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-149
Calibrate Disposable Tip Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-153
RoMa Calibrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-157
1 mL Subsystem Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-158
Disposable Tip Rack Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-161
Shelf Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-165
Calibration Verifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-167
M&D Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-167
Print Calibrations Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-167
Network Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-168
Install the Router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-168
Network Configuration Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-170
Database Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-173
System File Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-173
System File Restore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-174
On-line Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-176
System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-177
Audible Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-177
Time and Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-179
Sample Bar Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-182
Sample Racks and Tubes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-184
Run Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-184
Signal Tower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-186
Language and Locale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-188
Network Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-192
Automatic Export . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-192

200942-103—September 2007
Section 4 Purpose of This Section

This section describes installation of the m2000sp instrument.
It should be carefully reviewed before starting installation.
IMPORTANT: Be sure to verify the instrument you are
! installing is a G-series and not an E-series model. (For
E-series model installation, see the m2000sp E-series
Service Manual.)
Refer to the G-series Installation Checklist, found on page 4–6.

Also, always be sure to check recently released ISAs and TSBs
for updated procedures before beginning any installation.


200942-103—September 2007
G-series Installation Checklist

Complete this checklist after each successful installation. Use
the referenced Abbott ISA, TSB, or Manual Section as
more-detailed guides for each step. This checklist should be
filled out by an authorized Abbott FSE only.
Customer:
Customer Contact: System Software Version:
Address: SCC S/N:
City: Country: Instrument S/N:
State: Zip:
Service Technician (print)
Service Technician (sign) Date:
Customer (print)
Customer (sign) Date:
Site Inspection
Task Reference Complete
Pre-installation inspection checklist
Pre-Installation Checklist on page 4–14
obtained and reviewed

200942-103—September 2007
Section 4 G-series Installation Checklist
System Hardware Installation – Cabinet

Cabinet unpacked Unpacking and Positioning on page 4–17
Wheels installed Cabinet Installation on page 4–17
Cabinet placed in desired location Unpacking and Positioning on page 4–17
Cabinet leveled Cabinet Leveling on page 4–19
System Hardware Installation – Instrument

Instrument unpacked Unpacking and Positioning on page 4–17
Instrument placed on cabinet Lifting the Instrument on page 4–22
Unpack accessories Instrument Setup on page 4–27
OPTIBO power connections tightened Instrument Setup on page 4–27
Syringes, valves, and tubing Instrument Setup on page 4–27

connections checked/tightened
LiHa, RoMa, and PosID manually Instrument Setup on page 4–27
checked for freedom of movement
System liquid tubing to FaWa pump FaWa and Pressure Relief Valve Setup on page
and pressure relief valve routed 4–31
CAN-BUS resistance test performed CAN-BUS Resistance Test on page 4–33
1 mL Subsystem cabling routed and Instrument Setup Completion on page 4–34

connected
Sensor cables to SMIO board routed and Instrument Setup Completion on page 4–34
connected
System liquid and liquid waste Instrument Setup Completion on page 4–34
containers and connectors installed
Solid waste container installed Instrument Setup Completion on page 4–34
Worktable, carriers, racks, and 1 mL Instrument Setup Completion on page 4–34

Subsystem labeled
Metal guide pins installed Instrument Setup Completion on page 4–34
1 mL Subsystem installed Installation of 1 mL Subsystem on page 4–39
Ouput Deck installed Latest revision of TSB 605-003

Hood Installed (Optional) The latest revision of TSB 605-018

200942-103—September 2007
System Hardware Installation – SCC, Monitor, Printer & Stand

SCC, monitor, printer, and stand SCC Installation on page 4–41
unpacked
Correct SCC voltage verified SCC Installation on page 4–41
System Hardware Installation – Cables

Cables connected to SCC SCC Installation on page 4–41
RS-232 cable between the SCC and the SCC Installation on page 4–41
OPTIBO board connected
Power cords of the SCC, monitor, and N/A
printer connected to the power outlet
Power cord between the instrument N/A
and power outlet connected
System Software Installation

Software installed properly Latest TSB/ISA
Communication between SCC and Installation of Instrument Software on page

instrument verified 4–43
Hardware Configuration screen Hardware Configuration on page 4–44
completed in the m2000sp Software
Setup and Service (S&S) – Setup

Password entered Enter Password on page 4–47
Instrument initialized Initialize the Instrument on page 4–49
Worktable loaded Load Worktable on page 4–50
EEPROM backup of default factory Perform EEPROM Backup on page 4–52

settings performed

200942-103—September 2007
S&S – Configure the LiHa

Channel configuration performed Channel Configuration on page 4–56
Tip adapter test performed Check Each of the Tip Adapters on page 4–58
LiHa range determined Determine LiHa Range on page 4–60
LiHa reference positions determined Determine LiHa Reference Position on page 4–60
Lower DiTi eject calibrated Calibrate the Lower DiTi Eject on page 4–63
Lower DiTi Eject Test performed Perform the Lower DiTi Eject Test on page 4–64
LiHa Y-spread procedure performed Y-Spread Procedure on page 4–67
S&S – Configure the RoMa

RoMa setup performed Set up the RoMa on page 4–75
RoMa reference positions determined Determine RoMa Reference Positions on page

4–78
RoMa range determined Determine Range on page 4–81
Auto-adjustment of the rotator Adjust the Rotator on page 4–82

performed
Manual adjustment of the rotator Manual RoMa Rotator Adjustments on page
performed 4–83
S&S – Configure the PosID

PosID functionality test performed PosID Functionality Test on page 4–87
Basic mechanical accuracy of the PosID Verify Basic Mechanical Accuracy on page 4–91
confirmed
PosID 2 setup performed Set Up PosID 2 on page 4–92

200942-103—September 2007
S&S – Additional Instrument Setup

Wash/waste station installed Installation of Wash/Waste Station on page
4–104
Output Deck replaced Reinstallation of the Output Deck on page 4–115
S&S – Sensors, etc.

Chiller temperature check performed Chiller and Heater Temperature Check, found
on page 5–52 of Section 5, Maintenance and
Diagnostic Procedures.
System liquid, liquid waste, and solid Calibrate and Verify System Liquid, Liquid
waste sensors calibrated Waste, and Solid Waste Sensors on page 4–105
Door locks verified Check Door Locks on page 4–115
1 mL Subsystem temperature check Verify Temperature Performance of 1 mL

performed Subsystem Heater Blocks on page 4–119
S&S – Liquid System Setup

FaWa pump set up FaWa Pump Setup on page 4–121
Fill/flush protocol performed FaWa Fill/Flush Protocol on page 4–122
FaWa pump test performed Perform FaWa Pump Test on page 4–123
Liquid detection test performed Perform Liquid Detection on page 4–127
S&S – Finish Setup

EEPROM backup performed Perform Backup on page 4–131
Configure Sample Racks and Tubes

Configure sample racks and tubes Sample Rack and Tube Configuration on page
4–149

200942-103—September 2007
Calibrations – LiHa
Tip Adapter calibrations performed Calibrate Tip Adapter Locations on page 4–136
Reference Tip calibrations performed Calibrate Reference Tip Locations on page 4–139
Disposable Tip calibrations performed Calibrate Disposable Tip Locations on page

4–153
Calibrations – RoMa
Calibration of the 1 mL Subsystem 1 mL Subsystem Calibration on page 4–158
performed
Calibration of the DiTi carrier racks Disposable Tip Rack Calibration on page 4–161
performed
Calibration of the DiTi shelves Shelf Calibration on page 4–165
performed
Verification of Installation – Full Backup

Full backup performed System File Backup on page 4–173
Verification of Installation – M&D Procedures

Extensive flush performed Extensive Flush on page 5–10 of Section 5,
Maintenance and Diagnostic Procedures
50 µL Dispense Gravimetric Test Dispense Test 50 µL, Gravimetric on page
performed 5–23 of Section 5, Maintenance and
Diagnostic Procedures
800 µL Dispense Gravimetric Test Dispense Test 800 µL, Gravimetric on page
performed 5–26 of Section 5, Maintenance and
Diagnostic Procedures
LiHa Location Test performed LiHa DiTi Location Test on page 5–12 of
Section 5, Maintenance and Diagnostic
Procedures
LiHa Sample Tube Check performed LiHa Sample Tube Check on page 5–14 of
Procedures

200942-103—September 2007
DiTi Rack Tests – Deck and Shelf RoMa DiTi Rack Test on page 5–27 and
performed RoMa DiTi Shelf Test on page 5–29 of
Procedures
RoMa 1 mL Carrier Test performed RoMa 1 mL Carrier Test on page 5–30 of
Procedures
Sample Extraction Test Sample Extraction Test on page 5–37 of
Procedures
Z-Calibration Check (Sample Z-Calibration Check – Sample Extraction on
Extraction and Master Mix Addition) page 5–40 and Z-Calibration Check – Master
performed Mix on page 5–45 of Section 5,
Maintenance and Diagnostic Procedures
Network Configuration (if applicable)

Router installation Network Configuration on page 4–168
AbbottLink installation See the latest revision of the AbbottLink ISA
On-Line Documentation
On-line documentation loaded Refer to the Software Updates page on the
GSS website

200942-103—September 2007
Section 4 Site Inspection
Site Inspection
The pre-installation site inspection involves the following

activities:
• Confirming site specifications, as listed on the
Pre-Installation Checklist
• Confirming the viability of the delivery route by
walkthrough; refer to Dimensions and Weight on page
3–10 of Section 3, Technical Data
• Confirming adequate power is available; refer to
Environmental Conditions on page 3–13 of Section 3,
Technical Data
• Confirming proper environmental conditions exist; refer
to Environmental Conditions on page 3–13 of Section 3,
Technical Data
• Confirm that the Miscellaneous requirements, as listed on
the Pre-Installation Checklist, are met
• Complete the Pre-Installation Checklist on page 4–14

200942-103—September 2007
Pre-Installation Checklist
Account Information
Account Name
Delivery Address Bldg. & Floor
City State/Country Zip Code
Primary Contact Phone
Secondary Contact Phone
Customer Number Customer E-mail
Site Specifications
Instrument & Cabinet space meets specification criteria
Record space
measurements _____________ Length
_____________ Height
_____________ Depth
Specifications – 176.5 cm (69.5 in) instrument and cabinet length

(side service door open). 61 cm (24 in) are required for
clearance on each side.
298.5 cm (117.5 in) total length
– 203 cm (80 in) instrument and cabinet height (RoMa
extended).
168 cm (66 in) total height (245 cm/96 in w/hood)
– 79.4 cm (31.3 in) instrument and cabinet depth. 10.2
cm (4 in) of clearance is required in back and 91.4 cm
(36 in) is required in front.
196.2 cm (77.3 in) total depth
Is instrument or cabinet blocking a thoroughfare? ___ Yes ___ No
Will an operator using the instrument block a ___ Yes ___ No
thoroughfare?
Is the space provided for commodities inadequate? ___ Yes ___ No
If any of the answers above were YES, consult with the customer on an alternate installation location.
Action plan to resolve:
Weight – 293 kg (645 lb) instrument, cabinet, and accessories (310 kg/682 lb w/hood)
Notify customer the floor load capacity must be verified to see if it is adequate
If floor capacity is inadequate, resolution plan:
System Control Center space meets specification criteria

Record space measurements: ____________ Length ____________ Height ____________ Depth
Specifications: Length: 70 cm (24 in) + Height: 162.6 cm (64 in) + Depth: 78.7 cm (31 in) ++++ Weight: 27.3 kg (60 lb)
Page 1 of 3

200942-103—September 2007
Section 4 Pre-Installation Checklist
Delivery Route
Measure door width openings from entryway to lab and record here: _________________________________
Check one: _____ Door and entryway openings are 102.9 cm (40.5 in) or wider
_____ Door and entryway openings are less than 102.9 cm (40.5 in) but at least 81.5 cm (32 in). In this case,
REMOVAL OF INSTRUMENT FROM PALLET MAY BE REQUIRED. Contact area customer service.
_____ Door and entryway openings are less than 81.5 cm (32 in). Contact area customer service.
Measure turning radius in passageways. The m2000sp requires a combined 279.4 cm (110 in) of width of both passageways
around corners.
Is there a loading dock? Yes _____ No _____ If No, contact area customer service
Does the loading dock have a raised delivery platform? Yes _____ No _____ If No, contact area customer service
If any of the following are answered YES, contact area customer service
Does the instrument have to be moved up or down stairs? Yes _____ # of flights __________ No _____
Does the instrument have to be moved via freight elevator? Yes _____ Elevator door width __________ No _____
Will the instrument have to be lifted over any barriers? Yes _____ Height of barrier __________ No _____
Resolution plan (if necessary):
Power Requirements
Dedicated/Isolated 15 amp power line with circuit breaker identified as Abbott m2000sp System is optimal. If not possible,
how clean is the power? What other equipment is plugged into the same power line? See Uninterruptible Power Supply below.
m2000sp power outlet is within 30.5 cm (12 in) of the instrument’s electrical input panel.
Power Measurements
System Requirements: Voltage range: 100-240 VAC + 10%
NOTE—All system components Voltage frequency: 50/60 Hz + 1%
will run at the single phase voltage
standard for the country (e.g. Power: 1200 VA
Japan 100VAC + 10%, US 110VAC Circuit breaker: 15 A
+ 10%, EU 220VAC + 10%)
Line Noise: Breaker Closed Open

Line to neutral 100-240 VAC + 10% < 0.5 VAC
Line to earth 100-240 VAC + 10% < 0.5 VAC
Neutral to earth < 0.5 VAC < 0.5 VAC
NOTE—If the power is not within specification, have the customer notify their electrician for correction
Four (4) outlets provided (instrument, computer, printer, and monitor) _______ Yes _______ No
NOTE—If four outlets are not available, have the customer notify their electrician to add additional outlets
Site Environmental Requirements

Operation temperature: 15-30 C (59-86 F) Operating altitude: Max 2000 m (6600 ft)
Operation humidity: 30-80% relative (non-condensing) Operating noise: < 80 dBA measured @ 1 m
@ 30 C (86 F) or below
Pollution degree: 2 BTU output: 4100 BTU / 1200 WA
Over Voltage Category: II NOTE—Avoid placing instrument near air vents or drafts
Page 2 of 3

200942-103—September 2007
Miscellaneous
System Liquid Requirements: – Internal waste container used for liquid waste recovery
– Non-plumbed distilled or deionized water is required
Check bar code type below (check all that apply)
Codabar _____ w/o Checksum Code 39 standard _____ w/ Checksum _____ w/o Checksum UPCA _____
Interleaved 2 of 5 _____ w/ Checksum _____ w/o Checksum Code 128 subset A, B, and C _____ Code 93 Standard ____
Unknown _____ Other _____ Please list ________________________________ OBTAIN A BARCODE SAMPLE
Record the type(s) of sample tube(s) that have been chosen by the customer
Type of sample tube __________________________________ Distributor/Manufacturer _________________________________
Sample tube size _____________________________________ Catalog number __________________________________________
OBTAIN one (1) of each sample tube being used by the customer
Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) Requirements
It is recommended that the customer use one of the following UPS:
— For the m2000sp G-series: General Electric GT1500 (110V); for 220V, contact the EMEA Support team in Germany
— For the SCC: 07D06-11 (110V) or 07D06-22 (220V)
Additional Questions
What kind of samples will be used (blood, buffer, urine, etc.)? __________________________________________________________
Will the customer be performing DNA or RNA extractions? _____________________________________________________________
Does the customer require a certificate of installation (IQ/OQ)? _________________________________________________________
Action plan to resolve inadequacies or concerns:
Refer to the m2000sp Service Manual for more detail on any of the above information.
Customer Signature/Title and Date
Abbott Representative Signature and Date
Fax completed report to: m2000sp Product Manager

1.224.361.7505
Questions? Call: 1.224.361.7375 or, if in Europe, the Middle East, or Africa, contact the EMEA
Service and Support team in Germany
Page 3 of 3

200942-103—September 2007
Section 4 Cabinet Installation
Cabinet Installation
Cabinet installation involves the following activities:

• Unpacking the cabinet
• Installing the wheels
• Placing the cabinet in the desired location
• Leveling the cabinet
Unpacking and Positioning

The m2000sp instrument is delivered in multiple boxes. The
boxes contain the m2000sp instrument, cabinet, SCC, SCC
support stand, printer, and monitor. Before unpacking the
instrument, ensure all parts and packaging are visually
inspected for possible damage sustained during transportation.
Verify the shipment according to the packing list.
NOTE: Save and store packaging material for possible
future shipment of the instrument.
1. The cabinet is packed in the smaller of the two large boxes.
Figure 4.1: Cabinet and Instrument Boxes

200942-103—September 2007
2. Remove the banding and lift off the top.
Figure 4.2: Bands and Top Cover Removed from Box
3. Remove the cardboard box from the pallet.

WARNING: Lifting Hazard. Four people are
required to lift the cabinet. Use proper lifting
technique.
4. Move the cabinet to the edge of the pallet and rotate onto
its back as shown.
Figure 4.3: Cabinet Rotated for Removal of Legs
5. Remove the original screw-adjustable legs and discard.

6. Install the supplied mounting bolts onto the caster before
installing on the cabinet.
7. Carefully thread the mounting bolt into the cabinet base
and tighten.

200942-103—September 2007
Section 4 Cabinet Installation
8. Position the leveling block at the maximum raised

position. Ensure that the squared top is level with the
cabinet bottom.
Figure 4.4: Leveling Block Raised to Top Position
9. Ensure the caster is properly secured to the cabinet.

10. Rotate the cabinet onto the casters; move to allow the
removal of the shipping pallet.
11. Place the cabinet in the desired location. Refer to Table
3.11: Site Requirements on page 3–14 of Section 3,
Technical Data.
Cabinet Leveling
1. Level the cabinet by performing the following (refer to
Figure 4.5 below):
• Front to back (A-B): Place a 1.22 m/4 ft bubble level on
the end of the cabinet, parallel to A-B. Adjust the
caster on the low corner until the bubble is centered
in the sight glass.
Figure 4.5: Cabinet Leveling Positions

200942-103—September 2007
• Front to back (C-D): Place level on the end of the

cabinet, parallel to C-D. Adjust the caster on the low
corner until the bubble is centered in the sight glass.
• Front to back (E-F): Place level on the middle of the
cabinet, parallel to E-F. Adjust the caster on the low
side until the bubble is centered in the sight glass.
2. Verify the entire cabinet is level by placing the level on all
positions noted above: A-B, C-D, E-F, B-F-D, and A-E-C.

200942-103—September 2007
Section 4 Instrument Installation
Instrument Installation
Instrument installation involves the following activities:

• Unpacking the instrument
• Placing the instrument on the cabinet
• Unpacking the accessories
• Tightening the OPTIBO power connections
• Checking/tightening the syringes valves and tubing
connections
• Manually checking the LiHa, RoMa, and PosID for
freedom of movement
• Routing and connecting the system liquid tubing to the
FaWa pump and pressure relief valve
• Routing and connecting the 1 mL Subsystem cabling
• Performing the CAN-BUS resistance test
• Routing and connecting the sensor cables to the SMIO
board
• Installing the system liquid and liquid waste containers
and connectors
• Installing the solid waste container
• Labeling the worktable, carriers, racks, and 1 mL
Subsystem
• Installing metal guide pins
• Installing the 1 mL Subsystem
• Installing the Worktable Kit (including the Output Deck)
per the latest revision of TSB 605-003
• Installing the hood per the latest revision of TSB 605-018, if
required
• Unpacking and installing the SCC, monitor, printer, and
stand
• Connecting the SCC and OPTIBO board via cable
• Connecting the power cords from the instrument and SCC
to appropriate power outlets

200942-103—September 2007
Unpacking the Instrument

1. Remove the bands, cardboard top, and box from around
the instrument.
Figure 4.6: Large Box in Instrument
2. Remove the large brown box containing the 1 mL

Subsystem and other accessories.
Lifting the Instrument

Perform the following steps to mount the instrument to the
top of the cabinet:
1. Ensure the lifting device is ready.
NOTE: The lifting device includes four handles
(two left and two right), two pipes, and four safety
pins.

200942-103—September 2007
2. Set up the lifting device according to the following

illustrations.
3 4
1 2
5
1 Left lifting bracket 4 Frame strut

2 Instrument worktable 5 Safety pin
3 Instrument screws 6 Pipe
Figure 4.7: Lifting Assembly

200942-103—September 2007
a. Lifting brackets are left- and right-side specific. Note

that “R” is stamped on the right lifting bracket.
Figure 4.8: Right Side
b. This side view illustrates placement of the lifting

bracket.
Figure 4.9: Lifting Bracket Placement

200942-103—September 2007
c. The bracket locks against screws underneath the

instrument, holding the bracket in place so it does not
slip out.
Figure 4.10: Bracket Locking Against Screws
WARNING: To avoid injury, ensure the safety pins

are placed according to the following illustration.
d. Safety pins secure the handles in place.
Figure 4.11: Safety Pins in Place

200942-103—September 2007
Figure 4.12: Right Side Lifting Handle in Place
WARNING: The instrument is heavy. Four people

are required to carefully lift the instrument onto
the cabinet. While lifting, ensure the lift handles
remain engaged with the locking features of the
instrument.
3. Center the instrument on the left and right sides of the
cabinet. Ensure the edges of the rear feet are flush with the
back edge of the cabinet.
Figure 4.13: Lifting Up

200942-103—September 2007
Instrument Setup
1. Remove the styrofoam blocks from the top ends of the
instrument, the two cardboard worktable protection
strips, styrofoam blocks wedged between the diluters and
hotel, and the cardboard pieces protecting the X-rail and
PosID.
Figure 4.14: Packing Material Shown
2. Remove the styrofoam blocks protecting the LiHa and

RoMa.
Figure 4.15: Styrofoam Blocks Protecting LiHa and RoMa

200942-103—September 2007
3. Remove the styrofoam pieces supporting the PosID.
Figure 4.16: Styrofoam Pieces Supporting PosID
4. Remove the left- and right-side transport support brackets,

each held in place with two screws (M2.5).
Figure 4.17: Transport Support Bracket

200942-103—September 2007
5. Remove the tape and packing material from the left and
right sides of the cabinet.
Figure 4.18: Packing Material in Cabinet
6. Unpack the accessories, including the carriers, racks,

bottles, etc.
7. Remove the screw (M6 x 20) and nut located on the left
side of the cabinet in the bottom rail. The screw prevents
movement of the waste drawer during shipment. Reinstall
the screw in the middle vertical support rail, as shown
below. The screw acts as a stop to prevent over-flexing of
the left cabinet door. Ensure the screw does not interfere
with movement of the waste drawer guide rail.
Figure 4.19: Placement of Cabinet Screw

200942-103—September 2007
8. Tighten all screw terminals on the OPTIBO (left access

door).
Figure 4.20: OPTIBO Board
9. Tighten each syringe firmly to the valve and the two

tubing connections to each valve.
10. Finger-tighten tubing connections on the 1:4 distributors
(upper access door).
Figure 4.21: 1:4 Distributor Valves
11. Manually check movement of the LiHa, PosID, and RoMa

for any obstruction.

200942-103—September 2007
FaWa and Pressure Relief Valve Setup

IMPORTANT: Ensure the arrows on the Pressure Relief
! Valve point in the direction of fluid flow.
1. Remove the two outer screws from the FaWa assembly
located on the left side of the instrument. Pull out the
FaWa assembly to access the FaWa pump and Pressure
Relief valve.
2. Remove any existing tubing from the input side of the
FaWa pump and output side of the Pressure Relief valve
only.
3. Route the one clear plastic tube up through the hole in the
cabinet deck, through the hole in the worktable surface,
under the worktable, and around the back of the FaWa
assembly to the left side of the FaWa assembly. Connect
the tubing to the Pressure Relief valve and secure with a
screw clamp. Ensure the Pressure Relief valve is angled in
the direction as shown to prevent crimped tubing.
Arrows pointing in
the direction of
flow.
Figure 4.22: Tubing Connected to Pressure Relief Valve

200942-103—September 2007
4. Route the second length of tubing to the front of the FaWa

assembly, and up through the gap between the FaWa
assembly and instrument frame (behind the Waste Front
Blind cover). Connect the tubing to the input side of the
FaWa pump and secure the tubing to the pump with a
spring clamp.
Figure 4.23: Tubing Routed and Connected to FaWa Pump
NOTE: The tubing may be shortened to remove

excess slack.
5. Connect the two cables for the 1 mL Subsystem to CAN
Option 3 and 4 on the OPTIBO board. Secure the cables to
the instrument frame with the supplied cable clamps, two
per cable.
Figure 4.24: OPTIBO

200942-103—September 2007
CAN-BUS Resistance Test

NOTE: Power to the instrument must be off when
measuring resistance.
1. Measure the CAN-BUS resistance on the OPTIBO (left
access door):
a. Open the left service access door.
b. Measure the CAN-BUS resistance with an ohmmeter
on the two checkpoints, CAN-L and CAN_H for
system CAN-BUS, and CANO-L and CANO_H for
option CAN-BUS on the OPTIBO as shown.
Figure 4.25: CAN-BUS Resistor Check Points on OPTIBO
NOTE: Ensure the instrument is switched off while

measuring CAN-BUS resistance. If the resistance is not
50 to 65 Ω, refer to Quick Check for Jumper Settings on
page 9–207 of Section 9, Repair, Replacement of Spare
Parts to determine jumper settings.

200942-103—September 2007
Table 4.1: CAN-BUS Resistance
CAN-BUS Check Points Resistance Interpretation
System CAN-L/CAN-H 50-65 Ω Correct number of

CAN-BUS jumpers
~ 40 Ω 1 jumper too many
~ 120 Ω 1 jumper too few
Option CANO-L/ 50-65 Ω Correct number of
CAN-BUS CANO-H jumpers
~ 40 Ω 1 jumper too many

~ 120 Ω 1 jumper too few
2. Power on the instrument. Reestablish communication

with the instrument and initialize the instrument.
Instrument Setup Completion

After completing the CAN-BUS Resistance Test, continue with
instrument setup as follows.
1. Route the 1 mL Subsystem cables in front of the FaWa
pump as shown, and underneath the worktable surface.
Figure 4.26: 1 mL Subsystem Cable Routing
2. Notch the sealing strip at grids 10 and 15 for the two 1 mL

Subsystem cables. Route the 1 mL Subsystem cables
through the notched holes; leave enough cable length to
connect to the 1 mL Subsystem. Notch the cabling at grid
41 for the chiller cable.
3. Ensure that none of the tubing or cabling is crimped, and
that it does not interfere with the movement of the PosID
assembly.

200942-103—September 2007
4. Feed any extra cable length in front of the instrument.

Secure the FaWa assembly to the instrument frame with
two screws.
Figure 4.27: Cable Routing through Sealing Strip
5. Route the three sensor cables (system liquid, liquid waste,

solid waste) through the opening in the top of the cabinet
and underneath the instrument.
Figure 4.28: Sensor Cables between Instrument and Cabinet
6. Route the cables outside the frame of the instrument

covered by the right side service door. Be careful not to
damage the cables by pulling them against the edges of the
frame.

200942-103—September 2007
7. Secure the cables to the front frame with cable clamps, two
per cable. Use a flathead screwdriver to carefully pry the
clamps from the frame.
Figure 4.29: Cables Secured to Front Frame
8. Attach the cables to the SMIO board:

a. Plug the cables into the connectors on the top SMIO
board.
b. Plug the system liquid sensor (green-taped cable) into
J18, the connector farthest to the right next to the
CAN-BUS jumper.
c. Plug the liquid waste sensor (red-tipped cable) into
J19, the connector second from the right next to the
system liquid sensor cable connector.
d. Skip one connector and plug the solid waste sensor
cable into J21.
Refer to the drawing on the inside of the right service
access door.
Figure 4.30: Sensor Cable Connected to SMIO Board

200942-103—September 2007
9. Apply a green decal to the waste tray for the system liquid
container and a red decal to the waste tray for the liquid
waste container.
Figure 4.31: Decals Applied to Waste Tray
10. Apply a green decal to one face of the system liquid

container and a red decal to the face of the liquid waste
container.
Figure 4.32: Decals Applied to Liquid Containers

200942-103—September 2007
11. Install the system liquid container (filled with distilled or

deionized water) into the left container compartment
(liquid level sensor closest to the floor). Connect the lid,
with a white quick-connect fitting and clear tubing, to this
container.
NOTE: Seams of the bottle should face away from
the sensor.
Figure 4.33: System Liquid Cap and Connections
12. Install the liquid waste container into the right container
compartment. For ease of identification, tie-strap the two
liquid waste tubes together. Then, connect the clear
tubing with the beige quick-connect fitting to the
container cap’s beige male connection and the clear
tubing with the white quick-connect to the white male
connection.
NOTE: Seams of the bottle should face away from
the sensor.
Figure 4.34: Waste Liquid Cap Connection

200942-103—September 2007
13. Install the solid waste container, with bag for disposable
tips, into the cabinet.
Figure 4.35: Solid Waste Container
14. Perform installation of the m2000sp worktable kit per the

latest revision of TSB 605-003.
Installation of 1 mL Subsystem
1. Power off the instrument.
2. Place the 1 mL Subsystem upside down on the worktable
surface. Connect the two cables to the two heater boards,
accessed through the notched opening in the bottom
cover of the 1 mL Subsystem; the cables can be connected
to either of the two connectors. The software reads the
address setting of each heater block. Secure the cables with
a screwdriver.
Figure 4.36: 1 mL Subsystem, Bottom View

200942-103—September 2007
3. Align the left edge of the 1 mL Subsystem with location

grid 7 and place the 1 mL Subsystem on the deck, aligning
the notches in the middle guide bar on the bottom of the
1 mL Subsystem with the guide pins on grid 12.
Figure 4.37: 1 mL Subsystem location
4. Push extra cable length through the notched openings in

the sealing strip. Ensure the 1 mL Subsystem is in the
correct location, held in place on the worktable by the
positioning pins and the corresponding notches in the
middle guide bar on the bottom of the 1 mL Subsystem.
5. Close the front worktable cover.
6. Lift the 1 mL Subsystem off the worktable and set on the
ground. Leave cables connected.
NOTE: The wash/waste station and Output Deck
are installed after the worktable surface is defined
and the PosID, LiHa, and RoMa are calibrated.
Hood Installation
Hoods are not standard equipment on all G-series instruments.
When installation is required, refer to the latest revision of TSB
605-018.

200942-103—September 2007
SCC Installation
1. Unpack the computer stand, SCC, monitor, printer,
keyboard, and mouse. Set up the computer stand then set
the SCC, monitor, printer, keyboard, and mouse in place.
Do not connect cables at this time.
Monitor
Computer (CPU)
with CD Drive
Keyboard
Mouse
Figure 4.38: SCC and Stand
2. Plug all power cables into the rear of the SCC as shown
below. Verify the correct voltage is selected on the SCC.
Figure 4.39: Rear of SCC

200942-103—September 2007
3. Connect the RS-232 cable, shipped with the instrument,

between the OPTIBO board and SCC. Connect the power
cord to the instrument.
Figure 4.40: RS-232 Cable Connection
4. Plug the instrument power cord into the power outlet.
Printer Installation
Refer to the latest revision of the applicable printer or software
installation TSB.

200942-103—September 2007
Section 4 Installation of Instrument Software
Installation of Instrument Software
The keys to successful software installation are:

• Referring to the latest revision of the software TSB and/or
ISA for detailed software installation instructions
• Verifying the software version to be installed is for the
correct SCC platform (SCC series D software is not
compatible with an SCC RAD945)
• Following installation of the software, verifying that the
instrument is connected via the RS-232 cable to the
computer
IMPORTANT: The 1mL Subsystem cables must be
! connected to the subsystem and OPTIBO for the
instrument to reach the STOPPED state. Otherwise, it
will remain in the CONNECTING state for a time and
then switch to OFFLINE. Continuing with software
configuration while the instrument is in this state
might corrupt the software.
Note that if the RS-232 cable is disconnected while the
software is initializing, the software will lock up until the cable
is replaced. Also verify that the chiller is connected to the USB
Edgeport per the TSB and is powered on.
When communication is established with the instrument, the
following parameters are gathered:
• Firmware Version
• Serial Numbers
• Offsets, Ranges, Scale Factors
• Available Options
• Worktable Database is Opened
Proceed with Hardware Configuration, found on page 4–44.

Refer to System Settings on page 4–177 for a discussion of
other configuration and setting options.

200942-103—September 2007
Hardware Configuration
From the <System Settings> menu, select <Hardware
Configuration> then <Configure>.
Figure 4.41: Hardware Configuration screen
1. Enter the instrument serial number in the appropriate

field.
2. In the <Type> field, select <G-series>.
3. The <External Devices> section provides a listing of any
external devices installed with that instrument, and
indicates whether they have been enabled. The signal
tower listed here is part of the hood configuration.
If a hood has been installed on the instrument, ensure the
<Signal Tower> has been enabled with a check mark.
If no hood is to be installed, ensure there is no check
mark next to <Signal Tower>.
4. Select <Save>. The instrument will reboot if the settings
(other than serial number) have changed.
If the signal tower was enabled, it can be configured after
the reboot. Refer to Signal Tower on page 4–186.

200942-103—September 2007
Instrument Status Screen

The Instrument Status screen provides the current status of
the instrument.
Table 4.2: Instrument Status
Status Status Definition

Offline Software and instrument not
communicating. Instrument off or not
connected.
Connecting Software and instrument are attempting to
communicate via RS-232.
Initializing The instrument is performing a system
initialization from a stopped state.
Stopped The instrument is in an uninitialized and
unknown (not homed) state.
Ready The instrument is in a known (homed)
state, and is ready to execute a run.
Running The instrument is running an application.
* Paused An application or maintenance procedure
has been paused by the user.
* Paused: An immediate pause has been enacted by
Immediate the user.
Run The instrument is preparing for a run.
Initialization
* The <Pause> option stops an in-process application run as

soon as the instrument reaches the next pipetting step
(homing the LiHa and RoMa) and allows the user to update
the tip status, if necessary. The <Immediate Pause> option
instantly stops the instrument, regardless of what activity is
being performed or what stage the run is in.

200942-103—September 2007
The <Instrument Status> screen also provides an update of

the current status of the hardware, as well as the status of an
in-process application. The hardware status includes sensors,
heaters, and major mechanisms, as shown below. A status of
<Tripped> is caused when the sensor has been tripped.
Table 4.3: Status Options
System Status Options

Liquid Waste OK, Tripped
Solid Waste OK, Tripped
Systems Fluid OK, Tripped
Doorlocks (L/R) Locked, Unlocked
Heater Zone 1 Failed, Current Temperature
Heater Zone 2 Failed, Current Temperature
Chiller Failed, Current Temperature
LiHa Failed, OK
RoMa Failed, OK
FaWa Failed, OK
PosID Failed, OK
Genesis Setup and Service Software

Genesis Setup and Service software is used for field service
troubleshooting, instrument setup, and diagnostics. See
Section 11, Genesis Setup and Service Software for detailed
information on the software features not covered in the
installation process.
In order to navigate to setup and service software from the
m2000sp application software, log in to the application as an
FSE. Navigate to <System>, <Setup and Service>.
Figure 4.42: Route to Setup and Service

200942-103—September 2007
Configure the System
Enter Password
1. Start the function with <System>, <Password>. The
<Password> dialog displays.
Password Protection: Enter the password to
access specific service-related software menu
items.
NOTE: The <System> menu includes all
commands that apply to the whole system, and
not to a particular function.
Figure 4.43: System Menu
2. Enter the field service password (smart) in the <Enter

Password> field.
Figure 4.44: Password Dialog
3. Confirm the entry with <OK>. FSE functions are enabled

in menus and screens.

200942-103—September 2007
COM Port
Purpose
This function allows the communication port (e.g., COM1,
COM2, etc.) to be selected or changed. The computer
communicates with the instrument through the
communication port.
NOTE: It should not be necessary to change the port
assignment. Installation uses COM1.
Procedure
Perform the following steps to select or change a
communication port.
1. Ensure the instrument is connected to the required COM
port connector, normally located on the rear side of the
computer. Refer to the accompanying documentation for
the computer, if necessary.
Figure 4.45: COM Port Sub-menu
2. From the System <COM port> sub-menu, select the

correct port (COM1, COM2, etc.) The sub-menu lists all
available COM ports.
NOTE: In the sub-menu, the currently selected
COM port is marked with a check (⻫).
NOTE: Depending on the selection, the computer
automatically leaves or enters the simulation
mode.

200942-103—September 2007
Initialize the Instrument

1. Select <System>, <Initialize Instrument>.
Figure 4.46: System Menu
2. The message <Initialize system. Please wait...> displays.
Figure 4.47: Initialize System
NOTE: During initialization, all installed system

devices (PosID, LiHa, RoMa) are moved to their
initial positions.
3. The message dialog disappears when initialization is
complete.

200942-103—September 2007
Load Worktable
1. To load a worktable, select <System>, <Load Worktable>.
Refer to Load Worktable in Section 11, Genesis Setup
and Service Software for more information.
2. If available, select the <m2000sp Worktable>. Otherwise,
select the <NAT MBS Worktable>.
Figure 4.48: Select Worktable Dialog
3. Select <OK>.
Test Configuration (Not Currently Used)

1. The Test Configuration option is used to load any test
format configured for a test or protocol, by selecting Save
for *.ini files or Save As for *.any files.
2. Start test configuration by selecting System > Test
Configuration.
3. The Open Configuration dialog displays.
4. Select the file type in the Files of Type list.
5. Select the appropriate file.
6. Load the file with Open.
Print Setup (if required)

1. Perform Print setup by selecting <System>, <Print Setup>.
This command starts the standard Windows dialog to set
up a printer.
2. Select <Okidata B4350> as the printer.

200942-103—September 2007
Print All Configuration Data (Not Required)

1. Select <System>, <Print>, <Configuration>.
2. The <Common Print Information> dialog displays.
Figure 4.49: <Common Print Information> Dialog
3. Select the print destination and fill out the <Header

Information>.
4. Start immediate printing with <OK>.
Print Specific Data (Not Required)

1. Select <Print> on the corresponding assembly screen (e.g.,
LiHa) to print configuration data and/or test results of a
specific function after any test was run.
2. Select the print destination(s) and fill out the Header
Information as above.
Figure 4.50: <Test Specific Print Information> Dialog

200942-103—September 2007
3. Confirm entries with <OK>. The <Test Specific Print

Information> dialog displays.
4. Select the data to print and enter any comments.
5. Start printing with <OK>.
Perform EEPROM Backup

Save the default factory settings of the m2000sp instrument by
performing a backup of the EEPROM parameters. Refer to
EEPROM Backup, found on page 4–132.
Exit/Finish Setup
Select <System >, <Exit> to close the Setup & Service software
safely without data loss.

200942-103—September 2007
Configure the LiHa

LiHa configuration in S&S involves the following activities:
• Performing channel configuration
• Performing the Tip Adapter Test
• Determining the LiHa range
• Determining the LiHa reference positions
• Calibrating the lower DiTi eject
• Performing the Lower DiTi Eject Test
• Performing the LiHa Y-spread procedure

where the FSE or operator may be exposed to
Contamination hazards exist if parts of the instrument
CAUTION: Chemical Hazard. The FSE or operator may
be exposed to hazardous chemicals when handling
Abbott Molecular sample preparation reagents.
Exposure to hazardous chemicals is minimized by
following instructions provided in product-specific
labels and product-specific Material Safety Data Sheets
(MSDS). Wear appropriate personal protective
equipment, such as gloves, lab coat, and protective
eyewear.
sensitive devices.
CAUTION: Ensure there are no objects installed on the
worktable that could interfere with movement of the
LiHa. It may be necessary to restart the software and
re-enter the password, smart, if the software was exited.

200942-103—September 2007

and racks on worktables. While working with the
• Keep back from the worktable surface during these
procedures.
NOTE: The SN of the LiHa is not stored in the software.
A prompt to enter the SN displays when either cycling
power to the instrument or performing a <Setup> task
without first entering the SN. Select <Apply>.
LiHa Move Tool

To perform many of the procedures in this section, it will be
necessary to use the LiHa Move Tool. Refer to Move Pages on
page 11–17 of Section 11 for instructions on using this
feature.
Reference Tips
Several LiHa configuration activities require the use of a
reference tip. There are currently two types of reference tips
available:
• Long reference tip (old style)
• Short reference tip (new style)
Figure 4.51: Reference Tips

200942-103—September 2007
Either reference tip can be used to perform all applicable

configurations and calibrations; however, the procedures
required to mount the different tips differ significantly, as
described under Mounting the Long Reference Tip and
Mounting the New Short Reference Tip.
Mounting the Long Reference Tip

1. Using the DiTi cone wrench, turn DiTi cone 3 clockwise to
loosen and remove it from the tip ejector tube.
NOTE: The DiTi cone is screwed into the tip
grabbing assembly through a right-threaded screw.
Figure 4.52: DiTi Cone Wrench
NOTE: Support the tip adapter by squeezing it

between your fingers when loosening the DiTi
cone.
2. Remove the black tip ejector tube.
3. Disconnect the tubing extension from the tubing.
NOTE: Ensure the O-ring (and separator ring, if
applicable) remains with the tubing extension.
4. Unscrew the stainless steel adapter cylinder.
5. Safely set aside the DiTi cone, tubing extension, O-ring
(and separator ring, if applicable), and adapter cylinder.
6. Screw the reference tip on the tip adapter and tighten.
NOTE: Before mounting the reference tip, check
that the tip is not bent.
Mounting the New Short Reference Tip

The new design allows calibration without removing the
adapter cylinder, tubing extension, O-ring configuration, or
tip ejector tube.

200942-103—September 2007
1. Using the DiTi cone wrench, turn DiTi cone 3 clockwise to

loosen and remove it from the tip ejector tube (See NOTES
under Step 1 above).
2. Remove the DiTi cone only; all other hardware must
remain in place, including the O-ring configuration.
3. Screw the reference tip onto the adapter cylinder until it is
finger tight.
Channel Configuration
1. Select <System Devices><LiHa>.
Figure 4.53: System Devices Menu
2. Select <LiHa>, <Channel> from the <LiHa> menu to

initiate tip configuration.

200942-103—September 2007
3. Configure the tips. Select all eight checkboxes (聺) for

<DiTi> then select <Adapter> for the <Ch.Type> for all
eight tips.
Figure 4.54: <LiHa Panel> Main Menu
4. Select <1000 µL> for the syringe volumes. Select <Apply>

to save the settings.

200942-103—September 2007
Check Each of the Tip Adapters

1. Select the <Contents> page in the LiHa panel and select
the <Tip Adapter> checkbox (聺) under <Test>.
Figure 4.55: <LiHa Panel>, <Contents>
2. Remove all DiTis or reference tips from the Diti adapters.

3. Switch to the <Test Configuration> page.
4. Select all eight tip adapters to test then select <Start>. A
prompt to move the LiHa to a more-accessible location
over the worktable displays.

200942-103—September 2007
5. Manually move the LiHa to the middle-front area of the

worktable then select <OK>.
Figure 4.56: LiHa <Test Configuration>
6. Follow the onscreen prompt and move up the first adapter

to the contact position and hold up in position.
Figure 4.57: Checking Tip Adapter
7. Observe the progress bar on the process prompt to

determine if the tip was detected.
Figure 4.58: Tip Adapter Test

200942-103—September 2007
8. Continue to hold the tip adapter all the way up and

confirm with <Next>.
9. Repeat the test until all tip adapters are checked. The
prompt <Tip Adapter Passed> displays.
10. Select <OK>. The screen reverts to the <Test
Configuration> page.
Determine LiHa Range

This procedure calibrates the Z- and Y-ranges.
1. Select the <Contents> page in the LiHa panel and select
the <Determine Range> checkbox (聺).
Do NOT deselect any previously checked <Setup> or
<Test> or <Alignment> box.
2. Switch to the <Setup> page.
3. Select the <4/8 Reference Tips Available> checkbox (聺).
CAUTION: Do NOT deselect the <Use Y
Backlash> box. Leave it checked! This function
tells the software to accommodate some geared
backlash (hysteresis in the gears).
4. In the <Reference Positions> frame, set the left grid
reference position to 1 and right grid reference position to
39.
5. Select the <Left> option for <Use for Y>.
6. Select <Start>.
7. Follow the onscreen prompts. Z-ranges are determined for
each tip.
8. After the test is complete, do not remove the reference
tips; they are used in the next test.
9. Confirm with Done.
Determine LiHa Reference Position

1. On the <Contents> page select the <Determine
Reference Positions> checkbox (聺) then switch to the
<Setup> page.
Do NOT deselect any previously checked <Setup> or
<Test> or <Alignment> box.

200942-103—September 2007
2. Select the <4/8 Reference Tips Available> checkbox if

eight reference tips are available. If not, deselect the
option.
3. In the <Determine Reference Positions> frame select the
<Manually> option button.
4. Set the <Left> and <Right> grid references to 1 and 39,
respectively.
5. Select <Left> for the grid Y-range grid position.
6. Select <Start> to initiate the procedure.
Figure 4.59: <Setup> Page
7. Follow the onscreen prompts.

200942-103—September 2007
8. Confirm with <Done> when the tips are mounted.

9. The <Move LiHa> page is activated and the message <Use
move tool to determine the first reference point>
displays.
Figure 4.60: <LiHa Panel>, <Move LiHa>
10. Adjust the position in the X- and Y-direction as shown.
Reference Tip
Reference Point
Reference Pin on Worktable
Figure 4.61: Reference Position
11. When the tip is in the correct position, confirm with

<Done>.
12. Repeat alignment for all required positions.
13. After checking all reference positions, the message
<Dismount Reference Tips> displays.

200942-103—September 2007
14. Confirm with <Done>.
Calibrate the Lower DiTi Eject

1. Select <System Devices>, <LiHa> to initiate the
procedure. The <Contents> page displays.
2. Select the <Calibrate Lower DiTi Eject> checkbox (聺).
3. Select <Start>.
4. Enter the serial number of the instrument at the prompt
and select <OK>. The test proceeds automatically and
requires no user intervention.
Figure 4.62: <Contents>
5. At the <LiHa Process Prompt>, select <OK>.

6. Select <Close> again to return to the main menu.
Figure 4.63: <LiHa Process Prompt>

200942-103—September 2007
Perform the Lower DiTi Eject Test

1. Go to <Liquid System>, <DiTi>, <Lower DiTi Eject
Test>.
2. Load the <NAT worktable> or the <m2000sp
Worktable>:
• Place the DiTi rack carrier at grid 21.
• Place the wash/waste station and DiTi slide in the
cutout at grid 18.
• Place a full DiTi rack (1000 µL) on the rear position.
• Place an empty tray on the middle rack
3. Place an empty DiTi tray on a 1000 µL DiTi rack and place
it in the middle position on the carrier. The <Lower DiTi
Eject Test> screen displays.
Figure 4.64: <Lower DiTi Eject Test> Route
4. Configure the Lower DiTi Eject Test as shown:
NAT MBS m2000sp

DiTi Type 1000F EDiTi 1000F EDiTi
Source Rack DiTi.RR C12.RR
First DiTi Position 1 1
Destination Rack DiTi.RM C12.RM
Waste Rack W1.DiTi Waste C11.DiTi Waste
For both setups:

• Leave <Put back DiTi on lower position> blank
• Enter the operator name

200942-103—September 2007
5. Select <Select Tips> and verify all eight DiTis are 1000 µL
DiTis with Filters.
Figure 4.65: <Select Tips>
6. Select <OK>.
7. Select <Run> to initiate the test. The status becomes <Test
Running>.
8. At completion of the test, the status becomes <Test
Passed>.
9. Select <Close> to finish the test.
10. If the test failed:
• Verify the LiHa reference positions.
• Check the tip adapters.
• Perform individual Z alignment.

200942-103—September 2007
• Calibrate the lower DiTi eject.
Figure 4.66: Lower DiTi Eject Test Passed
11. Remove the carrier, DiTi slide, and wash/waste station

from the worktable.

200942-103—September 2007
Y-Spread Procedure
NOTE: The Y-spread tool and ISA 600-015 are required

for this procedure.
1. Select <System Devices>, <LiHa> to initiate the

procedure. The <LiHa Panel> displays.
2. Returning to the main S&S menu, select <Instrument>
then <Information>.
3. Select the <Information> tab and then <LiHa Arm> from
the top field.
4. Select <Axis Parameter> and then find the Ys scaling
factor in the bottom field and write the value down for
later use.
Figure 4.67: Ys Scaling Factor Value

200942-103—September 2007
5. Close the <Information Panel> and select the <Move

LiHa> tab from the <LiHa Panel>.
Figure 4.68: Move LiHa Control
6. Return to the <Instrument> menu and select <Command

Tool>. Select <Single Commands> and enter the
following command in the <Command> field:
A1RPY8
Enter
A1RPY8
here
Figure 4.69: Command Tool Panel

200942-103—September 2007
The value will report as A1@#####,#####. The first

number is the Y scaling; the second number is the Ys
scaling.
7. Run the Y-spread batch file from ISA 600-015 and do the
following:
• Enter the grid location
• Select No when asked if you will be using reference
tips
• Select No when asked if you will be using the front
holes
• Select No when asked if you will be changing the
Y-spread to 18.8 mm
8. Bring tip 3 down to the associated gap on the Y-spread
tool. Center in the X and Y first, and then align in the Z.
Adjust the X and Y if necessary.
Figure 4.70: Tip 3 Aligning with Y-spread Tool
9. Using the <Single Commands> tool, obtain the

parameters (X,Y, and Z) for tip 3 by entering the following
three commands (one at a time) and writing down the
value for Z3:
• A1RPX0
• A1RPY0
• A1RPZ0

200942-103—September 2007
10. Using the <Single Commands> tool again, set all tips to
tip 3’s Z-height on the Y-spread tool by entering the
following command:
A1PAAX,Y,Ys,Z1,Z2,Z3,Z4,Z5,Z6,Z7,Z8
Here X, Y, and Z1-Z8 are the tip 3 values found above, and
Ys is 90 (as set by the Y-spread script).
11. Observe the placement of the tips and adjust the values to
re-center tip 3 if necessary.
Observe the Y-spread at these locations. Ideally, the tips
will not be touching the walls of the Y-spread notches.
If the tips are out of alignment, check for bent tip
adapters and replace if necessary.
If tip 3 or tip 7 are replaced, reperform the LiHa
Determine Range test (refer to Determine LiHa Range on
page 4–60) then perform the Y-spread check again.
12. Using the <Single Commands> tool, reinitialize the axis
by entering the following command:
A1PIZ
13. Run the Y-spread batch file from ISA 600-015 and do the
following:
• Enter the grid location
• Select No when asked if you will be using reference
tips
• Select Yes when asked if you will be using the front
holes
• Select Yes when asked if you will be changing the
Y-spread to 18.8 mm

200942-103—September 2007
14. Align tip 3 with the associated gap on the y-spread tool.
Figure 4.71: Tip 3 Aligning
15. Using the <Single Commands> tool, obtain the

parameters (X,Y, and Z) for tip 3 by entering the following
three commands (one at a time) and writing down the
value for Z3:
A1RPX0
A1RPY0
A1RPZ0
16. Using the <Single Commands> tool again, set all tips to
tip 3’s Z-height on the Y-spread tool by entering the
following command:
A1PAAX,Y,Ys,Z1,Z2,Z3,Z4,Z5,Z6,Z7,Z8
Here X, Y, and Z1-Z8 are the tip 3 values found above, and
Ys is 188 (as set by the Y-spread script).
17. Observe the placement of the tips and adjust the values to
re-center tip 3 if necessary.
Observe the Y-spread at these locations. Ideally, the tips
will not be touching the walls of the Y-spread notches.

200942-103—September 2007
18. Move the tips back and forth over the Y-spread tool from
the front location to the back location.
Figure 4.72: Y-spread Tool
You can use the same commands as were previously

entered by double-clicking on them in the command
window.
19. Observe the Y-spread again at the front location for
scaling. If the tips are set inside the scaling notches, the
scaling factor should be made larger; if the tips are set
outside the notches, the factor should be made smaller.
Using the <Single Commands> tool, change the scaling
factor as needed using the following command:
A1SAS#####
20. Using the <Single Commands> tool, home the Z and Y
axes using the following commands:
A1PIZ (the Z-axis must be homed first)
A1PIY

200942-103—September 2007
21. Move back to the 188 (front) location, then back to the 90
(back) location, then the 188 location again.
90
188
Figure 4.73: Y-spread Tool
Observe the Y-spread in the front location. If satisfied,

move to the back location, and observe the Y-spread
there.
Continue with adjustments until the Y-spread in both
locations is satisfactory.
22. When satisfied, use the <Single Commands> tool to save

the value with the following command:
M1SOW
23. Using the <Single Commands> tool report Y-spread value
with the following command:
A1RPY8
The value will report as A1@#####,#####. The first
number is the Y scaling; the second number is the Ys
scaling.
Write this number down in the event you want to return
to an earlier value.

200942-103—September 2007
Configure the RoMa

RoMa configuration in S&S involves the following activities:
• Performing RoMa setup
• Determining the RoMa reference positions
• Determining the RoMa range
• Auto-adjusting the rotator
• Manually adjusting the rotator

Abbott Molecular sample preparation reagents.
Exposure to hazardous chemicals is minimized by
labels and product-specific MSDS. Wear appropriate
personal protective equipment, such as gloves, lab coat,
sensitive devices.
• Wear a wrist ground strap
touching the instrument
CAUTION: Ensure there are no objects installed on the
worktable that could interfere with movement of the
RoMa. It may be necessary to restart the software and
re-enter the password if the software was exited.

200942-103—September 2007

and racks on worktables. When working with the

procedures.
RoMa Move Tool

To perform many of the procedures in this section, it will be
necessary to use the RoMa Move Tool. Refer to Move Pages on
page 11–17 of Section 11 for instructions on using this
feature.
Set up the RoMa

1. Go to <System Devices>, <RoMa>.
Figure 4.74: <System Devices> Menu
2. Switch to the <Printing> page and complete the

<Operator> and <Comment> fields:
• Operator (name)

200942-103—September 2007
• Comment
Figure 4.75: RoMa Panel

200942-103—September 2007
Set Type
1. On the <Contents> page, select <Set Type> then switch to
the <Setup> page.
2. Select:
• <CW> for <Rotator Type>
• <Eccentric> for <Gripper Type>
• <Normal (standard)> for <Z Range>
Figure 4.76: <RoMa Panel>, <Setup> Page
3. Save the selections by selecting <Start>.

4. Confirm the changes with <OK>. The values are written to
the RoMa.

200942-103—September 2007
Determine RoMa Reference Positions

1. Select the <Determine Reference Positions> checkbox
(聺) in the <Contents> page.
Figure 4.77: <RoMa Panel>, <Contents> Page
2. Switch to the <Setup> page.
Figure 4.78: RoMa Panel - Reference Positions Page
3. Define the <Left> reference position for the RoMa as 6 or

7 and the <Right> reference position as 45.
NOTE: The <Left> grid reference position may
either be 6 or 7, depending on manufacturing
tolerances. Check that the reference pin is in the
correct location on the worktable deck (6 or 7).
4. Select the <Left> option for <Use for Y>.
5. Initiate the procedure with <Start>. The message <Mount
Reference Tool> displays.
6. Hold the reference tool against the bottom of the gripper
module and select <OK>. This opens the gripper to hold
the reference tool.

200942-103—September 2007
7. Confirm the message <Ready to Proceed> with <OK>.

The <Move RoMa> page is activated and the message
<Use move tool to determine first reference point>
displays. Grab and drag the <RoMa Process Prompt> box
away from the <Move RoMa> page.
8. Use the X- and Y-arrow keys to move the RoMa to the first
reference point. The Z-arrow keys can be used to lower the
reference tool closer to the reference position.
9. When in the correct position, confirm with <Next>.
10. Repeat for all indicated positions.
11. Press <OK> to release the tool.
12. Press <OK> to proceed.
13. Press <OK> at the prompt <Setup: Done>.
14. If the RoMa is significantly out of alignment or the test
fails, reset the default parameters (Set Default Parameters)
and perform the following:
• Set Type, found on page 4–77
• Determine RoMa Reference Positions, found on page
4–78
• Determine Range, found on page 4–81
• Adjust the Rotator, found on page 4–82
Reference Plate Test

NOTE: Ensure that 3M foam tape is installed on the
reference plate prior to beginning this procedure, as
required in the TSB.
1. From the <Contents> page select the <Reference Plate
Test> checkbox (聺).
2. Switch to the <Test Configuration> page and select grid
25 for the Reference Plate Position grid, and 5 cycles.
3. Select <Start>.
4. At the prompt, mount the gripper fingers then press <OK>
to continue.
5. Place the reference plate at grid position 25.
6. Select <OK> to initiate the procedure.

200942-103—September 2007
7. The RoMa attempts to pick up the reference plate.

Determine if the reference plate is picked up squarely with
equal pressure applied from both fingers.
8. If no adjustment is necessary, press <OK>, close the RoMa
panel, and proceed to the first PosID test.
9. If adjustment is required, perform Adjust the Rotator,
found on page 4–82.
Set Default Parameters (As Needed)

1. On the <Contents> page, select <Set Default Parameters>
and select <Start>. The ranges, reference positions, and
rotation ranges were reset to the default values and must
be reestablished.
Figure 4.79: RoMa <Contents> Page

200942-103—September 2007
Determine Range
1. On the <Contents> page, select the <Determine Range>
checkbox (聺) and switch to the <Setup> page.
2. In the <Reference Positions> frame. Select <Left> for the

<Use for Y> reference position, and set the left <Grid>
spin box to 6 or 7 and the right <Grid> spin box to 45.
Figure 4.81: RoMa <Reference Positions>
NOTE: The left grid reference position may be

either 6 or 7, depending on manufacturing
tolerances. This has no impact on the range or
accuracy of the RoMa.
3. Select <Start> to initiate the procedure. The RoMa moves
and determines the range. The message <Mount

200942-103—September 2007
4. Hold the reference tool against the gripper module and

select <OK>. This opens the grippers to hold the reference
tool.
5. Confirm the message <Ready to Proceed> with <OK>.
After determining the range, the message <Unmount
6. To prevent the reference tool from falling, hold the
reference tool in the gripper then select <OK>. The
reference tool is released and values are saved. Select <OK>
at the prompt.
7. Select <OK> again at the <Setup: Done> prompt.
Adjust the Rotator

NOTE: If the gripper fingers were removed, mount the
gripper fingers. Use the RoMa move option to move the
RoMa to a position where the grippers can be mounted
easily. Once they are mounted, lower the gripper head
down to a flat surface (such as the 1 mL Subsystem) and
adjust the fingers so that they contact the worktable at
the same time. When finished, raise the gripper head to
its initialized position.
NOTE: Ensure that 3M foam tape is installed on the
reference plate prior to beginning this procedure, as
required in the TSB.
1. On the <Contents> page, select the <Adjust Rotator>

checkbox (聺) and switch to the <Setup> page.

200942-103—September 2007
2. Select 25 to define the grid position of the test plate (front

left corner).
Figure 4.83: RoMa <Setup> Page
3. Select <Start> to initiate the procedure. The message

<Mount Gripper> displays.
4. The message <Make sure the reference plate is on Grid
25> displays.
5. Put the test plate on the worktable at the selected grid
position (front-left corner) and continue with <OK>. The
rotator is adjusted and the values are saved. Press <OK>
when the test is complete.
6. Verify the setup by performing the <Reference Plate> test.
7. Select <Close> to exit the RoMa panel.
Manual RoMa Rotator Adjustments

Both rotational offsets in the firmware and mechanical offsets
in the hardware are included in this adjustment as needed.
1. Check the parallelism of the arms by placing the reference
plate on the deck.
Use the RoMa move tool to position the RoMa arms
directly over the plate, with the grippers open to the
width of the plate.

200942-103—September 2007
Figure 4.84: RoMa Positioned Over the Plate
2. Observe the arm position in relation to the plate. They

should run parallel.
If the arms are not parallel, it might be necessary to bend
them slightly.
3. Rerun the Reference Plate Test, found on page 4–79.
If the plate is gripped and replaced with a minimum of
slippage from the pins to the deck, leave them as is and
move on with the calibrations. This instruction applies to
tests that are borderline but still passing, as well.
NOTE: If calibrations cannot be passed with the
rotation as is, return to S&S and follow the
rotation adjustments outlined below.
If the test fails, manually fix the rotation as instructed in
Step 4 below.

200942-103—September 2007
4. Remove the gripper arms from the RoMa head. Use the
<RoMa Move> screen to align the front line of the gripper
mount to the back of the 1 mL Subsystem or the back of
an MTP carrier (the important thing is that it is aligned to
a straight edge).
Figure 4.85: RoMa Head Aligned with 1mL Subsystem
5. Use the <Single Commands> tool to report the rotator

value with the following command:
C1RPR4
Record this reported value prior to making any changes.
6. Use the <Single Commands> tool to change the rotator
value with the following command:
C1SOR###
7. Use the <Single Commands> tool to reinitialize the
rotator with the following command:
C1PIR
8. Observe the rotator head to see if the front of the gripper
mount is parallel with the straight edge of the 1 mL
Subsytem.
Repeat the above steps until the desired parallelism is
reached, then remount the gripper arms.
9. Rerun the Reference Plate Test. If the plate is gripped and
replaced satisfactorily, save the value to memory using the
following single line command before continuing with
calibrations:
C1AWE

200942-103—September 2007
Configuring Sample Bar Code Labels

The Configuring Sample Bar Code Labels procedure is
performed within the m2000sp software. Refer to Sample Bar
Code on page 4–182.

200942-103—September 2007
Configure the PosID 2

PosID 2 configuration in S&S involves the following activities:
• Performing the PosID functionality test
• Confirming basic mechanical accuracy
• Performing PosID 2 setup
PosID Functionality Test

WARNING: Class II Laser Product. This Class 2 laser
product contains an embedded low power visible Class
2 laser diode bar code scanner. Avoid direct viewing of
the bar code laser beam or reflections of the beam.
NOTE: The bar codes for the Output Deck and
GPReagent Rack are not read by this test and will not
appear in the results.
NOTE: If you have loaded the <NAT MBS Worktable>,
you must run the PosID tests using 100 mL reagent
carriers and troughs. If you have loaded the <m2000sp
Worktable>, you must run the PosID tests using 200
mL reagent carriers and troughs.
1. Select <System Devices>, <PosID>, <Test>. The <PosID2
Test Configuration> dialog displays.
Figure 4.86: PosID2 Test Configuration Dialog
2. Set <Number of cycles:> to 5.

3. Set <Grid-Positions> from 1 to 40.

200942-103—September 2007
4. Select the <Read Carrier> checkbox (聺) to read carriers

and containers.
5. Select the <Read User ID> checkbox (聺) only if user
identifications are used.
6. Enter operator name and instrument serial number.
7. Load the worktable with bar-coded carriers. Refer to the
m2000sp Operations Manual for instructions on labeling
carriers, racks, and/or tubes with bar code labels.
If the <m2000sp Worktable> is loaded, run the test with
the following:
• Two carriers, at grids 4 and 5, with multiple bar-
coded containers (sample tubes). The bar codes
should face the slots on the right side of the tube
carriers.
• One 200 mL reagent carrier with reagents at grid
19-20.
• Two DiTi carriers with left edges at grids 21 and 27.
• Chilled Output Deck at grids 35-40.
If the <NAT MBS Worktable>, is loaded, run the test with
the following:
• Two carriers, at grids 4 and 5, with multiple bar-
coded containers (sample tubes). The bar codes
should face the slots on the right side of the tube
carriers.
• One 100 mL reagent carrier with reagents at grid
19.
• Two DiTi carriers with left edges at grids 21 and 27.
• Two sample output carriers at grids 38 and 39.
8. Start the test procedure with <Run>. An empty <PosID 2
Test Results> window opens.
9. Begin the test procedure with <Start>.
10. The instrument initializes and the PosID starts to check
the carriers and containers.
11. Values in the <PosID 2 Test Results> window are
continuously updated during the test.

200942-103—September 2007
12. Select the <Show Container Reads> option at the bottom

of the screen to show both carrier and container read data
during the test.
Figure 4.87: PosID 2 Test Results Window
13. The following data can be read in the window:

• Heading line displays the number of reads
done/defined and worktable position, for which
results display in the table. The position can be
switched using the scroll bar.
• <NT> shows the reading result of the No Tube sensor
during the Reference Read. Two letters can display:
– <T>: Tube found
– <N>: No tube found
• <Reference Read> indicates which bar codes were
read in the reference read. Two sets of characters can
display:
– <***> indicates no reading possible, but tube is
placed correctly
– <$$$> indicates no tube found in this position
• <NT> shows the reading result of the No Tube sensor
during the Actual Reads.
• <Actual Read> indicates bar codes which were read in
the Actual Reads.

200942-103—September 2007
• <NT> stands for “No Tube” and indicates no tube

found in the read attempt.
• <NR> stands for “No Read” and indicates no bar codes
were read, but tubes were placed correctly.
• <WR> stands for “Wrong Read” and indicates bar
codes were read that do not match bar codes read in
the Reference Read.
• <Total Errors> indicates the total errors that occurred
during a test run.
14. The message <PosID 2 Test passed> or <PosID 2 Test
failed> displays.
15. Confirm with <OK>.
16. Select <Close> to close the window. The <PosID 2 Test
Configuration> dialog is active again.
17. Print the test results with <Print> and/or finish the
function with <Close>.
18. The test passed if the following criteria are met:
• <No Tube>: zero errors
• <No Read>: not more than five errors
• <Wrong Read>: zero errors
No other setup of the PosID 2 is required.
19. If the test failed, verify correct positioning of the bar code
labels and bar code types, and/or setup of the PosID as
described in Set Up PosID 2, found on page 4–92.

200942-103—September 2007
Verify Basic Mechanical Accuracy
NOTE: The PosID Service Rack is required for setup

functions.
Figure 4.88: PosID Service Rack
1. Switch off the instrument.

2. Use a feeler gauge to check the gap between the release
finger of the PosID 2 and worktable surface. Ensure the gap
is approximately 0.2 mm.
Figure 4.89: Release Finger Adjustment
3. If necessary, loosen the two fixing screws and adjust the

release finger then tighten the screws.
4. Place the Service Rack onto a grid position on the
worktable.
5. Manually move the PosID 2 gripper into the Service Rack.

200942-103—September 2007
6. Check the gap between the Service Rack and gripper pin.
If needed, adjust to approximately 0.5 mm.
Figure 4.90: Mechanical Adjustment
7. Switch on the instrument and initialize with <System>,

<Instrument>.
Set Up PosID 2
1. Start the function with <System Devices>, <PosID>,
<Setup>.
Figure 4.91: System Devices Menu <PosID>, <Setup>

200942-103—September 2007
2. Select <Set>. The PosID 2 moves through all five logical

positions and the gripper moves through all eight possible
logical axes.
Figure 4.92: PosID 2 Adjustment Dialog
3. Select <Run>. The PosID 2 runs in all axes to the end

positions to determine its range.
4. Set the <Left Position> to 1, <Rack Position> to 10, and
<Right Position> to 41.
5. Select <Start> to start setup. A prompt displays to insert
the test rack at the defined position.
Figure 4.93: Insert Test Rack Message
6. Slide the Service Rack into grid 1. Do not push it to its stop
position. Verify it is approximately 1 cm in front of the
stop position.

200942-103—September 2007
7. Confirm with <OK>. The <Move PosID: Move Gripper to

Position 1> dialog displays.
Figure 4.94: <Move Gripper to Position 1> Dialog
8. Carefully push the Service Rack toward the rear of the

instrument to its stop position.
9. Check the position of the gripper pin against the adjusting
slot of the Service Rack. The pin must fit exactly in the slot.
Figure 4.95: Adjusting Slot Position
10. If the position is incorrect, align it using the movement

buttons.
11. When the gripper pin fits in the slot, confirm the
adjustment with <OK>. The message <Please insert Test
Rack in Position 41> displays.

200942-103—September 2007
12. Slide the Service Rack into grid 41. Do not push it to its
stop position. Verify it is approximately 1 cm in front of
the stop position.
13. Confirm with <OK>. The <Move PosID: Move Gripper to
position 41> dialog displays.
15. Check the position of the gripper pin against the adjusting
slot of the Service Rack. The pin must fit exactly in the slot.
16. If the position is incorrect, align it with the movement

buttons.
adjustment with <OK>. The message <Please Insert Test
Rack in Position 10> displays.
18. Slide the Service Rack into grid 10 to its stop position.

200942-103—September 2007
19. Confirm with <OK>. The mechanical adjustment starts

when the <Move PosID: Mechanically adjust beam
angle vertical> dialog displays.
Figure 4.97: <Mechanically Adjust Beam Angle Vertical>
Scanner Head Mechanical Adjustment

1. The laser beam must be parallel to the vertical guideline
on the Service Rack.
Carrier ID Read Position
Guideline
Laser Beam
Correct Incorrect
Figure 4.98: Carrier PosID

200942-103—September 2007
2. If the beam is not parallel, loosen one of the two fixing

screws for the horizontal adjustment with a 2.5 mm Allen
key and adjust the scanner head accordingly. Tighten both
screws when adjustment is complete.
Fixing Screws for Horizontal

Adjustment (Step x)
Fixing Screws for Horizontal and

Vertical Adjustment (Step x)
Fixing Screw (Vertical Adjustment)

(Step x)

(Step x)
Figure 4.99: Scanner Head Adjustment Screws
3. Adjust the X-positioning until the laser beam and

guideline are superimposed.
Service Rack
Horizontal Calibration
Line
Vertical Calibration Line
Laser Beam
Correct Incorrect
Figure 4.100:Vertical/Horizontal Scanner Head Adjustment

200942-103—September 2007
4. Confirm with <OK>. The gripper finger moves the Service

Rack to its center position. The <Move PosID:
Mechanically adjust head vertical> dialog displays. The
laser beam must be parallel to the vertical calibration line
Figure 4.101:<Mechanically Adjust Head Vertical>

screws for horizontal and vertical adjustment with an
Allen key and adjust the scanner head accordingly.
Tighten both screws when adjustment is complete.
6. Use the arrow keys to move the PosID 2 until the laser
beam and vertical calibration lines are superimposed.

200942-103—September 2007
7. Confirm with <OK>. The <Move PosID: Mechanically

adjust beam height> dialog displays.
Figure 4.102:<Mechanically Adjust Beam Height> Dialog
8. The laser beam must be parallel and flush to the horizontal

calibration line on the Service Rack.
9. Perform the parallel adjustment using the movement
buttons. Movement must always be done from the CW
direction because of hysteresis. First, move the scanner
head back with the <CCW> key, then move the scanner
back into the correct position with the <CW> key until the
beam is superimposed with the calibration line.
10. If the beam is not in line with the horizontal calibration
line, insert an Allen key through the access hole and move
the scanner head until the beam is flush with the
horizontal calibration line.

200942-103—September 2007
11. Confirm with <OK>. The mechanical adjustment is

executed and the position of the bar code reader is stored.
The <Move PosID: Adjust carrier reading position>
dialog displays. The laser beam must be parallel and flush
with the vertical guideline on the Service Rack.
Figure 4.103:<Adjust Carrier Reading Position> Dialog

200942-103—September 2007
12. Confirm with <OK>. The <Move PosID: Adjust change

position> dialog displays.
Figure 4.104:<Adjust Change Position> Dialog
NOTE: The change position is the transition

position in which the scanner head changes from
moving around its vertical B-axis to moving
around its horizontal X-axis, or vice versa. Since
mechanical movement always has hysteresis, the
adjustment procedure must be started from the
same direction.
NOTE: Always rotate the scanner head with
<CCW> back to the correct position to avoid
potential mechanical problems (collisions).
13. With the Beam Angle (deg) List, set the step size to 1.0.
14. Rotate the scanner head counterclockwise with <CCW>
until it rotates, to verify it is not already in the change
position.
15. Rotate the scanner head clockwise with <CW> until it
stops rotating in the vertical B-axis.
16. Count the number of steps necessary until the scanner
head starts to rotate into the horizontal X-axis.
17. Go back counterclockwise, half the number of steps
counted plus two additional steps.
NOTE: These two additional steps are necessary to
compensate for space in the mechanical system.

200942-103—September 2007
18. Go two steps clockwise, to arrive exactly at the change

position.
19. Confirm with <OK>.
20. The PosID starts with the No Tube Sensor test. The gripper
finger slowly moves the Service Rack backward in the
Y-direction until the No Tube sensor passes all three slots
in the Service Rack.
21. If the No Tube Sensor test passed, the following four
checkboxes are selected (聺) in the <PosID 2 Adjustment>
dialog.
• Slot begin
• Slot end
• Check sensor upper limit
• Check sensor lower limit
22. If the No Tube sensor test failed, the No Tube sensor is
damaged and must be replaced. Refer to No Tube Sensor
on page 9–172 of Section 9, Repair, Replacement of Spare
Parts.
23. The setup procedure continues. The gripper finger moves
the Service Rack to its center position and the <Move
PosID: Adjust tube reading position> dialog displays.
The laser beam must be in line with the vertical calibration
line of the Service Rack.
Figure 4.105:<Adjust Tube Reading Position> Dialog

200942-103—September 2007
24. If the laser is out of line, use the rotation buttons to adjust
the scanner head accordingly.
25. Confirm with <OK>. The tests for <Adjust scan line start>
and <Adjust scan line stop> are performed automatically.
PosID 2 adjustment was completed successfully.
Figure 4.106:PosID 2 Adjustment Dialog
26. After passing the setup procedure successfully, the

<PosID 2 Adjustment> dialog displays again. Except for
the <Adjust failed> checkbox, the checkboxes are checked
(聺) to indicate all appropriate tests were completed.

200942-103—September 2007
27. When the <PosId 2 adjust: Adjust passed> dialog

appears, select <OK>.
Figure 4.107:<Adjust Passed> Message
28. If the setup procedure failed, the <Adjust failed>

checkbox is checked (聺), and the setup procedure must be
repeated.
Installation of Wash/Waste Station

1. Install the wash/waste station on the worktable surface at
grid 18.
Figure 4.108:Wash/Waste Station on Worktable
2. Secure to the surface with the included screw.

3. Install two pieces of short tubing to the two nipples of the
wash/waste station that extend below the worktable
surface into the cabinet (as shown in Figure 4.109 below).
Secure with tubing clamps.

200942-103—September 2007
Figure 4.109:Underside of Wash/Waste Station
Ensure the waste station chute is securely positioned and

that the ramped section at the bottom of the chute points
to the left, toward the center of the solid waste container.
A warning sticker
shows when the
waste chute is
being installed
incorrectly.
A green circle
appears on the
front of the waste
chute.
Incorrect Figure 4.110: Waste Chute Properly Positioned

positioning of
the waste IMPORTANT: If the waste chute’s red warning
chute could sticker is visible after it is reinstalled, it has been
result in errors positioned incorrectly. The green circle label
must face the user.
Calibrate and Verify System Liquid, Liquid Waste, and Solid Waste Sensors
Adjustments and calibrations are performed through the
Genesis S&S software.
NOTE: To access S&S, log on to the SCC and select
<System>, <Setup and Service>.

200942-103—September 2007
Calibration of DiTi Waste Sensor

1. Go to the <Options>, <SMIO for NAT> menu.
Figure 4.111: Options Menu
2. Select <DiTi Waste Sensor Calibration> under <Setup>.
Figure 4.112: SMIO Panel Menu
3. Go to the <Tools & Configuration> tab.

200942-103—September 2007
4. Verify the <Device Type> is <NAT>. (If not, select <NAT>

from the pull-down menu.) Then select <Diti Waste Full>.
Clear the other checkboxes.
Figure 4.113: Tools & Configuration Tab
5. Select <Start>. The prompt <Place a reflecting plate at

about 120 [mm] below the ultrasonic sensor> displays.
Instead of placing the plate at 120 mm, place the plate at
300 mm below the sensor.
Figure 4.114: Process Prompt: Reflector Plate

200942-103—September 2007
6. Select <Next>. The prompt <Turn both potentiometers

counterclockwise to their stop positions> displays.
NOTE: The potentiometers are made of plastic. Be
careful not to damage them by applying too much
force.
Figure 4.115: Process Prompt: Potentiometers
7. Select <Next>. The prompt <Adjust the distance

potentiometer (top potentiometer) to the point where
the integrated LED just lights up> displays.
Figure 4.116: Process Prompt: Adjust Potentiometers
8. Select <Next>. The prompt <Setup: Done> displays.
Figure 4.117: Process Prompt: Setup

200942-103—September 2007
9. Select OK.
NOTE: If the calibration fails, check the
connection to the SMIO board and repeat the test.
NOTE: If the calibration fails again, replace the
sensor.
10. Perform the DiTi Waste Sensor Verification on page 4–114.
Adjustment of System Liquid Level Sensor

Potentiometers
NOTE: System liquid level sensing is accomplished by
changes in capacitance. Water droplets on the inside
and outside of the liquid container can adversely affect
potentiometer adjustment and sensor calibration.
1. Remove the two screws securing the sensor to the bracket.
2. Pour 1 L of water into the container and allow the water to
settle.
3. Move the sensor to the left to access the potentiometer
adjustment screw located on the rear face of the sensor.
force.
4. Keep the sensor at the same level as the mounting
brackets.
5. Hold the sensor in place with one hand or use the
container to hold the sensor in place against the bracket.
6. With the container in place, adjust the potentiometer so
the sensor LED is on.
7. Adjust the potentiometer in the opposite direction until
the LED just goes off.
8. Add 1 L of liquid to the container, for a total of 2 L in the
container.
9. Verify the sensor LED is on.
10. Attach the sensor to the bracket and perform the System
Liquid Bottle Sensor Verification on page 4–111.

200942-103—September 2007
Waste Liquid Sensor Potentiometer Adjustment

NOTE: The waste liquid sensor is an optical sensor.
1. Disconnect the waste container hoses and remove the cap.

2. Pour 8.5 L of water into the container and allow the water
to settle.
3. Switch the instrument on.
4. Adjust the potentiometer, located on the end of the
sensor, counter clockwise until the sensor LED goes out.
force.
5. Turn the potentiometer clockwise slowly until sensor LED
turns on.
6. Turn the potentiometer clockwise another 180 degrees
(half turn).
7. Add 1.5 L of liquid to the container, for a total of 10.0 L in
the container.
8. Verify the sensor LED is off.
9. Pour out the liquid. Dry the outside surface of the
container, but leave the inside wet.
10. Place the container back in position and check to ensure
the sensor light is on.
11. If the sensor is off perform a minor adjustment of the
potentiometer until the sensor is on.
12. If necessary, repeat steps 1 through 11 to verify accuracy
of the potentiometer adjustment.
13. Perform the Liquid Waste Bottle Sensor Verification on
page 4–112.
14. Replace the sensor only after two (2) consecutive failed
adjustment attempts.

200942-103—September 2007
Sensor Verification
System Liquid Bottle Sensor Verification

1. From S&S, go to the <Options>, <SMIO for NAT>. The
SMIO Panel screen displays.
Figure 4.118: SMIO Panel Screen
2. Select the <Sensors> test box.

3. Go to the <Tools & Configuration> tab and check the
<System Bottle Empty> box, ensuring that no other
boxes are checked.
4. Select <Start>. The prompt <Fill system bottle with 1.0
[liter] of liquid> displays.
Figure 4.119: Process Prompt: 1.0 Liter

200942-103—September 2007
5. Select <Next>. The prompt <Add 2.0 [liter] of liquid>

displays.
Figure 4.120: Process Prompt: 2.0 Liter
6. Select <Next>. If the test was successful, the prompt

<Sensor Test: Passed> displays.
Figure 4.121: Test Passed
7. If the test fails, adjust the system liquid sensor

potentiometer in one of the two ways described in the
previous section until a <Pass> screen is obtained. Select
<OK> to complete the verification.
Liquid Waste Bottle Sensor Verification

1. From S&S, go to <Options>, <SMIO for NAT>.
<Wash Bottle Full> box, ensuring no other boxes are
checked.

200942-103—September 2007
4. Select <Start>. The prompt <Fill waste bottle with 8.5

[liter] of liquid> displays.
Figure 4.122: Process Prompt: 8.5 Liters
5. Select <Next>. The prompt <Add 2.0 [liter] of liquid>

displays.
Figure 4.123: Process Prompt: 2 Liters

<Sensor Test: Passed> displays. Select <OK> to finish the
verification.
7. If the test fails, adjust the potentiometer as described in

Waste Liquid Sensor Potentiometer Adjustment on page
4–110 until a <Pass> screen is obtained. Select <OK> to
complete the verification.

200942-103—September 2007
DiTi Waste Sensor Verification

<DiTi Waste Full> box, ensuring that no other boxes are
checked.
180 [mm] below the sensor> displays. Instead of placing
the plate at 180 mm, place the plate at 360 mm below the
sensor.
Figure 4.125: Process Prompt: Reflecting Plate
5. Select <Next>. The prompt <Place the plate at 120 [mm]

below the sensor> displays. Instead of placing the plate at
120 mm, place the plate at 300 mm below the sensor.
Figure 4.126: Process Prompt: 120 mm

200942-103—September 2007

Figure 4.127:Test Passed
Reinstallation of the Output Deck

Return the Output Deck to the worktable and reconnect all
cables per the latest revision of TSB 605-003.
Perform Peltier Chiller Temperature Check

Verify the chiller is on, then refer to Chiller and Heater
Temperature Check, found on page 5–52 of Section 5,
Maintenance and Diagnostic Procedures.
Check Door Locks

1. From S&S, go to <Options>, <Access Status Options>.
Figure 4.128: <Access Status Options> Route
2. A prompt to enter the instrument serial number may

display. Enter the serial number then select <SET>.
3. The <Access/Status Panel window with activated
<Contents> page displays.

200942-103—September 2007
4. In the <Available Devices> section, select <Access

Status> to test the door locks.
Figure 4.129: <Access / Status Panel>
5. Select the <Device Test> under <Test>.

6. Change to the <Configuration & Tools> page.
7. Select:
• Door Lock 1 (left)
• Door Lock 2 (right)
Figure 4.130: Door Locks 1 & 2
8. Select <Apply> at the lower-right corner to save the

selected configuration.
9. Select <Start> to initiate the protocol.

200942-103—September 2007
10. The prompt <Door Lock 1 (left) / Please close the main
door> displays. Select <OK>.
Figure 4.131: Close Door Prompt
11. The prompt <Door Lock 1 (left) / Check if the left side
is now locked> displays. Select <OK> if successful; if
unsuccessful, select <Cancel>.
NOTE: If <Cancel> is selected because the lock is
not functioning, troubleshoot the lock.
Figure 4.132: Check Door Prompt
12. The prompt <Door Lock 1 (left) / Check if it is unlocked

now> displays. Select <OK> if successful; if unsuccessful,
select <Cancel>.
NOTE: If Cancel is selected because the lock is not
functioning, troubleshoot the lock.
Figure 4.133: Check Door Is Unlocked

200942-103—September 2007
13. The prompt <Door Lock 2 (right) / Please close the main
door> displays. Select <OK>.
Figure 4.134: Close Door Prompt
14. The prompt <Door Lock 2 (right) / Check if the right

side is now locked> displays. Select <OK> if successful; if
Figure 4.135: Check Door Prompt
15. The prompt <Door Lock 2 (right) / Check if it is

unlocked now> displays. Select <OK> if successful; if

200942-103—September 2007
16. The prompt <Test Result: Passed / Access/Status Test:

Passed> displays.
17. Select OK.

18. Select OK again to exit.
Verify Temperature Performance of 1 mL Subsystem Heater Blocks

Perform the 1 mL Subsystem Heater Block Temperature Check,
as follows:
Access the Command Tool

1. Go to <System>, <Setup and Service>, then go to
<Options>, <SMIO for NAT>.
2. Open the Single Line Command Tool protocol by
selecting <Command Tool>, <Single Commands>.
3. The <Single Commands> page displays.
4. Set the <Timeout> value to <20000>.
Check Heater Zone 1

1. Type <O4STT500> in the <Command> line and select
<Transmit> to turn on heater zone 1. Set the temperature
to 50.0°C.
NOTE: Turn both heaters on at the same time to
consolidate warm-up time.
2. The <Answer> should be <O4@> to indicate the heater is
on.
3. Wait 20 minutes for the heater block to equilibrate.
4. Type <O4RAT> in the <Command> line and select
<Transmit> to read the actual temperature.

200942-103—September 2007
5. The <Answer> displayed is in the format <O4@XYZ>,

where XYZ is the temperature (in °C) times 10. The value
of XYZ for heater zone 1 should be 475 to 525 (47.5 to
52.5°C).
6. Turn off the heater after completion of the check by
entering <O4STT0> in the <Command> line or cycling
power to the analyzer.
Check Heater Zone 2

1. Type O5STT750 in the <Command> line and select
<Transmit> to turn on heater zone 2. Set the temperature
to 75.0°C.
2. The <Answer> should be <O5@> to indicate the heater is
on.
3. Wait 40 minutes for the heater block to equilibrate.
4. Type <O5RAT> in the <Command> line and select
<Transmit> to read the actual temperature.
5. The <Answer> displayed is in the format <O5@XYZ>,
where XYZ is the temperature (in °C) times 10. The value
of XYZ for heater zone 2 should be 725 to 775 (72.5 to
77.5°C).
6. Turn off the heater after completion of the check by
entering <O5STT0> in the <Command> line or cycling
power to the analyzer.

200942-103—September 2007
Section 4 Set Up Liquid System
Set Up Liquid System

Liquid system setup involves the following activities:
• Setting up the FaWa
• Performing the fill/flush protocol
• Performing the FaWa Pump Test
• Performing the Liquid Detection Test
FaWa Pump Setup

1. Start the function with <Liquid System>, <FaWa>,
<Setup>. The <Fast Wash Pump Setup> dialog displays.
Figure 4.137:<Liquid System> Menu
2. Select 1 for the <Number of Pumps>.

3. Select 8 for the <Number of Tips for each Pump>.
Figure 4.138:<Fast Wash Pump Setup> Dialog
4. Confirm the entries with <OK>.

5. If any data were changed, the message <Write results to
MPO EEPROM> displays. Confirm with <Yes>.

200942-103—September 2007
FaWa Fill/Flush Protocol

1. Load either the <NAT MBS Worktable> or the <m2000sp
Worktable>.
NOTE: If you have loaded the <NAT MBS
Worktable>, you must run the Liquid System tests
using 100 mL reagent carriers and troughs. If you
have loaded the <m2000sp Worktable>, you must
run the tests using 200 mL reagent carriers and
troughs.
2. Select <Liquid System>, <FaWa>, <Test> from the menu.
The <Fast Wash Pump Test Configuration> screen
displays.
Figure 4.139:<Fast Wash Pump Test Configuration>
3. Set <DiTi Type> to 1000F EDiTi.

4. Select <Fill/Flush>. The <Fill Liquid System> screen
displays.
Figure 4.140:<Fill Liquid System>
5. Select the <Use Fast Wash Pump> checkbox (聺).

200942-103—September 2007
6. Select <W1.WASTE,RM> from the pulldown menu for the

<Flush Station> and <W1.DiTiWaste> for the <DiTi
Waste Rack>.
7. Set the <System Liquid Aspirate Speed> to <1000 µL/s>.
8. Set the <Fill Speed> to <1000 µL/s>.
9. Set the <Fill Liquid Volume> to <30000 µL>.
10. Select <Fill System> to initiate filling of the dispense
system.
Elimination of Bubbles
1. To use the above FaWa Fill/Flush Protocol to eliminate
bubbles from the dispense tubing and syringes, deselect
the <Use Fast Wash Pump> checkbox (□), reduce the
<Fill Liquid Volume> from 30000 to 3000 and select <Fill
System>.
2. While the test is running, tap the liquid lines to dislodge
any bubbles lodged in the dispense tubing network.
Perform FaWa Pump Test

NOTE: Use only 13 mm diameter tubes with a
minimum length of 100 mm.
• Ensure test tubes are empty and clean.
• Ensure the worktable map was loaded.
troughs.

200942-103—September 2007
1. Start the function with <Liquid System>, <FaWa>,

<Test>. The <Fast Wash Pump Test Configuration>
dialog displays.
Figure 4.141:<Liquid System> Menu
2. Set the appropriate test configuration:

• <Prefill Volume>: <600 µL>
• <Destination Rack>: <C4.R1> (strip rack with eight
clean 13 mm tubes in the first eight positions)
NOTE: If 16 mm tubes must be used, place the
racks in grids C1-C3.R1, as needed.
• <Flush Rack>: <W1.WASTE,RM>
• <DiTi Type>: <1000F EDiTi>
• <DiTi Rack> (full): <DiTi.RR> (carrier at grid 21)
• <DiTi Waste Rack>: <W1.DiTiWaste>
• <First DiTi Position>: <1>
Figure 4.142:<Fast Wash Pump Test Configuration> Dialog

200942-103—September 2007
3. Select <More>. The <Fast Wash Pump Test-Adv.

Configuration> page displays.
Figure 4.143:<Fast Wash Pump Test - Adv. Configuration>
4. Set the advanced configuration:

• <User defined>: selected
• <Name of user defined Test>: <FaWa>
• <Duration>: <30>
• <Minimal Throughput to pass Test>: <1600>
5. Select <OK>.
6. The prompt <Your user-defined configuration is
accepted. FaWa-Test will run.> displays. Select <OK>.
Figure 4.144:FaWa Test Prompt

200942-103—September 2007
7. Start the test with <Run>. The <Fast Wash Pump Test
Results> window opens.
Figure 4.145:FaWa Test Results Screen
8. Begin the test procedure with <Start>. The test starts

running.
9. After finishing the test, the message <Fast Wash pump
test passed> or <Fast Wash pump test failed> displays.
Confirm with <OK>. The <Fast Wash Pump Test Results>
window with final test results becomes active.
Figure 4.146:<Fast Wash Pump Test Results> Window
10. Close the window with <Close>. The <Fast Wash Pump
Test Configuration> dialog is active again.
11. Finish with <Cancel>.
12. The test passed if the throughput value is greater than the
minimal throughput value displayed in the <Tip>
column. If the value under <Measured> is less than the
expected throughput value, the test failed.
13. If the test failed, verify tips are not clogged and recheck the
liquid system for air bubbles.

200942-103—September 2007
Perform Liquid Detection

NOTE: Tubing should be bubble free.
NOTE: Use only 13 mm diameter tubes with a

minimum length of 75 mm.
1. Load the NAT or m2000sp worktable map with <System>,

<Load Worktable>.
troughs.
2. Fill a clean reagent trough with 40 to 60 mL of tap water.
Place the trough into the front portion (RF) of a reagent
carrier and load the carrier on grid 20 of the worktable.
3. Place a full rack of 1000 µL DiTis onto the rear position
(RR) of a DiTi carrier and place the carrier on grid 21 of the
worktable.
4. Place a rack with eight tubes in positions 1 through 8 on
grid 1 of the worktable.
5. Select <Liquid System>, <Liquid Detection>, <Setup>,
then select:
• <Use Trough Detection Mode>
• <Save>
• <OK>
• <Close>

200942-103—September 2007
6. Begin the function with <Liquid System>, <Liquid

Detection>, <Normal Test>. The <Liquid Detector Test
Configuration> dialog displays.
Figure 4.147:<Liquid Detection> Submenu
7. Set the appropriate test configuration according to the

worktable map.
• <Cycles>: 15
• <Submerge>: 10
• Select <Is the Liquid Source a Rack?>
• <Source Rack>: <T1.RF>
• <Flush Rack>: <W1.WASTE,RM>
• <Destination Rack>: <C4.R1>
• <First Dest. Position>: <1>
• <DiTi Type>: <1000F EDiti>
• <DiTi Rack>: <DiTi.RR>
• <DiTi Waste Rack>: <W1.DiTiWaste>
• <First DiTi Position>: <1>

200942-103—September 2007
Figure 4.148:<Liquid Detector Test Configuration> Dialog
8. Start the test with <Run>. An empty <Liquid Detector

Test Results> window opens.
Figure 4.149:<Liquid Detector Test Results>
9. Begin the test procedure with <Start>. The message <Do

flush step?> displays.
Figure 4.150:<Do Flush Step?> Message

200942-103—September 2007
10. Confirm with <Yes>. Select <No> when <Repeat flush

step?> displays a second time. The test starts running.
11. During the test, results display continuously on the
<Liquid Detector Test Results> window.
Figure 4.151:<Liquid Detector Test Results> Window
12. After finishing the test, the message <Liquid Detector

Test passed> or <Liquid Detector Test failed> displays.
Figure 4.152:<Liquid Detector Test Passed>
13. Confirm with <OK>. The <Liquid Detector Test Results>

window with final test results is active.
14. Close the window with <Close>. The <Liquid Detector
Test Configuration> dialog is active again.
15. Finish the test with <Close>.
16. The test passed if <Tot Errs = 0>.
17. If the test fails:
• Verify all tips have the same height; if not, correct
with <LiHa>, <Setup>, <Individual Z>.
• Check the liquid system for air bubbles.

200942-103—September 2007
Perform Backup
Password Protection: This procedure is exclusively for
FSEs and requires use of the appropriate password.
Purpose
The EEPROM function allows backup of the EEPROM
parameters of one or more devices on disk. This also allows
parameters to be restored from disk. For example, performing a
backup of the current device parameters is recommended if an
electronic board must be replaced. Restoration of parameters
after the board is replaced eliminates redo of the setup and/or
calibration procedures.
Figure 4.153: Setup Panel

200942-103—September 2007
The EEPROM page includes the controls in the following

table:
Table 4.4: EEPROM Controls
Control Description
Do for Checkboxes to select the device addresses of
the EEPROMs to backup.
Device Name Indicates the subject device.
Restore with Displays the names of the files selected with
the <Browse […]> buttons.
Browse […] Command buttons that open the standard
Windows <Open> dialog to search the files
with parameters to restore.
EEPROM Backup
1. On the <Contents> page of the <Instrument>, <Basic
Setup> menu, select the <EEPROM Backup/Restore>
checkbox (聺) and switch to the <EEPROM> page.
Figure 4.154:<Contents> Page
2. When the EEPROM page displays, select the checkboxes of

the EEPROMs to perform backup.
NOTE: At minimum, backup the key instrument
parameters: M1, O4, O5, C1, O2, and O3.

200942-103—September 2007
Figure 4.155:EEPROM Page
3. Select <Start>. Contents of the selected EEPROMs are

written to disk.
Exiting Setup and Service

The next step in the installation process is calibrating the LiHa
and RoMa using m2000sp software. It will be necessary to exit
S&S and allow the system to reboot and return to the m2000sp
software before proceeding.

200942-103—September 2007
LiHa Calibrations
LiHa calibrations are categorized by the implement used to
perform them. The <Calibrate Liquid Handler> menu offers
three calibration options based on those implements:
• Tip Adapter
• Reference Tip
• Disposable Tip
To access m2000sp calibration commands, go to <System>

then <System Calibration>.
Figure 4.156: System Calibration Status Screen
WARNING: Potential Biohazard. If calibrations

are performed at any time other than installation,
instrument parts might be contaminated with
potentially infectious materials. Observe basic
biohazard precautions. Wear appropriate personal
protective equipment such as gloves, lab coats,
Password Protection: These procedures are
exclusively for FSEs and require use of the
appropriate password.
NOTE: Additional calibrations may need to be
completed. See appropriate TSBs.

200942-103—September 2007
Section 4 LiHa Calibrations
The following table lists the three types of LiHa calibrations

performed and the worktable locations calibrated with each.
Table 4.5: LiHa Calibrations
Type Worktable Location

• DiTi racks
Calibrate Tip • DiTi reuse racks
Adapter Locations • Deep well plate (X-Y positioning)
• PCR plate (X-Y positioning)
• 1 mL Subsystem locations
• ASR location
Calibrate Reference
• Master Mix Tube
Tip Locations
• Deep well plate (Z positioning)
• PCR plate (Z positioning)
• 13 mm tube (grid 2)
• 16 mm tube (grid 3)
• Transport tube (pierceable cap)
(grid 4)
• Custom 13 mm tube (grid 2)
Calibrate • Custom 16 mm tube (grid 3)
Disposable Tip NOTE: Before performing
Locations calibrations with DiTis, the
sample racks and tubes the
customer will use must be
properly configured. Refer to
Sample Rack and Tube
Configuration on page 4–149
for more information.
At the completion of LiHa calibrations, verification procedures

must be performed. Refer to Calibration Verifications on page
4–167.

200942-103—September 2007
Calibrate Tip Adapter Locations

During these procedures, the LiHa will be moved to each of
the DiTi racks and reuse racks on the worktable, and to the
PCR and deep well plates on the Output Deck, and will then be
aligned with well A1 of each tray or plate.
Figure 4.157: Tip Adapter Properly Aligned in A1
1. Perform the following steps to set up the worktable:

• Load two 1000 µL DiTi racks on DiTi rack carrier 1
after removing the DiTi from well A1 of each
• Load two 200 µL DiTi racks on DiTi rack carrier 2 after
removing the DiTi from well A1 of each
• Load empty DiTi trays in the DiTi reuse racks on both
DiTi rack carriers
• Load a PCR plate on the front position of the Output
Deck and a deep well plate in the middle position
2. From the main menu select <System> then <System
Calibration>.

200942-103—September 2007
3. Select <Tip Adapter> from the <Calibrate Liquid

Handler> menu on the left side of the screen. The <Liquid
Handler Calibration> screen displays.
Figure 4.158: Liquid Handler Calibration Screen
4. Align the tip adapter in the X and Y direction using the

arrow keys and the <Safe Move> button.
NOTE: The LiHa will not move until <Safe Move>
is selected.
5. Select <Move>.
6. Use the arrows to align the tip adapter to the target. Adjust
the X and Y directions first, followed by the Z. The
<Move> button will need to be selected after each change
to express the new coordinates and to save them.
In the X and Y directions, the tip adapter cone should be
centered in the target.
In the Z direction, the bottom of the black tip ejector tube
should barely touch the surface.
IMPORTANT: For Z adjustments, do NOT drive
! down and then step up, as this will magnify
hysteresis problems. Step down to the calibration
point. If you do need to step up, select <Home>
and then <Move> to return to the calibration
point.

200942-103—September 2007
Figure 4.159: Tip Adapter Properly Aligned with Deep Well

Plate
7. Select <Home>, then <Move>. Repeat the alignments if

necessary. Once the adjustments are complete, select
<Move> a final time. Then select <Next> to move to the
next calibration location.
8. When all calibrations are complete, select <Finish> then
<Close> to return to the <System Calibration> screen.

200942-103—September 2007
Calibrate Reference Tip Locations

There are two types of reference tips available; either may be
used for calibration. Refer to Reference Tips on page 4–54 for
more information.
1 mL Subsystem Calibration
There are two stages to 1 mL Subsystem calibration. First,
heater zone 1, heater zone 2, the room temperature zone, and
the magnetic zone (MagLow) are calibrated, then using a 1 mL
Subsystem carrier, MagRest is calibrated.
1. Perform the following steps to prepare the 1 mL

Subsystem:
• Remove any carriers present
• To assist in visualizing the target, use a black marker
to color the target indentation in the center of each
zone for contrast
Calibration>.
3. Select <Reference Tip> from the <Calibrate Liquid

200942-103—September 2007
4. Follow the prompts to mount the reference tip on LiHa

tip 3.
Figure 4.161: New Reference Tip Mounted on Tip 3
5. For each location, select <Safe Move> to align LiHa tip 3

with the calibration target.
6. Align the reference tip in the X and Y direction using the
is selected.
7. Select <Move>.
8. Use the arrows to align the reference tip to each
calibration indentation. Adjust the X and Y directions
first, followed by the Z. The <Move> button will need to
be selected after each change to express the new
coordinates and to save them.
In the X and Y directions, the reference tip should be
centered in the calibration target.

200942-103—September 2007
In the Z direction, the reference tip should barely touch.

Use a piece of paper between the tip and target to gauge
resistance.
Figure 4.162: Reference Tip and Paper

point.
next calibration location.
10. After the first four zones (heater 1, heater 2, room
temperature, and MagLow) are calibrated, place a 1 mL
Subsystem carrier (without cover) in the MagRest position.
11. Select <Safe Move> to align LiHa tip 3 above the center of
the raised carrier.
IMPORTANT: For carriers with crosshair targets in
! the center, do NOT attempt to calibrate to the
crosshair. Calibrate only according to the
directions in this section.
12. Move the X position to the right 20 steps to avoid settling
in the groove.
13. Select <Move>.
14. Use the arrows to align the reference tip to the target. Only
the Z should need to be adjusted.

200942-103—September 2007
15. Check the location values for X and Y. The X value should
be the same as MagLow X. The Y value should be 50 steps
greater than the MagLow Y value.
Figure 4.163:Carrier in MagRest Position
NOTE: The <Move> button will need to be

selected after each change to express the new
In the Z direction, the reference tip should barely touch
the surface. Use a piece of paper between the tip and
target to gauge resistance.
16. When the tip is calibrated in the Z, move the X direction
back to the left 20 steps.
next calibration location, the assay-specific reagent
holder.

200942-103—September 2007
ASR Calibration
1. Mount the ASR Calibration tool on the assay reagent
holder.
Figure 4.164: ASR Calibration Tool and Target
NOTE: If you are not already in the process of

performing reference tip calibrations, select
<System>, <System Calibration>, and then
<Reference Tip> from the <Calibrate Liquid
Handler> menu. Follow the prompts to mount
the reference tip, and then select <Next> until you
reach screen 6 of 9.
2. Select <Safe Move> to align LiHa tip 3 with the calibration
target, an indentation in the upper-left corner of the ASR
tool.
is selected.
4. Select <Move>.
5. Use the arrows to align the reference tip to the target.
Adjust the X and Y directions first, followed by the Z. The

200942-103—September 2007

centered in the calibration target.
In the Z direction, the reference tip should barely touch.
Use a piece of paper between the tip and target to gauge
resistance.
point.
next calibration location, the master mix tube.
Master Mix Tube Calibration

performing reference tip calibrations, select <System>,
<System Calibration>, and then <Reference Tip> from
the <Calibrate Liquid Handler> menu. Follow the
prompts to mount the reference tip, and then select
<Next> until you reach screen 7 of 9.
1. Insert the master mix tube upside down at master mix
location 1.
Figure 4.165: Master mix tube inserted upside down

200942-103—September 2007

target.
IMPORTANT: While the tube is upside down DO
! NOT select <MOVE>! Otherwise, a Drive No Load
error will occur and the instrument will have to be
reinitialized.
3. Manually raise the tube up to the bottom of the reference
tip.
4. Make X- and Y-axis adjustments as needed to center the
tip.
5. Select <Safe Move>.
is selected.
6. After the X and Y axis have been centered, select <Home>.
7. Select <Safe Move> and verify X and Y alignment. Make
adjustments as needed as described in steps 3 and 4.
8. Select <Home>.
9. Remove the master mix tube, turn it upright, and insert it
in its normal position.
Figure 4.166: Master mix tube positioned correctly
10. Select <Safe Move> and then <Move>

200942-103—September 2007
11. Adjust the Z-axis to the well bottom, making minor

adjustments to X and Y if needed so the tip is in the center
of the tube.
the bottom of the tube. Use your fingers to try and raise
the tube. There should be a very small amount of
movement (1-2 steps) in the Z direction.
Figure 4.167: Checking Z-direction movement

point.
next calibration location, the deep well and PCR plates on
the Output Deck.

200942-103—September 2007
Deep Well Plate and PCR Plate Calibration

1. Remove the deep well plate and PCR plate from the
Output Deck.
performing reference tip calibrations, select
<System>, <System Calibration>, and then
<Reference Tip> from the <Calibrate Liquid
Handler> menu. Follow the prompts to mount
the reference tip, and then select <Next> until you
reach screen 8 of 9.
target on the PCR plate, which in this case is any flat
surface on the plate, away from the dimples.
NOTE: X and Y are not particularly important for
these calibrations. The Z is the critical calibration
point.
Figure 4.168: Reference Tip Positioned on Flat Surface

is selected.
4. Select <Move>.
5. Use the arrows to align the reference tip to the target.
Adjust the X and Y directions first, followed by the Z. The
away from the dimples.

200942-103—September 2007

the surface. Use a piece of paper between the tip and
target to gauge resistance.
point.
<Move> a final time.
7. After calibrating the PCR plate, select <Next> and repeat
the above steps for the deep well plate.
8. When the PCR and deep well plates are calibrated, select
<Finish> then <Close> to return to the <System
Calibration> screen.

200942-103—September 2007
Sample Rack and Tube Configuration

Prior to calibrating the disposable tip locations, the sample
racks and tubes must be configured as described in the
following procedures.
Enabling a Rack
Sample tube size and style (spherical, conical, or flat bottom)
configurations must be set by an FSE at installation. Perform
the following steps to properly configure a system:
1. Navigate to <System>,<Settings>, and then <Sample
Rack and Tube>.
2. Select <Configure> from the <Setting Tasks> menu.
Figure 4.169: Sample Rack and Tube Configuration
The screen covers three rack types under <Rack ID>:

• 13 mm
• 16 mm
• Pierceable cap (transport tube)
For the 13 mm and 16 mm racks, customers have the
option to use the standard (<Default>) rack and tube
configurations or choose a custom setup of their own
(<User Defined>).

200942-103—September 2007
3. If the customer will be using only the standard m2000sp

rack and tube configuration, or the Pierceable Cap rack,
verify that <Default> is checked in the applicable field,
then select <Save>.
Figure 4.170: 13 mm Rack with Standard Configuration
4. To enable a custom rack, first select <User Defined> in the

applicable field (13 mm or 16 mm).
Figure 4.171: 13 mm Rack with Standard and Custom

Configurations Selected
5. Next, make a selection from the <Bottom Type> menu by

clicking on the toggle and scrolling down the list.
Figure 4.172: Bottom Type Menu
NOTE: Conical, non-cylindrical, or skirted tubes

(also referred to as false bottom or self-standing)
should not be used on the m2000sp unless
specifically approved by Abbott Molecular.
Contact Abbott Molecular GSS for assistance.

200942-103—September 2007
6. After defining the type of tube to be used, the tube’s outer

diameter must be measured and entered into the <Outer
Diameter> field.
Figure 4.173: Outer Diameter Field
NOTE: For 13 mm tubes, the outer diameter must

be between 11.5 and 14 mm. Tubes outside this
range cannot be used.
For 16 mm tubes, the outer diameter must be
between 14.5 and 16 mm. Tubes outside this range
cannot be used.
7. If a conical tube was selected under <Bottom Type>, the

bottom height will have to be determined and the
calculated value entered into the <Bottom Height> field.
Contact Abbott Molecular GSS for assistance in making
this determination.
Figure 4.174: Bottom Height Field
NOTE: The bottom heights for spherical and

flat-bottom tubes are automatically entered into
the <Bottom Height> field once the <Outer
Diameter> field is completed.

200942-103—September 2007
8. After all configurations have been made, select <Save>.

The newly enabled racks must now be calibrated. Proceed
to Calibrate Disposable Tip Locations on page 4–153.
NOTE: Recalibration is also required whenever
previously enabled racks have had their
dimensions or other parameters changed.
After calibration is complete, run the LiHa Sample Tube
Check on page 5–14 of Section 5.
9. Attach the correct PoSt and label to each enabled rack,
ensuring the bar code faces the rear of the instrument.
Table 4.6: Sample Rack Bar Code Labels
Sample Rack Bar Code PoSt Label Color

13mm (blue insert) 013/xxxxxx Blue
16mm 016/xxxxxx White
Pierceable cap 513/xxxxxx Red
Custom 13 mm 713/xxxxxx Blue with an orange
stripe
Custom 16 mm 716/xxxxxx White with an
orange stripe
Disabling a Rack
To disable a previously enabled rack, deselect its check box
under <Rack Enable> and select <Yes> at the prompt.
Figure 4.175: Check Boxes
NOTE: Once a rack is disabled, the calibration for that

rack will be lost, even if it is later re-enabled.
Calibration will be required to regain valid status if the
rack is re-enabled.

200942-103—September 2007
Calibrate Disposable Tip Locations

During these procedures, the LiHa will be moved to each of
the sample input racks used on the system and aligned with
the tube in position 1 of each rack.
Before performing calibrations with DiTis, the system must
have an accurate understanding of the DiTi racks present on
the worktable. The <Disposable Tip Status> display, found
under the <System> menu, shows the system’s understanding
of the DiTis remaining on the shelves and worktable after each
run.
NOTE: The information displayed here is NOT the
result of specific inventory sensors. It is a reflection of
the system’s memory of what tips it has used to this
point.
If the tip status is not updated after additions are made,
the system will not recognize the DiTi racks that were
added and, as a result, will bypass them during the next
run.
Any time DiTi racks are added to the worktable or shelves, it
will be necessary to update the system by selecting one of the
options under <Update>.
Figure 4.176: <Update> Menu Options

200942-103—September 2007
1. Perform the following steps (as applicable to your system)

to set up the worktable for DiTi location calibrations:
• Ensure there is at least a partially full rack of 1000 µL
DiTis on DiTi rack carrier 1, location 1 or 2, and that
the <Disposable Tip Status> screen reflects what is
physically present on the worktable.
• Load a 13 mm sample rack with a single sample tube
in position 1 and place the rack in grid position 2
NOTE: If the customer will be using both default
and custom tubes, load the default rack first and
run the procedure, then, at the screen prompt
switch out the racks. This applies to all tube sizes.
• Load a 16 mm sample rack with a single sample tube
(default first) in position 1 and place the rack in grid
position 3
• Load a transport tube (pierceable cap) rack with a
single sample tube (with the cap removed) in position
1 and place it in grid position 4
IMPORTANT: For each sized tube above, the
! largest round-bottom tube used by the customer
should be used here.
Calibration>.
3. Select <Disposable Tip> from the <Calibrate Liquid
4. At the prompt, select <Close> to allow the LiHa to move

and the system to stake a DiTi on LiHa tip 3.

200942-103—September 2007
5. For each location, select <Safe Move> to align LiHa tip 3

with the calibration target.
6. Align the tip adapter in the X and Y direction using the
is selected.
7. Select <Move>.
8. Use the arrows to align the DiTi to the target. Adjust the X
and Y directions first, followed by the Z. The <Move>
button will need to be selected after each change to
express the new coordinates and to save them.
In the X and Y directions, the tip should be centered in
the tube.
In the Z direction, the tip should barely touch the bottom
of the tube. Use your fingers to try and raise the tube.
There should be a very small amount of movement (1-2
steps) in the Z direction.
Figure 4.178: Checking Z-direction Movement

point.

200942-103—September 2007

next location.
10. After calibrating the first tube type, repeat the above steps
for all remaining tubes.
11. When all tubes are calibrated, select <Finish> then

200942-103—September 2007
Section 4 RoMa Calibrations
RoMa Calibrations
The left-side <Calibrate Robotic Manipulator> menu offers
three calibration options:
• 1 mL Subsystem Calibration, found on page 4–158
• Disposable Tip Rack Calibration, found on page 4–161
• Shelf Calibration, found on page 4–165
To access m2000sp calibration commands, go to <System>

then <System Calibration>.
Figure 4.179: System Calibration Status Screen
WARNING: Potential Biohazard. If calibrations

are performed at any time other than installation,
instrument parts might be contaminated with
potentially infectious materials. Observe basic
biohazard precautions. Wear appropriate personal
Password Protection: These procedures are
exclusively for FSEs and require use of the
NOTE: Additional calibrations may need to be
completed. See appropriate TSBs.
At the completion of RoMa calibrations, verification

procedures must be performed. Refer to Calibration
Verifications on page 4–167.

200942-103—September 2007
1 mL Subsystem Calibration
For each calibration point, the RoMa gripper arms will be
properly aligned with the 1 mL Subsystem carrier.
IMPORTANT: It should NOT be necessary to
! adjust the Y-axis value during RoMa calibration.
Adjusting the Y value in one location might affect
the value at all locations. Therefore, if a Y change
is made in one location, the same change must be
made in all locations.
NOTE: The gripper open distance should be
adjusted minimally. These values will be less than
those seen in m2000sp Software Version 1.1 in
order to accommodate 96 sample processing.
1. Load a 1 mL Subsystem carrier with RVs, install the cover,
and place the carrier in the target area, beginning with
heater zone 1 and moving from location to location as
directed by the on-screen prompts.
The carrier must contain RVs so that deflection can be
observed if it occurs.
Calibration>.
3. Select <1 mL Subsystem> from the <Calibrate Robotic
Manipulator> menu on the left side of the screen. The
<Robotic Manipulator Calibration> screen displays.
Figure 4.180: Robotic Manipulator Calibration Screen

200942-103—September 2007
5. Adjust the RoMa arms in the X direction only using the

NOTE: The RoMa will not move until <Safe
Move> is selected.
6. Select <Move>.
7. Use the arrows in the X and Z positions to align the RoMa
arms with the carrier. X should be adjusted first, then Z.
The <Move> button will need to be selected after each
change to express the new coordinates and to save them.
The goal is to have the RoMa gripper arms positioned just
below the lip on the sides of the carrier, and properly
centered on both sides.
Figure 4.181: RoMa Gripper Properly Positioned
8. Select <Home>, then <Safe Move>, then <Move>.

9. To verify the position, use the <Grip> button to grip the
carrier and the <Raise / Lower> button to observe any
deflection of the RVs. Select <Release> once the carrier has
been lowered.
NOTE: <Release> and <Lower> do not appear as
options until <Grip> or <Raise> are selected.
10. Repeat the alignment if necessary.
11. Once the adjustments are complete, select <Move> a final
time to save the coordinates, and then <Next> to move to
the next 1 mL Subsystem location.

200942-103—September 2007
12. After all locations have been calibrated, select <Finish>

then <Close> to return to the <System Calibration>
screen.

200942-103—September 2007
Disposable Tip Rack Calibration

DiTi rack calibration is a two-step process. The first step is for Z
and the second step is for X and Y.
1. Perform the following steps to prepare the worktable:
• Remove DiTi carrier 2 from grids 27-32, and remove
the reagent carriers from grids 33-34
• Remove both DiTi racks from DiTi carrier 1, but leave
the carrier in place on grids 21-26
Calibration>.
3. Select <Disposable Tip Racks> from the <Calibrate
Robotic Manipulator> menu on the left side of the
screen. The <Robotic Manipulator Calibration> screen
displays.

5. Adjust the RoMa arms in the Z direction only using the
Move> is selected.
6. Select <Move>.

200942-103—September 2007
7. Use the arrows in the Z position to align the RoMa arms

with the carrier surface. The <Move> button will need to
be selected after each change to express the new
The goal is to have the bottom of the gripper pads just
touch the surface of the carrier.
NOTE: Position 1 might be difficult to see because
one pad will be on the rounded edge. If necessary,
use the value for Position 2.
Figure 4.183: RoMa Gripper Aligned with Surface

the next position.
12. Place a 1000 µL DiTi rack in the back position of DiTi
carrier 1.

200942-103—September 2007
13. Use the arrows in the X and Y positions to align the RoMa
arms with the rack. The <Move> button will need to be
selected after each change to express the new coordinates
and to save them.
The goal is to have the RoMa gripper arms positioned just
below the lip on the sides of the carrier, and properly
centered on both sides. In the Y-axis, the gripper pins
should be equidistant to the sides of the DiTi rack and
should just touch the end of the rack.
Figure 4.184: RoMa Gripper Aligned with Rack

15. To verify the position, use the <Grip> button to grip the
carrier and the <Raise / Lower> button to observe the
movement. Select <Release> once the carrier has been
lowered.
NOTE: <Release> and <Lower> do not appear as
options until <Grip> or <Raise> are selected.
16. Repeat the alignment if necessary. Once the adjustments
are complete, select <Move> a final time to save the
coordinates, and then <Next> to move to the next
position.
17. Remove the DiTi rack from the carrier and repeat the
above steps for the carrier’s middle position.

200942-103—September 2007
18. After all locations have been calibrated, select <Finish>

then <Close> to return to the <System Calibration>
screen.

200942-103—September 2007
Shelf Calibration
For each calibration point, the RoMa gripper arms will be
properly aligned with the shelf rack positions.
1. Load a 1000 µL DiTi rack on DiTi shelf 8. Push the rack in
until it just hits the rise at the rear of the shelf.
IMPORTANT: Ensure that the rack is NOT aligned
! with the front edge of the shelf.
Calibration>.
3. Select <Shelves> from the <Calibrate Robotic
Manipulator> menu on the left side of the screen. The
<Robotic Manipulator Calibration> screen displays.

5. Adjust the RoMa arms in the X and Y directions using the
Move> is selected.
6. Select <Move>.

200942-103—September 2007
7. Use the arrows in the X, Y, and Z positions to align the

RoMa arms with the shelf. X and Y should be adjusted
first, then Z. The <Move> button will need to be selected
after each change to express the new coordinates and to
save them.
The goal is to have the RoMa gripper arms centered on
both sides of the rack and just making contact with the
surface of the shelf. The gripper pins should just touch
the end of the DiTi rack.
Figure 4.186: RoMa Gripper Properly Positioned on Shelf 8

the next shelf.
IMPORTANT: Be consistent across the shelf
! calibrations. Make adjustments as necessary based
on the RoMa DiTi Rack Test on page 5–27 and
RoMa DiTi Shelf Test on page 5–29 of Section 5,
Maintenance and Diagnostic Procedures.
11. After all shelves have been calibrated, select <Finish> then

200942-103—September 2007
Section 4 Calibration Verifications
Calibration Verifications
M&D Procedures
To verify all LiHa and RoMa calibrations the following M&D
Procedures should be performed:
• Extensive Flush on page 5–10
• Dispense Test 50 µL, Gravimetric on page 5–23
• LiHa DiTi Location Test on page 5–12
• LiHa Sample Tube Check on page 5–14
• DiTi Rack Checks – Deck and Shelf
– RoMa DiTi Rack Test on page 5–27
– RoMa DiTi Shelf Test on page 5–29
• RoMa 1 mL Carrier Test on page 5–30
• Sample Extraction Test on page 5–37
• Z-Calibration Checks
– Z-Calibration Check – Sample Extraction on page
5–40
– Z-Calibration Check – Master Mix on page 5–45
All M&D procedures can be found in Section 5, Maintenance
and Diagnostic Procedures.
Print Calibrations Report

After all M&D verifications have passed, print and keep copies
of the Liquid Handler and Robotic Manipulator reports found
under the <Print Report> menu located on the lower-left side
of the main calibration page, <System Calibration Status>.
IMPORTANT: The RoMa gripper calibration
! coordinates are incorrect in this report. If the G-axis is
altered in any way during calibration, the FSE must
write the new coordinates on the printed report.

200942-103—September 2007
Network Configuration
Install the Router
IMPORTANT: For AbbottLink router installation, refer
! to the latest revision of the AbbottLink ISA.
Perform the following steps to install the router:
Rename the SCC

For each SCC to be connected to the router:
1. From the m2000sp or m2000rt menu, navigate to
<System><Explorer>.
2. Navigate to and highlight <My Computer>
3. Right click and select <Properties>
4. Navigate to the <Computer Name> tab
5. Select the <Change...> button. The Computer Name
Changes dialog will appear.
6. In the <Computer name> field, enter the following:
a. m2000sp-1 for m2000sp SCC #1
b. m2000sp-2 for m2000sp SCC #2
c. m2000sp-3 for m2000sp SCC #3
d. m2000sp-4 for m2000sp SCC #4
e. m2000rt-1 for m2000rt SCC #1
f. m2000rt-2 for m2000rt SCC #2
g. m2000rt-3 for m2000rt SCC #3
h. m2000rt-4 for m2000rt SCC #4
7. Select <Ok>, <Ok>, <Ok>.
8. A System Settings Change dialog will appear. Select <No>
to reboot the SCC.
9. Another dialog will appear asking if you wish to exit the
application. Select <Yes>.

200942-103—September 2007
Section 4 Network Configuration
Router Configuration
Figure 4.187: Router
1. Power off the SCC to each system that is to be connected

to the router.
2. Connect one end of an RJ-45 cable into the Ethernet
connection on SCC #1 (first system) and the other end
into LAN port 1 on the router.
LAN ports 4 3 2 1
Figure 4.188: Router LAN ports 4 though 1
3. Connect each additional instrument into the remaining

ports (2, 3 and 4)
4. Connect the power cable to the hardware router and
power up the router.
5. Power on all SCCs connected to the router.

200942-103—September 2007
Network Configuration Screen

Regardless of the method of network connection (crossover
cable, router, etc.), the network connection will need to be
configured after the connection is established. From the
<System Settings> menu, select <Network Configuration>
then <Configure>.
Figure 4.189: Network Configuration screen
If no network connection will be used, select <No network

connection (export via CD only)> if it is not already chosen.
If a network connection is to be used, choose one of the
following options:
• <Send to m2000rt via crossover cable>, which allows the
instrument to be connected directly to one m2000rt via a
crossover cable; the exported Test Orders are stored on the
connected m2000rt system. Proceed to Crossover Cable on
page 4–171.
• <Send to m2000rt2.0 via network connection>, which
allows the instrument to be connected directly to one
m2000rt with release 2.0 via a network connection; the
exported Test Orders are stored on the connected m2000rt
system. Proceed to Connect with m2000rt 2.0 on page
4–171.

200942-103—September 2007
Section 4 Network Configuration
• <Send to network data store>, which allows the

instrument and other m2000sps to be connected to one or
more m2000rts in a multi-instrument network; the
exported Test Orders are stored on any of the connected
systems in the network or on an AbbottLink computer, if
available. Proceed to Network Data Store on page 4–171.
NOTE: The Network Data Store option is only
available with an m2000rt system with release 2.1
software.
Crossover Cable
1. Enter “m2000rt-1” as the workgroup name.
2. Test the configured connection by selecting the <Test>
button.
3. Select <Save>.
Connect with m2000rt 2.0

1. Enter “m2000rt-1” as the IP address.
button.
3. Select <Save>.
Network Data Store

For this option, both the m2000sp and m2000rt systems will
need to be configured.
On the m2000sp:
1. Enter the IP address of the m2000rt, m2000sp, or
Abbottlink computer that will be used as the Network
Data Store.
To find the IP address, do the following:
• For the m2000rt, navigate to the <Serial Number
Configuration> screen.
• For the m2000sp, navigate to the <Hardware
• For an Abbottlink computer, refer to the Abbottlink or
Router Installation Survey.
button.

200942-103—September 2007
3. Select <Save>.
On the m2000rt systems:
1. Navigate to the <System><Settings><Network
Figure 4.190:m2000rt Network Configuration screen
2. Select the <Get from network data store> option.

3. Enter the IP Address that was entered above for the
m2000sp systems.
4. Select <Test>.

200942-103—September 2007
Section 4 Database Management
Database Management
There are six backup options provided on the <Database
Management> menu:
• Full backup, which combines the System Database and
System Calibrations options, and includes all system data
• System Database only, which includes all database
information (including result information)
• System Calibrations only, which includes all data related
to LiHa and RoMa calibrations
• Configuration Files, which includes only system
configuration data
• System Logs, which include all log files except those from
Genesis
• Calibration Data, which only includes absolute
coordinates of previous calibrations
NOTE: All six categories can be backed up on a
CD; however, only the first three (Full, System
Database, and System Calibration) can be restored.
The last three options are backed up for
troubleshooting purposes only.
System File Backup

1. To perform a file backup within the m2000sp software, log
in as an FSE.
2. Navigate to <System>, <Database Management>.
Figure 4.191:<Database Management> Screen
3. Highlight a backup option and select <Backup> from the

<Database Management Tasks> menu.

200942-103—September 2007
The <Perform System Backup> screen displays, giving

you the option to enter a comment if you choose.
4. Load a blank CD into the CD drive. Then select <Start>.
Figure 4.192:Backup
5. Leave a copy of the backup CD at the site in the front

pocket of the m2000sp Operations Manual.
System File Restore

The m2000sp system offers the following restore options:
• Full
• System Database
• System Calibrations
NOTE: The remaining backup options (Configuration
Files, System Logs, and Calibration Data) cannot be
restored. They are backed up for troubleshooting only.
To restore a system file, do the following:

1. Insert the CD containing the files to be restored.
NOTE: The CD must be in the drive and the CD
light off prior to selecting <Restore>.
2. Wait until the drive finishes spinning (approximately 12
seconds).

200942-103—September 2007
Section 4 Database Management
3. Select <Restore> from the <Database Management

Tasks> menu.
Figure 4.193: System Restore Display
4. Highlight the backup files in the <Select Backup> field

and select <Start>.
NOTE: Here, the previous backup dictates what is
restored. For example, if you did a Full backup, the
restore would do a Full restore, even if you select
System Calibrations only.
NOTE: The RAD945 system has timing issues with
system restore functions.
If you experience problems, such as system lockup
or a big red X on the backup listing screen, reboot
the SCC and retry the restore.

200942-103—September 2007
On-line Documentation
Load the on-line documentation after downloading all
necessary files from the GSS website’s Software Update page.

200942-103—September 2007
Section 4 System Settings
System Settings
To access the <System Settings> menu, select <System> then
<Settings>. This menu offers ten possible options:
• Hardware Configuration. Refer to Hardware
Configuration on page 4–44.
• Audible Alert
• Time and Date
• Sample Bar Code
• Sample Rack and Tube. Refer to Sample Rack and Tube
• Run Checks
• Signal Tower
• Language and Locale
• Network Configuration. Refer to Network Configuration
Screen on page 4–170.
• Automatic Export
NOTE: The Signal Tower option will appear only if that

device has been enabled by the FSE on the <Hardware
Configuration> screen. Refer to Hardware
Audible Alert
NOTE: The following procedure can also be performed
by customers.
This screen allows the user to:
• enable or disable the audible alert when an alert
dialog is generated
• choose a sound scheme
• adjust the volume for operator notifications

200942-103—September 2007
1. To configure the audible alert, highlight <Audible Alert>

on the <System Settings> screen and then, from the task
menu, select <Configure>.
2. On the <Audible Alert Configuration> screen, select a
sound scheme for each message type to be enabled:
• <Error>
• <Warning>
• <Information>
To disable a sound scheme, choose <none> from the
respective message type’s dropdown menu.
Click here to reveal

the dropdown menu
Click here to hear

the sound sample
Select [none] to disable

sound for this message
Figure 4.194:Choosing a sound scheme
NOTE: Refer to the ISA database for instructions

regarding customer-desired custom sound schemes.
3. Select <Test> to hear the selected sound scheme.
4. Choose the volume level desired by using the arrows on
the <Volume> toggle at the top of the screen. The volume
setting can be verified by clicking <Test>.

200942-103—September 2007
Figure 4.195:<Audible Alert Configuration> Display
NOTE: The volume on the monitor may also need

to be adjusted.
NOTE: Contact your Abbott Representative if
external speakers are desired.
5. Click <Save> when finished.
Time and Date

by customers with administrator access.
To set the correct time and date, and time zone select
<Settings> from the <System> menu, highlight <Time and
Date>, and choose <Configure> from the <Setting Tasks>
menu.
Figure 4.196:<Time and Date Configuration>

200942-103—September 2007
To Set Time and Date

Select the desired field, and then use the toggle at the right to
move the setting up or down as necessary. Click <Save> when
finished.
Figure 4.197: Setting Time and Date
NOTE: Daylight savings settings are configured by the

FSE as part of the Installation TSB.
If you have not already configured for daylight savings,
select <System>, <Explorer>,<My Computer>, and
<Control Panel>. Then:
1.Select <Date, Time, Language, and Regional
Options> and then <Date and Time> from the
control panel icon list.
2.Select the <Time Zone> tab and select or deselect
<Automatically adjust clock for daylight savings
changes> per the locale.
NOTE: The date and time formats can be changed to
meet regional preferences. See Language and Locale on
page 4–188.

200942-103—September 2007
To Select a Time Zone

Click on the dropdown menu arrow at the end of the <System
Time Zone> field to reveal the list of choices.
Dropdown menu
arrow
Figure 4.198:Setting the Time Zone
Scroll up or down, as needed, and select the desired time zone.

Click <Save> when finished.

200942-103—September 2007
Sample Bar Code

The m2000sp can be configured to read several different types
of sample bar code labels. These include the following
symbologies:
Table 4.7: Bar Code Symbologies
Symbology Editable Parameters

Interleaved 2 of 5 • Length (2-20 characters bar code
length)
• Use and transmission of Checksum
Code 39 Use and transmission of Checksum
UPCA Use and transmission of Checksum
Codabar • Use and transmission of Checksum
• Use and transmission of Start/Stop
characters
Code 128 Not editable
Code 93 Not editable
To configure a bar code:

1. Select <Settings> from the <System> menu. Then,
highlight <Sample Bar code> and choose <Configure>
from the <Setting Tasks> menu.
The <Bar Code Configuration> screen displays.
Figure 4.199:<Bar Code Configuration> Screen
2. Configure the length (Interleaved 2 of 5, 2 - 20 even) by

editing the number in the length column.
3. Configure the Checksum by using the dropdown menu
and selecting:
• Off (no Checksums)

200942-103—September 2007
• On with transmit (Checksum in bar code transmitted,

or sent, to SCC for display)
• On without transmit (Checksum in bar code but not
sent to SCC)
Figure 4.200:Bar Code Configuration Checksum
NOTE: If Checksum for UPCA is set to <Off>, the

system will ignore this setting.
4. Configure the Start/Stop by using the dropdown menu
and selecting:
• Off
• On with transmit (start and stop characters used in
bar code and sent to SCC for display)
• On without transmit (start and stop characters used in
bar code but not sent to SCC for display)
Figure 4.201:Bar Code Configuration Start/Stop
NOTE: Codabar start/stop characters are always on.

“Off” is the same as “on without transmit.”
5. When configuration is complete, select <Save>.

200942-103—September 2007
Sample Racks and Tubes

Sample tube size and style can be configured by selecting
<Sample Rack and Tube> from the <System> menu, and
choosing <Configure> from the <Setting Tasks> menu. Refer
to Sample Rack and Tube Configuration on page 4–149.
Run Checks
FSEs can enable or disable m2000sp run checks by selecting
<Settings> from the <System> menu, highlighting <Run
Checks>, and choosing <Configure> from the <Setting
Tasks> menu.
Figure 4.202: <Run Checks Configuration> Display
These checks are used to verify the correct placement of racks,

plates, and carriers, and the volume of sample preparation
reagents prior to beginning a run.
IMPORTANT: If these checks are disabled during
! installation, be sure to re-enable them before leaving
unless the customer specifically asks that they remain
disabled.

200942-103—September 2007
FSEs can enable or disable the following Sample Extraction

checks:
• <Check for sufficient volume of Sample Preparation
Reagents>
Checks the minimum and/or maximum required fill
volume of each reagent vessel, as configured by the
application specification that is running and the number
of samples being processed. If there is too little or too
much volume, the fill volume must be corrected prior to
continuing with the run.
• <Check for 1 mL Subsystem Carriers in correct
positions in the 1 mL Subsystem>
Checks the placement of one or both 1 mL Subsystem
carriers and all empty locations. Carriers must be in the
correct locations prior to continuing the run (refer to the
<Worktable Setup> screen).
• <Check for the presence of Deep Well Plate on the
Output Deck>
Checks for the presence of the deep well plate on the
Output Deck. A warning is given if the check fails. The
user must then manually verify the plate is in position.
• <Check that Shelf Location 1 does not contain a
Disposable Tip Rack>
Checks that no DiTi rack is present in shelf location 1.
This shelf must be empty before the run can proceed.
Master Mix Addition check options are as follows:

• <Check for the presence of Deep Well Plate on the
Output Deck>
Checks for the presence of the deep well plate on the
Output Deck. A warning is given if the check fails. The
user must then manually verify the plate is in position.
• <Check for the presence of PCR Plate on the Output
Deck>
Checks for the presence of the PCR plate on the Output
Deck. A warning is given if the check fails. The user must
then manually verify the plate is in position.

200942-103—September 2007
• <Check that Shelf Location 1 does not contain a

Disposable Tip Rack>
Checks that no DiTi rack is present in shelf location 1.
This shelf must be empty before the run can proceed.
When checks are disabled a message is sent to the Message Log

indicating such.
Signal Tower
The <Signal Tower> screen appears as an option on the
<Settings> menu for hooded instruments only.
The signal tower, which includes a red, a yellow, and a green
lamp, is designed to light up in a unique way for each of the
following five states:
• <Idle>: the instrument is ready
• <Running>: a run is in progress
• <Paused>: an instrument function was paused
• <Run Completed Successfully>: the run has finished
• <Run Failure>: the run has failed
The default signal tower configuration (i.e., what color

signifies what state) can be changed by doing the following:
1. Select <Signal Tower> from the <System Settings> menu,
and then select <Configure> from the <System Tasks>
menu.
2. The <Signal Tower Configuration> screen is divided into

five grids representing each of the five states listed above.

200942-103—September 2007
Each grid is divided into three color menus featuring the

following choices:
• <Off>: that lamp color will not light up in the selected
state
• <On>: that lamp color will light up in the selected
state
• <Blinking>: that lamp color will blink on and off in
the selected state
To make changes, click on the choice desired for each
color.
3. To see the signal tower display the new setting, click the
<Test> button for that state.
4. Select <Save> after all changes have been made.

200942-103—September 2007
Language and Locale

Figure 4.203:<Language and Locale> screen
On the <Language and Locale> screen, the following settings

can be changed to meet regional preferences:
NOTE: The <Language> field cannot be changed.
• <Input Language>, which determines what regional

keyboard layout will be used with the system
• <Document Language>, which determines what
language the on-line documentation (e.g., the m2000sp
Operations Manual) will display in when accessed
through the <Help> menu
• <Locale>, which determines:
– how numeric data are presented in reports and screens
– how the date and time is displayed and entered for
expiration dates

200942-103—September 2007
To make changes, first select <Settings> from the <System>

menu, highlight <Language and Locale>, and choose
<Configure> from the <Setting Tasks> menu.
IMPORTANT: Changes to the Language and Locale
! affect the keyboard and display within the m2000sp
application only. In S&S, Explorer, etc., the keyboard
and displays will act and appear as they would right out
of the box regardless of what Language and Locale
setting is chosen.
To Change <Input Language>

Changing the keyboard preference is a two-part process:
• Changing the preference on the SCC
• Installing the new keyboard
Changing the Preference on the SCC

1. On the <Language and Locale> page, go to the <Input
Language> field and click on the dropdown menu to
select a keyboard layout preference.
Figure 4.204:<Input Language> Field
2. Select <Save>.
Installing the New Keyboard

1. Unplug the original keyboard from the back of the
computer.
2. Plug the new keyboard into the back of the computer, but
be careful not to disturb the other cables.
NOTE: If a handheld bar code reader is installed,
plug it into the new keyboard.
NOTE: Contact your Area Abbott Customer
Service for a list of supported keyboards.

200942-103—September 2007
To Change <Document Language>

1. If you have not already done so, install the applicable
translated document versions found on the GSS website’s
Software Updates page.
2. On the <Language and Locale> page, go to the
<Document Language> field and click on the dropdown
menu to select a language preference for the on-line
documentation, such as the m2000sp Operations
Manual.
Figure 4.205:<Document Language> Field
3. Select <Save>.
To Change <Locale>
1. On the <Language and Locale> page, go to the <Locale>
field and click on the dropdown menu to select a regional
display preference.
2. Scroll down the list and make the selection that best fits
your preferences.
Figure 4.206:Choose a preference

200942-103—September 2007
3. The <Examples> section below the dropdown menu will

show examples of how dates, times, and numerical data
will be depicted in the m2000sp Software.
Figure 4.207:Examples of New Formats
If these new formats are acceptable, and if all other

changes have been made to the settings on this screen,
select <Save>.
NOTE: Changes made to the <Locale> setting
require a system restart to implement. It is best to
make all desired changes to the other settings on
the <Language and Locale> screen before
selecting <Save> here.
4. A message displays explaining that the change requires a
system restart. Select <Yes>.
After the system restarts, the date and time will be
displayed in the new format.
Figure 4.208:Reformatted Date and Time Display
The on-line documents, found under the <Help>,

<Online Documentation> menu, will now appear in the
language selected if it has been loaded onto the system by
the FSE.

200942-103—September 2007
Network Configuration
Refer to Network Configuration on page 4–168.
Automatic Export
If a network or crossover cable connection was configured
during installation, customers with Administrator access can
choose to have Test Order results exported automatically on
the <Automatic Export> page.
1. To enable or disable automatic exporting, select
<Settings> from the <System> menu, highlight
<Automatic Export>, and choose <Configure> from the
<Setting Tasks> menu.
Figure 4.209:<Automatic Export Configuration> screen
2. On the <Automatic Export Configuration> screen, select

one or all of the following export options:
• <Sample Extraction Open Mode> for Sample
Extraction open mode; deep well plate data will be
transferred at the end of a successful open-mode
Sample Extraction run
• <Master Mix Addition Open Mode> for reagent
addition open mode; PCR plate data will be
transferred after a successful Master Mix Addition run
• <Master Mix Addition Closed Mode> for reagent
addition closed mode; PCR plate data will be
transferred after a successful Master Mix Addition run
3. When finished, select <Save>.

200942-103—September 2007
NOTE: Results can still be manually transferred via CD

at any time.

200942-103—September 2007
NOTES

200942-103—September 2007
Section 5: Maintenance and Diagnostic Procedures
SECTION 5:
MAINTENANCE AND
DIAGNOSTIC
PROCEDURES

2000942-103—September 2007
Maintenance and Diagnostic Procedures Section 5
NOTES

2000942-103—September 2007
Table of Contents
TOC
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Pausing/Resuming/Stopping a Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Daily Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Flushes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Simple Flush . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Extensive Flush . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
LiHa Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
LiHa DiTi Location Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
LiHa Sample Tube Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
LiHa Output Deck Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
1 mL Subsystem Alignment Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
Dispense Test 50 µL, Visual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
Dispense Test 50 µL, Gravimetric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
Dispense Test 800 µL, Visual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
Dispense Test 800 µL, Gravimetric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
RoMa Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
RoMa DiTi Rack Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
RoMa DiTi Shelf Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29
RoMa 1 mL Carrier Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
System Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32
LiHa Output Test - Sample Extraction . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32
LiHa Output Test - Master Mix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35
Sample Extraction Test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37
Z-Calibration Check – Sample Extraction . . . . . . . . . . 5-40
Z-Calibration Check – Master Mix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-45
RNA Simulation Test – Sample Extraction . . . . . . . . . . 5-47
RNA Simulation Test – Master Mix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-50
Other Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-52
Chiller and Heater Temperature Check . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-52
Ethanol LLS Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-54
LiHa Sample Volume Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-56

200942-103—September 2007

This section provides information for using the Maintenance
and Diagnostics (M&D) functions within the m2000sp
software, including an overview of each function and
directions for use.
WARNING: Chemical Hazard. The FSE or operator
minimized by observing instructions provided in
protective eyewear.
WARNING: Class II Laser Product. Identifies a Class 2

against direct viewing of the bar code laser beam or
WARNING: Electrical Shock Hazard: Possible danger
rating.

2000942-103—September 2007
Section 5 Overview
Overview
M&D procedures for use in troubleshooting and confirmation
of setup by FSEs are found under one of the following two
menus:
• Maintenance Procedures, found under the System menu
• Sample Extraction, found under the Orders menu
The following table indicates which M&D procedures are
found under which menu.
Table 5.1: M&D Menu Locations
Menu Protocol Name

• m2000sp Simple Flush
• m2000sp Extensive Flush
• m2000sp Instrument Daily Maintenance
• LiHa DiTi Location Test
Maintenance Procedures
• RoMa DiTi Rack Test
• RoMa DiTi Shelf Test
• RoMa 1 mL Carrier Test
• Chiller and Heater Temperature Check
• LiHa Output Deck Test (Alignment)
• 1 mL Subsystem Alignment Check
• 50 µL Dispense Tests
• 800 µL Dispense Tests
• LiHa Sample Tube Check
• LiHa Output Test
Sample Extraction
• Sample Extraction Test
• Pierceable Cap Rack Test
• Diagnostic - Z-Calibration Check
• RNA Simulation Tests
• Ethanol LLS Check
• LiHa Sample Volume Checks
When a problem is discovered during any M&D procedure, try

recalibrating the location. (Refer to LiHa Calibrations on page
4–134 and RoMa Calibrations on page 4–157 of Section 4,
Installation.)
If that does not solve the problem, proceed to Section 7,
Troubleshooting, and find the section relevant to the problem.

200942-103—September 2007
Pausing/Resuming/Stopping a Process
To pause a process, select <Pause> or <Immediate Pause>
from the left-hand menu. At the prompt, select <Yes>.
Figure 5.1: Pause a Process
The <Pause> option stops an in-process application run as

soon as the instrument reaches the next pipetting step
(homing the LiHa and RoMa), allowing the user to update the
disposable tip status, if necessary. The <Immediate Pause>
option instantly stops the instrument, regardless of what
activity is being performed or what stage the run is in.
To resume a process, select <Resume> from the left-hand
menu. At the prompt, select <Yes>.
Figure 5.2: Resume a Process

2000942-103—September 2007
Section 5 Overview
To stop a process, select <Stop Process> from the left-hand

menu. At the prompt, select <Yes>.
Figure 5.3: Stop a Process
At the stop request prompt, select <Close>.
Figure 5.4: Stop Request Prompt
At the <Process Aborted> prompt, select <Close>.
Figure 5.5: Process Aborted Prompt

200942-103—September 2007
At the <Process Completed> prompt, select <Close>.
Figure 5.6: Process Completed Prompt
At the prompt, select <Yes>.
Figure 5.7: Close the Process

2000942-103—September 2007
Section 5 Daily Maintenance
Daily Maintenance
There are four process steps in Daily Maintenance.
• Tighten the liquid handling components

• Clean the m2000sp components
• Check containers in the cabinet
• System flush
See the m2000sp Operations Manual, Section 9, Service and

Maintenance, for more information.

200942-103—September 2007
Flushes
Simple Flush
The <Simple Flush> purge might be required when:
• Isolated bubbles are found in the tubing between 3-way
valves and DiTi cones
• System sits idle for a few hours between runs
• Any LiHa component between the 3-way valve and DiTi
cone has been reassembled for replacement, calibration, or
check
1. To perform the <Simple Flush>, close the safety door.

2. When the system is in the READY state, from the menu
select <System> then <Maintenance Procedures>.
3. Select <m2000sp Simple Flush> from the <Maintenance
Procedures> section.
4. Select <Set up Run> from the <Maintenance Tasks>
menu.
5. The <Maintenance Procedure: Run Start> screen
displays. Select <Start>.
6. The system will perform the flush with the use of the Fast
Wash (FaWa) pump and syringes.
7. When prompted that the procedure has completed
successfully, select <Close Process> from the <Process
Tasks> menu.
Extensive Flush
The <Extensive Flush> purge might be required when:
• System is first set up
• When system fluid is refilled (outside of Daily
Maintenance)
• Any component within the fluid handling system has
been reassembled for maintenance, replacement,
calibration or check (e.g., replacing the system liquid)
• Special flush is performed using a cleaning solution

2000942-103—September 2007
Section 5 Flushes
1. To perform the <Extensive Flush>, close the safety door

2. When the system is in the READY state, from the menu
select <System> then <Maintenance Procedures>
3. Select <m2000sp Extensive Flush> from the
<Maintenance Procedures> section
4. Select <Set Up Run> from the <Maintenance Tasks>
menu
5. The <Maintenance Procedure: Run Start> screen
displays. Select <Start>
6. The system will perform the flush with the use of the
FaWa pump and syringes
7. When prompted that the procedure has completed
successfully, select <Close Process> from the <Process
Tasks> menu

200942-103—September 2007
LiHa Checks
LiHa DiTi Location Test
Purpose
During this test, the LiHa will pick up and eject tips, allowing
the user to visually check the alignment of the DiTi cones with
the DiTis underneath.
Actions
As you run this procedure, be sure to:
• Check X and Y alignment of the tips in each position
After the procedure:
• Adjust X and Y alignment in the DiTi racks and reuse racks
as needed
Procedure
• Load two 1000 µL DiTi racks with empty DiTi trays on
DiTi rack carrier 1
• Load two 200 µL DiTi racks with empty DiTi trays on
DiTi rack carrier 2
• Load empty DiTi trays and deep well plates in the DiTi
reuse racks on both DiTi rack carriers
• Fill column 1 and column 12 of all six DiTi trays with
DiTis in appropriate sizes, as shown below.
Figure 5.8: LiHa DiTi Location Test DiTi Carrier Setup

2000942-103—September 2007
Section 5 LiHa Checks
2. Select <System> then <Maintenance Procedures>, or

select the Maintenance Procedure icon.
3. Select <LiHa DiTi Location Test> from the
<Maintenance Procedures> screen and select <Set Up
Run> from the <Maintenance Tasks> menu.
4. When the worktable has been loaded, close the door and
select <Start> to begin the test.
5. The LiHa will stake and eject DiTis from the selected
columns. After doing this at each column, the LiHa will
pause briefly above the DiTis in the tray. Check the
alignment of the DiTi cones with the DiTis underneath.
When the LiHa has completed its check of a specific tray,
it will stop above it, and a message indicating this will
appear. Select <Close> to close the message box and then
select <Resume> from the <Process Tasks> menu.
At each of the DiTi reuse racks, the LiHa will attempt to
pick up DiTis twice at column 6, with a pause at each
attempt. Check the alignment of the DiTi cones in the
empty columns.
6. If a problem is observed, select <Stop Process> to abort the
test. Otherwise, select <Resume> to continue the test.
7. The test will end automatically after checking all six DiTi
racks.
8. When the process is completed, select <Close>, then
<Close> again to clear the message boxes.
9. Select <Close Process> from the side panel to close the
test, and confirm with <Yes>.

200942-103—September 2007
LiHa Sample Tube Check
Purpose
During this test, the DiTi locations at the input sample tubes
will be visually verified.
Actions
• Check X and Y alignment of the tips in each position: the
tips should be more or less centered in all tubes, with some
variability allowed as tubes sit differently in the racks
• Adjust X and Y alignment in the input sample locations as
needed
Procedure
• Load a full rack of 1000 µL DiTis on position 1 of DiTi
rack carrier 1
• Run all sample tube types being used by the customer,
but ensure that the sizes are not mixed on a rack (i.e.,
all 13 mm on one rack; all custom tubes on another
rack) and that the tube type matches the rack type
• Run all sample rack types being used by the customer
(13, 16, custom, or transport [pierceable])
• Run 16 tubes on each rack to check for run out from
front to back on the system
• Load reagent vessel carriers on the worktable (no bar
codes are needed)
2. Select <Orders>, <Sample Extraction>, then <Diagnostic
- LiHa Sample Tube Check>.
3. Select <Set Up Run> from the left-hand option menu.
4. The <Sample Extraction: Run Setup> screen displays.
Select <Next> at the lower-right corner of the screen to
move on.
5. Select <Scan> to scan the samples. Proceed with the run as
with a typical Sample Extraction run.

2000942-103—September 2007
6. Enter arbitrary numbers for the <Sample ID> when

prompted. Select <Next>.
At the <Sample Extraction: Worktable Setup> screen,
ignore all instructions and select <Next>.
When the <Sample Extraction: Disposable Tip Status>
screen appears, verify there is a full 1000 µL DiTi rack at
location 1 of DiTi rack carrier 1. Update the status, if
necessary, and select <Next>.
7. At the <Sample Extraction: Reagent Setup> screen, enter
arbitrary numbers for <Deep Well Plate ID> and
<Reagent Lot Number>, and the current month and year
for <Expiration Date>. When ready, select <Next>.
NOTE: Disregard all on-screen information and
instructions; these are extraction run instructions
and are irrelevant to this diagnostic test.
8. On the screen that follows, select <Scan> then <Next>.
On the <Sample Extraction: Run Start> screen, ignore
all on-screen instructions and select <Start>.
9. Tips will pause briefly in the sample tubes for aspiration.
Observe alignment during this time, or select <Immediate
Pause> from the <Sample Extraction Tasks> menu for an
extended observation. The tips then dive to the bottom of
the tubes to check Z-calibration.
The check is considered successful if all DiTis are aligned
in the center area of the sample tubes and no drive no
load errors are encountered on the dive.

200942-103—September 2007
LiHa Output Deck Test
Purpose
During this test, the DiTi X-Y alignment at the assay reagent
bottles, master mix tube, deep well plate, and PCR plate on the
Output Deck will be visually verified.
Actions
• Check X and Y alignment of the tips at all Output Deck
locations
• Adjust X and Y alignment in the Output Deck locations as
needed
Procedure
• Load one full rack of 1000 µL DiTis on DiTi carrier 1,
position 1
• Load an input sample rack with 8 tubes
• Load 8 reaction vessels in a 1 mL Subsystem carrier,
and place the carrier in the room temperature zone
• Load one reagent vessel containing a minimum of 20
mL of tap water or buffer solution into reagent vessel
position 6 on reagent vessel carrier 2 (the vessel
closest to the safety door) and place on the worktable
(no bar codes are needed)
• Load a clean, empty DiTi tray and a clean deep well
plate onto the DiTi Reuse rack on DiTi carrier 1
position 4
• Load one empty reagent pack at position 1 (no bar
code needed)
• Load a clean master mix tube at position 1 on the
master mix tube holder
• Load a deep well plate onto the Output Deck
• Load a clean PCR plate on the chiller

2000942-103—September 2007

- LiHa Output Deck Test>.
Select <Next>. The <Sample Extraction: Assay Details>
screen displays.
5. In the <Actual Concentration> fields, type in the same
numbers as those listed under <Target Concentration>.
Select <Next> at the lower-right corner of the screen.
6. Close the door and select <Scan>. Proceed with the run as
8. When the <Sample Extraction: Assay Assignment>
screen displays, select <Next>. Then, ignore the <Sample
Extraction: Warnings> screen and select <Next> again.
9. At the <Sample Extraction: Worktable Setup> screen,
verify the 1 mL Subsystem carrier is in the room
temperature zone and that it contains 8 reaction vessels,
then select <Next>.
location 1 of DiTi rack carrier 1 and a full 200 µL DiTi
rack at location 4 of DiTi rack carrier 2. Update the status,
if necessary, and select <Next>.
all on-screen instructions and select <Start>. A modified
sample preparation procedure will be performed.

200942-103—September 2007
14. Select <Orders>, <Master Mix Addition>, then in the
<Select a Plate> field, highlight the plate that was just
run. (This plate can be used repeatedly.)
15. Select <Set Up Run> from the <Master Mix Addition
Tasks> menu and perform the protocol as a typical Master
Mix Addition run.
16. Select <Next> on the <Master Mix Addition: Plate
Details> screen.
17. At the <Master Mix Addition: Worktable Setup> screen,
enter arbitrary numbers for the <PCR Plate Name> and
select <Next>. Ignore all on-screen instructions.
When the <Master Mix Addition: Disposable Tip
Status> screen appears, select <Next>.
18. On the <Master Mix Addition: Assay Specific Reagent
Scan> screen, select <Scan>, then <Next>.
19. Verify the master mix tube is in the correct location as
indicated on the <Master Mix Addition: Run Start>
screen and select <Start>.
NOTE: If a problem occurs and it becomes
necessary to rerun this test, it will NOT be
necessary to repeat the Sample Extraction portion.
20. The LiHa travels to various locations on the Output Deck,
diving into each location and pausing briefly. As it does,
visually ensure the DiTis are properly centered at each
location.
NOTE: If more time for visual inspection is
needed, select <Immediate Pause> from the
<Sample Extraction Tasks> menu while the LiHa
is paused. The safety door may be opened at this
time. Select <Resume> when the inspection is
complete.

2000942-103—September 2007
1 mL Subsystem Alignment Check
Purpose
During this test, the DiTi X-Y alignment at the reaction vessels
on the 1 mL Subsystem will be visually verified.
Actions
• Check X and Y alignment of the tips in each position,
verifying they are more or less centered throughout
• Check for positioning and alignment of the 1 mL
Subsystem carriers, ensuring they are set into position
evenly and with minimal deflection
• Adjust calibration positions as needed
Procedure
rack carrier 1
• Load input sample racks with a minimum of 16 tubes
• Load the same number of reaction vessels in a 1 mL
Subsystem carrier, beginning at position 1, and place
the carrier in the room temperature zone
– 1 mL Subsystem Alignment Check>.
move on.

200942-103—September 2007

temperature zone and that it contains the right number
of reaction vessels in the positions indicated on the
screen, then select <Next>.
9. The LiHa stakes tips, spreads, and dives into the reaction
vessels in the 1 mL Subsystem, and then pauses for 10
seconds. Visually ensure each DiTi is properly centered
within a reaction vessel.
NOTE: If more time for visual inspection is
needed, select <Immediate Pause> from the
<Sample Extraction Tasks> menu while the LiHa
is paused. The safety door may be opened at this
time. Select <Resume> when the inspection is
complete.
The RoMa will move the carrier to every position in the
1 mL Subsystem. At each location, the LiHa will repeat
the process of entering and pausing within the reaction
vessels. Ensure the DiTis are centered at every location.
10. When the check is finished, select <Close>, then <Close>
again to clear the message boxes.

2000942-103—September 2007
Dispense Test 50 µL, Visual
Purpose
This small-volume test verifies the accuracy of fluidic
pipetting.
Actions
At the end of this procedure, be sure to:
• Visually inspect the RVs for a consistent level of fluid
• If inconsistencies are found, check the system fluidics for
leaks
Procedure
1. Set up the worktable as follows:
rack carrier 1
• Load input sample racks with 48 tubes, starting with
tube position 1
• Load the 1 mL Subsystem carrier with 48 clean
reaction vessels, beginning at position 1, and place
• Load both reagent vessel carriers on the worktable (no
bar codes are needed)
• Fill the reagent vessel at location 6 (the vessel closest
to the safety door) with a minimum of 20 mL of tap
water or buffer solution.
- 50 µL Dispense Test>.
move on.

200942-103—September 2007

The instrument then checks the 1 mL Subsystem setup.
11. When the door is unlocked, visually inspect the reaction
vessels in the 1 mL Subsystem for consistency of dispensed
volumes.

2000942-103—September 2007
Dispense Test 50 µL, Gravimetric
Purpose
This small-volume test verifies the accuracy of fluidic
pipetting.
Actions
If inconsistencies are found at the end of this procedure, check
the system fluidics for leaks.
Procedure
All steps should be performed as outlined in the Dispense Test
50 µL, Visual, with the following changes:
1. Weigh each empty reaction vessel on a balance (accurate
to 0.5 milligrams or better) before loading it onto the 1 mL
Subsystem carrier during worktable setup. Number each
tube.
2. Weigh each reaction vessel from the 1 mL Subsystem
carrier at the end of the run using the same balance.
3. Calculate the volume transferred during the run by
subtracting the two values and then dividing that result by
the density of water (.000998 g/µL).
4. The gravimetric test passes if the mean value of the
calculated volume transferred is between 47.5 µL and 52.5
µL.

200942-103—September 2007
Dispense Test 800 µL, Visual
Purpose
This large-volume test verifies the accuracy of fluidic pipetting.
Actions
At the end of this procedure, be sure to:
• Visually inspect the RVs for a consistent level of fluid
• If inconsistencies are found, check the system fluidics for
leaks
Procedure
rack carrier 1
• Load input sample racks with 48 tubes, starting with
tube position 1
• Load the 1 mL Subsystem carrier with 48 clean
• Load reagent vessel carriers on the worktable (no bar
codes are needed)
• Fill the reagent vessel at location 6 (the vessel closest
to the safety door) with a minimum of 50 mL of tap
water or buffer solution
- 800 µL Dispense Test>.
move on.

2000942-103—September 2007

The instrument then checks the 1 mL Subsystem setup.
11. When the door is unlocked, visually inspect the reaction
vessels in the 1 mL Subsystem for consistency of dispensed
volumes.

200942-103—September 2007
Dispense Test 800 µL, Gravimetric
Purpose
This large-volume test verifies the accuracy of fluidic pipetting.
Actions
If inconsistencies are found at the end of this procedure, check
the system fluidics for leaks.
Procedure
All steps should be performed as outlined in the Dispense Test
800 µL, Visual, with the following changes:
1. Weigh each empty reaction vessel on a balance (accurate
to 0.5 milligrams or better) before loading it onto the 1 mL
Subsystem carrier during worktable setup. Number each
tube.
2. Weigh each reaction vessel from the 1 mL Subsystem
carrier at the end of the run using the same balance.
3. Calculate the volume transferred during the run by
subtracting the two values and then dividing that result by
the density of water (.000998 g/µL).
4. The gravimetric test passes if the mean value of the
calculated volume transferred is between 760 µL and
840 µL.

2000942-103—September 2007
Section 5 RoMa Checks
RoMa Checks
RoMa DiTi Rack Test
Purpose
During this test, the RoMa will move the DiTi racks between
the DiTi rack carrier and the DiTi rack shelf.
Actions
• Check for positioning and alignment of the DiTi racks in
each position
• Verify that all movements are smooth, with minimal
contact between the racks and the surfaces
• Adjust calibrations of the DiTi racks as needed
Procedure
• Load two 1000 µL DiTi racks on DiTi rack carrier 1 in
positions 1 and 2
• Load two 200 µL DiTi racks on DiTi rack carrier 2 in
positions 1 and 2
• Load 1000 µL DiTi racks in positions 2 through 8 on
the shelf
NOTE: For the purpose of this test, it does not
matter whether DiTis are present in the racks.
2. Select <System> then <Maintenance Procedures> or

3. Select <RoMa DiTi Rack Test> from the <Maintenance
Procedures> screen, and select <Set Up Run>.
4. Close the door and select <Start> to begin the test.
5. The RoMa will move the DiTi racks to all positions.
Observe the DiTi rack movements and record any
problems found. The RoMa will return to the home
position after each step.

200942-103—September 2007

test.
7. The test will end automatically after checking all
locations.

2000942-103—September 2007
RoMa DiTi Shelf Test
Purpose
During this test, the RoMa will move a DiTi rack to each of the
DiTi rack shelf's eight positions.
Actions
• Check for positioning and alignment of the DiTi rack in
each shelf
• Verify that all movements are smooth, with minimal
contact between the racks and the surfaces
• Adjust calibrations of the DiTi racks as needed
Procedure
• Load one 1000 µL DiTi rack in shelf location 1
• Remove all other DiTi racks from the shelf
3. Select <RoMa DiTi Shelf Test> from the <Maintenance
5. The RoMa will move the DiTi rack from shelf to shelf in
sequential order. At the end of each step, the RoMa will
return home.
test.
locations.

200942-103—September 2007
RoMa 1 mL Carrier Test
Purpose
During this test, the RoMa will move two 1 mL Subsystem
carriers to all positions within the 1 mL Subsystem.
Actions
• Check for positioning and alignment of the 1 mL
Subsystem carriers in each position, ensuring they set into
position evenly and with minimal deflection of the RVs
• Check for interleaving of the carriers; no contact should
occur
• Adjust calibration of the 1 mL Subsystem carriers as
needed
Procedure
• Load 96 empty reaction vessels into two 1 mL
Subsystem carriers (48 vessels per carrier)
• Lock the reaction vessels in place with the 1 mL
Subsystem carrier cover
• Place the first 1 mL Subsystem carrier in heater zone 1
and the second carrier in heater zone 2
3. Select <RoMa 1 mL Carrier Test> from the <Maintenance
5. The RoMa will move the carriers to all positions on the 1
mL Subsystem. Observe the carrier movements and record
any problems found, looking for carrier placement
misalignment.
test.
locations.

2000942-103—September 2007

9. Select <Close Process> from the <Process Tasks> menu to
close the test, and confirm with <Yes>.

200942-103—September 2007
System Checks
LiHa Output Test - Sample Extraction
Purpose
This is the first portion of a buffer run procedure that enables
the user to evaluate m2000sp performance through a Sample
Extraction sequence, including transfer of eluate from the
reaction vessels to the deep well plate in the Output Deck. The
master mix process will be completed in the second portion of
the run.
NOTE: Two 995 reagent bar codes and reagent packs
will be needed for the master mix portion of this test.
Actions
At the end of the procedure, be sure to:
• Verify that no errors occurred (if any occur, the test has
failed)
• Examine the Process Logs for the minimum level sense
numbers:
– verify that the minimum level sense at MagRest minus
the calibrated bottom is greater than or equal to 7
– if this is not the case, check the calibration or the
system hardware
Procedure
• Load two full racks of 1000 µL DiTis on DiTi carrier 1
in locations 1 and 2
• Load input sample racks with 48 tubes
and place the carrier in the room temperature zone
• Load one reagent vessel containing a minimum of 20
mL of tap water or buffer solution into reagent vessel
position 6 on reagent vessel carrier 2 (the vessel
closest to the safety door), and place the carrier on the
worktable (no bar codes are needed)

2000942-103—September 2007
Section 5 System Checks
• Load a clean deep well plate onto the Output Deck

- LiHa Output Test>.
screen displays.
temperature zone and that it contains the right number of
reaction vessels in the positions indicated on the screen,
then select <Next>.
screen appears, verify there are two full 1000 µL DiTi
racks on DiTi rack carrier 1. Update the status, if
12. Observe the action of the instrument at all process steps.

200942-103—September 2007

15. After the door is unlocked, visually inspect the 1 mL
carrier and the deep well plate. There should be very little
residual fluid in each reaction vessel in the 1 mL carrier.
There should be a uniform level of fluid in each of the first
48 wells in the deep well plate.
16. After the Sample Extraction inspection has been
completed, the Master Mix Addition portion of this
diagnostic test can be performed.

2000942-103—September 2007
LiHa Output Test - Master Mix
Purpose
This is the second portion of the buffer run procedure that
begins with the LiHa Output Test - Sample Extraction. This test
will take the plate created in the previous test and complete
the Master Mix Addition process.
NOTE: Two 995 reagent bar codes and reagent packs
will be needed for the master mix portion of this test.
Actions
• Pause after the master mix to PCR plate transfer to check
that all wells have an equal amount of fluid; if there is
inconsistency, check the system fluidics for leaks
• Verify that all wells still have an equal amount of fluid
Procedure
position 1
position 4
• Beginning at position 1, load two reagent packs (with
reagent bar code 995) and reagent vials filled with tap
water in the volumes specified below:
Table 5.2: Tap Water Volumes
Vial Position Target Fill Volume

1 0.40 mL
2 1.05 mL
3 0.14 mL
• Load a clean master mix tube at the position that

corresponds to the left-most reagent pack location on
the master mix tube holder

200942-103—September 2007
• Ensure that the deep well plate created in the previous

LiHa Output Test – Sample Extraction is located on
the Output Deck
<Select a Plate> field, select the plate that was run in the
first portion of the buffer run.
4. Close the door and perform the protocol as a typical
Master Mix Addition run. Select <Next> on the <Master
Mix Addition: Plate Details> screen.
Status> screen appears, verify there is a full 1000 µL DiTi
rack in location 1, on DiTi rack carrier 1, and a full 200 µL
DiTi rack in location 4, on DiTi rack carrier 2. Update the
status, if necessary, and select <Next>.
10. When the door is unlocked, visually inspect the PCR plate.
The first 48 wells should be filled with about the same
amount of fluid.

2000942-103—September 2007
Sample Extraction Test
Purpose
During this procedure, a buffer run will be performed to
evaluate m2000sp performance through an entire Sample
Extraction sequence, except for eluate transfer from the
reaction vessels to the deep well plate.
NOTE: Reagent vessel RNA bar codes will be needed for
this test.
Actions
• Inspect the RVs following each liquid removal to verify
that all liquid was removed
• Check X and Y alignment of the tips—especially tip 3—in
each position, ensuring they are more or less centered in
all tubes
• Ensure that no water drops fall off the tips at the reagent
vessel locations during the system pause; if drops fall,
check the system fluidics for leaks
• Adjust X and Y calibrations as needed
Procedure
• Load three full racks of 1000 µL DiTis on DiTi carrier
1, positions 1 and 2, and shelf position 2
• Load a clean empty DiTi tray and a clean deep well
plate onto the DiTi Reuse rack on DiTi Carrier 1
• Load 13 mm sample racks with 48 reaction vessels,
filled with a minimum of 1 mL of tap water
• Load a 1 mL Subsystem carrier with 48 reaction vessels
and place the carrier in heater zone 1

200942-103—September 2007
• Load the reagent vessels, filled with tap water at the

volumes indicated below, onto reagent vessel carriers
1 and 2 and load onto the worktable (RNA bar codes
are needed on the reagent vessels)
Table 5.3: Reagent Vessel Volumes
Location Location Label Minimum Fill Volume

1 mLysis 45 mL
3 mMicroparticles 15 mL
4 mWash 1 45 mL
5 mWash 2 45 mL

- Sample Extraction Test>.
move on.
5. Close the door, select <Scan>, and proceed.
verify the 1 mL Subsystem carrier is in heater zone 1 and
that it contains the right number of reaction vessels in
the positions indicated on the screen, then select <Next>.
screen appears, verify there are full racks of 1000 µL DiTis
on DiTi carrier 1, positions 1 and 2, and in shelf position
2. Update the status, if necessary, and select <Next>.

2000942-103—September 2007
9. Look for droplets above reagent vessels 4 and 5 during the

pause (10 seconds). If they are detached during the pause,
leakage is indicated.
11. Select <Close Process> from the <Process Tasks> menu to
close the test, and confirm with <Yes>.
12. When the door is unlocked, visually inspect the 1 mL
Subsystem carrier. All reaction vessels in the carrier should
have minimal residual liquid (< 10 µL).

200942-103—September 2007
Z-Calibration Check – Sample Extraction
Purpose
This is the first portion of a buffer run procedure. During this
test, Z-calibration at the input sample tubes, heater zones 1
and 2, magnetic rest, and the deep well plate locations will be
verified.
Actions
• Verify that no errors occurred (if any occur, see
troubleshooting table below)
• Inspect the 1 mL Subsystem carrier to ensure that all liquid
was removed from the RVs
• Ensure the first 48 wells in the deep well plate contain an
equal amount of fluid: if there is inconsistency, check the
system fluidics for leaks
Table 5.4: Z-Calibration Troubleshooting
Location Error Reason
Heater zone 1 Drive no load (3110) Calibration too low

Heater zone 1 Specified submerge position for the liquid Calibration too high
volume exceeds the calibrated Z-bottom (3152)
Sample aspiration Drive no load (3110) Calibration too low
Sample aspiration Insufficient volume for aspiration (3153) Calibration too high
Magnetic rest Specified submerge position for the liquid Calibration too high
Magnetic rest More liquid than expected (3131) Calibration too low
Heater zone 2 Drive no load (3110) Calibration too low
Heater zone 2 Specified submerge position for the liquid Calibration too high
Deep well plate Specified submerge position for the liquid Calibration too high
• For errors found during this check, perform the following

sequence of steps:

2000942-103—September 2007
1. Check the sp calibration and adjust as needed.

– If a calibration adjustment is made, rerun the
Z-Calibration Test. If the test passes, proceed to the
master mix portion of this check.
– For 1 mL Subsystem issues, if the calibration did
not require adjustment, or if the second
Z-Calibration failed, perform the S&S calibration
(refer to 1 mL Subsystem S&S Calibrations for
Z-Calibration on page 5–43) and move on to
Step 2.
– For sample aspiration and deep well plate issues, if
the sp calibration did not require adjustment, or if
the second Z-Calibration failed, proceed directly to
to Step 3.
2. If the S&S calibration resulted in a change, rerun the
Z-Calibration check. If the Z check passes, proceed to
the master mix portion of this check.
3. If the S&S calibration results in no change, or if the
Z-Calibration check fails, move the calibration in the
required direction (+ 3 steps) and rerun the
Z-Calibration check.
4. Repeat Step 3 until the Z-Calibration passes.
Procedure
• Load three full racks of 1000 µL DiTis on DiTi carrier
1, positions 1 and 2, and shelf location 2
• Load input sample racks with 48 tubes containing
740 µL of tap water each
and place the carrier in heater zone 1
• Load one reagent vessel with a minimum of 30 mL tap
water onto reagent vessel position 6 (mElution™
Buffer site) on reagent vessel carrier 2 (no bar code is
needed).
• Load a clean DiTi tray and deep well plate onto the
DiTi reuse rack on DiTi rack carrier 1

200942-103—September 2007

- Z-Calibration Check>.
screen displays.
that it contains 48 reaction vessels, then select <Next>.
screen appears, verify there are full 1000 µL DiTi racks at
locations 1 and 2 of DiTi rack carrier 1, and in shelf
location 2. Update the status, if necessary, and select
<Next>.

2000942-103—September 2007
14. Open the safety door and visually inspect the reaction
vessels in the 1 mL Subsystem. There should be minimal
liquid residue in the reaction vessels.
The deep well plate on the Output Deck should show a
uniform distribution of fluid over the first 48 wells; each
well should contain about the same amount of liquid. If
these conditions have been met, proceed with the Master
Mix Addition portion of this test.
1 mL Subsystem S&S Calibrations for Z-Calibration

NOTE: These procedures are only to be used if the
Z-Calibration Test – Sample Extraction failed and you
have been instructed to perform them under Actions
above.
To access S&S functions, navigate to <System>, <Setup and
Service>. Then select <System Devices>,<LiHa>.
Calibrating Heater Zone 1 or 2

Mount a tip on Tip Adapter 3. Place an RV in position 20 of
the 1 mL Subsystem carrier and place the carrier in the heater
zone to be calibrated.
1. Using the LiHa Move tab, position the DiTi above the RV
and center it in the X and Y directions.
2. Use the keypad to lower the DiTi in the Z direction to the
bottom of the tube. Ensure the DiTi remains centered in
the X and Y directions.
3. Use your fingers to try and raise the tube. It should NOT
be able to move freely in the Z direction.
4. Using the Single Commands Tool, obtain the Z position of
the tip by entering the following command: A1RPZ0.
The answer will appear as A1@Z1,Z2,Z3,Z4,Z5,Z6,Z7,Z8.
Write down the number for Z3 plus 264 (the length of the
tip)
5. Open the m2000sp application and proceed to the
calibration screen for the location in question.
6. Input the Z-value obtained above (well bottom + 264).
7. Select <Move> before selecting <Finish> to complete the
calibration.

200942-103—September 2007
Calibrating Magnetic Rest

Mount a tip on Tip Adapter 3. Place an RV in position 20 of
the 1 mL Subsystem carrier and place the carrier in the
MagRest position.
1. Using the LiHa Move tab, position the DiTi above the RV
and center it in the X and Y directions.
2. Use the keypad to lower the DiTi in the Z direction to the
bottom of the tube. Ensure the DiTi remains centered in
the X and Y directions.
3. Use your fingers to try and raise the tube. It should NOT
be able to move freely in the Z direction.
4. Using the Single Commands Tool, obtain the Z position of
the tip by entering the following command: A1RPZ0.
The answer will appear as A1@Z1,Z2,Z3,Z4,Z5,Z6,Z7,Z8.
Write down the number for Z3 plus 334 (the length of the
tip and the carrier)
5. Open the m2000sp application and proceed to the
calibration screen for the MagRest position.
6. Input the Z-value obtained above (well bottom + 334).
7. Select <Move> before selecting <Finish> to complete the
calibration.

2000942-103—September 2007
Z-Calibration Check – Master Mix
Purpose
This Master Mix Addition step completes the Z-calibration test

begun with Sample Extraction. This test will take the plate
created in the previous test and complete the Master Mix
Addition process.
Actions
• Verify that no errors occurred (if any occur, the test has
failed)
• Ensure the first 48 wells in the PCR plate contain an equal
amount of fluid: if the fluid level is inconsistent, check the
Procedure
position 1
position 4
• Beginning at position 1, load two reagent packs (no
bar code needed) and reagent vials filled with tap
water in the volumes specified below:

1 0.40 mL
2 1.05 mL
3 0.14 mL
• Load a clean master mix tube at position 1 on the

master mix tube holder
Z-Calibration Check - Sample Extraction is located on
the Output Deck

200942-103—September 2007
2. Select <Orders> and then <Master Mix Addition>. In the

<Select a Plate> field, highlight the plate that was run in
the first portion of this buffer run, and then select <Set Up
Run> from the <Master Mix Addition Tasks> menu.
The first 48 wells should be filled with about the same
amount of fluid.

2000942-103—September 2007
RNA Simulation Test – Sample Extraction
Purpose
This is the first part of an RNA Simulation procedure in which
a buffer run will be performed to evaluate m2000sp
performance through an entire RNA extraction and master
mix sequence.
NOTE: Two 995 reagent bar codes and reagent packs,
and reagent vessel RNA bar codes, will be needed for
the master mix portion of this test.
In the Sample Extraction portion, all aspects of a typical RNA
run will be performed, except for duplicate washes or
incubation time.
Actions
• Examine each step of the process for correct calibrations
and adjust if necessary
• Examine each step of the process for correct liquid
handling: if fluid removals are not accurate, examine the
• Verify that no errors occurred during the run (if errors
occur, the test has failed)
• Ensure the first 48 wells in the deep well plate contain an
equal amount of fluid: if there is inconsistency, check the
Procedure
• Load 13 mm sample racks with 48 tubes, containing a
minimum of 1.5 mL of tap water, starting with tube
position 1
• Load the 1 mL Subsystem carrier with 48 unused
the carrier in heater zone 1
• Load full 1000 µL DiTi racks on DiTi carrier 1,
positions 1 and 2, and in shelf positions 2-8

200942-103—September 2007
• Load reagent vessels with tap water in the locations

and volumes listed in the table below (RNA bar codes
are required)
Table 5.6: Reagent Vessel Volumes
Location Location Label Minimum Fill Volume

1 m™Lysis 140 mL
3 mMicroparticles 26 mL
4 mWash 1 92 mL
5 mWash 2 92 mL
6 mElution 22 mL
• Load a clean DiTi tray and deep well plate onto the
DiTi reuse rack on DiTi rack carrier 1
2. Select <Orders>, <Sample Extraction>, then <m2000

RNA Simulation Test>.
screen displays.
that it contains the right number of reaction vessels in the
positions indicated on the screen, then select <Next>.

2000942-103—September 2007

screen appears, verify that for every 8 samples used above,
there is one full rack of 1000 µL DiTis on DiTi carrier 1,
positions 1 and 2, and in shelf positions 2-8, as needed.
Update the status, if necessary, and select <Next>.


200942-103—September 2007
RNA Simulation Test – Master Mix
Purpose
This is the second portion of the buffer run procedure that
begins with the RNA Simulation Test – Sample Extraction. This
test will take the plate created in the previous test and
complete the master mix process.
NOTE: Two 995 reagent bar codes and reagent packs,
and reagent vessel RNA bar codes, will be needed for
this portion of this test.
Actions
• Examine each step of the process for correct calibrations
and adjust if necessary
• Examine each step of the process for correct liquid
handling: if fluid removals are not accurate, examine the
• Verify that no errors occurred during the run (if errors
occur, the test has failed)
• Ensure the first 48 wells in the PCR plate contain an equal
amount of fluid: if there is inconsistency, check the system
fluidics for leaks
Procedure
position 1
position 4
• Beginning at position 1, load two reagent packs (with
reagent bar code 995) and reagent vials filled with tap
water in the volumes specified in the table below

1 0.40 mL

2000942-103—September 2007

2 1.05 mL
3 0.14 mL
• Load a clean master mix tube at the position that

corresponds to the left-most reagent pack location on
the master mix tube holder
RNA Simulation Test – Sample Extraction is located on
the Output Deck
<Select a Plate> field, select the plate that was run in the
first portion of the buffer run.
The wells used in the test should be filled with about the
same amount of fluid.

200942-103—September 2007
Other Checks
Chiller and Heater Temperature Check
Purpose
During this test, the set temperatures at heater zone 1, heater
zone 2, and the PCR tray holder will be confirmed.
Actions
If either heater zone fails to come to temperature:
• Check the cabling at the temperature block; check the
tightness of the connections
• Check the heater block hardware (heater boards, etc.)
If the chiller fails to reach temperature:
• Check the cabling at the chiller
• Check the chiller hardware
Procedure
• Load a reaction vessel with 1 mL of water in column
3, position 4 of the 1 mL Subsystem carrier and install
the carrier cover
• Place the 1 mL carrier in heater zone 1
3. Select <Chiller and Heater Temperature Check> from
the <Maintenance Procedures> screen and then select
<Set Up Run> from the <Maintenance Tasks> menu on
the left.
4. Close the door and select <Start> to begin the test. The
chiller temperature will begin to descend, and the system
will automatically pause, allowing the operator to open
the door.
5. Set the TVK into the PCR plate holder on the chiller. The
TVK should remain there throughout the test to allow
temperature readings to be taken periodically over the
next 20 minutes.

2000942-103—September 2007
Section 5 Other Checks
6. When the temperature is within range (8°C, ± 3°C) or

when 20 minutes of the test are over, close the door and
press <Resume>.
The temperature in heater zone 1 will begin to ramp, and
the system will automatically pause, allowing the
operator to open the door.
7. Set a calibrated thermometer into the reagent vessel in the
1 mL Subsystem carrier. The thermometer should remain
there throughout the test to allow temperature readings to
be taken periodically over the next 40 minutes.
press <Resume>.
9. The temperature in heater zone 2 will begin to ramp, and
the system will automatically pause, allowing the operator
to open the door.
10. Move the Subsystem carrier along with the calibrated
thermometer to heater zone 2.
press <Resume>.

200942-103—September 2007
Ethanol LLS Check
Purpose
During this buffer run procedure, liquid level sensing is
performed six times for mWash 2DNA.
Actions
If level sensing fails:
• Check that the correct amount of fluid was added to the
trough
• Check the connections for the level sensing circuit (ILID
board, ILID cable, tip adapter)
• Check the hardware for the level sensing circuit (ILID
• Retry the test
Procedure
rack carrier 1
• Load a 13 mm input sample rack with 8 tubes
• Load one reagent vessel with a minimum 30 mL of
70% Ethanol solution into reagent vessel position 5
(no bar code is needed)
2. Select <Orders>, <Sample Extraction>, then <Ethanol
LLS Check>.
move on.
ignore all instructions and select <Next>.

2000942-103—September 2007

The LiHa stakes tips, moves to the reagent vessel, and
performs a 10 µL aspiration six times.

200942-103—September 2007
LiHa Sample Volume Checks
Purpose
These checks determine the minimum sample volume needed
for a given tube and a given sample aspiration volume in order
to achieve reliable aspiration.
There are four sample volumes that can be checked:
• 200 µL
• 400 µL
• 500 µL
• 600 µL
• 1000 µL
These checks are particularly useful for determining the
minimum sample volume required in custom tubes. Refer to
Sample Rack and Tube Configuration on page 4–149 of Section
4, Installation, for more information on custom tubes.
Actions
The test should be considered a failure after two unsuccessful
100 µL water additions.
If failure occurs:
• Ensure that tap water, and NOT deionized or distilled
water, was used
• Check the connections for the level sensing circuit (ILID
• Check the hardware for the level sensing circuit (ILID
Procedure
• Prepare 13 or 16 mm sample racks with a minimum of
8 tubes, starting with tube position 1. Fill each tube
with tap water in the sample volume desired (200,
400, 500, 600, or 1000 µl) plus an additional 200 µL
• Load the sample racks on the worktable

2000942-103—September 2007
• Load the 1 mL Subsystem carrier with the same

number of unused reaction vessels, beginning at
position 1, and place the carrier in heater zone 1
• Load full racks of 1000 µL DiTis on DiTi carrier 1,
positions 1 and 2
2. Select <Orders> and <Sample Extraction>, then choose

the check that matches the sample volume desired:
• <Diagnostic – LiHa Sample Volume 200 Check>

ignore the on-screen instructions. Verify the 1 mL
Subsystem carrier is in heater zone 1, then select <Next>.
screen appears, verify there are full 1000 µL DiTi racks at
locations 1 and 2 of DiTi rack carrier 1. Update the status,
if necessary, and select <Next>.

200942-103—September 2007
9. On the <Sample Extraction: Run Start> screen, ignore all

on-screen instructions and select <Start>.
If the Test Passes

If the check completes successfully, a minimum volume has
been determined. However, operators who ran a
higher-volume check initially could run the check again at a
lower volume to see if that will work as well.
When the process is complete, select <Close>, then <Close>
again to clear the message boxes.
Select <Close Process> from the side panel to close the test,
and confirm with <Yes>.
If the Test Fails

If a test fails, it will need to be rerun with a higher volume.
Select <Close>, then <Close> again to clear the message boxes.
Select <Close Process> from the side panel to close the test,
and confirm with <Yes>. Then, proceed as follows:
a. Return to Step 1 and reload the tubes. Use the same

sample volume desired, but this time increase the
additional volume by 100 µL.
NOTE: It will probably not be necessary to
reload DiTi racks at each check attempt. Ensure
you have at least as many DiTis as sample tubes
before each attempt.
Repeat this process until the check proceeds
successfully.
b. When the process is completed, select <Close>, then
c. Select <Close Process> from the side panel to close
the test, and confirm with <Yes>.

2000942-103—September 2007
Module 6: Upgrade Procedures
SECTION 6:
UPGRADE PROCEDURES

200942-103—September 2007
Upgrade Procedures Section 6
NOTES

200942-103—September 2007
Table of Contents
Procedural Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

m1000 to m2000sp Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Hood Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Ramped Waste Chute Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

200942-103—September 2007
Procedural Resources
m1000 to m2000sp Conversion

Directions for upgrading an m1000 instrument to an m2000sp
instrument are contained in the latest version of TSB 605-002.
Hood Installation
Hoods are not standard equipment on all G-series instruments.
When installation is required, refer to the latest revision of TSB
605-018.

200942-103—September 2007
Section 6 Ramped Waste Chute Installation
Ramped Waste Chute Installation

Ensure the waste station chute is securely positioned and that
the ramped section at the bottom of the chute points to the
left, toward the center of the solid waste container.
A warning sticker
shows when the
waste chute is
being installed
incorrectly.
A green circle
appears on the
front of the waste
chute.
Incorrect Figure 6.1: Waste Chute Properly Positioned

positioning of
the waste
IMPORTANT: If the waste chute’s red warning
chute could sticker is visible after it is reinstalled, it has been
result in errors positioned incorrectly. The green circle label
must face the user.
After the chute is installed correctly, it will be necessary to

reset the sensor height by recalibrating the DiTi waste as
described below.
Calibrate the DiTi Waste Sensor

Adjustments and calibrations are performed through the
Genesis S&S software.
NOTE: To access S&S, log on to the SCC and select
<System>, <Setup and Service>.

200942-103—September 2007
1. Go to the <Options>, <SMIO for NAT> menu.
2. Select <DiTi Waste Sensor Calibration> under <Setup>.
Figure 6.3: SMIO Panel Menu
3. Go to the <Tools & Configuration> tab.

200942-103—September 2007
4. Verify the <Device Type> is <NAT>. (If not, select <NAT>

from the pull-down menu.) Then select <Diti Waste Full>.
Clear the other checkboxes.
Figure 6.4: Tools & Configuration Tab

about 120 [mm] below the ultrasonic sensor> displays.
Figure 6.5: Process Prompt: Reflector Plate

200942-103—September 2007
6. Select <Next>. The prompt <Turn both potentiometers

counterclockwise to their stop positions> displays.
force.
Figure 6.6: Process Prompt: Potentiometers
7. Select <Next>. The prompt <Adjust the distance

the integrated LED just lights up> displays.
Figure 6.7: Process Prompt: Adjust Potentiometers
8. Select <Next>. The prompt <Setup: Done> displays.
Figure 6.8: Process Prompt: Setup

200942-103—September 2007
9. Select OK.
NOTE: If the calibration fails again, replace the
sensor.
10. Perform the DiTi Waste Sensor Verification.

<DiTi Waste Full> box, ensuring that no other boxes are
checked.
180 [mm] below the sensor> displays. Instead of placing
sensor.
Figure 6.9: Process Prompt: Reflecting Plate
5. Select <Next>. The prompt <Place the plate at 120 [mm]

below the sensor> displays. Instead of placing the plate at
Figure 6.10: Process Prompt: 120 mm

200942-103—September 2007


200942-103—September 2007
Section 7: Troubleshooting
SECTION 7:
TROUBLESHOOTING

200942-103—September 2007
Troubleshooting Section 7
NOTES

200942-103—September 2007
Table of Contents
TOC
Error Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Process Management Issues (Error Codes 1000-1099) . . 7-6
System Calibration Issues (Error Codes 1100-1199) . . . . 7-6
Test Order Issues (Error Codes 1200-1299) . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Reagent Management (Error Codes 1300-1399) . . . . . . . 7-7
Check Configuration (Error Codes 1500-1599) . . . . . . . 7-7
Signal Tower (Error Codes 1600-1699) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
LiHa Calibration (Error Codes 2000-2099) . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
RoMa Calibration (Error Codes 2100-2199) . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Run Application (Error Codes 2200-2299) . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Run Master Mix Addition (Error Codes 2300-2379) . . . 7-8
Hardware Configuration (Error Codes 2380-2399) . . . . 7-9
Shared Sample Preparation (Error Codes 2400-2499) . . 7-9
Instrument Control (Error Codes 2500-2599) . . . . . . . . 7-9
Sample Preparation System Calibrations (Error Codes
2601-2699) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
Sample Preparation Command Library (Error Codes
2700-2799) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Sample Preparation Data Server (Error Codes 2800-2899)
Robotic Sample Processor (RSP) COM (Error Codes
3040-3099) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
Liquid Handler (LiHa) (Error Codes 3101-3199) . . . . . 7-13
Dilutor (Error Codes 3201-3299) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-22
Robotic Manipulator (RoMa) (Error Codes 3301-3399) 7-23
Bar Code Scanner (PosID) (Error Codes 3401-3499) . . 7-25
Doorlocks (Error Codes 3502-3599) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26
Fast Wash Pump (FaWa) (Error Codes 3602-3699) . . . . 7-27
Heaters (Error Codes 3701-3799). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27
SMIO (Smart Monitored Input/Output) (Error Codes
3802-3899) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27
Output Deck Chiller (Error Codes 3900-3949) . . . . . . . 7-28
Hood (Error Codes 3950-3999) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29
Disposable Tip Inventory (Error Codes 7000-7099) . . . 7-29
User Notification (Error Codes 7100-7199) . . . . . . . . . 7-29
Application Specification (Error Codes 7200-7299) . . . 7-29
Result Management (Error Codes 7300-7399) . . . . . . . 7-30
Backup and Restore (Error Codes 7400-7499 / 8700-8799) .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-30
Shared Application Specification (Error Codes 7600-7749) .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31
Network Data Store (Error Codes 7750-7799) . . . . . . . 7-31

200942-103—September 2007
Report Requests (Error Codes 7900-7999) . . . . . . . . . . 7-31

User Access (Error Codes 8000-8049 / 8400-8499) . . . . 7-32
Network Configuration (Error Codes 8050-8099) . . . . 7-32
Audible Alert (Error Codes 8100-8299) . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32
Date/Time Configuration (Error Codes 8500-8599) . . 7-33
Serial Number (Error Codes 8600-8699) . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33
Operating System (Error Codes 8800-8899) . . . . . . . . . 7-33
Language and Locale (Error Codes 8900-8910). . . . . . . 7-33
On-line Documentation (Error Codes 8911-8950) . . . 7-33
Architecture (Error Codes 9000-9099). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33
Hardware Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34
CAN BUS Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34
Dilutor Hardware. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34
Doorlocks Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36
Edgeport™ Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37
FaWa Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37
Heater Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-38
LiHa Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-39
Output Deck Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-44
PosID Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-44
Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-47
Printer Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-48
RoMa Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-48
SCC Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-54
Sensor Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-57
SMIO/SMIO-SAFY Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-58
Instrument Connection Issues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-58
Database/Restore Issues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-59
Network Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-59
Signal Tower Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-59

200942-103—September 2007

This section provides information necessary to resume
operation of the m2000sp after a physical problem has
occurred that cannot be eliminated by the operator. Before
performing any troubleshooting refer to Section 2, Safety for
instrument and non-instrument hazards and safety measures.
NOTE: For software troubleshooting and diagnostics,

refer to Section 10, Troubleshooting, of the m2000sp
Operations Manual.

Abbott Molecular sample preparation reagents. The
exposure to hazardous chemicals is minimized by
eyewear.
sensitive devices.

200942-103—September 2007
Error Codes
The following section contains general information on all

error codes for the m2000sp system, as well as a series of
possible troubleshooting steps to resolve each error. For a
complete list of error codes, refer to Section 10,
Troubleshooting, of the m2000sp Operations Manual.
Process Management Issues (Error Codes 1000-1099)
Timing exceeded / Application aborted

• Check for related errors (DiTi staking, liquid level sense) in
the Process Log and correct the area of error
• Reinitialize the instrument
• Repeat the process
The majority of these error codes relate to action during
processing (completion of run, pause requested, etc.). Action is
not required for these error codes.
System Calibration Issues (Error Codes 1100-1199)

These errors occur during calibration. Wait for a valid
instrument state to perform calibration functions.
Test Order Issues (Error Codes 1200-1299)
Bar Code Missing / Incorrect / Unreadable

• Load required carriers, reagent packs, samples, etc., on the
worktable
• Load the carrier in the correct location (as indicated on
screen)
• Check that all racks and carriers have the correct prefix on
the bar codes
• Check that all sample input racks have unique bar code
IDs

200942-103—September 2007
Section 7 Error Codes
• Check that all racks and carriers are in the same position
as during the initial sample scan
• Verify carriers and racks are enabled
• Check that all bar codes meet specifications and are
configured correctly
Sample Rack Not Enabled / Empty / Missing Sample

• Use a different sample rack
• Enable and calibrate the current rack
• Check tube sensor on the PosID
Sensor Check Failed or Tripped

• Check that the liquid waste is emptied, system liquid is
filled, and solid waste is emptied
• If you suspect a hardware issue, refer to Sensor Hardware
on page 7–57
Reagent Management (Error Codes 1300-1399)

Bar Code Invalid / Wrong Size/ Unreadable
• Replace the reagent pack
• Check the quality of the bar code
• Clean the PosID head
• Adjust the PosID through S&S
Too Many / Too Few Assay Reagent Packs Present

• Load the correct number of reagent packs
• Load Genotype packs in order
Check Configuration (Error Codes 1500-1599)

• Cycle power on the SCC and the system

200942-103—September 2007
• Perform a system backup

• If necessary, reload software
Signal Tower (Error Codes 1600-1699)

• Check cable connections at Edgeport and SCC
• Check cable connections at hood controller board
• Cycle power on the SCC and the instrument
• Ι f you suspect a hardware issue, refer to Edgeport™
Hardware on page 7–37
• If you suspect a hardware issue, refer to Signal Tower
LiHa Calibration (Error Codes 2000-2099)

The majority of these errors codes are user notification
prompts. Follow the instructions given on the prompts.
RoMa Calibration (Error Codes 2100-2199)

Run Application (Error Codes 2200-2299)

These error codes are generally the result of user error
(incorrect date entry, concentration value, etc.). Follow the
instructions given on the prompts.
Run Master Mix Addition (Error Codes 2300-2379)

These error codes are generally the result of user error
(incorrect lot number entry, etc.). Follow the instructions
given on the prompts.

200942-103—September 2007
Hardware Configuration (Error Codes 2380-2399)

These errors relate to actions during hardware configuration,
and occur while in the Hardware Configuration screen. Follow
the screen prompts to resolve these errors. Refer to Hardware
Shared Sample Preparation (Error Codes 2400-2499)

prompts (need for a commodity, etc.). Follow the instructions
given on the prompts.
Instrument Control (Error Codes 2500-2599)
General Errors
Sensor Errors
• Check full/empty status of the indicated sensor
Chiller Error Code

• Check the seating of the power cable at the chiller
• Check the Edgeport™ cable connections
• Cycle power on the chiller
• Unplug and replug the Edgeport
• If you suspect a hardware issue, refer to Edgeport™

200942-103—September 2007
Doorlock Error Codes

• Check that the door is completely closed and nothing is
obstructing the path of the doorlocks
• Check for damage to the doorlock fingers
• Retry the process
• If you suspect a hardware issue, refer to Doorlocks
Sample Preparation System Calibrations (Error Codes 2601-2699)
Calibration File Corrupted / Missing / Failed to Save

• Repeat system calibration procedures
• Save calibrations after each system calibration
Failed to Restore Calibration File

• Wait until CD spins up before selecting restore
• Retry restore function
• Repeat system calibration procedures
LiHa/RoMa Unavailable / Failure Reported During Travel

• Check for obstructions of the LiHa or RoMa
• Retry movement
RoMa Failed to Grip Object

• Check that the object is present and seated correctly
• Check for obstructions to the RoMa movement

200942-103—September 2007
• Check the RoMa calibrations
Unable to Stake a Tip

• Check that full DiTi racks are in place
• Update the disposable tip inventory status (navigate to
<System>,<Disposable Tip Status>)
NOTE: The DiTi inventory present on the
worktable and shelves must match the system’s
understanding of the inventory as depicted on
screen. Refer to Calibrate Disposable Tip Locations
on page 4–153 of Section 4.
• Recalibrate the DiTi locations
Sample Preparation Command Library (Error Codes 2700-2799)
DiTi Errors
• Check that all DiTi cans are loaded in the correct location
NOTE: Refer to Calibrate Disposable Tip Locations
on page 4–153.
Heater/Chiller Errors
• Unplug and replug the Edgeport™
• Check cable connections
• CheckHeater and CheckChiller turned off errors are due to
Application Specification problems; contact your local FAS
• If runs are performed back-to-back, the heater might not
be able to cool down to the start temperature fast enough
• If you suspect a hardware issue, refer to Heater Hardware
on page 7–38

200942-103—September 2007
• If you suspect a hardware issue, refer to Output Deck

Process/Command Stopped Because of Failed Samples

• Check the logs and troubleshoot devices as appropriate
• Rerun samples if possible
Process/Command Aborted
• Check the logs and troubleshoot devices as appropriate
• Cycle power to the instrument
• Check that communication with the instrument has been
established
• If error occurred in the master mix
– check for sufficient fluid in the reagent pack and
master mix tube
– check for bubbles in the reagent pack
• If error occurred during extraction, check that the 1 mL
Subsystem carrier or carriers have been placed correctly
• Check that all commodities have been placed correctly
• Rerun the samples if possible
Command Skipped / 1 mL Subsystem Carrier Absent

These are status messages. No action is necessary. The
commands are skipped because the plate was not used or all
samples in that plate have failed.
Sample Preparation Data Server (Error Codes 2800-2899)

• Perform a system backup
• If necessary, re-ghost the system

200942-103—September 2007
Robotic Sample Processor (RSP) COM (Error Codes 3040-3099)

• Verify the cable connections at the instrument and the
SCC
• Check the Genesis logs for specific device failures
• Troubleshoot the particular device failure encountered
Liquid Handler (LiHa) (Error Codes 3101-3199)
Initialization Error
• Check for obstructions to the LiHa
• Cycle power to the instrument and reinitialize
Invalid Command/Operand
• If error occurred during extraction, ensure that adequate
sample volume (per package insert) is present
Drive No Load Errors

• Check for obstructions on the LiHa
• Check that all carriers, commodities, etc., are in the
correct location
• Check that the right rack/tube configuration was used
• Check that adequate sample volume is present in the tubes
• Verify that the DiTis are not building up in the waste
container
NOTE: It is good practice to empty the waste
container prior to a run of more than 48 samples.
• If you suspect a hardware issue, refer to LiHa Hardware on
page 7–39
Tip Errors
• Verify that tips are available

200942-103—September 2007
• Check the LiHa calibration

NOTE: Refer to Calibrate Disposable Tip Locations
on page 4–153 of Section 4.
• If you suspect a hardware issue, refer to LiHa Hardware on
page 7–39
Not Enough Liquid Errors

• Verify that adequate liquid is available
• Check ILID system connections
• Check liquid for bubbles
• Check LiHa calibration
• Check lines/syringes for bubbles
• Perform an Extensive Flush on page 5–10 of Section 5
3109 (No Liquid Detected)

• Sample Troubleshooting
– Verify that adequate liquid is available
– Check liquid for bubbles
– Check that the right rack/tube configuration was used
• Hardware Troubleshooting
– Check tip adapters
– Check the ILID cable connections
– Check the ILID cables
– Check the ILID board
• Instrument Troubleshooting
– If there are consistent No Liquid Detected errors,
check the Z-calibration at the problem location
• S&S troubleshooting
– Perform Liquid Detection on page 4–127 of Section 4
to verify correct function of the ILID circuitry

200942-103—September 2007
• M&D Troubleshooting
– Perform an Extensive Flush on page 5–10 of Section 5
– Perform a Sample Extraction M&D to investigate
instrument performance
NOTE: There should be no attempt to retry at
the trough or heater zone 1.
• Log Troubleshooting
– Check the run logs (Process Log, Message History Log,
Process.LiHa.log) to see if a specific tip adapter has
been having consistent level sense errors, which
might indicate a hardware failure of that tip
adapter/ILID cable/ILID board
3119 (No Clot Detected)
Figure 7.1: No Clot Detected
– Check liquid for clots
– Check that the sample was vortexed/centrifuged
correctly

200942-103—September 2007
– Check the ILID cable connections

– Check the ILID cables
– Check the ILID board
– Check the integrity of the fluidics system
NOTE: If the problem is specifically noted on tips
1-4 or 5-8, check the 1:4 manifolds on the top of
the system.
– Check the calibrations at the problem location
– Perform a liquid detection test, increasing the clot
detection distance to 40
NOTE: If the test fails, check the Z-rods for
excessive hysteresis.
instrument performance: after each fluid transfer,
pause to check for correct volumes; check for correct
DiTi centering throughout the test
– Match failures in the logs (Process Log,
process.liha.log) with hardware failures
– Note the failure positions and volume trends (additive
failures) from previous steps

200942-103—September 2007
3130 (Less Liquid Than Expected)
Figure 7.2: Less Liquid Than Expected
– Check for proper volumes in reagent vessels and input
samples
– Check all liquid system connections
– Inspect system liquid tubing
– Check the syringes, valves, and dilutors
– Check for large bubbles forming on the top of the
syringe
the system.
– Check the calibrations at the problem locations

200942-103—September 2007
– Check the instrument Y-spread

3131 (More Liquid Than Expected)
Figure 7.3: More Liquid Than Expected

200942-103—September 2007
– Check all liquid system connections
– Inspect system liquid tubing
– Check the syringes, valves, and dilutors
– Check for large bubbles forming on the top of the
syringe
the system.
– Check the instrument Y-spread

200942-103—September 2007
3152 (Specified Submerge Position for the Requested

Liquid Volume Exceeds the Calibrated Z-Bottom)
Figure 7.4: Liquid Volume Exceeds Z-Bottom
– Check for sufficient volume in sample tubes
– Check ILID cable connections
– Check ILID cables
– Check ILID board
– Examine the 1 mL Subsystem carrier plate for
deformity

200942-103—September 2007
– Perform the Z-Calibration Check – Sample Extraction

on page 5–40 and Z-Calibration Check – Master Mix
on page 5–45 of Section 5
– Check the logs for consistency of calibration values
and fluid removals
3153 (Insufficient Volume for Aspirate)
Figure 7.5: Insufficient Volume
– Check for sufficient volume in sample tubes
– Check ILID cable connections
– Check ILID cables
– Check ILID board

200942-103—September 2007

the system.
– Perform a liquid detection test
– Perform a Gravimetric Test
Dilutor (Error Codes 3201-3299)
Dilutors Not Initialized

• Check the connection of the dilutor to the board
• Use the S&S Dilutor tool to independently verify the
initialization of the dilutors
• If you suspect a hardware issue, refer to Dilutor Hardware
on page 7–34

200942-103—September 2007
CAN BUS Error

• If you suspect a hardware issue, refer to CAN BUS
Plunger/Valve Overload
• For a plunger overload, replace the failed syringe, ensuring
it is properly seated in the thumb screw (refer to the logs if
the failed plunger cannot easily be seen)
• For a valve overload, replace the failed valve
• Replace the failed dilutor if necessary
on page 7–34
Piezo Module Error

• Check dilutor connections
on page 7–34
Robotic Manipulator (RoMa) (Error Codes 3301-3399)
• Check for obstructions to the RoMa

200942-103—September 2007
Plate Not Fetched Error

• Check that the object is in place
• Verify RoMa calibrations
• Check for any RoMa obstructions
• If you suspect a hardware issue, refer to RoMa Hardware on
page 7–48
Drive No Load Error

• Check for obstruction of the RoMa
• Check for correct placement of objects on the worktable
• Check for misalignment of the RoMa
• Check for misalignment of DiTi racks, DiTi rack carriers, or
the 1 mL Subsystem carrier
page 7–48
Failed to Grip/Move Object

• Check for obstruction of the RoMa
• Check for misalignment of the RoMa
• Check for misalignment of DiTi racks, DiTi rack carriers, or
the 1 mL Subsystem carrier
page 7–48

200942-103—September 2007
Bar Code Scanner (PosID) (Error Codes 3401-3499)
• Check for obstructions to the PosID
• Remove extra carriers at the end of the worktable
• Check frogs for wear
Drive No Load Error

• Check for obstruction of the PosID
• Verify PosID mechanical adjustment
• If you suspect a hardware issue, refer to PosID Hardware on
page 7–44
Undefined Carrier Error

• Check that all carriers have the correct bar code identifiers
• Check that all bar codes are readable
• Check that all carriers are in the correct locations
• Check that the mounted rack is enabled
page 7–44
Invalid Sample / Carrier Bar Code Error

• Check that the bar code is readable
• Check that the bar code symbology is supported and
configured correctly

200942-103—September 2007
• Check that the carrier is located in the correct grid

location
• Check that the rack is enabled
page 7–44
Failed to Detect a Previously Scanned Carrier

• Check that all carriers are in the correct locations on the
worktable
• Check that no carriers have moved from the location of
their previous scan
• Verify the PosID is not hitting the racks when moving
• Replace the rack
page 7–44
Doorlocks (Error Codes 3502-3599)
Additional Doorlock Errors

• Check that the door is completely closed and nothing is
obstructing the doorlocks
• Check for damage to the doorlock fingers
• If you suspect a hardware issue, refer to Doorlocks

200942-103—September 2007
Fast Wash Pump (FaWa) (Error Codes 3602-3699)
Additional FaWa Errors

• If you suspect a hardware issue, refer to FaWa Hardware on
page 7–37 or Dilutor Hardware on page 7–34
Heaters (Error Codes 3701-3799)
Additional Heater Errors

• Check all cable connections to the heater blocks
• Perform the Chiller and Heater Temperature Check on
page 5–52 of Section 5
• If you suspect a hardware issue, refer to Heater Hardware
on page 7–38
SMIO (Smart Monitored Input/Output) (Error Codes 3802-3899)

200942-103—September 2007
Additional Errors
• Check cable connections at the SMIO board and at the
SCC
• If you suspect a hardware issue, refer to SMIO/SMIO-SAFY
Output Deck Chiller (Error Codes 3900-3949)
Communication Errors
• Check the seating of the power cable at the chiller
• Check the Edgeport™ cable connections
Temperature Errors
• Check all cable connections between the chiller and the
m2000sp instrument
• Check the Edgeport cable connections
• Perform the Chiller and Heater Temperature Check on

200942-103—September 2007
Hood (Error Codes 3950-3999)
Incompatible Hardware
Use the hardware configuration screen to reconfigure a
G-Series as an E-Series.
Signal Tower
• Check cable connections
• Cycle power to SCC and instrument
• Verify that the signal tower is implemented in the
Hardware Configuration screen
Hardware on page 7–37 or Signal Tower Hardware on page
7–59
Disposable Tip Inventory (Error Codes 7000-7099)

Many Disposable Tip Inventory error codes are related to
actions during processing. Action is not required for these
error codes.
User Notification (Error Codes 7100-7199)

User notification codes are informational in nature and
require no action.
Application Specification (Error Codes 7200-7299)

• Install all required Liquid Class Files
NOTE: If installing or updating a liquid class, all
application files that reference that liquid class
must be deleted and re-installed
• Delete the Application Specification
• Reinstall the Application Specification

200942-103—September 2007
If you continue to experience errors, there might be a problem

with the underlying Application Specification file. Contact
GSS for Application Specification support.
Result Management (Error Codes 7300-7399)
General Errors
For most result management errors, you will need to reprocess
the samples.
Exporting Errors
• Try exporting the Test Order files again
• Retry export with a different CD
• “Network” might not be available as an export option;
configure m2000rt computer name and check cabling
• Check the network cable at the m2000rt™ and m2000sp
• Cycle power on the SCC
• Replace the CD
• If you suspect a hardware issue, refer to SCC Hardware on
page 7–54
Backup and Restore (Error Codes 7400-7499 / 8700-8799)
Backup/Restore Failed
• Open/close CD drive door, wait 12 seconds, and try again
• Replace the CD
• Retry the procedure
• Check the logs for information
• Ensure that all non-application windows are closed
behind the application window
• If you suspect a hardware issue, refer to SCC Hardware on
page 7–54

200942-103—September 2007
Database Failure
First, retry the procedure. The database that is being backed
up/restored might be incompatible with the current software
version. Contact GSS to see if there is any way the database
can be read.
The majority of these error codes relate to actions during
processing (completion of backup, invalid state, etc.). Follow
any necessary prompts for these actions.
Shared Application Specification (Error Codes 7600-7749)

Application Specification errors are due to fundamental errors
in the Application Specification file. Contact GSS for
Application Specification support.
Network Data Store (Error Codes 7750-7799)

• Check network cable connections at the router, SCC, and
data store
• Check that the data store computer is turned on
• Check power to all components
• Check network configuration
• If you suspect a hardware issue, refer to Network Hardware
on page 7–59
• If you suspect a configuration issue, refer to Network
Configuration Screen on page 4–170 of Section 4
Report Requests (Error Codes 7900-7999)
Report Failed Due to Software

• Cycle the power on the SCC
• Retry report generation
Report Failed Due to Printer

• Cycle the power on the printer and retry report generation

200942-103—September 2007
• Verify that correct printer is being used (Okidata 4350)

• Verify that the printer is set to default (via Control Panel)
• Check that cable connections are tight
• Check that the printer status is Ready
• If you suspect a hardware issue, refer to Printer Hardware
on page 7–48
User Access (Error Codes 8000-8049 / 8400-8499)

Network Configuration (Error Codes 8050-8099)
Configuration Screen Errors

These errors relate to actions during network configuration,
and occur while in the network configuration screen. Follow
the screen prompts to resolve these errors.
Test Failed
• Check crossover cable connections at router and SCC
• Check power to components (SCC and router)
• Check cable type
• If you suspect a hardware issue, refer to Network Hardware
on page 7–59
• If you suspect a configuration issue, refer to Network
Configuration Screen on page 4–170 of Section 4
Audible Alert (Error Codes 8100-8299)

The majority of these errors codes are due to user-entry error.
Follow the instructions given on the prompts.

200942-103—September 2007
Date/Time Configuration (Error Codes 8500-8599)

Serial Number (Error Codes 8600-8699)

Operating System (Error Codes 8800-8899)

Operating system error codes are informational in nature.
Language and Locale (Error Codes 8900-8910)

These errors relate to actions during Language and Locale
configuration, and occur while in the configuration screen.
Follow the screen prompts to resolve these errors. Refer to
Language and Locale on page 4–188 of Section 4.
On-line Documentation (Error Codes 8911-8950)

• Retry opening document
• Verify that the correct level of user access is logged in
• Reload on-line documentation
Architecture (Error Codes 9000-9099)

For architecture error codes, cycle power on the SCC.

200942-103—September 2007
Hardware Errors
The following section contains general information on all

hardware error codes for the m2000sp system, as well as a series
of possible troubleshooting steps to resolve each error. The
hardware subsystems have been alphabetized.
! troubleshooting is a G-series and not an E-series model.
(For E-series model troubleshooting, see the m2000sp
E-series Service Manual.)
CAN BUS Hardware
In S&S:
• Verify that under <Options>,<SMIO Panel
Configuration type>, the device is listed as NAT systems
• Check the information panel to ensure that all devices are
available (<Instrument>,<Basic Set-up>,<Information>)
Check the following and replace if necessary:

• Status LEDs on the hardware assemblies for fatal hardware
errors (e.g., both lights lit on the PosID)
• Unplug all options connected to the Option CAN BUS one
at a time to determine what is causing the bus to be
blocked; replace hardware as needed
Dilutor Hardware
Plunger Overload Errors

Typically, this problem requires a dilutor replacement;
however, a clog or kink in the fluidics could cause plunger
overload, as well. Therefore, first check the following and
replace as needed:
• Valve
• Syringe
• Tubing extension
• Dispense tubing

200942-103—September 2007
Section 7 Hardware Errors
One Dilutor Failing

• In S&S:
– Enter the single line command DNREE to get an error
code response for a particular dilutor, where N is the
dilutor firmware address 0-7
– Use the LiHa dilutor tool to verify dilutor
functionality
• Check the following and replace if necessary:
– Green LED blinking
– Syringe movement is unobstructed
– Dilutor is firmly plugged into the VCC Dilback board
– Dilutor address set correctly
– Check that tubing is unkinked
– Check that the valve is unblocked
– Check for over- or under-tightening of the
valve/syringe
– Valve
– Syringe
– Dilutor
All Dilutors Failing

• In S&S:
– Use the LiHa Dilutor tool to verify dilutor
functionality
– Fuse FU4 on the OPTIBO board
– Cable connection between VCC Dilback board and
OPTIBO board
– Cables
– VCC Dilback board
– OPTIBO board

200942-103—September 2007
Doorlocks Hardware
One Doorlock Failing

• In S&S:
– Check door lock functionality using <Options>,
<Access Status Options>
– Door latch alignment with door lock
– Cable connection between door lock and SMIO-SAFY
board
– If the right lock is failing, check the status of the left
(the left lock must lock first)
– Swap cables to determine status of the board
– Swap SMIO board with SMIO-SAFY board (address,
jumpers, firmware)
– Doorlocks
Both Doorlocks Failing

• In S&S:
– Check door lock functionality using <Options>,
<Access Status Options>
– Jumper on SMIO-SAFY board is set to J9, outer two
pins
– Address on SMIO-SAFY board is set to 1
– Cable connection between SMIO-SAFY board and
OPTIBO board (Options 6-J18)
– Cables
– SMIO-SAFY board

200942-103—September 2007
Edgeport™ Hardware
In Explorer:
• Verify that Port 1 is set to COM3 in the Edgeport
Configuration menu

• The LED on the front of the Edgeport is blinking
(primarily green); if not, disconnect the USB cable, wait
five seconds, and reinsert the USB cable
• Cable connection from the SCC to the Edgeport
• Cable connection from Edgeport to chiller
• Edgeport USB must be plugged into the same USB port as
it was initially (back, lower left)
• RS-232 cable for hood (if installed) must be plugged into
Port 2 of the Edgeport
FaWa Hardware
In S&S:
• Perform FaWa Fill/Flush Protocol on page 4–122 of Section
4
• Perform FaWa Pump Test on page 4–123 of Section 4

• Fuse FU6 on the OPTIBO board
• Check that tubing is unkinked
• Check for tightness of the tubing connections
• Verify that there is sufficient system liquid
• Cable connection between MPO board and OPTIBO board
(CAN Opt 1 – FaWa)
• Pressure relief valve
• FaWa pump
• MPO board
• Cables

200942-103—September 2007
• OPTIBO board
Heater Hardware
One Heater Failing

• In m2000sp Application:
– Perform the Chiller and Heater Temperature Check on
– Fuses FU8 and FU9 on the OPTIBO board
– Cable connection between the OPTIBO board and the
1 mL Subsystem (CAN Opt 3 and 4)
– Internal cable connection between the heater block
and MBS print complete for Mags board
– Address settings
– Heater block
– Internal cable
– External cable
– OPTIBO board
Both Heaters Failing

– Fuses FU8 and FU9 on the OPTIBO board
– Check for over/under tightening of cable connections
1 mL Subsystem (CAN Opt 3 and 4)
– Cables
– OPTIBO board

200942-103—September 2007
LiHa Hardware
Shortened X-drive Travel (Arm not moving all the way to

the right)
• Check whether an E-series X-drive was installed by
mistake
• If so, replace it with the correct G-series X-drive (PN
619854)
No Response
• In S&S:
– Verify that the LiHa is recognized on the Basic Setup
Information Tab
– Verify that each LiHa axis is present and OK on the
LiHa informational panel
– Verify the Device M1 is known on the Firmware
Download page (if not, download LiHa firmware)
– Enter the single line command A1REE
– The response should be A1@@@@@@@@@@@ if
all axes are responding correctly
– If errors are received, address the specific axis
involved by following the steps in the
appropriate section below
– Indicator light on Genesis CU board (if out, the board
needs to be replaced)
– Cable connection between LiHa backplane board and
OPTIBO board (LiHa J5 – LiHa)
– Cable connection between the X-drive assembly and
the LiHa backplane board
– Cables
– OPTIBO board
– LiHa backplane board

200942-103—September 2007
LiHa X-axis
• In S&S:
Information Tab
– The response should be A1N@@@@@@@@@@,
where N is the axis error code
– Check Y-spread
– Check LiHa reference positions
– Check instrument scaling
– Look for obstructions that would prevent proper
initialization of the LiHa
the LiHa backplane board
– Verify the distance between the X-drive and the X-gap
is 2.0 mm
– X-drive belt
– X-drive assembly
– Cables
– Servo power board
– Device CU board
– LiHa
LiHa Y-axis or Ys-axis

• In S&S:

200942-103—September 2007

Information Tab
– The response should be A1@N@@@@@@@@@
for Y or A1@@N@@@@@@@@ for Ys, where N is
the axis error code
– Check Y-spread
– Check LiHa reference positions
– Check instrument scaling
– Check Z-rod perpendicularity to the worktable
– check for any Z-rod binding in movement
– clean the Z-rods
– Check belt tension
– Check ball bearings
– Check screws between the axles and pulleys
– Cable connection between the Y-motors and the LiHa
backplane board
– Cables
– Device CU board
– Y-belt
– Y-motors
– OPTIBO board
LiHa Z-axis
• In S&S:
Information Tab

200942-103—September 2007

– The response should be A1@@@N@@@@@@@,
where N is the axis error code
– Check Z-axis setup and offset
– Check tip type length
– Check screws between the axles and motors
– Cable connection between the motor and the LiHa
backplane board
– Swap or replace the servo boards (2 through 5) and
change the addresses:
– Servo 2 (Z3 and Z6)
– Cables
– OPTIBO board
DiTi Ejection
• In S&S:
Information Tab
– Check Each of the Tip Adapters on page 4–58 of
Section 4
– Calibrate the Lower DiTi Eject on page 4–63
– Perform the Lower DiTi Eject Test on page 4–64

200942-103—September 2007
– Check the Set Discard distance by entering AIRST at

the single line command
– The response should be A1@___,___,45
– If the response is different, set the distance by
entering A1SST,45, then M1SOW
– Clean the linkage pin and holes at the lever and yoke
on the linkage mechanism, and lubricate the pin
– Perform the Rocker Adjustment Procedure on page
9–71 of Section 9
– Check that the thin lever on the solenoid lies in the
center of the yoke at a 90 degree angle to the drive
shaft
– Cable connection between the Lower DiTi Eject
Option and the LiHa backplane board
– Tip adapters
– Solenoid
– Cables
– ILID cable
– ILID board
– DC Servo Board Z5/Z4 position 5
– LiHa
Tip Adapters
• In S&S:
– Perform the Tip Adapter Test (refer to Check Each of
the Tip Adapters on page 4–58)
– The straightness and alignment of the tip adapter
– The set screw on the Z-rod

200942-103—September 2007
Output Deck Hardware
Chiller
– Power switch on the back of the chiller is ON
– Power cord is firmly plugged into the back of the
chiller
– The RS-232 cable between the chiller and the
Edgeport™ is connected to Port 1 on the Edgeport
Output Deck Support

If experiencing difficulty in setting the master mix block into
the back of the Output Deck support, check the ball bearing
detent on the Output Deck support. This can be adjusted as
necessary.
PosID Hardware
Bar Code Reading

• In S&S:
– Confirm the PosID 2 parameters (PosID mechanical
accuracy and scanner head mechanical accuracy)
– The quality of the bar codes
– The orientation and positioning of the bar codes
– The integrity and positioning of the frogs
– Clean the Bar Code Reader window
– Cable connection from scanner to Y/B-board cable
– Cable connection from DSP board to Y/B-board cable
– Cable connection from X-flex cable to Y/B-board and
PosID board

200942-103—September 2007
– Cable connection from Y/B-cable to the PosID board

and the PosID CU board
– Cable connection from the PosID CU board to the
OPTIBO board (CAN Opt2-CU PosID)
– Scanner
– DSP board
– Y/B-board
– B-motor
– Cables
– PosID CU board
– Confirm the PosID 2 bar code settings in the m2000sp
software
– bar code type
– length
– check digit option
– start-stop character
Tube Sensing
• Check the following and replace if necessary
– Clean the tube sensors
– Cable connection between the PosID CU board and
PosID board
– Cable connection between the OPTIBO board (CAN
Opt 2-CU PosID) and the PosID CU board
– Cable connection of the X-flex cable between the
PosID board and PosID 2 module
– Cable connection between the NO Tube Sensor and
the Y/B board
– No Tube Sensor
– Y/B board
– Servo board
– Y/B cable

200942-103—September 2007
– X-flex cable
– PosID CU board
PosID 2 X Movement
• In S&S:
– Enter the single line command P1REE
– The response should be N@@, where N is the
axis error code
– Manually check for free movement of the PosID 2
– Cable connection between the X-motor and PosID
board
the PosID board
– Check the X-belt tension
PosID board and PosID 2 module (Y/B board)
PosID CU board (CAN Opt 2 – PosID)
– Cables
– X-servo board
– X-motor
– X-drive assembly
– Belt
– PosID board
– OPTIBO board
PosID 2 Y-movement
• In S&S:
– Enter the single line command P1REE

200942-103—September 2007
– The response should be @N@, where N is the

axis error code
– Verify the gap between the release finger of the PosID
2 and worktable surface equals 0.2 mm
– Verify the gap between the PosID Service Rack and
gripper pin equals 0.5 mm
the PosID board
– Check the Y-belt tension
PosID board and PosID 2 module (Y/B board)
PosID CU board (CAN Opt 2 – PosID)
– Check the tube sensor cable for interference with the
Y-slide
– Cables
– Y-belt
– Y-motor
– Servo board
– Y/B board
– Gripper assembly
– Y/B cable
– X-flex cable
– PosID CU board
Power Supply

• Power switch is on
• Power is available at the outlet (breaker on)
• Green light by the power supply is illuminated
• Power interlock switch is in place

200942-103—September 2007
• Power supply leads to the OPTIBO are securely screwed in

place
• 24V are available at the OPTIBO
Printer Hardware
Check or do the following:

• Power switch is on
• Replace the USB cable with a parallel printer cable (doing
so will create a copy of the printer in the printer menu);
then, set the copy to be the default printer
<Image Drum Missing> Message

• Replace the printer
RoMa Hardware
Shortened X-drive Travel (Arm not moving all the way to

the right)
• Check whether an E-series X-drive was installed by
mistake
• If so, replace it with the correct G-series X-drive (PN
619854)
No Response
• In S&S:
– Verify that the RoMa is recognized on the Basic Setup
Information tab
– Verify that each RoMa axis is present and OK on the
RoMa information panel
– Verify that Device C1 is known on the Firmware
Download page (if not, download RoMa firmware)
– Enter the single line command C1REE
– The response should be C1@@@@@ if all axes
are responding correctly

200942-103—September 2007
– If errors are received, address the specific axis

involved by following the steps in the
appropriate section below
– If no errors are received, run a random move
test to see if any errors occur then
– Cable connection between RoMa Freedom backplane
board and the OPTIBO board (Arm R1 J15-RoMa)
– CU board
RoMa Rotator
• In S&S:
– Verify that Device C1 is known on the Firmware
Download page (if not, download RoMa firmware)
– The response should be @@@N@, where N is
the rotator error code
– Perform the Reference Plate Test on page 4–79 of
Section 4, and auto-adjust the rotator if necessary
– After reperforming the Reference Plate Test, perform
Manual RoMa Rotator Adjustments on page 4–83 if
necessary
– Manually rotate the gripper head, and check for
bearing roughness
– Cable connection between the rotator motor and
gripper head
– Cable connection between the gripper board and the
RoMa 2 backplane board
board and the OPTIBO board
– Common servo boards (swap to check for board
failures); check board address settings

200942-103—September 2007
– Rotator motor
– Y/R servo board
– RoMa 2 backplane board
– Gripper board
– RoMa Freedom backplane board
Run any of the RoMa alignment M&D checks to verify
correction rotational alignment of the RoMa (refer to
RoMa Checks on page 5–27 of Section 5). Manually align
the RoMa rotator if necessary.
RoMa Gripper
• In S&S:
– The response should be @@@@N, where N is
the gripper error code
– Check the gripper setup in <RoMa>,<Set Type>
– Perform the Reference Plate Test on page 4–79 of
Section 4, and auto-adjust the rotator if necessary
– Manually rotate the gripper head, and check for
bearing roughness
– Use the move panel to move the gripper fingers above
a straight surface (the reference teach plate, for
example) to verify the fingers are parallel and even
– Use the move panel to move the gripper fingers above
the 1 mL Subsystem and bring them down to the
surface to verify that the bottoms of the pads are flat
to the surface; readjust the screws if necessary
– Cable connection between the gripper motor and
gripper board
– Cable connection between the gripper board and the

200942-103—September 2007
– Cable connection between RoMa 2 backplane board

and the RoMa Freedom backplane board
– Z/G servo board
– Gripper board
– RoMa
– Gripper fingers
RoMa Y-axis
• In S&S:
– The response should be @N@@@, where N is
the Y-axis error code
– Check the scaling factor
– Initialize the axis and check for extended errors
– Manually check for free movement of the RoMa arm
– Y-belt tension
– Screws between the axles and the pulley
– Cable connection between the Y-pulley and the
– Cable connection between the RoMa 2 backplane
board and the RoMa Freedom backplane board
– Y-belt
– Servo board
– Y-motor

200942-103—September 2007
– Cables
– RoMa
RoMa Z-axis
• In S&S:
– The response should be @@N@@, where N is
the Z-axis error code
– Check the RoMa range
– Initialize the Z-axis and check for extended errors
– Grease the worm gear
– Cable connection between the Z-motor and the
– Z-motor
– Servo board
– Cables
– RoMa
RoMa X-axis
• In S&S:

200942-103—September 2007

– The response should be N@@@@, where N is
the X-axis error code
– Check the LiHa reference positions
– Check the scaling factor
– Initialize the X-axis and check for extended errors
the RoMa Freedom backplane board
– X-belt
– X-belt assembly
– Cables
– Servo power board
– Device CU board
– RoMa
RoMa Z-brake
• In S&S:
– Clean the Z-brake
– Check the Z-brake for cracks
– Verify the distance between the brake shoe and
Z-brake is 7.25 mm +0.2mm; adjust if necessary

200942-103—September 2007
– Cable connection between the Z-brake and the

– Z-brake
– Servo board
– Cables
– RoMa
SCC Hardware
Communication Errors
– Cable connection between the 1 mL Subsystem and
CAN options 3 and 4
– Cable connection between SCC and the OPTIBO
board (Host RS-232)
– Check that the port setting is set to COM1
– RS-232 cable
– Power cable
– OPTIBO board
– CU board
• After a short-term m2000sp shutdown, cycle SCC power
No Display
• Check monitor connections to SCC
• Check that power switches are in the on position (one in
front and one in rear next to power cord)

200942-103—September 2007
Long Bootup
It is normal for networked systems to take an additional 60
seconds to bootup as they acquire the network.
No Boot-up or Login Screens

Replace the hard drive if you experience any of the following:
• Black screen with blinking cursor in upper left corner
• Blue screen with no Login screen after several minutes
• Constant Yellow light, hard drive is slow to respond
No Green Light After Power Switch Is Depressed

• Check for fan operation in the rear
– If on, switching circuit is bad, replace power supply.
– If not operating, check input fuse
• If good, power supply is defective
• If fuse is blown, secure power on the SCC and
replace fuse; if SCC still fails to power up
replace power supply
Noisy Hard Drive

Replace the hard drive if you experience any of the following:
• High-pitched whine, indicating the bearings or motor is
going bad
• Clicking noises, indicating the read heads are skipping
CD Drive Not Reading Files

• Try exiting out of the current application and re-entering
to reconnect with the CD drive
– If this does not work, replace the CD drive
• Replace the CD drive if the drive does not respond to the
“Open” command
Memory Problems
• If the RAM buffer is out of available memory, restart the
SCC to clear the buffer

200942-103—September 2007
• If the SCC constantly locks up when operating instrument

protocols, there might not be enough memory or the
buffer is at maximum capacity
– Restart the SCC

200942-103—September 2007
Sensor Hardware
Work through the following Problem Solving Tree to resolve
sensor problems:

200942-103—September 2007
SMIO/SMIO-SAFY Hardware
In S&S:
• Check board function using <Options>,<SMIO for NAT>
and <Options>,<Access Status Options>

• All board to sensor connections
• The cable between the SMIO and the SMIO-SAFY boards
• The cable between the SMIO-SAFY board and the OPTIBO
board
• Check the address on the boards (SMIO-SAFY = 1,
SMIO = 2)
• Jumper connections on J9 (Inside 2 pins on the SMIO
board, outside 2 pins on the SMIO-SAFY board)
• Swap the boards for troubleshooting (change address,
jumpers, and firmware)
• SMIO board
• SMIO-SAFY board
• Cables
Instrument Connection Issues

• Reseat the cable connection at the SCC
• While powering the instrument off and then back on,
perform a system shutdown and restart on the SCC
• Set COM 1 port in GenDRV (necessary when a previously
installed modem is removed)
– Launch pcAnywhere
– Select modem
– Select delete
– Launch S&S
– Navigate to the GenDRV (minimized window)
– Select <Options>,<Driver>
– Set the port to COM 1, select <OK>
– Restart the SCC

200942-103—September 2007
Database/Restore Issues
• Shutdown the SCC (particularly if you observe a red X or
system lock up)
• Restart the SCC
• Login as FSE
• Navigate to the Database Manager
• Place the Backup CD in the drive
• Wait until the CD light turns off (approximately
12 seconds)
• Select restore
Network Hardware
In m2000sp Application:
• Check that the network is correctly configured
• Network cable at router is connected to LAN jack
• Network Data Store computer is connected to LAN jack
• Router should be powered on and blinking green
• SCC is connected to router
Signal Tower Hardware

In m2000sp Application:
• Check that the signal tower is configured correctly and
test (refer to Signal Tower on page 4–186)
• Cable connection from the SCC to the Edgeport
• Cable connection from the Edgeport to the hood
controller board
• LED on the hood controller board should be green

200942-103—September 2007
NOTES

200942-103—September 2007
Section 8: Maintenance
SECTION 8:
MAINTENANCE

200942-103—September 2007
Maintenance Section 8
NOTES

200942-103—September 2007
Table of Contents
TOC
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Consumables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Cleaning Agents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Clean Liquid System Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Microbial Growth Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Clean the System Liquid Container Procedure . . . . . . . 8-8
ProClin® Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Clean the Liquid Waste Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
RoboScrub Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
Gas Spring Maintenance Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
At Each Site Visit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
Biannual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
Annual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
m2000sp G-series Biannual Preventive Maintenance Checklist
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
m2000sp G-series Annual Preventive Maintenance Checklist . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21

200942-103—September 2007
Introduction
This section summarizes the biannual and annual preventive
maintenance procedures. Maintenance must be performed as
described in this manual. For optimum performance and
reliability of the instrument, routinely perform the
maintenance and cleaning tasks described in this chapter.
! maintaining is a G-series and not an E-series model.
(For E-series model maintenance information, see the
m2000sp E-series Service Manual.)
Use only original m2000sp accessories, consumables, and

G-series field replaceable units. If other parts are used during
the normal warranty period, the manufacturer’s guarantee
could be invalidated. Modifications should be made by an
Abbott- authorized representative only. Abbott Molecular will
not accept responsibility for any claim resulting from
unauthorized modification or alteration of the m2000sp.

200942-103—September 2007
Section 8 Safety
Safety


Abbott Molecular sample preparation reagents. The
exposure to hazardous chemicals is minimized by
eyewear.
WARNING: Electrical Shock Hazard. When cleaning
the instrument surfaces (e.g., worktable, instrument
panels, etc.) or performing maintenance tasks, always
power off the instrument first.
and racks on worktables. While working with the
procedures.

200942-103—September 2007
Consumables
Detailed cleaning instructions are located in Section 8, Service
and Maintenance of the m2000sp Operations Manual, which
is available for review within the m2000sp Software under the
<Help> menu.
Cleaning Agents
Alcohol
Use ethanol or 2-Propanol (Isopropanol).
Bleach
Use 0.1% or 0.5% sodium hypochlorite solution (2% or
10% chlorine bleach) depending on the task to be performed.
WARNING: Do not mix any oxidizing agents such as
straight household bleach, or any solution that
contains sodium hypochlorite in percentages higher
than 0.5%, with the mLysis, mWash 1, mMicroparticles,
mLysisDNA, mWash 1DNA, or the mMicroparticlesDNA
reagents in the Abbott sample preparation reagent
pack. Do not mix any oxidizing agents such as sodium
hypochlorite with the liquid waste of the m2000sp.
Toxic gases could be generated from these mixtures.
Pressure can build up in the closed container of the
mixtures. It is the responsibility of each facility to
characterize its waste and ensure it is handled and
disposed of in accordance with local, state, and federal
regulations.
Water
Use distilled or deionized water.
CAUTION: Strong detergents may dissolve carrier and
worktable surface coatings.
• Use only recommended cleaning agents.
• Chlorine solution can pit equipment and metal.
Use adequate amounts or repeated applications of
70% ethanol or water until chlorine residue is no
longer visible.

200942-103—September 2007
Section 8 Consumables
Detergent Solutions
• Sporicidin Brand Disinfectant Solution (pump spray and
refill) EPA Reg.: 8383-3; Sporicidin International,
Rockville, MD
• Sporicidin Brand Disinfectant Towelette EPA Reg.: 8383-7;
Sporicidin International, Rockville, MD
• RoboScrub: contact Abbott Molecular GSS for assistance in
ordering RoboScrub.
• ProClin® 300 Preservative (product number 48914-U)
can be purchased globally from the Sigma-Aldrich
company’s website at www.sigmaaldrich.com

200942-103—September 2007
Clean Liquid System Procedures
Microbial Growth Inspection

Microbe-free distilled or deionized water must be used in order
to minimize the risk of microbial contamination of the liquid
handling system.
Inspection for microbial growth should be performed at each
site visit, as follows:
1. Visually inspect the inside of the system liquid container
and the outside of the cap tubing for areas of discoloration
(brownish-yellow or blue-green spots).
2. Even if nothing is visually present, move a gloved finger
along the supply tubing. If the glove feels slippery after
removal from the tubing, biofilm is likely present.
If no signs of biofilm are found, no further action is required.
If biofilm is found or suspected:
1. Perform the Clean the System Liquid Container Procedure
below
2. Replace all system tubing (refer to Tubing System on page
9–174 of Section 9)
3. Inform the customer of the need to use ProClin® 300
Preservative to prevent microbial growth
4. With the customer’s permission, perform the ProClin®
Procedure on page 8–10
Clean the System Liquid Container Procedure

1. Open the front-left door of the cabinet.
2. Pull the waste tray forward.
3. Disconnect the white connector from the top of the
system liquid container by holding the tubing and
pressing in on the quick-connect fitting.
4. Wrap the tubing with absorbent material.
5. Remove the system liquid container from the tray.
6. Remove the cap from the container and drain the
remaining system liquid.

200942-103—September 2007
Section 8 Clean Liquid System Procedures
7. Rinse the system liquid container and the inside of the

container tubing with 0.1% sodium hypochlorite
solution.
8. Rinse the system liquid container with distilled or
deionized water a minimum of five times to ensure that all
bleach is removed.
9. Wipe the tubing on the underside of the cap with a
lint-free cloth or paper towel moistened with 0.1% sodium
hypochlorite solution.
10. Rinse the tubing on the underside of the cap with distilled
or deionized water or wipe with a lint-free cloth or paper
towel moistened with distilled or deionized water. Ensure
that all bleach residue has been removed.
11. Refill the system liquid container with distilled or
deionized water.
NOTE: Perform the ProClin® Procedure on page
8–10 if ProClin is used by the customer.
12. Replace the cap on the system liquid container and return
the container to the waste tray.
13. Reconnect the tubing on the system liquid container by
pressing the tubing with quick-connect fitting onto the
connector on the cap. Ensure the fitting and connection
are secure.
14. Push the waste tray back into the cabinet.
15. Close the front-left door of the cabinet.
16. Perform the Extensive Flush on page 5–10 of Section 5 if
this procedure is performed at any time other than during
Daily Maintenance.

200942-103—September 2007
ProClin® Procedure
1. Remove the cap from the system liquid container, empty
whatever liquid remains, and refill the container with 2.5
liters of distilled or deionized water.
2. Volumetrically add 3.5 mL of ProClin® 300 to the water in
the container.
CAUTION: Chemical Hazard. ProClin 300
Preservative is a corrosive chemical. Refer to its
MSDS, laboratory guidelines, and local
government regulations for instructions on proper
handling and disposal. Wear appropriate personal
NOTE: Serological pipettes or any other
volumetric measurement device with an accuracy
better than + 0.2 mL can be used.
3. Fill the container with an additional 7.5 liters of distilled
or deionized water (for a total of 10 liters).
Clean the Liquid Waste Container

WARNING: Potential Biohazard. Instrument waste
could be contaminated with potentially infectious
materials.
• Observe basic biohazard precautions
• Wear appropriate personal protective equipment such
as gloves, lab coats, and protective eyewear
Dispose of the liquid waste and the guanidine-containing

Abbott sample preparation reagents in accordance with local,
state, and federal regulations.

200942-103—September 2007
WARNING: The level of guanidine in the liquid waste

container can range from 0.5 to 1.6 M. Do not mix any
oxidizing agents such as sodium hypochlorite with the
sample preparation reagents containing guanidine
(mLysis, mMicroparticle, mWash 1, mLysisDNA,
mMicroparticleDNA, and mWash 1DNA) and the liquid
waste from the m2000sp process. Combining sodium
hypochlorite with these reagents and waste may result
in the formation of toxic gases. If this mixture occurs in
a closed container, pressure may build up in the
container.
Perform the following procedure to empty and clean the liquid

waste container.
1. Open the front-left door of the cabinet.
2. Pull the waste tray forward.
3. Disconnect the two tubing connectors from the top of the
liquid waste container by holding the tubing and pressing
in on the quick-connect fitting.
4. Wrap the tubing with absorbent material.
5. Remove the liquid waste container from the tray.
6. Remove the cap from the container and empty the liquid
waste container.
7. Thoroughly rinse the liquid waste container with water or
a detergent solution.
8. Decontaminate the liquid waste container with a 0.1%
sodium hypochlorite.
9. Rinse the liquid waste container with water a minimum of
five times to ensure that all bleach is removed.
10. Replace the cap and place the container back onto the
waste tray.
11. Reconnect the tubing on the liquid waste container by
pressing the tubing with quick-connect fittings onto the
two connectors on the cap. Ensure the fittings and
connections are secure.
12. Push the waste tray back into the cabinet and close the
front-left door of the cabinet.

200942-103—September 2007
RoboScrub Procedure
This procedure purges the system liquid pathway, including
tubing, valves, pumps and connectors with a detergent
solution (1.5% solution of RoboScrub). It should be performed
only at the recommendation of Abbott Molecular GSS.
WARNING: Potential Biohazard. Follow basic
biohazard precautions. Appropriate personal protective
equipment should be worn during all cleaning and
assay procedures.
1. Prepare a 1.5% solution of RoboScrub. Add 15 mL of

RoboScrub to 1 L of hot (approximately 50°C) water.
2. Open the front left door of the cabinet. Pull the waste tray
forward.
3. Disconnect the two connectors from the top of the liquid
waste container by holding the tubing and pressing in on
the quick-connect fitting.
4. Empty the liquid waste container. Rinse the liquid waste
container thoroughly with water to remove any sample
preparation reagents or waste containing guanidine
compounds. Replace the cap and tubing.
5. Disconnect the white connector from the top of the
system liquid container by holding the tubing and
pressing in on the quick-connect fitting. Remove the cap
from the container and place in a container filled with the
1.5% solution of RoboScrub. Then reconnect the cap with
the quick-connect fitting.
6. In the m2000sp application, select <System>,
<Maintenance Procedure>, <Extensive Flush>.
7. Wait five minutes, and select <System>, <Maintenance
Procedure>, <Extensive Flush> again.
8. Wait ten minutes, and remove the cap and tubing from
the RoboScrub solution.
9. Disconnect the tubing from the top of the cap, and rinse
the cap and tubing with distilled or deionized water.
10. Blot the tubing dry, and then place the tubing into a
container filled with distilled or deionized water. Connect
the tubing to the top of the cap.

200942-103—September 2007

<Maintenance Procedure>, <Extensive Flush>. Perform
this procedure twice.
12. Disconnect the tubing from the top of the cap, and rinse
the cap and tubing with distilled or deionized water.
13. Blot the tubing dry, and then place the cap and tubing
back on the system liquid container, after first filling the
container with fresh distilled or deionized water.
15. Remove cap and tubing from the liquid waste container,
and empty the container. Replace.
16. Push the tray back into the cabinet and close the door.
18. If bubbles still remain in the system, repeat the Extensive
Flush or Simple Flush until all bubbles are removed.

200942-103—September 2007
Gas Spring Maintenance Check
This annual procedure verifies the integrity of the safety door’s

gas springs. This procedure should not be performed on
springs that have been in place for 5 years or more; springs of
this age must be replaced.
1. Open and close the door several times to ensure that
operation is smooth.
2. Open the door all the way and then lower it until there is
a 10 inch difference between the tip of the top panel and
the top of the door, as shown below.
10 inches
Figure 8.1: Door Lowered to Proper Position
3. Leave the door in this position for five minutes and

observe for slippage.
4. If no slippage occurs, the springs are fine. If slippage
occurs, replace the springs.

200942-103—September 2007
Section 8 Maintenance Schedule
Maintenance Schedule
At Each Site Visit
• Perform Microbial Growth Inspection on page 8–8
• Print system information (refer to Information on page
11–57 of Section 11)
• Run counter readout (refer to the individual device’s
Information page within S&S)
Biannual
Refer to the m2000sp G-series Biannual Preventive
Maintenance Checklist on page 8–19 for a complete listing of
biannual maintenance procedures.
This section discusses special conditions FSEs need to be aware
of and provides a general listing of where specific checklist
procedures or tests can be found in this manual.
Parts to be Replaced
There are two different DiTi Spare Sets available depending on
your instrument’s DiTi O-ring configuration. If you plan to
upgrade to the new DiTi/O-ring configuration, refer to TSB
605-008 for directions. Otherwise, be sure to order the
appropriate part. Refer to DiTi Adapter (DiTi Spare Set)
Replacement on page 9–63 of Section 9 and the part numbers
listed in Section 12.
Parts to be Cleaned
• The following items can be cleaned with alcohol and a
lint-free cloth:
– Z-drive rod and guide rods for RoMa
– Z-drive rod for LiHa
– Arm guide
– Lower DiTi Eject linkage and guide rods
• To clean the Y-square bar, use a lint-free cloth (do not use
any agent). Remove side covers of LiHa as described in
Complete LiHa Assembly on page 9–40 of Section 9.

200942-103—September 2007
• To clean the system liquid assembly, refer to Clean the

System Liquid Container Procedure on page 8–8.
• To clean the liquid waste assembly, refer to Clean the
Liquid Waste Container on page 8–10.
Lubrication
Part number 10626104 (see Section 12 for details) consists of:
• One tube of food-grade lubricant grease, which is used for:
– the RoMa guide rods
– the Lower DiTi Eject Pivot Pin
• One tube of Lubricant grease, which is used for:
– the LiHa, RoMa, and PosID X-slide shafts
IMPORTANT: Never use a spray-on lubricant.
!
NOTE: Lubricant should be applied sparingly and only
when necessary.
Setup and Service (S&S) Procedures

The S&S procedures referenced on the Biannual Preventive
Maintenance Checklist can be found in Section 4 of this
Manual.
Maintenance and Diagnostic (M&D) Procedures

The M&D procedures referenced on the Biannual Preventive
Manual.

200942-103—September 2007
Section 8 Maintenance Schedule
Annual
Refer to the m2000sp G-series Annual Preventive Maintenance
Checklist on page 8–21 for a complete listing of annual
maintenance procedures.
This section discusses special conditions FSEs need to be aware
of and provides a general listing of where specific checklist
procedures or tests can be found in this manual.
Parts to be Replaced
• DiTi Spare Sets: Be sure to order the appropriate part for
your O-ring configuration. Refer to DiTi Adapter (DiTi
Spare Set) Replacement on page 9–63 of Section 9.
• 3-way Valves: Be sure to order the appropriate valve for
your dilutor configuration.
– For any new XP Smart Dilutors, order valve 10649016
– For any XP3000 Dilutors, order valve 04J97-42
Parts to be Cleaned
• The following items can be cleaned with alcohol and a
lint-free cloth:
– Z-drive rod and guide rods for RoMa
– Z-drive rod for LiHa
– Arm guide
– Lower DiTi Eject linkage and guide rods
• To clean the Y-square bar, use a lint-free cloth (do not use
any agent). Remove side covers of LiHa as described in
Complete LiHa Assembly on page 9–40 of Section 9.
• To clean the system liquid assembly, refer to Clean the
System Liquid Container Procedure on page 8–8.
• To clean the liquid waste assembly, refer to Clean the
Liquid Waste Container on page 8–10.

200942-103—September 2007
Lubrication
Part number 10626104 (see Section 12 for details) consists of:
• One tube of food-grade lubricant grease, which is used for:
– the RoMa guide rods
– the Lower DiTi Eject Pivot Pin
• One tube of Lubricant grease, which is used for:
– the LiHa, RoMa, and PosID X-slide shafts
IMPORTANT: Never use a spray-on lubricant.
!
NOTE: Lubricant should be applied sparingly and only
when necessary.
Setup and Service (S&S) Procedures

The S&S procedures referenced on the Annual Preventive
Manual.
Maintenance and Diagnostic (M&D) Procedures

The M&D procedures referenced on the Annual Preventive
Manual.

200942-103—September 2007
Section 8 m2000sp G-series Biannual Preventive Maintenance Checklist
m2000sp G-series Biannual Preventive Maintenance Checklist

Customer Information
Contact account: Service Technician:
Contact person: G-series 150
Address: Arm right
RoMa Standard
LiHa 8
ZIP Code: Positive Identification
City: Serial Number:
Country:
Done/
Action Item N/A Failed Comment
Passed
Diti cones, Tubing
extensions, O-rings
Replace
Any missing or damaged
worktable frogs
Z-drive rod and guide

rods RoMa
Z-drive rod LiHa
Y-square bar LiHa
Arm guide
Liquid waste assembly

Clean (bottle and cap)
System liquid assembly

(bottle and cap)
Lower DiTi Eject linkage

and guide rod
X-slides for PosID, RoMa,

and LiHa
Check and Lower DiTi Eject rocker

Align and stop setting

200942-103—September 2007
Done/
Passed
Lower DiTi Eject pivot pin
Lubricate
RoMa guide rods
(see page
8–16) X-slides for PosID, RoMa,
and LiHa
Tip Adapter Test
Calibrate Lower DiTi Eject
S&S Lower DiTi Eject Test
Liquid Detection Test
Verify sensor calibrations
RoMa DiTi Rack Test
M&Ds LiHa Sample Tube Check
Z-Calibration Test
(Sample Extraction)
Z-Calibration Test (Master

Mix Addition)
Additional Comments
Signatures
Maintenance Date Service Technician Next Maintenance Date Due

200942-103—September 2007
Section 8 m2000sp G-series Annual Preventive Maintenance Checklist
m2000sp G-series Annual Preventive Maintenance Checklist

Customer Information
Contact account: Service Technician:
Contact person: G-series 150
Address: Arm right
RoMa Standard
LiHa 8
ZIP Code: Positive Identification
City: Serial Number:
Country:
Done/
Passed
Syringes
3-way valves
1:4 manifolds
Pipetting tubing
Interconnecting tubing
FaWa tubing
Replace ILID cables
Clamps
Y-distributors
Syringes
Diti cones, Tubing

extensions, O-rings
Any missing or damaged

worktable grids

200942-103—September 2007
Done/
Passed
Clean/ Door Gas springs

Inspect and
Door Hinges
Replace (if
needed) RoMa Z-brake
Z-drive rod and guide

rods RoMa
Z-drive rod LiHa
Y-square bar LiHa
Arm guide
Liquid waste assembly

Clean (bottle and cap)
System liquid assembly

(bottle and cap)
Lower DiTi Eject linkage

and guide rod
X-slides for PosID, RoMa,

and LiHa
Check and Lower DiTi Eject rocker

Align and stop setting
Lower DiTi Eject pivot pin

Lubricate
RoMa guide rods
(see page
8–18) X-slides for PosID, RoMa,
and LiHa

200942-103—September 2007
Section 8 m2000sp G-series Annual Preventive Maintenance Checklist
Done/
Passed
Tip Adapter Test
Fill/Flush FaWa
Calibrate Lower DiTi Eject

S&S
Lower DiTi Eject Test
Verify sensor calibrations
RoMa DiTi Rack Test
LiHa Sample Tube Check

M&Ds
Z-Calibration Test
(Sample Extraction)
Z-Calibration Test (Master

Mix Addition)
Chiller and Heater

Temperature Check
Additional Comments
Signatures
Maintenance Date Service Technician Next Maintenance Date Due

200942-103—September 2007

200942-103—September 2007
Section 9: Repair, Replacement of Spare Parts
SECTION 9:
REPAIR, REPLACEMENT
OF SPARE PARTS

200942-103—September 2007
Repair, Replacement of Spare Parts Section 9
NOTES

200942-103—September 2007
Table of Contents
TOC
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Worktable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
Spare Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
Required Special Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
Removal of Worktable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
Installation of Worktable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
System Electronics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
Spare Parts Discussed in This Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
OPTIBO Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17
CU Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17
DC-DC Power Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21
SMIO and SMIO-SAFY Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24
Power Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31
Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31
X-Drive Assembly and X-Belt (for LiHa and RoMa) . . . . . . 9-32
Spare Parts X-drive Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32
X-drive Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32
X-drive Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-36
Liquid Handling Arm (LiHa) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-39
Spare Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-39
Complete LiHa Assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-40
Electronic Boards and Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-43
Y-belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-52
Y-motors (Y-DC-Servo or Y-spreading). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-56
DiTi Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-63
DiTi Adapter (DiTi Spare Set) Replacement . . . . . . . . . 9-63
White Separator Ring and Black O-ring Assembly . . . . 9-67
Lower DiTi Eject Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-68
Tip Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-75
Robotic Manipulator Arm (RoMa Standard) . . . . . . . . . . . 9-77
Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-77
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-77
RoMa Standard Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-78
Ensuring Operating Readiness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-80
Complete RoMa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-81
Mechanical Adjustment after Reinstallation . . . . . . . . 9-83
Grippers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-89
Gripper Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-92

200942-103—September 2007
Gripper Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-97

Rotator Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-103
Y-flex Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-104
Gripper/Rotator Flex Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-107
Y/R- and Z/G-DC-Servo Motor Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-110
RoMa 2 Backplane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-114
Y-belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-117
Y-motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-121
Z-motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-124
Z-brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-128
RoMa Freedom Backplane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-132
Device CU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-136
X-DC-Servo Power Board. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-139
Ensuring Operating Readiness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-141
Transport and Packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-142
PosID 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-143
Spare Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-143
Complete PosID 2 Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-144
X-drive Assembly PosID 2 (X-belt, X-motor, X-flex Cable) .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-147
Electronic Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-153
Scanner Assembly (B-motor, Scanner Head, and Scanner
Cable) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-162
Y-drive Assembly (Y-belt, Gripper Assembly, Y-motor) 9-166
No Tube Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-172
Liquid System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-174
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-174
Tubing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-174
Monitored Pump Option/Fast Wash Option . . . . . . . 9-176
Dilutors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-182
Spare Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-182
Dilutor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-182
3-Way Valve and Syringe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-184
VCC-Dilback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-185
Level Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-188
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-188
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-188
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-190
Sensor Adjustment and Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-190
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-191
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-191
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-192
1 mL Subsystem Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-193
Complete 1 mL Subsystem Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-194
1 mL Subsystem Heater Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-195

200942-103—September 2007
1 mL Subsystem Heater Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-197

1 mL Subsystem Internal Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-200
1 mL Subsystem Cables, from OPTIBO Board . . . . . . . 9-200
Chiller/Output Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-203
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-203
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-204
Hood Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-205
CAN-BUS Resistor Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-206
Quick Check for Jumper Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-207
Movement Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-208
Return of Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-209
Service Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-210

200942-103—September 2007
Introduction
This section provides instructions on repair and replacement
of spare parts on the m2000sp.
! servicing is a G-series and not an E-series model. (For
E-series model service, see the m2000sp E-series Service
Manual.)
protective eyewear.
WARNING: Class 2 Laser Product. Identifies a Class 2
WARNING: Electrical Shock Hazard. Possible danger
rating.

200942-103—September 2007
Section 9 Introduction

these procedures.
sensitive devices.
CAUTION: Hot Surface.

200942-103—September 2007
Worktable
NOTE: Two people will be needed to perform this
installation.
CAUTION: The worktable might have sharp edges.
Take care when handling.
Spare Parts
• Worktable
• Positioning pins
• Sealing strip
Required Special Tool

Reference tip for LiHa (refer to Reference Tips on page 4–54 of
Section 4)
Removal of Worktable
The worktable must be removed if:
• A new or different type of worktable must be installed.
• Access to the PosID 2 is necessary.
Do the following to remove the worktable:

2. Empty the worktable completely, including racks, carriers,
wash/waste station, 1 mL Subsystem, the Output Deck and
door locks (2).
3. Open the front worktable cover. Remove the sealing strip.
4. Remove all six screw caps and all 12 fixing screws (M2.5)
from the worktable.
NOTE: Use a watchmaker’s screwdriver.
5. Remove the deck pins from the rear two rows of grids 1
and 2, in order for the worktable to slide under the PosID.
6. Align the PosID with the opening created on the
worktable.

200942-103—September 2007
Section 9 Worktable
7. Remove the worktable by carefully lifting and pulling

forward.
• Be careful not to catch the frogs on the PosID. Lift up
on PosID as the worktable is pulled forward.
• The rear lip of the worktable can catch on the
cross-members on the frame. Lift the rear edge of the
worktable up slightly and continue to pull forward.
Figure 9.1: Worktable Removed
Installation of Worktable
1. Carefully install the worktable. If the worktable has deck
pins mounted, remove the rear two rows from grids 1 and
2.
2. Position the PosID on the far right side of the worktable.
3. Insert the oval head screws, and tighten only slightly.
Loosely insert the countersunk screws.
4. Manually align the worktable then further tighten the
front-left screw. This screw acts as a pivot point during the
following alignment.
5. Install the reference tip onto position 3 of the LiHa.
6. Manually position the reference tip at the edge of the
foremost positioning pin in grid position 1 (far left grid).
Check the gap between pin and reference tip.

200942-103—September 2007
7. Move the LiHa to the right-most grid position and check

the gap between pin and reference tip either manually or
using the LiHa hand controls.
NOTE: The gap must be the same on both sides of
the worktable. Adjust the worktable until this is
the case.
Figure 9.2: Gap between Reference Tip and Positioning Pin
8. Tighten all screws, working from left to right and front to

back in a zigzag pattern in order to prevent warping or
bending of the worktable, which will cause PosID
problems.
9. Reinstall all previously removed parts.
Verification
Ensure operating readiness by:
• Checking reference positions (Determine LiHa Reference
Position on page 4–60 of Section 4 and Determine RoMa
Reference Positions on page 4–78)
• Configure the PosID 2 on page 4–87

200942-103—September 2007
Section 9 System Electronics
System Electronics
sensitive devices.
Spare Parts Discussed in This Section

• OPTIBO board
• Fuses
• CU board
• DC-DC board
• SMIO/SAFY
NOTE: For all boards, if the m2000sp application is
running while the instrument is powered off and
the boards are switched, a 2501 (FW version
mismatch) error may result when the instrument
is powered on and the firmware on the board does
not match as expected. If the application is
powered off, then a 2513 error with specific board
information will be given.
Perform a firmware download if either of these
firmware errors occur.

200942-103—September 2007
OPTIBO Board
The OPTIBO board is located in the left service compartment.
It holds the CU board on its solder side.
OPTIBO
Figure 9.3: OPTIBO Board Location

200942-103—September 2007
Removal
Perform either a full system shutdown of the SCC or ensure
that the m2000sp application has been closed by opening
Genesis Setup and Software.
1. Verify the instrument is switched off and the power cord
is disconnected.
2. Disconnect all eight cables from the front of the OPTIBO
board.
NOTE: Remember to disconnect the Dilutor cable
(J4) on the solder side of the PCB.
C
H
G D
F
E
A Host RS-232 E CAN Opt 4-1 mL Sub-

B CAN Opt 1-FaWa system
C CAN Opt 2-CU PosID F Option 6-J18 SMIO
D CAN Opt 3-1 mL Sub- G LiHa J5-LiHa
system H Arm R1 J15 RoMa

200942-103—September 2007
Figure 9.5: OPTIBO
3. First label then disconnect power supply cables (four

screws) from the OPTIBO.
Figure 9.6: Power Supply Cables
4. Remove the OPTIBO board fixing screws (eight screws: two

along left side, six along right side). Be careful to not
damage the PCB connected to the OPTIBO board’s rear
side.

200942-103—September 2007
5. Disconnect the CU board from the OPTIBO board as

described in CU Board on page 9–17.
Installation
is disconnected.
2. Ensure the CU board is connected to the OPTIBO board
solder side.
3. Verify that switch SW1 on the OPTIBO board is set to off
(to the right) for both the System and Option CANs.
Figure 9.8: Switch SW1

200942-103—September 2007
4. Connect the Dilutor cable (J4) to the solder side of the

OPTIBO.
NOTE: Refer to the following illustration for
correct cable connection.
Jumper SW1
PC Cable
CAN-BUS Cables for Options
RoMa and LiHa Cables

Dilutor Cable
CAN-BUS Cable for Options

or CANDI, Uniport OPTIBO Board
CU Board
Figure 9.9: OPTIBO Cable Connections
5. Connect the OPTIBO to the instrument with eight screws.

6. Connect all cables to the OPTIBO board.
Verification
Ensure operating readiness by performing the following:
• Firmware test
• Initializing of all system devices
• FaWa Fill/Flush Protocol on page 4–122 of Section 4
• PosID Functionality Test on page 4–87
• Random Move test
• CAN-BUS Resistance Test on page 4–33

200942-103—September 2007
Fuses
sensitive devices.
NOTE: The fuses are located on the OPTIBO board.
Refer to the following illustration for correct allocation.
CU Board 39-01
Option 1:4
Dilutor
RoMa/R1 R2 39-02
LiHa
CANDI and Uniport or Option 5
Arm L1 L2
39-01Fuse 6.3 AT 39-02Fuse 8 AT, sand-filled

Figure 9.10: Fuses on OPTIBO Board
CAUTION: Use sand-filled 8 AT type fuses only—except

the fuse for the CU board, which is 6.3 AT, and not
sand-filled.
CU Board
sensitive devices.

200942-103—September 2007

NOTE: The CU board is located in the left service
compartment. It can only be accessed by removing the
OPTIBO board because it is connected to the solder side
of the OPTIBO.
Special Tools
IC release tool
Removal
2. Remove the OPTIBO board as described earlier in OPTIBO
Board on page 9–12; refer to the following illustration.
C
H
G D
F
E
A Host RS-232 E CAN Opt 4-1 mL Sub-

B CAN Opt 1-FaWa system
C CAN Opt 2-CU PosID F Option 6-J18 SMIO
D CAN Opt 3-1 mL Sub- G LiHa J5-LiHa
system H Arm R1 J15-RoMa

200942-103—September 2007
3. Unscrew the four CU board fixing screws. With pliers,

press the barbs on the two board clips then carefully
remove the CU board from the OPTIBO board.
Figure 9.12: CU Board
4. Use the IC release tool to remove the EEPROM (IC6) if it

will be installed on the new board. Refer to Step 9.13 for
details.
NOTE: The IC6 EEPROM from the old board could
be defective or have bent pins.
LEDs
J1
IC6
J22 CU Board
Figure 9.13: CU Board and Cable Connection
NOTE: EEPROM settings can be saved by the

instrument software. Refer to EEPROM Backup on page
4–132 in Section 4, Installation.

200942-103—September 2007
Installation
NOTE: Spare CU boards may be delivered with an older
firmware version. If so, firmware upgrade is necessary.
Refer to Firmware Download in Section 11, Appendix
A - Software Reference Material.
1. Determine if jumpers J1 and J22 on the CU board were set
correctly according to configuration of the instrument.
Figure 9.14: CU Board, Jumper J1
2. Install in reverse order.

NOTE: Refer to Figure 9.13: CU Board and Cable
Connection on page 9–19 for correct cable
connections.
Verification
Ensure operating readiness by initializing all system devices
and performing the following in Setup and Service:
• Firmware test
• Perform Liquid Detection on page 4–127
• Perform FaWa Pump Test on page 4–123
• PosID Functionality Test on page 4–87
• Random Move Test on page 11–141

200942-103—September 2007
• Check Door Locks on page 4–115

Check Error States

Verify the LED status on the CU board according to the
following table.
Table 9.1: Error States
Green LED Red LED Error

blinking off Normal operation
stays on or off stays on or off Fatal hardware error
blinking on Flash not accessible
blinking blinking Power fail circuit failure
blinking fast blinking fast Firmware download required
DC-DC Power Board

sensitive devices.
Removal
is disconnected.
2. Disconnect the red and black +24VDC power cables from
the DC-DC power supply board.
3. Disconnect the RJ45 cable from the OPTIBO board and
move it to the side.
4. Unscrew the six screws connecting the DC-DC power
supply board to the instrument, and remove the board.

200942-103—September 2007
Installation
is disconnected.
2. If necessary, attach the earth strips to the DC-DC power
supply board using two screws as shown below.
Figure 9.15: New Power Board with Earth Ground Strip
3. Insert the DC-DC Power Supply board carefully as shown

below, and connect the board to the instrument with six
screws. Note that the two bottom center screws fasten the
braided earth-ground cables to the ground strip.
Figure 9.16: New Power Board Installed

200942-103—September 2007
4. Connect the red and black +24VDC power cables as shown

above. The BLACK cable connects the OPTIBO -24VDC
spade to the DC-DC power supply board spade labeled
GND. The RED cable connects the OBTIBO +24VDC spade
to the DC-DC power supply board spade labeled 24V.
5. Reconnect the RJ45 cable to the OBTIBO.
6. Connect the long +12VDC chiller power supply cable to
the output of the DC-DC power supply board as shown
below. The WHITE wire connects to the VOUT+ spade and
the BLACK wire connects to the VOUT- spade.
Figure 9.17: Installing New Power Cable 1
7. Route the cables through the connectors down the side of

the instrument.
Verification
• Chiller and Heater Temperature Check on page 5–52 of
Section 5

200942-103—September 2007
SMIO and SMIO-SAFY Board

sensitive devices.
The SMIO and SMIO-SAFY boards are identical in design and
layout, but have different firmware and are used to monitor
different functions. When either board is replaced, note the
address and jumper setting of the replaced board. Ensure that
the firmware is at the correct version number for the board
(SMIO or SMIO-SAFY) being replaced.
SMIO Board
The SMIO board is located near the top of the right service
compartment. There are four cables connected:
• J18 System Liquid Capacitance sensor
• J19 Liquid Waste Capacitance sensor
• J21 Solid Waste Ultrasonic sensor
• J2 CAN-BUS cable between the SMIO and SMIO-SAFY
boards

200942-103—September 2007
Address Setting: 2
Jumper J9: Inside 2
SMIO SMIO-SAFY
J2 CAN-BUS J2 CAN-BUS to OPTIBO Bd
J9 Jumper J3 CAN-BUS to SMIO Bd
J18 Sys Liq sensor J24/J5Left door lock
J19 Liq Wst sensor J23/J6Right door lock
J21 Sld Wst sensor J9 Jumper
SW1 Address switch SW1 Address switch
Figure 9.18: SMIO/SMIO-SAFY
Removal
2. Unplug the four cables.
3. Remove the four screws (M2.5) securing the SMIO board to
the frame.
Installation
1. Set the address of the new board to 2 and ensure the J9
jumper is on the inside two pins.
2. Install the SMIO board to the frame with four screws
(M2.5).

200942-103—September 2007
3. Connect the four cables to the SMIO board.
Figure 9.19: SMIO Board
4. Perform the CAN-BUS Resistance test to verify the jumpers

are set correctly.
5. Switch on the power.
6. Check that the firmware version is the correct one for the
SMIO board. Download the correct version if necessary.
IMPORTANT: There are different paths for G-series
! and E-series instruments. For G-series firmware,
follow this file path for download: C:\program
files\Tecan\Genesis Instrument Software.
Verification
• Firmware test
• Verify the green light on the SMIO board is blinking
• Verify the sensors are functioning

200942-103—September 2007
SMIO-SAFY Board
The SMIO-SAFY board is located near the bottom of the right
service compartment. There are four cables connected:
J3 CAN-BUS cable between the SMIO and SMIO-SAFY
boards
J2 CAN-BUS cable to the OPTIBO board
J5/J24 Door lock left
J6/J23 Door lock right
Address Setting: 1 Jumper J9: Outer 2 pins
Removal
2. Disconnect the four cables.
3. Remove the three screws (M2.5) securing the SMIO-SAFY
board to the frame.
Installation
1. Set the address of the new board to 1 and ensure the
jumper is on the outside two pins.
2. Install the SMIO-SAFY board to the frame with three
screws (M2.5).

200942-103—September 2007
3. Connect the four cables.
Figure 9.20: SMIO-SAFY Board
4. Perform the CAN-BUS Resistance test to verify the jumpers

are set correctly.
5. Switch on the power.
Verification
1. Firmware test.
2. Verify the green light on the SMIO-SAFY board is blinking.
3. Verify the door locks are functioning. Verification is
performed through the S&S software. Refer to Check Door
Locks on page 4–115.

200942-103—September 2007
Section 9 Power Module
Power Module
NOTE: Refer to Section 3, Technical Data for more
information.
WARNING: Electrical Shock Hazard. Switch off the
power and disconnect the power cord of the
instrument before performing any service. The power
module in its entirety is a spare part. For safety reasons,
no replacement of individual power module
components is allowed. Do not attempt to repair this
part. Faulty wiring could potentially harm the user and
damage the instrument.
NOTE: The removal and installation of the power
module takes approximately two hours.
Removal
1. Verify the power switch is off and the instrument is not
connected to the power outlet.
2. Open the top cover.
3. Remove the four screws (M2.5) securing the cover located
to the right of the diluters.
Top cover
Figure 9.21: Front Cover
4. Remove the two metallic rails that support the tubing

chain (six screws for the backrail, two screws for the
frontrail) to access screws holding the power supply in
place.

200942-103—September 2007
5. Remove the five fixing screws (33-03) (M3) on the bottom

and the five fixing screws (33-01) on top that hold the
power supply in place.
33-01(5x M4 x 10) 2
33-03 33
4x M3 x 10
2-02
2 Top cover 33-01Fixing screws

2-02 Dilutor case covers 33-03Fixing screws
33 Power module
Figure 9.22: Cover and Screw Locations
6. Disconnect the red and black power cables from the

OPTIBO board. Refer to the following illustration for
details.
or
Figure 9.23: Connection to OPTIBO
NOTE: Jumper J11 must be present on the OPTIBO

board
7. Remove the power module by carefully pulling it forward.

200942-103—September 2007
Section 9 Power Module
Installation
WARNING: Electrical Shock Hazard. Verify the power
switch is off and the instrument is not connected to the
main (i.e., wall) power outlet.
1. Place the new power module in the instrument.
2. Tape the ends of the power cables together to facilitate
leading the power cables through the cable channel.
3. Secure the power module in place with the five bottom
screws (M3).
4. Secure the power module in place with the five top screws
(M3).
5. Connect the power cables to the OPTIBO board.
6. Install the removed cover.
7. Close the top cover.
8. Connect the power cable to the power outlet and switch
on the instrument.
Verification

200942-103—September 2007
X-Drive Assembly and X-Belt (for LiHa and RoMa)

sensitive devices.
these procedures.
Spare Parts X-drive Assembly

• X-belt
• X-drive assembly including motor and X-belt (PN 619854)
X-drive Assembly
Removal
2. Remove the X-bay cover, two screws (M2).
Figure 9.24: X-bay Cover

200942-103—September 2007
Section 9 X-Drive Assembly and X-Belt (for LiHa and RoMa)
Figure 9.25: X-bay Cover, Removed
3. Disconnect the X-motor cable.
Figure 9.26: X-motor Cable Connection

200942-103—September 2007
4. Remove the X-drive assembly (5-01) from the X-slide

(5-02; two screws).
Figure 9.27: X-drive Assembly
5-01
2.0 mm 5-02
5-01 X-drive assembly 5-02 X-slide
Figure 9.28: Distance between X-drive Assembly and X-rod

200942-103—September 2007
Installation
IMPORTANT: Verify you have the correct G-series part
! (PN 619854) before continuing. E-series X-drives will
not work on G-series instruments.
1. Connect the X-drive assembly to the X-slide with two
screws. Use a feeler gauge to ensure the gap between the
X-drive and X-rod is 2.0 mm.
NOTE: If no feeler gauge is available, use two 2.0

mm Allen wrenches.
WARNING: Without the 2 mm gap between the
X-drive and X-rod, the assembly will be either too
tight (causing it to bind) or too loose (causing
skipping).
2. Connect the X-motor cable. Refer to Figure 9.26: X-motor
Cable Connection on page 9–33.
3. Check movement by manually moving the X-drive
assembly back and forth and listening for erratic
movement.
4. Install the X-bay cover with two screws (M2).
5. Switch on the instrument.
Verification
• Perform the Random Move test.
• Check reference points and scale factor.

200942-103—September 2007
X-drive Belt
Removal
1. Power off the instrument.
2. Remove the X-drive assembly.
3. Remove the two screws (M3) that secure the cover plate.
Figure 9.31: X-drive Assembly Screw

200942-103—September 2007
4. Remove the cover plate from the assembly.

NOTE: Be careful to not lose the two bearings or
center belt guide pulley.
Figure 9.32: X-drive Cover Plate
5. Slide the X-drive belt off the pulleys.
Figure 9.33: X-drive Belt
Installation
1. Install the X-drive belt onto the pulleys. Ensure the white
guide gear is centered.
2. Attach the cover plate to the X-drive assembly and secure
with two screws.
3. Connect the X-drive assembly to the X-slide.
4. Attach the RoMa or LiHa to the X-drive assembly.
5. Connect any removed cables and secure with clamps.
6. Use a feeler gauge to verify the gap between the X-drive
assembly and X-rod is 2.0 mm.

200942-103—September 2007
7. Check movement by manually moving the X-drive

assembly back and forth listening for erratic movement.
8. Install the X-bay cover with two screws.
9. Power on the instrument.
Verification
1. Random Move Test on page 11–141
2. Check reference points and scale factor.

200942-103—September 2007
Section 9 Liquid Handling Arm (LiHa)
Liquid Handling Arm (LiHa)

sensitive devices.
these procedures.
Spare Parts
• Y-belt
• DC-Servo board
• DC-Servo Power board
• LiHa board backplane board
• ILID board
• ILID chip
• ILID board flat cable
• ILID cable
• Y DC-Servo motor
• Y-spreading DC-Servo motor
• Solenoid
• DiTi spare set
• Tip adapter
• Lower DiTi Eject assembly
• Drive shaft/pinion gear

200942-103—September 2007
Complete LiHa Assembly
Removal
2. Manually move the RoMa all the way to the right side of
the instrument and the LiHa to the middle of the
instrument.
3. Refer to Step 9.34 below to do the following:
• Remove all DiTi adapters (9-03), tubing shelf cover
(9-04), and side covers (9-01).
• Disconnect the LiHa cable (9-05) and X-motor cable
(9-06) from the LiHa backplane board.
• Remove any cable clamps and wraps.
9-06
9-05
9-01
9-04
9-02
9-01 9-03
9-01 Side cover 9-04 Tubing shelf cover

9-02 Tubing shelf 9-05 LiHa cable
9-03 DiTi adapter 9-06 X-motor cable
Figure 9.34: LiHa Assembly

200942-103—September 2007
4. Refer to Figure 9.35: LiHa Removal of ILID Cables and

Tubing from Z-rod on page 9–41 to do the following:
• Remove the black covers from the TIP-ADAPT boards.
• Disconnect the ILID cables (9-09) from the TIP-ADAPT
board (9-11) and ILID board (9-12).
• Remove the DiTi cones, tip extensions, and stainless
sleeves.
• Remove the support tubings (9-07) with ILID cables
(9-09) and pipetting tubings (9-08) from the Z-rods
(9-10).
9-07
9-08
9-09
9-10
9-09
J2
9-11
J1
J3
J1: tip adapter /ILID
J2: NPS/ILID board
J3: NPS/tip
9-08
9-12 9-09
9-07 Support tubing 9-10 Z-rod

9-08 Pipetting tubing 9-11 TIP-ADAPT board
9-09 ILID cable 9-12 ILID board
Figure 9.35: LiHa Removal of ILID Cables and Tubing from

Z-rod
5. Remove the tubing shelf (four screws); refer to Figure 9.34:

LiHa Assembly on page 9–40.

200942-103—September 2007
6. Remove the screw holding the lower DiTi eject rear

bearing block. Carefully pull the block and shaft out of the
way to access the screw securing the LiHa arm to the
X-slide.
7. Remove the four screws (two M3, two M2.5) holding the
LiHa arm on the X-slide.
8. Carefully lift the LiHa out of the instrument.
Installation
1. Clean the contact surface of the guide rail, guide rollers,
and support roller with a lint-free tissue and ethyl alcohol.
2. Install in reverse order. Before replacing the support
tubing on the Z-rod:
a. Guide each ILID cable through the Z-rods and
connect to each TIP-ADAPT board.
b. Guide the pipetting tubing through the Z-rods and
connect each one to their respective tips.
Verification
• Flush tips sequentially to verify tubing routing through
Genesis Setup and Service <System>, <Devices>,
<Dilutor>.
• Tip Adapter Test
• Check reference position
• Liquid Detection test
• Lower DiTi Eject test
• Precision test
• m2000sp calibrations (LiHa)
• The following M&Ds from Section 5:
– Dispense Test 50 µL, Gravimetric on page 5–23
– LiHa DiTi Location Test on page 5–12
– Sample Extraction Test on page 5–37

200942-103—September 2007
Electronic Boards and Cables
DC-Servo
D-C Servo Power
Figure 9.36: LiHa DC-Servo and Power PCB
LiHa Backplane Board

sensitive devices.
Figure 9.37: LiHa Backplane PCB

200942-103—September 2007
Removal
2. Remove instrument rear panel.
3. Unplug X-drive Power Cable and Lower DiTi Eject power
cable from the backplane board. Remove the boards
housing cover (four screws - M2). Refer to Figure 9.26:
X-motor Cable Connection on page 9–33 for details.
4. Remove the DC-Servo boards and DC-Servo Power board.
Keep the DC-Servo boards in order because each board has
a unique address.
5. Remove the boards housing from the back of the LiHa
(four screws - M2.5).
9-14
9-13
9-17
9-16
9-15
9-13 DC-Servo Power board 9-16 Boards housing

9-14 DC-Servo board 9-17 LiHa backplane
9-15 Boards housing cover
Figure 9.38: LiHa DC-Servo Boards
6. Disconnect the ILID board flat cable and all Y-motor and
Z-motor cables from the LiHa board backplane board and
lower DiTi Eject Assembly cable (J3).

200942-103—September 2007
7. Remove the six screws (M2.5) holding the LiHa backplane

board onto the bracket. Remove the backplane.
Installation
1. Ensure the bus termination switch is set to on.
2. Attach the LiHa backplane board to the bracket with six
screws (M2.5).
3. Connect the ILID board flat cable and all Y-motor and
Z-motor cables to the backplane board, and the Lower DiTi
Eject Assembly cable to J3.
NOTE: The cable connectors and board
connections are labeled. Be sure to install the
cables in the correct order. Refer to Table 9.2:
Board Positions on page 9–48.
4. Install the boards housing to the back of the LiHa with
four screws (M2.5).
5. Install the DC-Servo boards and DC-Servo Power board in
the correct order.
6. Attach the boards housing cover with four screws (M2).
Verification
• Check reference position
• Liquid Detection test
• Lower DiTi Eject test
• Precision test

200942-103—September 2007
DC-Servo Boards, DC-Servo Power Board

sensitive devices.
Removal
2. Remove the LiHa from the instrument, or if access to the
rear of the instrument is available, remove the instrument
back cover. Refer to Complete LiHa Assembly on page
9–40.
3. Refer to Figure 9.38: LiHa DC-Servo Boards on page 9–44:
• Remove the boards housing cover (9-15), (four
screws).
• Remove the appropriate DC-Servo board (9-14) or the
DC-Servo Power board (9-13).
Large, Brown
Resistor
Figure 9.39: LiHa DC-Servo Power PCB

200942-103—September 2007
Green Resistor
Figure 9.40: LiHa Servo PCB
NOTE: The DC-Servo Power board is not the same

board as the DC-Servo boards. Therefore, they
cannot be exchanged. With the connector facing
toward you, note the size and color of the resistor
on the left corner of the board. The resistor on the
DC-Servo Power board has a higher resistance and
is brown; the resistor on the DC-Servo boards is
green.

200942-103—September 2007
Installation
Install in reverse order.
NOTE: Before installing a new DC-Servo board, use a
2 mm flathead screwdriver to dial the correct address
on the address switch of the replacement DC-Servo
board.
Table 9.2: Board Positions
Boarda Address Connection Motor

DC-Servo (position 1) 4 J4 Y1
J5 Y2
DC-Servo (position 2) 3 J6 Z3
J7 Z6
J9 Z2
J11 Z8
J13 Z4
J3 lower DiTi eject
DC-Servo Power 5 J16 X1
(position 6)
a. Positions are denoted top-down
Verification
• Check Each of the Tip Adapters on page 4–58
• Determine LiHa Reference Position on page 4–60
• Perform the Lower DiTi Eject Test on page 4–64
• LiHa Calibrations on page 4–134

200942-103—September 2007
ILID Board
sensitive devices.
Removal
2. Remove the tubing shelf cover, four M2 screws, and left
side cover. Refer to Figure 9.34: LiHa Assembly on page
9–40.
3. Disconnect the ILID board flat cable (J9) and all eight ILID
cables from the ILID board. Refer to Figure 9.35: LiHa
Removal of ILID Cables and Tubing from Z-rod on page
9–41.
C
A B
A ILID board switches C ILID cables (8)

B ILID chips (8)
Figure 9.41: ILID Board
4. Remove the ILID board (four M2.5 screws).

200942-103—September 2007
Installation
Be sure to set the ILID board switches (2 switches) SW1 and
SW2 to eight for the number of tips.
Figure 9.42: ILID Board Switches
Verification
Ensure operating readiness by the following: Perform Liquid
Detection on page 4–127.
ILID Board Flat Cable

sensitive devices.
Removal
2. Remove the left side cover and the tubing shelf cover (9-01
and 9-04 on Figure 9.34: LiHa Assembly on page 9–40)
(eight screws - M2).

200942-103—September 2007
3. Disconnect the ILID board flat cable from the ILID board
(9-12) and LiHa backplane board (9-17) Refer to Figure
9.35: LiHa Removal of ILID Cables and Tubing from Z-rod
on page 9–41 and Figure 9.38: LiHa DC-Servo Boards on
page 9–44.
Installation
Verification
ILID Cable
sensitive devices.
Removal
2. Remove the left side cover (9-01 on Figure 9.34: LiHa
Assembly on page 9–40) (four screws - M2).
3. Refer to Figure 9.35: LiHa Removal of ILID Cables and
Tubing from Z-rod on page 9–41 to do the following:
• Disconnect the ILID cable (9-09) from the TIP-ADAPT
board (9-11) and ILID board (9-12).
• Remove the support tubing (9-07) from the Z-rod
(9-10).
• Remove the ILID cable (9-09) and pipetting tubing
(9-08) from the Z-rod (9-10) and support tubing
(9-07).

200942-103—September 2007
Installation
1. Install in reverse order:
a. Guide the ILID cables through the Z-rods and support
tubing.
b. Guide the aspiration tubes through the Z-rods and
support tubing.
2. Attach the ILID cable to the ILID board (Tip Connector,
NOT Piezo connector) and TIP-ADAPT board (J1).
3. Attach the left side cover to the LiHa with four screws
(M2).
Verification
Y-belt
Removal
1. Switch the instrument off.
2. Remove the LiHa from the instrument (refer to Complete
LiHa Assembly on page 9–40).
3. Remove the left side cover and the tubing shelf cover (9-01
and 9-04 on Figure 9.34: LiHa Assembly on page 9–40)
(eight screws - M2).
4. Refer to Step 9.43 below.
• Remove the Y DC-Servo motor (four screws) or
Y-spreading DC-Servo motor (four screws) to slacken
the Y-belt.

200942-103—September 2007
• Cut tie wraps if necessary.
9-18 9-19
9-20
9-18 Y-belt 9-20 Y-spreading DC-Servo

9-19 Y DC-Servo motor motor
Figure 9.43: LiHa Y-belt Removal
5. Remove the Y-belt lock from the Y-slide (two screws - M2)
and take the Y-belt out of the LiHa.
9-21
9-22
9-23

200942-103—September 2007
9-21 Y-slide 9-23 Y-belt

9-22 Y-belt lock
Figure 9.44: LiHa Y-belt Assembly
6. Open the Y-belt lock and remove the belt.
LiHa Y-belt Locks
Figure 9.45: LiHa Y-belt Locks
Installation
1. Install in reverse order. Belt length is 1290 mm/50.8 in.
2. Insert the Y-belt assembly into the arm belt lock and close.
3. Insert the Y-belt assembly into the LiHa. Do not attach the
Y-belt to the motor pulley at this time.
4. Move the Y-belt and lock into position on the Y-slide.
5. Pull the Y-belt over the Y-motor pulley.
6. Manually tighten the Y-belt by moving the Y-DC-Servo
motor assembly.
7. Tighten the four screws securing the motor assembly.
8. Install the cover.
9. Install the LiHa.
Verification
• Determine LiHa Range on page 4–60

200942-103—September 2007

5–40

200942-103—September 2007
Y-motors (Y-DC-Servo or Y-spreading)

sensitive devices.
Removal
1. Remove the LiHa from the instrument. Refer to Complete
LiHa Assembly on page 9–40 for details.
9-19
9-20
9-19 Y DC-Servo motor 9-20 Y-spreading DC-Servo

motor
Figure 9.46: LiHa Y-motors
2. Remove the boards housing (four screws - M2.5) from the

rear of the LiHa. Disconnect the motor cable from the
backplane.
3. Remove the Y-belt as previously described; refer to Y-belt
on page 9–52.
4. Remove the tie wraps to free the cables.
5. Remove the Y-DC-Servo motor or Y-spreading DC-Servo
motor by unscrewing the four screws (2.5 mm Allen key).
6. Remove the pinion gear.
Installation
2. Install the pinion gear onto the motor.

200942-103—September 2007
3. Place the new Y-DC-Servo motor assembly onto the LiHa

and insert the screws. Do not tighten the screws. Ensure
the attachment encoder head points to the correct
direction. Refer to Figure 9.46: LiHa Y-motors on page
9–56.
4. Insert the Y-belt as previously described; refer to Y-belt on
page 9–52.
5. Connect the motor cable to the backplane.
6. Install the boards housing (four screws - M2.5) to the rear
of the LiHa.
Verification
• LiHa Range calibration reference position calibration
• CAN-BUS Resistance test
5–40

200942-103—September 2007
Drive Shaft/Pinion Gear (square or star-shaped)

sensitive devices.
NOTE: If replacement of one drive shaft/pinion gear is
required, replace the other seven at the same time
regardless of condition.
Removal
1. Remove the LiHa from the instrument. Refer to Complete
LiHa Assembly on page 9–40 for details.
2. Remove the screw of the front bushing of the Z-axis drive
shaft/pinion gear to be replaced. See Figure 9.47 below.
Screw
Bushing
Figure 9.47: Front bushings
3. Remove the bushing.

200942-103—September 2007
4. Loosen the coupling’s set screw and remove the drive

shaft. See Figure 9.48 below.
A Set screw
B Drive shaft
C Retainer screws
Figure 9.48: Drive shaft removal
5. Spread the Z-rods to access the screws of the retainers.

If accessing a screw is difficult, disengage the pin (A
below) of the spreading links from the Z-rod by sliding
the Z-rod down and removing it from the Z-guide. This
will allow the Z-guide to move more freely.
A Pin
B Slot
C Z-guide
Figure 9.49: Spreading link pin

200942-103—September 2007
6. Remove the retainer screw and then the retainer.
A Retainer screw
B Retainer
C Z-rod
Figure 9.50: Retainer and Z-rod
7. Remove the tip adapter from the Z-rod:

a. Remove the DiTi.
b. Remove the cover from the TIP-ADAPT board and
disconnect the ILID cable from the TIP-ADAPT board.
c. Remove the set screw holding the tip adapter to the
Z-rod.
Set screw
ILID cable
Figure 9.51: Tip adapter removal
d. Hold on to the Z-rod with one hand and carefully pull

out the tip adapter from the bottom of the Z-rod.
8. Pull the Z-rod out of the Z-guide until the gear is no longer
engaged.

200942-103—September 2007
9. Extract the pinion gear Z-axis together with the ball

bearings.
Z-rod guide
Pinion gear
Z-axis
Figure 9.52: Pinion gear Z-axis
10. Repeat the above process for the remaining seven drive
shaft/pinion gears.
Installation
Install the drive shaft and pinion gear Z-axis in reverse order of
removal. However, be mindful of the following:
• Do not lubricate the parts.
• Do not apply force when pushing in the Z-rod; turn the
pinion gear Z-axis in such a way that it engages properly
in the Z-rod.
• If the spreading link pin was removed, make sure it is
properly reinstalled in the slot of the Z-rod.
Verification
• Determine LiHa Range on page 4–60
• Calibrate the Lower DiTi Eject on page 4–63
• Perform the Lower DiTi Eject Test on page 4–64
• Y-Spread Procedure on page 4–67

200942-103—September 2007

• Sample Extraction Test on page 5–37

200942-103—September 2007
Section 9 DiTi Mechanism
DiTi Mechanism
sensitive devices.
these procedures.
DiTi Adapter (DiTi Spare Set) Replacement
(Type B)
Figure 9.53: DiTi Gripping Mechanism Assembly

200942-103—September 2007
Please Note
If your instrument was installed prior to
April 2007 and DOES NOT bear the label
shown here, refer to White Separator Ring
and Black O-ring Assembly on page 9–67
before performing the DiTi Adapter
Replacement.
Removal
1. Switch off the instrument and open the front safety panel.
2. Manually move up all Z-racks until they touch lightly,
then move the entire assembly toward the front of the
instrument. Spread the Z-racks completely apart.
3. Loosen the DiTi cone with the supplied wrench. Support
the tip adapter while loosening the cone.
NOTE: If the adapter cylinder within the black tip
ejector tube turns instead of the DiTi cone
(preventing DiTi cone removal), refer to Removal
of DiTi Cone with Loose Adapter Cylinder below.
4. Remove the DiTi cone and ejector tube.
5. Remove the O-ring.
6. Pull out the tubing extension and disconnect the tubing.
7. Unscrew and remove the adapter cylinder.
Removal of DiTi Cone with Loose Adapter Cylinder

If the adapter cylinder turns instead of the DiTi cone, the cone
cannot be removed because the dispense tubing inside of the
adapter cylinder will not rotate freely. Additionally, the
adapter cylinder cannot be tightened in this position because
the tip ejector tube completely covers it. Using a pliers,
perform the following steps to correct this situation.

200942-103—September 2007
1. Place the pliers on the tip ejector tube over the knurled
portion of the adapter cylinder, which will be found just
below the rectangular tip adapter.
2. Gently squeeze the pliers.
NOTE: If the pliers are not placed over the knurled
surface, they will not prevent the cylinder from
spinning regardless of the pressure applied.
3. Place the DiTi cone wrench on the DiTi cone.
Figure 9.54: Pliers and DiTi Wrench Positioned Correctly
4. Rotate DiTi wrench clockwise while holding the pliers in

place. Do NOT turn the pliers.
5. If the DiTi cone does not loosen, increase tension on the
pliers while turning the DiTi wrench.
6. When the DiTi cone is successfully removed, return to
Step 4 of Removal above.
Installation
1. Pull the pipetting tubing approximately 10 cm out of the
tip adapter.
2. Screw the adapter cylinder (knurled part up) onto the tip
adapter. Finger tighten only.

200942-103—September 2007
3. Push the conical (blank) part of the tubing extension

6 to 8 mm into the tubing. Support the dispense tubing
while inserting the tubing extension. This will prevent
damage to the dispense tubing caused by exceeding the
tubing bend radius. Insert the tubing into the adapter
cylinder.
NOTE: The pipetting tubing has a bend radius of
approximately 13 mm. Do not exceed the bend
radius of the pipetting tubing during insertion of
the tubing extension.
4. Slide the O-ring (red) onto the tubing extension until it is
touching the barrel.
Figure 9.55: Proper O-ring Positioning
NOTE: No separator ring is used with the red

O-ring. Do NOT install a separator ring.
5. Slide the Ejector tube, grooved-end up, over the adapter
cylinder and secure with the DiTi cone.
6. Tighten carefully with the supplied cone wrench.

200942-103—September 2007
White Separator Ring and Black O-ring Assembly
Separator ring
(white)
O-ring (black)
When you install the new-style red O-ring, DO NOT

reinstall the white separator ring. The red O-ring is designed
to replace both the separator ring and the black O-ring.

200942-103—September 2007
Lower DiTi Eject Option
Spare Parts
The following items are available:
• Lower DiTi eject option
• Solenoid
Removal of DiTi Eject Option

1. Remove the front and right LiHa covers.
1 Z-rod #3
2 Fixing screw bearing

block
3 Lower DiTi eject option
4 Fixing screw rocker

assembly
2 5 Solenoid
6 Fixing screw solenoid

19 holder
3
7 Solenoid cable
7
19 Bearing block
6 4
Figure 9.56: Removal of Lower DiTi Eject Option
2. Disconnect the solenoid cable (7) from the socket J3 on

the backplane and free the cable from cable holders and
velcro tape.

200942-103—September 2007
3. Unscrew the fixing screw (4) from the housing of the third
Z-rod (1).
4. Unscrew fixing screws (6) and (2) then remove the
complete lower DiTi eject option assembly.
Installation of DiTi Eject Option

NOTE: Verify the solenoid holder screws (6) are
tightened.
2. Perform the Rocker Adjustment Procedure on page 9–71.
Verification
• Calibrate Lower DiTi eject.
• Perform the Lower DiTi Eject test.
• Perform m2000sp Calibration (LiHa)
Removal of Solenoid
1. Remove the front and right LiHa covers.
2. Disconnect the solenoid cable (7 on Figure 9.56: Removal
of Lower DiTi Eject Option on page 9–68) from the socket
J3 on the backplane and free the cable from cable holders
and velcro tape.

200942-103—September 2007
3. Open and remove the link lock (9).
14
13 10
12 11
8 Solenoid 12 Solenoid fixing unit

9 Link lock 13 Solenoid holder
10 Solenoid fork 14 Washer
11 Fixing nut
Figure 9.57: Removal of Solenoid
4. Remove the clamp securing the solenoid cable to the front

face of the LiHa.
5. Remove the two screws securing the solenoid holder to the
LiHa.
6. Remove the solenoid fork (10) and fixing nut (11).
7. Loosen the solenoid fixing nut (12), remove solenoid (8)
from the solenoid holder (13).
Installation of Solenoid
NOTE: Verify the solenoid holder screws are
tightened.
2. Connect the solenoid cable to the backplane.
3. Verify that the thin part of the lever is approximately in
the center of the fork and is at a 90-degree angle to the
drive shaft. When pushing the drive shaft in the
Y-direction (to the front and rear), notice that the lever
does not touch the fork on the left or right.
4. Perform the Rocker Adjustment Procedure on page 9–71.
Verification

200942-103—September 2007
• Calibrate Lower DiTi Eject

• Perform the Lower DiTi Eject test
Rocker Adjustment Procedure

Perform the Rocker Adjustment Procedure:
• after installation of the solenoid or complete Lower DiTi
Eject option replacement
• whenever the rocker touches the Z-rods on the LiHa
• if DiTis are not ejected
Solenoid
Fixing nut
Figure 9.58: Solenoid
1. Manually pull back the solenoid axle to check the distance

between the rocker assembly (15) and Z-rods (1) No part of
the rocker assembly can touch the Z-rods at any time.
NOTE: In the eject position, the overlapping
distance between the rocker nose and tip adapter
must be between 2 to 3 mm.

200942-103—September 2007
15
1 Z-rod 15 Rocker assembly
Figure 9.59: Rocker Adjustment

200942-103—September 2007
2. If necessary, adjust the overlap between the rocker nose

and tip adapter by means of the set screw (16) on the
rocker stop.
• Turn the set screw clockwise to decrease the overlap.
• Turn the set screw counterclockwise to increase the
overlap.
18
17
16
16 Rocker assembly
17 Rocker shaft
18 Moving lever guide
Figure 9.60: Rocker Assembly
NOTE: The rocker is adjusted horizontally, not

vertically.
3. Loosen the fixing nut.
Solenoid
Fixing nut
Figure 9.61: Solenoid Assembly

200942-103—September 2007
4. Reduce the clearance between rocker shaft (17) and

moving lever guide (18) to an absolute minimum (until
almost touching).
• Turn the solenoid axle clockwise to reduce the
clearing until the rocker moves away from the moving
lever guide.
• Turn only ½ turn counterclockwise.
5. Tighten the fixing nut (11) at the solenoid fork.
Verification
• Verify/adjust the LiHa reference positions
• Perform m2000sp Calibrations (LiHa)
• Calibrate Lower DiTi Eject
• Perform the Lower DiTi Eject test
• The rocker must not touch the Z-rods on the LiHa. If it
does, re-perform the rocker adjustment.

200942-103—September 2007
Tip Adapter
sensitive devices.
NOTE: G-series instruments use Type B tip adapters
only. G-series and E-series tip adapters are not
interchangeable. (E-series models use Type D tip
adapters.)
Removal
1. Remove the DiTi adapter.
2. Remove the cover from the TIP-ADAPT board and
disconnect the ILID cable from the TIP-ADAPT board.
3. Remove the set screw (1.5 M) holding the tip adapter to
the Z-rod.
Figure 9.62: Tip Adapter Removal
4. Hold on to the Z-rod with one hand and carefully pull out
the tip adapter from the bottom of the Z-rod.
Installation
1. Slide the Type B tip adapter up into the bottom of the
Z-rod until the shoulder of the tip adapter shaft (below the
alignment hole) is flush with the base of the Z-rod.
2. Align the screw hole in the tip adapter shaft with the set
screw hole in the Z-rod and secure the tip adapter to the
Z-rod with the set screw.

200942-103—September 2007
3. Connect the ILID cable to J1 of the TIP-ADAPT board and

replace the cover.
Type B tip
adapter
Figure 9.63: Tip Adapter Shaft
4. Install the Diti adapter.
Verification
• Perform the M&D Sample Extraction Test on page 5–37.
See Section 5, Maintenance and Diagnostic Procedures,

200942-103—September 2007
Section 9 Robotic Manipulator Arm (RoMa Standard)
Robotic Manipulator Arm (RoMa Standard)

sensitive devices.
these procedures.
Special Tools
• Mounting bracket
• RoMa reference tip
• Black test plate
Overview
The m2000sp uses the RoMa Standard assembly. The RoMa
Standard and Long assemblies use common parts and either
can be shown for illustration purposes.

200942-103—September 2007
RoMa Standard Parts

14 Roma long
14-02 Centric gripper
14-07 (m2000sp uses eccentric)
14-03 Gripper module*
(include gripper)
14-18 14-04 Gripper board
14-11
14-05 Rotator motor
14-07 Gripper/rotator flex
14-17 cables
14-16 14-14 14-08 Z/G-DC-Servo board
14-15 14-09 Y/R-DC-Servo board
14-09
14-10 RoMa 2 backplane
14-11 Y-belt
14-10 14-12 Z-motor
14-08 14-13 Y-motor
14-14 Z-brake
14-15 Y-flex cable
14-16 RoMa Freedom
14-13
backplane
14-12 14-07
14-17 Device CU
14-05
14-18 X-DC-Servo power
board
14-03 * The actual part “gripper

module” (14-03) includes the
eccentric grippers (14-01), not
eccentric grippers (14-02)
14-02
Figure 9.64: RoMa Long Parts
Eccentric Gripper
The spare part designated “Eccentric Gripper” (14-01) is a set
that includes the following components:
• One long gripper finger (14-21)
• One short gripper finger (14-22)

200942-103—September 2007
Shoulder Flat-head screw

screw
14-21
14-22
Figure 9.65: Eccentric Gripper
RoMa Backplane, Device CU, and X-DC-Servo Board
14-17
14-18
14-16
14-16RoMa Freedom backplane 14-18X-DC-Servo power board

14-17Device CU
Figure 9.66: RoMa Standard, RoMa Long Electronic Boards at

Rear

200942-103—September 2007
For the Purpose of this Manual

The designation RoMa stands for RoMa Standard or RoMa
Long.
• The procedures for removing and installing parts of the
RoMa described below apply to both the RoMa Standard
and RoMa Long, unless otherwise noted.
• The illustrations usually show the RoMa Standard.
Ensuring Operating Readiness
Purpose
Most procedures described in this section require the entire
RoMa to be removed before a damaged part can be replaced.
Therefore, adjustments and tests described below must be
performed after reinstallation.
Required Special Tools

• Reference tip
• Test plate
Adjustments, Tests
1. Adjust the RoMa mechanically as described in Mechanical
Adjustment after Reinstallation on page 9–83.
2. Perform the CAN-BUS Resistance test if the RoMa Freedom
backplane, located at the rear, was replaced.
If the RoMa was removed or a new RoMa was installed,
perform Genesis Setup and Service RoMa Calibrations,
and m2000sp calibrations.
3. Perform the Rotator Test in Setup and Service.
4. Perform the following M&D checks from Section 5:
• RoMa DiTi Rack Test on page 5–27
• RoMa DiTi Shelf Test on page 5–29
After Finishing
1. Reinstall all covers that were removed.
2. Close service doors and X-bay covers.

200942-103—September 2007
3. Return objects that were removed to the worktable.

4. Start the m2000sp in operating mode.
Complete RoMa
Removal
Perform the following steps to remove the RoMa (14).
14-34
14-27
14-28
14
14-33 14-31
14-32
14-29
14-30
14-01
14 RoMa 14-31X-support
14-27Mounting bracket 14-32X-slide
14-28Guide rollers 14-33X-shaft
14-29Support roller 14-34X-flex cable
14-30Guide rail at front
Figure 9.67: Removing the RoMa

2. Manually move the LiHa to the left side of the instrument.
3. Manually move the RoMa to the middle of the
instrument.
4. Remove the gripper fingers.
5. Unplug the X-flex cable (14-34) and remove it from the
cable holder at the rear of the RoMa. Unplug the X-drive
cable from the backplane board.

200942-103—September 2007
Figure 9.68: RoMa X-flex Cable and Clamp
6. Unscrew the X-support (14-31) from the X-slide (14-32)

(four screws).
Figure 9.69: X-support and X-slide
7. Carefully lift the RoMa out of the guide rail (14-30) and off
the X-slide (14-32).

200942-103—September 2007
Installation
1. Clean the contact surface of the guide rail, and the guide
rollers and support roller with a lint-free tissue and a small
amount of ethyl alcohol.
2. Insert the mounting bracket to press the guide rollers
(14-28) apart.
Figure 9.70: RoMa Mounting Bracket
3. Install the RoMa onto the guide rail and onto the X-slide.
4. Insert the four screws, but do not completely tighten.
5. Remove the mounting bracket.
Verification
Refer to Ensuring Operating Readiness on page 9–141 for
details.
Mechanical Adjustment after Reinstallation
Purpose
After the RoMa is installed, it must be aligned with the guide
pins on the worktable. The purpose of this alignment is to
ensure the RoMa runs parallel to the guide pins when it moves
in the Y-axis. (rear ↔ front).

200942-103—September 2007
Installing the Reference Tip

14-35
14-36
14-37
14-38
14-39
14-40
14-41
14-35Z-rods 14-39Gripper finger support

14-36Z-spindle 14-40Protruding screw
14-37Gripper module head 14-41Reference tip
14-38Screws for positioning gripper
finger supports manually
Figure 9.71: Fixing the Reference Tip to the Gripper Module
1. Move the RoMa gripper module head (14-37) by its Z-rods

(14-35) to above the front center of the worktable.
2. Insert the reference tip (14-41) between the two gripper
finger supports (14-39).
• The protruding screw (14-40) must be on the side of
the screws (14-38).
• Turn one of the screws (14-38) until the reference tip
can be inserted between the gripper finger supports
(14-39).

200942-103—September 2007
3. Fix the reference tip (14-41) to the gripper module head

(14-37) by turning one of the screws (14-38) in the
opposite direction. Ensure the reference tip (14-41) is
firmly held by the gripper finger supports (14-39).
Figure 9.72: RoMa Grip
Alignment in Y-axis
1. Pull the gripper module head (14-37) downward.
14-37
14-41
14-42
Figure 9.73: Positioning the Reference Tip
2. Move the reference tip (14-41) close to the right edge of a

guide pin (14-42) in the third row from the front on the
worktable. Distance from guide pin is approximately
0.2 mm.

200942-103—September 2007
3. Firmly hold the X-slide with one hand (item 14-32 in

Figure 9.67: Removing the RoMa on page 9–81). Ensure
the RoMa cannot move in the X-axis during the following
test.
NOTE: The move tool under System Devices >
RoMa can also be used to move the RoMa in the
Y-direction. This ensures there is no movement in
the X-direction.
14-41
14-42
02
Figure 9.74: Checking the Distance Guide Pin/Reference Tip
4. Pull the RoMa gripper module head in the Y-axis (from

rear to front) past three guide pins (14-42) toward the
front of the instrument.
The distance between the guide pins (14-42) and
reference tip (14-41) must not exceed 0.2 mm.

200942-103—September 2007
Alignment in Y-axis (Continued)

1. Use the set screws (14-43) and (14-46) to adjust the
moving direction of the RoMa.
14-45 14-48
14-47
14-46
14-43
14-44
14-43Left set screw M4 x 10 14-46Right set screw M4 x 10

14-44Left fixing screw M4 x 12 14-47Right fixing screw M4 x 12
14-45Left fixing screw M3 x 10 14-48Right fixing screw M3 x 10
Figure 9.75: Fixing and Adjusting Screws on X-support
2. If the RoMa drifts to the right, turn the right set screw
(14-43) to correct.
3. If the RoMa drifts to the left, turn the left set screw (14-46)
to correct.
4. Repeat steps 1 through 3 until the RoMa Standard moves
parallel to the guide pins.

200942-103—September 2007
5. Tighten the fixing screws when finished; refer to Figure

9.71: Fixing the Reference Tip to the Gripper Module on
page 9–84.
0.2 mm
0.5 mm
0.2 mm
0 mm
Figure 9.76: Correction of Drifts
6. Remove the reference pin (14-41).

7. Install the grippers.
8. Connect the X-flex cable (14-34) and X-drive cable to the
RoMa backplane board.
Verification
details.

200942-103—September 2007
Grippers
Removal
The RoMa gripper set includes:
• 2 gripper fingers of different lengths
– Short gripper finger: 131 mm
– Long gripper finger: 161 mm (has oblong hole
4.2 mm for height adjustment)
• 2 screws
– 1 shoulder-head screw for the short finger
– 1 flat-head screw for the long finger
• 2 pieces of 3M foam tape (for the reference plate)
Flat-head screw
14-38 14-21
Shoulder screw
14-22
14-21Long gripper finger 14-38Screws for moving gripper fin-

14-22Short gripper finger gers manually
Figure 9.77: Gripper Fingers
Removal
Loosen the screws and unscrew the long (14-21) and short
(14-22) gripper fingers.
NOTE: Ensure the shoulder screw stays with the short
finger and the flat-head stays with the long finger.

200942-103—September 2007
Installation
1. Install the short gripper finger (14-22) and tighten the
shoulder screw. Ensure it is installed on the correct side as
illustrated in Figure 9.77 above.
2. Position the long gripper finger (14-21) and fasten it
slightly using the flat-head screw.
Verification
• Perform all required RoMa S&S calibrations per this
manual and the latest version of ISA 605-002, including:
– Determine RoMa Reference Positions on page 4–78 of
Section 4
– Determine Range on page 4–81
– Adjust the Rotator on page 4–82
– Manual RoMa Rotator Adjustments on page 4–83
• Perform all RoMa m2000sp calibrations per ISA 605-002;
refer to RoMa Calibrations on page 4–157
• Perform the following M&Ds:
– RoMa DiTi Rack Test on page 5–27 of Section 5
– RoMa DiTi Shelf Test on page 5–29
– RoMa 1 mL Carrier Test on page 5–30

200942-103—September 2007
Adjust Gripper Fingers

1. Check the parallelism of the arms by placing the reference
plate on the deck.
Use the RoMa move tool to position the RoMa arms
directly over the plate, with the grippers open to the
width of the plate.
Figure 9.78: RoMa Positioned Over the Plate
2. If the distance of each gripper finger from the worktable is

not equal, adjust the height:
• Eccentric grippers: Long gripper finger
• Tolerance limit: 0.5 to 1 mm
3. Tighten the fixing screw of the respective gripper finger
when finished.
4. Perform the RoMa Reference Plate test.

200942-103—September 2007
Gripper Board
Overview
14-56
14-57
14-58
14-06
14-54
14-55
14-67 14-04
14-59 14-62
14-60 14-66
14-63
14-0514-69
14-64
14-65
14-68
14-03 14-53
14-22
14-52
14-37 14-21
14-03Gripper module (include grip- 14-55Gripper/rotator flex cables

pers!) clamp
14-04Gripper board 14-56Gripper/rotator flex cables
14-05Rotator motor protection bracket
14-06Gripper/rotator flex cables 14-57Fixing screw (cable protec-
14-21Long gripper finger tion) M3 x 5
14-22Short gripper finger 14-58Gripper/rotator flex cable pro-
14-37Gripper module head tection foil
14-52Rotator cover 14-59 Gripper motor cable
14-53Fixing screws M2.5 x 6 14-60Cable connector
14-54Gripper/rotator flex cables 14-62Rotator motor cable
holder bracket 14-63Cap nut
14-64O-ring
14-65
Figure 9.79: Overview of Rotator and Gripper Modules

200942-103—September 2007
Remove Gripper Board

sensitive devices.
Unplug Cables
1. Unscrew the three screws (1.5M) that secure the rotator
cover (14-52).
NOTE: Refer to Figure 9.79: Overview of Rotator
and Gripper Modules on page 9–92 for details.
Figure 9.80: RoMa Rotator Cover

200942-103—September 2007
2. Remove the gripper/rotator flex cables clamps (14-55) by

removing two screws (1.5M).
A Flex cable C Holder bracket

B Clamp
Figure 9.81: RoMa Flex Cable and Clamp
3. Unscrew the two screws (2.5M) that secure the

gripper/rotator flex cables holder bracket (14-54).
4. Disconnect the gripper/rotator flex cables from the gripper
board (14-04).
• for RoMa Long: (14-07)
Figure 9.82: RoMa Rotator and Gripper Flex Cables

200942-103—September 2007
5. Disconnect the rotor motor cable (14-62).
Figure 9.83: RoMa Rotator Gripper Motor Cables
6. Disconnect the gripper motor cable (14-59).
Extract Wires
Use the crimp release tool to extract individual wires from the
connector (14-60). Be careful to not damage the contact
bushes (14-61). Refer to Figure 9.79: Overview of Rotator and
Gripper Modules on page 9–92 for details.
14-60
14-61
" !
$ #
& %
Figure 9.84: Gripper Motor Cable Plug

200942-103—September 2007
Remove Gripper Board

NOTE: Refer to Figure 9.79: Overview of Rotator and
Gripper Modules on page 9–92 for details
1. Remove the cap nut (14-63), O-ring (14-64), and bushing
(14-65).
Figure 9.85: RoMa Gripper Cap Nut
2. Unscrew and remove the gripper PCB (14-04).
Figure 9.86: Gripper Board
Install Gripper Board

1. Install by performing steps above in reverse order.
2. Reinsert the wires into the connector.

200942-103—September 2007
• Make sure to insert the contact bushes (14-61)

correctly into the housing of the connector (14-60).
• Note the wire colors.
Pin 1 White Pin 2 Not used
Pin 3 Yellow Pin 4 Red
Pin 5 Green Pin 6 Black
Pin 7 Not used Pin 8 Violet
14-60
14-61

" !
$ #
& %
Figure 9.87: Wire Colors
3. Continue installation by performing steps 1 through 6 of

Unplug Cables on page 9–93, in reverse order.
Verification
details.
Gripper Module
Removal
1. Remove the grippers.
2. Remove the gripper board.

200942-103—September 2007
3. With one hand, hold the gripper module. Remove the two
gripper module screws (2.5M) using the other hand.
Figure 9.88: Gripper Module
Figure 9.89: Gripper Module Fixing Screws

200942-103—September 2007
4. Carefully remove the gripper module without damaging

the gripper module cable or losing the O-ring in the
gripper flange.
Figure 9.90: Gripper Module Showing Gripper Cable

200942-103—September 2007
5. With one hand, hold the gripper module. Lead the gripper
cable through the Z-module using the other hand.
Figure 9.91: Gripper Module
Figure 9.92: Gripper Nut Cable Guide
NOTE: Ensure the gripper positioning screws are

within the range of the stop screw mounted in the
motor plate. The gripper module must be able to
move within 280 degrees.

200942-103—September 2007
Figure 9.93: Gripper Module Positioning Screws
Figure 9.94: Flange and Positioning Pins

200942-103—September 2007
6. While still holding the gripper module, insert and tighten

the two gripper module screws (2.5M).
Figure 9.95: Gripper Module Fix Screw
7. Install the gripper board.
Figure 9.96: Gripper Board
8. Install the grippers.
Verification
details.

200942-103—September 2007
Rotator Motor
sensitive devices.
Removal
Refer to Figure 9.79: Overview of Rotator and Gripper Modules
on page 9–92 for details.
1. Remove RoMa and gripper board as previously described
(see pages 9–81 and 9–92).
2. Loosen the gripper module head screws (14-68) to access
the fixing screws (14-69) of the rotator motor (14-05).
Refer to Gripper Board on page 9–92.
3. Unscrew and remove the rotator motor (14-05).
Screws
Figure 9.97: Rotator Motor Screws
Installation
1. Reinstall the rotator motor (14-05).
2. Tighten the gripper module head screws (14-68).
3. Reinstall the gripper board and RoMa.
Verification
details.

200942-103—September 2007
Y-flex Cable
Removal
14-16
14-15
14-10
14-10 RoMa 2 backplane
14-15 Y-flex cable
14-16 RoMa Freedom backplane
1. Remove the left cover of the RoMa (nine screws).

2. Remove one cable clamp located on the inside of the cover
(two screws - M2).
3. Disconnect the Y-flex cable (14-15) from the RoMa 2
backplane (14-10) and RoMa Freedom backplane (14-16).

200942-103—September 2007
A
B
C
D
A Y-flex cable C Z/G-DC-Servo PCB (top)

B Gripper/rotator flex cables D Y/R-DC-Servo PCB (bottom)
E RoMa 2 backplane
Figure 9.99: Y-flex Cable Connected to RoMa 2 Backplane
C
D
A Y-flex cable C Device CU

B RoMa Freedom backplane D X-DC-Servo Power
Figure 9.100: Y-flex Cable Connected to RoMa Freedom

Backplane

200942-103—September 2007
Installation
NOTE: Pleat the new flex cable in the same
manner as the old one.
Figure 9.101:
2. Connect the Y-flex cable to the RoMa 2 backplane and

RoMa Freedom backplane.
3. Install the cable clamp on the inside of the cable with two
screws (M2).

200942-103—September 2007
Gripper/Rotator Flex Cables
General
The gripper/rotator flex cables are two parallel cables—for the
rotator motor and gripper motor—which are connected to the
RoMa backplane and gripper board.
Removal
14-56
14-57
14-08
14-09
14-04 Gripper board

14-06 Gripper/rotator flex cables 14-10
14-08 Z/G-DC-Servo board 14-06
14-09 Y/R-DC- Servo board 14-55
14-10 RoMa 2 backplane 14-54
14-54 G/R flex cables holder bracket 14-04
14-55 G/R flex cables clamps
14-56 Cable protection bracket
14-57 Fixing screw (cable protection)
M3 x 5

200942-103—September 2007
1. Unscrew the three screws (M1.5) that secure the rotator

cover.
Figure 9.103:Rotator Cover
2. Remove the gripper/rotator flex cable clamp by removing

two screws (M1.5).
Figure 9.104:RoMa Flex Cable and Clamp

200942-103—September 2007
3. Unscrew the two screws (M2.5) that secure the

gripper/rotator flex cable holder bracket.
Figure 9.105:Flex Cable Holder Bracket
4. Unscrew six screws and remove the cable protection

bracket (14-56).
5. Remove the Z/G- and Y/R-DC-Servo boards (14-08) and
(14-09).
Need to fix pic
A
C
B
A Z/G-DC-Servo PCB (top) B Y/R-DC-Servo PCB (bot-

tom)
Figure 9.106:DC-Servo Boards
6. Disconnect the gripper/rotator flex cables from the RoMa

2 backplane (14-10) and Gripper board (14-04):
• RoMa Long (14-07)

200942-103—September 2007
Installation
Verification
details.
Y/R- and Z/G-DC-Servo Motor Boards

sensitive devices.
Refer to Figure 9.79: Overview of Rotator and Gripper Modules
on page 9–92 for items not illustrated below.
14-09 14-70
14-08
14-71
14-70
14-08Z/G-DC-Servo board 14-70Connectors gripper/rotator

14-09Y/R-DC-Servo board flex cables
14-71Board retaining clamp
Figure 9.107: Servo Motor Boards

200942-103—September 2007
Removing Boards
1. Remove the left cover (nine screws) and disconnect the
Y-flex cable.
Figure 9.108:DC-Servo Boards
2. Disconnect the gripper/rotator flex cables from the

connectors (14-70) on the RoMa 2 backplane board:
• (14-07) for RoMa Long.
3. Open the board retaining clamp (white-headed push pin)
(14-71).
Need to fix pic
Figure 9.109:RoMa DC-Servo PCB

200942-103—September 2007
4. Carefully remove the Z/G-DC-Servo board (14-08).

CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the
gripper/rotator flex cables when the board is removed.
Leave the Teflon protection foil (14-58 on Figure 9.79:
Overview of Rotator and Gripper Modules on page
9–92) between the flex cable closest to the shafts and
inner Y/R-DC-Servo board until it is removed.
sensitive devices.
5. Open the board retaining clamp (white-headed push pin)
(14-71).
A
A
A RoMa 2 backplane B Teflon protection foil
Figure 9.110:RoMa 2 Backplane Teflon
6. Carefully remove the DC-Servo motor board (14-09) from

the Y-motor.

200942-103—September 2007
Installing the Boards

1. Verify the address switches are set correctly:
• Switch for Y/R-DC-Servo board (14-09, inner board) is
address 6
• Switch for Z/G-DC-Servo board (14-08, outer board) is
address 7
! " #
$
% & ')
.
! " # * + ,-
$
% & ')
.
* + ,-
! " #
$
% & ')
.
* + ,-
Figure 9.111: Addresses on DC-Servo Motor Boards

NOTE: Be careful when installing the
Y/R-DC-Servo board. The fit is very tight. Ensure
the pins are aligned with the connector on the
backplane. Remember to depress the board
retaining clamp (white-headed push pin) when
sliding in the board.
NOTE: The Y/R-DC-Servo board is installed solder-
side up.
Verification
details.

200942-103—September 2007
RoMa 2 Backplane
sensitive devices.
Removal
1. Remove the left cover (nine screws).
2. Disconnect six cables from the RoMa 2 backplane (14-10).
14-09
14-10
14-73
14-08
14-70
14-72
14-73 14-74
14-08Z/G-DC-Servo board 14-72Connector for Y-flex cable

14-09/Y/R-DC-Servo board 14-73Fixing screws (backplane)
14-10RoMa 2 backplane 14-74Spacer
14-70Connectors Gripper/rotator
flex cables
Figure 9.112: Servo Motor Board

200942-103—September 2007

(14-09) according to Y/R- and Z/G-DC-Servo Motor Boards
on page 9–110.
RoMa 2
backplane
Z/G-DC-Servo
board
Figure 9.113:RoMa 2 Backplane and Z/G-DC-Servo Board
4. Unscrew two screws (2.5M) and remove the RoMa 2

backplane (14-10).
Figure 9.114:RoMa 2 Backplane
Figure 9.115:Y/R-DC-Servo Board and Roma 2 Backplane

200942-103—September 2007
Figure 9.116:Teflon Sheet
Installation
Perform steps above in reverse order:
• Install the RoMa 2 backplane.
• Install the Z/G- and Y/R-DC-Servo boards.
• Connect six cables to the Roma 2 backplane.
Verification
details.

200942-103—September 2007
Y-belt
Removal
1. Remove the RoMa. Refer to Complete RoMa on page 9–81.
14-77
14-75 14-80
14-11
14-79
14-78
14-11 Y-belt 14-78 Belt lock

14-75Y-pulley (M1.5) 14-79 Belt fixing screw (M2)
14-77Y-belt lock fixing screw 14-80 Belt tensioning screw (not
(M1.5 x 6) directly visible) M2 x 12
Figure 9.117:Y-belt (Front)
2. Loosen the Y-belt lock fixing screw (1.5M) (14-77).
Figure 9.118:Belt Fix Screw

200942-103—September 2007
3. Remove the belt tensioning screw (M2) (14-80) and belt

lock (14-78).
Figure 9.119:Belt Tensioning Screw (14-80)
4. Loosen the belt fixing screws (M2) (14-79) and remove the
front end of the Y-belt.
Figure 9.120:Belt Fixing Screw (14-79)

200942-103—September 2007
5. Loosen the screws (M2) (14-82) at the rear until the rear
end of the Y-belt (14-11) can be removed.
Figure 9.121:End Fixing Screws
6. Pull out the Y-belt (14-11).

14-81
14-82
14-11
14-11 Y-belt 14-82 Fixing screw M3 x 8

14-81 Fixing plate
Figure 9.122:Y-Belt

200942-103—September 2007
Installation
14-11 14-75 14-77 14-80

14-82
14-81
14-79
14-78 14-11
14-11 Y-belt 14-79Belt fixing screw (M2)

14-75Y-pulley 14-80Belt tensioning screw (not
14-77Y-belt lock fixing screw (M1.5 directly visible) (M2 x 12)
x 6) 14-81Fixing plate
14-78Belt lock 14-82Fixing screw (M2 x 8)
Figure 9.123: Fixing the Y-belt at the Front and Rear
1. Lead the Y-belt around the Y-belt pulley.

2. Route the Y-belt through the RoMa.
3. Fix the Y-belt (14-11) at the rear as illustrated on the right
side of Step 9.123 above.
4. Fix the Y-belt (14-11) at the front as illustrated on the left
side of Step 9.123 above.
Figure 9.124:RoMa Y-belt Motor

200942-103—September 2007
5. Tension the Y-belt by turning the screw (14-80).

6. Secure with the Y-belt lock-fixing screw (14-77) when
finished.
7. Manually move the module back and forth to verify the
Y-belt is assembled correctly.
8. Install the RoMa into the instrument.
Verification
details.
Y-motor
Removal
14-77 14-80
14-11 14-83 14-75
14-10
14-87
14-12
14-90
14-88 14-79
14-78
14-89 14-89
14-10RoMa 2 backplane 14-79Belt fixing screw (M2)

14-11 Y-belt 14-80Belt tensioning screw (not
14-12Y-motor directly visible) (M2 x 12)
14-75Y-pulley 14-84Mounting plate
14-76Pulley fixing screw (M1.5) 14-87Y-motor fixing screws M2 x 6
14-77Y-belt lock fixing screw (M1.5 14-88Cable tie
x 6) 14-89Y-motor cable
14-78Belt lock 14-90Z-motor cable
Figure 9.125: Y-motor

200942-103—September 2007
1. Remove the RoMa.
Figure 9.126:RoMa Y-belt Lock Fix Screw
2. Cut the cable tie (14-88) and disconnect the motor cables
(14-89) and (14-90) from the RoMa 2 backplane (14-10).
3. Loosen screws (14-77) and (14-80) until the screws (14-79)
become accessible. This releases the belt tension.
Figure 9.127:RoMa Y-belt Tension Screw

200942-103—September 2007
4. Unscrew the mounting plate (14-83), loosen the pulley

fixing screw (M1.5), and remove the Y-pulley (14-75).
Figure 9.128:RoMa Y-belt Motor
5. Remove the screws (M2) and remove the Y-motor.
Installation
1. Insert the Y-motor. Ensure the encoder head points in the
correct direction.
2. Secure the motor to the RoMa with three fixing screws
(M2).
3. Place the Y-belt pulley over the motor axle. Ensure the flat
sector of the Y-motor axle is perpendicular to the pulley
screw.
4. Install the support plate.
5. Secure and tension the Y-belt.
6. Connect the motor cables to the RoMa 2 backplane.
7. Install the left cover with seven screws.
Verification
details.

200942-103—September 2007
Z-motor
sensitive devices.
Removal
14-09
14-08
14-93 14-92
14-91
14-96 14-10
14-94
14-95
14-13
14-08 Z/G-DC-Servo board 14-92Z-motor support

14-09Y/R-DC-Servo board 14-93Positioning hole
14-10RoMa 2 backplane 14-94Z-motor pinion
14-13Z-motor 14-95Fixing screws (M2.5)
14-91Fixing screws M2 x 6 14-96Mounting holes
Figure 9.129: Z-motor

200942-103—September 2007
1. Remove the RoMa.
2. Disconnect all cables from the RoMa 2 backplane (Z- and

Y-motor and Z-break cables, Y-flex, gripper/rotator flex
cables).
(14-09) according to Y/R- and Z/G-DC-Servo Motor Boards
on page 9–110.
Figure 9.131:Z/G-DC-Servo
Figure 9.132:Y/R DC-Servo

200942-103—September 2007
4. Remove the RoMa 2 backplane according to RoMa 2

Backplane on page 9–114.
Figure 9.134:Teflon Sheet
5. Unscrew three screws and remove the Z-motor assembly.
Figure 9.135:Y- and Z-motors
6. Separate the Z-motor from the Z-motor support by

removing three screws.
Installation
1. Place the replacement Z-motor on the support. Ensure the
motor encoder head points in the correct direction.
2. Insert and tighten the three motor fixing screws.

200942-103—September 2007
3. Place the Z-motor assembly on the Z-drive.

4. Ensure there is approximately 0.1 mm of play between the
pinion and Z-drive gear to prevent damage to the Z-motor
pinion and avoid noise.
5. Tighten the screws.
6. Install the RoMa 2 backplane.
7. Install the Z/G- and Y/R-DC-Servo boards onto the RoMa 2
backplane, ensuring they are installed in the correct order
and orientation.
8. Connect the cables to the RoMa 2 backplane.
9. Install the cover.
Verification
details.

200942-103—September 2007
Z-brake
The old brake assembly featuring the shoe with the curved face
is being phased out. Upon failure, it should be replaced with
BRAKE SOLENOID Z-AXIS COMPLETE ROMA-3 (part number
30027047).
Z-brake Removal
14-100
14-56
14-14
14-98
14-97
14-10
14-14
14-99
14-10 RoMa 2 backplane 14-97Fixing screw

14-14 Z-brake 14-98Z-brake cable
14-56Gripper/rotator flex cables 14-99Brake shoe
protection 14-100 Strain relief
Figure 9.136: Z-brake
1. Disconnect the Z-brake cable (14-98) from the RoMa 2

backplane (14-10). The cable is held by the strain relief
(14-100) near the gripper/rotator flex cables protection
plate (14-56).
A
B
C
A Z-motor cable B Y-motor cable

C Z-brake

200942-103—September 2007
2. Unscrew two screws (M2) and remove the Z-brake (14-14).
Z Brake
Figure 9.138:RoMa Z brake
Z-brake Installation
NOTE: The brake shoe is screwed to the axle and fixed
with the set screw.
NOTE: For replacement of the brake shoe only, refer to
Brake Shoe Replacement on page 9–130 below.
1. Press the brake shoe down to the stop as shown below.
A Brake shoe
B Set screw
C Axle
d = Distance
Figure 9.139:Checking/adjusting the distance
2. Measure the distance between the brake shoe and the

body. The distance must be 7.25 + 0.2 mm (0.285 + 0.008
in).
3. If necessary, adjust the distance as follows:
a. Loosen the set screw.
b. Hold the axle with a pair of pliers and turn the brake
shoe until the distance is correct
c. Carefully tighten the set screw and secure it with
chemical thread lock when the adjustment is done.
4. Install the new Z-brake assembly in reverse order of
Z-brake Removal.

200942-103—September 2007
• Ensure the parts of the Z-brake cable covered with

shrinkable tubing are fixed securely with the cable
clamps, as shown in Figure 9.140 below.
Figure 9.140:Fixation of Z-brake Cable
Verification
Refer to Ensuring Operating Readiness on page 9–141.
Brake Shoe Replacement

IMPORTANT: This procedure can only be performed on
! Z-brake assemblies that already have the flat-faced
brake shoe. Assemblies with the curve-faced brake shoe
must be replaced with part number 30027047.
Subsequent repairs can be carried out using the
procedure below.
1. Access the Z-brake as described above in Z-brake Removal
on page 9–128.
2. Loosen and remove the set screw.
A Brake shoe
B Set screw
C Axle
d = Distance
Figure 9.141:Z-brake assembly
3. Remove the old shoe and spring.

200942-103—September 2007
4. Install the new spring and shoe, and secure with the set
screw.
5. Press the shoe down to the stop and measure the distance
between the brake shoe and the body. The distance must
be 7.25 + 0.2 mm (0.285 + 0.008 in).
6. Adjust as needed by loosening the set screw and turning
the brake shoe to achieve the correct distance.
7. Re-install the assembly as described in Z-brake Installation
on page 9–129.

200942-103—September 2007
RoMa Freedom Backplane

sensitive devices.
Overview
F A
D
E
B
A RoMa Freedom backplane D Board holding pin

B Device CU E End belt fixing screws
C DC-Servo Power F X-flex cable connector
G Y-flex cable connector
Figure 9.142: RoMa Freedom Backplane, CU, and Servo Power

Boards

200942-103—September 2007
Removal
1. Remove the RoMa or, if access allows, remove the back
cover.
Figure 9.143:RoMa Freedom Backplane Device CU, X-DC

Servo Power Boards and Cables
14-104
14-17
14-18
14-103
14-16
14-105
14-16RoMa Freedom backplane 14-103Connector for Y-flex cable

14-17Device CU 14-104Connector for X-flex cable
14-18X-DC-Servo Power board 14-105X-motor cable (not directly visi-
bl )
Figure 9.144: RoMa Freedom Backplane, Device CU, and
X-DC-Servo Power Board

200942-103—September 2007
2. Disconnect all cables from the RoMa Freedom backplane

(14-16):
• Y-flex cable (connector 14-103) J2
• X-flex cable (connector 14-104) J1
• X-motor cable (14-105) J10
3. Depress the two board retaining clamps (white-headed
push pins). Remove the Device CU (14-17) and
X-DC-Servo Power board (14-18).
Figure 9.145:RoMa Freedom Backplane Device CU and X-DC

Servo Power Boards
4. Unscrew and remove the RoMa Freedom backplane (seven

M2.5 screws).

200942-103—September 2007
Installation
1. Set the address to 4 and verify jumper J2 is terminated.
Figure 9.146:RoMa Freedom Backplane Address
2. Install the RoMa Freedom backplane with seven screws

(M2.5)
3. Install the Device CU and X-DC-Servo Power boards.
Secure with board retaining clamps.
4. Reconnect the Y-flex, X-flex, and X-motor cables.
5. Install the RoMa or back cover, whichever was removed.
Verification
details.

200942-103—September 2007
Device CU
sensitive devices.
Removal
14-104
14-17
14-18
14-16
14-106
14-103
14-105
14-16 RoMa Freedom backplane 14-103 Y-flex cable connector

14-17 Device CU 14-104 X-flex cable connector
14-18 X-DC-Servo power board 14-105 X-motor cable
14-106Address switch for Device CU
Figure 9.147: RoMa Freedom Backplane, Device CU, and More
1. Perform EEPROM backup with the Setup & Service

software.
2. Remove the RoMa, or if access is allowed, remove the back
cover.
3. Open the board retaining clamp (white-headed push pin).

200942-103—September 2007
Figure 9.148:RoMa Freedom Backplane Device CU, and

X-DC Servo Power Boards
4. Remove the board (14-17).
Figure 9.149:RoMa Device CU Board
Installation
1. The address switch (14-106) for the Device CU board
(14-17) is located on the RoMa Freedom backplane. Set the
address switch on the RoMa to position 4.
Figure 9.150:Address Switch for Device CU Board
2. Install the board onto the RoMa Freedom backplane and

secure with the board retaining clamp (white-headed push
pin).

200942-103—September 2007
3. Install the RoMa or instrument cover, whichever was

removed.
4. Restore the EEPROM.
NOTE: If bad settings were backed up, bad settings will
be restored.
Verification
details.
NOTE: If the Device CU board is exchanged without
restoring the EEPROM, the following setups must be
performed:
• Set X-drive properties
• Set machine size
• RoMa setup

200942-103—September 2007
X-DC-Servo Power Board

sensitive devices.
Removal
1. Remove the RoMa, or if access is allowed remove the back
cover.
2. Remove the lower board retaining clamp (white-headed
push pin) (14-71).
14-104
14-17
14-18
14-16
14-106
14-103
14-105
14-16 RoMa Freedom backplane 14-103 Y-flex cable connector

14-17 Device CU 14-104 X-flex cable connector
14-18 X-DC-Servo power board 14-105 X-motor cable
14-106Address switch for Device CU
Figure 9.151: RoMa Freedom Backplane Device CU and X-DC
Servo Power Boards

200942-103—September 2007
3. Remove the X-DC-Servo Power board (14-18).
Figure 9.152:RoMa X-DC Servo Power Board Address
Installation
1. The address switch (14-106) for the X-DC-Servo Power
board (14-18) is located on the board itself. Set the address
switch to position 0 (zero).
! " #
$
% & ')
.
* + ,-
Figure 9.153:Address of X-DC-Servo Power Board
2. Install the X-DC-Servo Power board onto the RoMa

Freedom backplane and secure with the board retaining
clamp.
3. Install the RoMa or instrument cover, whichever was
removed.
Verification
details.

200942-103—September 2007
Ensuring Operating Readiness
Purpose
Most procedures described in this section require the entire
RoMa to be removed before a damaged part can be replaced.
Therefore, adjustments and tests described below must be
performed after reinstallation.
Required Special Tools

• Reference tip
• Test plate
Adjustments, Tests
1. Adjust the RoMa mechanically as described in Mechanical
Adjustment after Reinstallation on page 9–83.
2. Perform the CAN-BUS Resistance Test on page 4–33 if the
RoMa Freedom backplane, located at the rear, was
replaced.
If the RoMa was removed or a new RoMa was installed,
perform Genesis Setup and Service RoMa Calibrations,
and m2000sp RoMa Calibrations on page 4–157.
3. Adjust the Rotator on page 4–82.
4. Perform the following M&D checks:
• RoMa DiTi Rack Test on page 5–27
After Finishing
1. Reinstall all covers that were removed.
2. Close service doors and X-bay covers.
3. Return objects that were removed to the worktable.
4. Start the m2000sp in operating mode.

200942-103—September 2007
Transport and Packaging

Store and/or ship the RoMa to Abbott Molecular only in its
original transport box using the original foam inserts.
NOTE: The RoMa transport box can also be used to
transport the LiHa arm.
1. Insert the transport padding into the clean, empty box.
2. Remove the two gripper fingers with a 3 mm Allen key.
Refer to Figure 9.65: Eccentric Gripper on page 9–79 for
details.
3. Carefully place the RoMa or LiHa in the transport box as
shown below.
Figure 9.154:Transport Box (LiHa Arm and RoMa)

200942-103—September 2007
Section 9 PosID 2
PosID 2
sensitive devices.
these procedures.
Spare Parts
• PosID 2 assembly
• X-belt
• X-flex cable
• X-DC-Servo motor
• PosID 2 CU board
• X-DC-Servo board
• Y/B board
• Y/B-DC-Servo board
• DSP decoding board
• B-DC-Servo motor
• Scanner head

200942-103—September 2007
• Scanner cable
• Y-belt
• Gripper assembly
• Y-DC-Servo motor
• No Tube sensor
Complete PosID 2 Assembly
Removal
2. Remove the left and right door locks.
3. Remove the worktable; see Worktable on page 9–8.
4. Disconnect the PosID 2 connection cable (13-03) and
X-motor cable (13-02) from the PosID 2 CU board.
13-01
13-02
13-04
13-03
13-01Communication cable 13-03Connection cable

13-02X-motor cable 13-04PosID 2 CU board
Figure 9.155:PosID 2 Cable Connections
5. Remove the PosID 2 assembly fixing nuts (four nuts).

200942-103—September 2007
Section 9 PosID 2
6. Slide the PosID 2 module (13) to the left side.

7. Hold the assembly by the base plate (13-08), lift the right
side first, then carefully lift the complete PosID 2 assembly
out of the instrument.
13
13-10
13-09
13-08
13-07
13-06
13-02
13-03
13-05
13 PosID 2 module 13-07PosID board

13-02X-motor cable 13-08Base plate
13-03Connection cable 13-09X-flex cable
13-05X-motor 13-10X-belt
13-06X-shaft
Figure 9.156:PosID 2 Assembly

200942-103—September 2007
Installation
13-08
13
13 PosID 2 module 13-08Base plate
Figure 9.157:Installation of PosID 2 Assembly
2. For PosID modules manufactured after May 2002, move

the base plate (13-08) to the far left of the instrument.
Before screwing it into the instrument frame, ensure there
is exactly 2 mm of space behind the base plate.
3. Before installing the worktable:
• Check for smooth and even motion of the PosID 2
module (13)
• Verify correct movement of the X-flex cable (13-09)
• Ensure the X-shaft (13-06) and base plate (13-08) are
thoroughly clean
Verification
• Worktable Alignment

200942-103—September 2007
Section 9 PosID 2

• M&D checks from Section 5:
– LiHa Sample Tube Check on page 5–14
5–40
X-drive Assembly PosID 2 (X-belt, X-motor, X-flex Cable)

NOTE: For the X-DC-Servo board, refer to Electronic
Boards on page 9–153 for details.
X-belt
Removal
3. Loosen the belt tensioning screws (13-13) (two screws).
Figure 9.158:Belt Tensioning Screws
4. Unscrew X-belt fixture to access the X-belt fixing screw

(13-14). The X-belt is secured to the PosID module under
the module slide.
5. Remove the X-belt.

200942-103—September 2007
Installation
1. For a new belt, cut the X-belt to the required length: 2430
mm.
2. Run the X-belt over the idler pulley (13-12) and drive
pulley of the X-motor; insert belt ends into the fixture and
tighten the fixing screw (13-14).
13-12
13-13
2x M4x8
13-05
13-14 M4x20
13-05X-motor 13-13Tensioning screws

13-12Idler pulley 13-14X-belt fixing screws
Figure 9.159:X-drive Assembly, Details
3. Fasten the X-belt fixture to the X-slide.

200942-103—September 2007
Section 9 PosID 2
4. Adjust and tighten the tensioning screws (13-13). The belt

must be tight and horizontal, but not over-tightened.
Figure 9.160:Adjust Tensioning Screws
Verification
• Align the worktable as described in Installation of
Worktable on page 9–9
5–40
– CAN-BUS Resistance Test on page 4–33
X-motor
Removal
3. Disconnect the X-motor cable (13-02) from the PosID
board (13-07). Refer to Figure 9.156: PosID 2 Assembly on
page 9–145 for details.

200942-103—September 2007
4. Loosen the belt tensioning screws (13-13).

5. Remove pulley (mL.5 screw) from the X-motor assembly
then unscrew the X-motor (13-05) from the bracket (four
screws). Refer to Figure 9.159: X-drive Assembly, Details
on page 9–148.
Installation
• Adjust the distance between the drive pulley and bracket
to approximately 5.5 mm.
Verification
• Worktable alignment (see Installation of Worktable on
page 9–9)
5–40
X-flex Cable
Removal
3. Remove casing as illustrated in Figure 9.165: Y/B Board
Assembly on page 9–155.
4. Disconnect the X-flex cable from PosID board. Refer to
Figure 9.156: PosID 2 Assembly on page 9–145.

200942-103—September 2007
Section 9 PosID 2
4x M3x6
2x M3x8
Figure 9.161:Flex Cable Fixtures
5. Remove the two flex cable fixtures.

6. Unscrew the five Y/B board fixing screws.
13-20
5x M2x6
Figure 9.162:Y/B Board Fixing Screws
7. Disconnect the X-flex cable from the Y/B board.
Installation
1. Fold the X-flex cable on the end where it will be connected
to the PosID.
185 mm (7¼”)
185 mm (7¼”)
Figure 9.163:X-flex Cable

200942-103—September 2007

3. Before reinstalling the worktable, verify correct movement
of the X-flex cable, and adjust if necessary.
Verification
• Worktable alignment (see Installation of Worktable on
page 9–9)
5–40

200942-103—September 2007
Section 9 PosID 2
Electronic Boards
sensitive devices.
PosID 2 CU Board, X-DC-Servo Board

The PosID CU board is located at the bottom of the left service
compartment. The X-DC-Servo board is connected to the
PosID 2 CU board.
Removal
2. Disconnect all cables from the PosID 2 CU board.
3. Unscrew and remove X-DC-Servo board (two screws).

200942-103—September 2007
4. Unscrew the PosID 2 CU board. (five screws).
J8
J6
Figure 9.164:PosID 2 CU Board
Installation
1. Verify jumper J6 (for L-CAN Bus) is set (jumper closed).
2. Verify jumper J8 is set according to the communication
diagram (jumper open).
3. Verify the X-DC-Servo board address switch is set to #0.
4. Install in reverse order of removal.
Verification
Ensure operating readiness:

200942-103—September 2007
Section 9 PosID 2
Y/B Board, Y/B-DC-Servo Board

sensitive devices.
Removal
13-17
13-16 13-18
13-15
3x M2x6
13-15casing 13-17Y/B board

13-16Y/B-DC-Servo board 13-18DSP decoding board
Figure 9.165: Y/B Board Assembly

200942-103—September 2007
1. Remove the three screws (M2) which secure the casing

(13-15).
Figure 9.166:PosID
2. Disconnect all cables (Y-motor, B-motor, X-flex, scanner,

No Tube sensor cables) from the Y/B board (13-17).
Figure 9.167:Y/B Board
3. On the exterior of the PosID 2, unscrew five fixing screws

(M2) (13-20) and remove the Y/B board.
13-20
5x M2x6
Figure 9.168:Y/B Board Fixing Screws (13-20)

200942-103—September 2007
Section 9 PosID 2
4. Push in the white pin on the bracket and remove the

Y/B-DC-Servo board (13-16).
Figure 9.169:Y/B-DC-Servo Board
5. Disconnect two cables (J7 and J9 from the DSP decoding

board) (13-18).
Figure 9.170:DSP Decoding Board (13-18)

200942-103—September 2007
6. Remove three screws securing the DSP decoding board to

the Y/B board (M2.5).
Figure 9.171:Y/B Board (M2.5)
Figure 9.172:Y/B PosID 2
Installation
1. On the Y/B-DC-Servo board, verify the address switch is
set to #2.
2. Attach the DSP decoding board to the Y/B board with
three screws.
3. Connect two cables from the DSP decoding board to the
Y/B board.
4. Install the Y/B-DC-Servo board to the Y/B board. Secure
with the white-headed push pin.

200942-103—September 2007
Section 9 PosID 2
5. Secure the Y/B board to the PosID assembly with five

screws.
6. Connect the Y-motor, B-motor, No Tube sensor, X-flex,
and scanner cables to the Y/B board.
Scanner Cable
X-flex Cable
Y-motor Cable
Connections to DSP
Board
B-motor Cable
No Tube Sensor Cable
Figure 9.173:Y/B Board Cable Connections
Verification
DSP Decoding Board

sensitive devices.

200942-103—September 2007
Removal
NOTE: The referenced position numbers are illustrated
in Figure 9.164 on page 9-144.
1. Remove the three screws that secure the casing (13-15).
Figure 9.174:PosID
2. Disconnect the two cables (J7 and 9) from DSP decoding

board (13-18) and three screws that secure the DSP
decoding board to the Y/B board.

200942-103—September 2007
Section 9 PosID 2
3. Remove the DSP decoding board.
Figure 9.176:Y/B PosID 2
Installation
1. Attach the DSP decoding board to the Y/B board with
three screws.
2. Connect two cables (J7 and J9) from the DSP decoding
board to the Y/B board.
3. Attach the casing with three screws.
Verification

200942-103—September 2007
Scanner Assembly (B-motor, Scanner Head, and Scanner Cable)
B-motor
Removal
1. Remove the three screws that secure the casing (13-15) as
illustrated in Figure 9.165: Y/B Board Assembly on page
9–155.
2. On the exterior of the PosID 2, unscrew the five Y/B board
fixing screws (13-20) to free the B-motor cable (13-24).
Disconnect this cable from Y/B board (J4).
13-19
2x M4x8
13-20
13-17 5x M3x6
13-24
13-23
13-22
M5x6
4x M2.5x8 13-21
13-17Y/B board 13-22Set screw

13-19B-motor fixing screws 13-23Bracket
13-20Y/B board fixing screws 13-24B-motor cable
13-21B-motor
Figure 9.177: B-motor

200942-103—September 2007
Section 9 PosID 2
3. On the exterior of the PosID 2, unscrew two fixing screws

(13-19) for removal of the B-motor assembly.
4. Loosen the set screw (13-22) and remove the gearing
assembly from the motor.Exterior of PosID 2
5. Remove four screws securing the bracket (13-23) to the
B-motor (13-21).
Figure 9.178:B-motor Bracket
Installation
NOTE: Observe correct positioning of the encoder
head as illustrated in Figure 9.177: B-motor on
page 9–162.
2. Use four screws to attach the B-motor to the bracket.
3. Tighten the set screw on the motor gearing assembly.
4. Secure the B-motor assembly to the PosID assembly with
two exterior screws.
5. Connect the B-motor cable to the Y/B board at J4.
6. Secure the Y/B board to the PosID assembly with five
screws.
Verification

200942-103—September 2007
Scanner Head, Scanner Cable
Removal
1. Remove the three screws securing the casing (13-15) as
illustrated in Figure 9.165: Y/B Board Assembly on page
9–155.
13-25
13-28
13-29
13-26 13-27 Potential
sticking point
13-25Cable connector 13-28Housing

13-26Scanner head 13-29Scanner cable
13-27Fixing screws
Figure 9.179:Scanner Head Assembly
2. Remove the scanner head housing (13-28) by removing

two screws.
Figure 9.180:Scanner Head Cover
3. Unscrew the cable holders and cable connector (13-25),

then disconnect the scanner cable (13-29) from the Y/B
board.

200942-103—September 2007
Section 9 PosID 2
• Open the fixing screws (13-27) and remove the

scanner head (13-26).
Figure 9.181:Scanner Head Assembly
Installation
NOTE: Swivel the scanner head up and down and
arrange the cable (13-29) so it does not touch and
stick at the point indicated with an arrow in Figure
9.179: Scanner Head Assembly on page 9–164.
2. Attach the scanner head with two screws.
3. Connect the scanner cable to the Y/B board.
4. Connect the cable holders and cable connector.
5. Attach the scanner head housing with two screws.
Verification

200942-103—September 2007
Y-drive Assembly (Y-belt, Gripper Assembly, Y-motor)
Y-belt, Gripper Assembly
Removal
1. Remove three screws (M2) securing the casing (13-15)
Figure 9.165: Y/B Board Assembly on page 9–155.
2. Loosen the two belt tensioning screws (M2.5) (13-36 in
Step 9.183 below).
Figure 9.182:PosID Belt Tension Screws

200942-103—September 2007
Section 9 PosID 2
13-30
13-31
13-32
4x M3x6
13-33
13-34
13-35
2x M2x6 13-36
13-30Y-motor cable 13-34Gripper assembly

13-31Y-motor 13-35No tube sensor
13-32No Tube sensor cable 13-36Belt tensioning screws
13-33Y-belt
Figure 9.183: Y-drive Assembly

200942-103—September 2007
3. Remove the four screws (M2) securing the gripper

assembly (13-34) and remove the Y-belt (13-33).
A Gripper assembly screws B Driver pins (reverse side)
Figure 9.184:Gripper Assembly
Installation
1. Lead the Y-belt around the driver pins (bottom side of
gripper assembly) as shown below.
Figure 9.185:Y-belt and Driver Pins
2. Install the Y-belt.

3. Attach the gripper assembly with four screws.
4. Manually tension the belt and tighten the two belt
tensioning screws.
5. Ensure smooth operation of the belt.

200942-103—September 2007
Section 9 PosID 2
Verification
Y-motor
Removal
1. Remove casing (13-15) as illustrated in Figure 9.165: Y/B
Board Assembly on page 9–155.
2. Loosen the two belt tensioning screws (M2.5) (13-36).
Refer to Figure 9.183: Y-drive Assembly on page 9–167 for
details.
Figure 9.186:PosID Belt Tension Screws
3. Disconnect the Y-motor cable (13-30) from Y/B board.

200942-103—September 2007
4. On the exterior of the PosID 2, unscrew the two fixing

screws (M2) and remove the Y-motor assembly.
2x M3x8
Figure 9.188:Y-motor Fixing Screws
5. Remove drive pulley (set screw) and screws securing the

bracket to the Y-motor.
Figure 9.189:Y-motor
Installation
• Note the correct orientation of the encoder head. Refer to
Figure 9.183: Y-drive Assembly on page 9–167 for details.
• When installing the drive pulley, ensure the set screw is
perpendicular to the flat part of the axle.
• Tension the Y-belt as described earlier in Y-belt, Gripper
Assembly on page 9–166, for details.

200942-103—September 2007
Section 9 PosID 2
Verification

200942-103—September 2007
No Tube Sensor
Removal
NOTE: The referenced parts are illustrated in Figure
9.183: Y-drive Assembly on page 9–167.
2. Remove the casing (13-15) as illustrated in Figure 9.165:
Y/B Board Assembly on page 9–155.
3. Unscrew the cable clamps (M2.5) then disconnect the No
Tube sensor cable (13-32) from the Y/B board.
4. Remove the two screws (M1.5) used to secure the No Tube
sensor (13-35).
A No tube sensor B Gripper
Figure 9.190:No Tube Sensor
Installation
1. Place the No Tube sensor into the PosID assembly and
secure with two screws.
2. Route the No Tube sensor cable to the Y/B board and
connect the cable to the board.
3. Secure the cable in place with the cable clamps.
4. Install the casing.

200942-103—September 2007
Section 9 PosID 2
Verification

200942-103—September 2007
Liquid System
reagents. The exposure to hazardous chemicals is
protective eyewear.
Overview
The term “liquid system” refers to all instrument modules and
parts which contain or directly influence liquid. The main
components include:
• LiHa Freedom; refer to Liquid Handling Arm (LiHa) on
page 9–39
• Tips; refer to the m2000sp Operations Manual
• Tubing system; refer to Tubing System below.
• MPO/FWO; refer to Monitored Pump Option/Fast Wash
Option on page 9–176
• Dilutor/Dilback; refer to Dilutors on page 9–182
Tubing System
This section describes the standard tubing system. Refer to
Monitored Pump Option/Fast Wash Option later in this
section for MPO/FWO tubing system details.
Spare Parts
Tubing and fittings for standard tubing

200942-103—September 2007
Section 9 Liquid System
Standard Tubing
8 Tips
30-03
30-02
8
30-01
4
30-06 32 9
30-07
30-04
35
30-05
30-01Aspiration tubing 30-07Distributor 1:4

30-02Interconnecting tubing 4 Dilutor
30-03Pipetting tubing 8 DiTi assembly
30-04Wash station 9 DiTi adapter
30-05Waste tube 32 Dilback
30-06Y-connector 35 MPO/FaWa
Figure 9.191: Tubing
Replacement
1. Empty the liquid system.
3. Replace relevant tubing.
NOTE: When replacing the pipetting tubing,
remember that diluter #1 (on the far left) is
connected to tip #1 (closest to the rear of the
instrument), diluter #2 to tip #2, etc.
Verification
• Tightness check
• The following M&D checks from Section 5:

200942-103—September 2007
– Dispense Test 50 µL, Visual on page 5–21

Monitored Pump Option/Fast Wash Option
General
Fast Wash Option (FWO) Fast Wash pump without LICOS

liquid level sensors
Spare Parts MPO/FWO

• FWO complete
• Fast Wash (FaWa) pump
• Pressure relief valve
• Distributor 1:2
• Tubing
• Connector cable
MPO/FWO Complete
Removal
1. Empty the liquid system.
3. Remove the two outer screws of the left worktable cover
(M2.5 x 8).

200942-103—September 2007
4. Pull the Fast Wash pump assembly out of the instrument

like a drawer.
2 screws M2.5 x 8
Figure 9.192:Fast Wash Pump Assembly Removal
5. Disconnect the tubing from the Fast Wash pump, pressure

relief valve, and connection cable from the OPTIBO.
Installation
• Electronic connections: OPTIBO, Option CAN-MPO
board, J7
• Connect the tubing as shown in Step 9.193 below
35-1
35-2 35-3 35-4
35-8
35-7
35-6
35-5
MPO/FWO Standard

200942-103—September 2007
35-1 Aspiration tube (to diluter) 35-5 Aspiration tube to FaWa

35-2 Distributor 1:2 pump
35-3 Pressure tube 35-6 Waste tube for pressure relief
35-4 FaWa pump valve
35-7 Pressure relief valve
Figure 9.193: MPO/FWO Tubing Connections
Verification
• Check all tubing fittings for tightness
Fast Wash Pump
Removal
1. Remove the Fast Wash pump assembly from the
instrument.
2. Remove the tubing from the FaWa pump.
3. Remove the FaWa pump from the Fast Wash pump
assembly (five screws).
FaWa Pump Fixing Screws
Figure 9.194:View from the Backside of the MPO/FWO

Assembly Drawer
Installation
1. Install in reverse order. Connect the tubing as shown in
Figure 9.193: MPO/FWO Tubing Connections on page
9–178
2. Use the Dilutor panel of the LiHa to fill the Fast Wash
pump. A dry pump valve may not work properly.
Verification

200942-103—September 2007

Pressure Relief Valve
Removal
instrument.
2. Remove the tubing from the pressure relief valve.
3. Remove the pressure relief valve from the Fast Wash pump
assembly (1 screw).
NOTE: Be careful not to confuse the attachment
screw of the pressure relief valve with the
regulating screw. Do not alter the setting of the
regulating screw.
Figure 9.195:Pressure Relief Valve
Installation
Install in reverse order. Ensure the arrows on the valve match
the direction of fluid flow as shown above in Figure 9.195.
Verification

200942-103—September 2007
MPO/FWO Tubing
Removal
instrument.
2. Remove the tubing.
Installation
Install in reverse order. Refer to Figure 9.193: MPO/FWO
Tubing Connections on page 9–178 for correct tubing
connections.
Verification
MPO Board
sensitive devices.
Removal
instrument. The MPO board is located at the backside of
the assembly.
2. Disconnect the FaWa pump cable and connection cable.
3. Remove the MPO board (5 screws).
Figure 9.196:MPO Board Fixing Screws

200942-103—September 2007
Installation
• Connection cable: J7
• FaWa pump cable
Go into the <Liquid System>, <FaWa>, <Setup> menu, and
set the number of pumps to 1 and number of tips for pump 1
to 8.
Verification

200942-103—September 2007
Dilutors
sensitive devices.
Spare Parts
• Dilutor type XP 3000 plus
• 3-way valve, 120°, M6 fittings
• Syringe
• VCC-Dilback
Dilutor
Removal
1. Empty the liquid system using the Dilutor Panel of the
LiHa.
3. Move the LiHa and RoMa arms to one side.
4. Open top cover (2 screws).
5. Remove diluter case cover (2 screws).
2-01
2-02
2-01 Top cover 2-02 Dilutor case cover
Figure 9.197:Dilutor Case
6. Remove the interconnecting and pipetting tubing from

the diluter.

200942-103—September 2007
Section 9 Dilutors
7. Unscrew the diluter from the instrument (1 M3 x 12 screw

with washer underneath the diluter).
NOTE: Be careful to not mistake the steel sheet
screws for diluter screws.
8. Carefully pull the diluter out of the instrument.
Installation
1. Verify the CAN-BUS address is set correctly.
Figure 9.198:Dilutor Address Settings

Address settings:
• Dilutor 1: 0
• Dilutor 2: 1
• Dilutor 3: 2
• Dilutor 4: 3
• Dilutor 5: 4
• Dilutor 6: 5
• Dilutor 7: 6
• Dilutor 8: 7
Dilutor 1 is the left-most diluter.
3. Perform a visual check to verify the liquid system is tight
(no leaking, dripping, etc.).

200942-103—September 2007
Verification
• Perform the following M&D checks:
See Section 5, Maintenance and Diagnostic Procedures
3-Way Valve and Syringe
Removal
1. Unscrew the knurled plunger lock screw that secures the
syringe to the plunger drive block.
Valve connection
3-way valve
Syringe screw
Plunger lock screw
Figure 9.199:Syringe Assembly
2. Unscrew the syringe screw and remove the syringe.

200942-103—September 2007
Section 9 Dilutors
3. Unscrew the input tubing (from 1:4 distributor) and

output tubing (to the DiTi) from the 3-way valve.
Output to DiTi Input from distributor
M3 x 25
Figure 9.200:Tubing Removal
4. Remove the two phillips head screws (M3 x 25) that secure
the valve to the diluter and remove the valve.
Installation
1. Secure the 3-way valve to the diluter using two phillips
head screws.
2. Connect the input tubing (from the 1:4 distributor) and
the output tubing (to the DiTi) to the 3-way valve.
3. Insert the syringe and tighten the syringe screw.
4. Tighten the knurled plunger lock screw to secure the
syringe to the plunger drive block.
Verification
• The following M&D checks from Section 5:
VCC-Dilback
sensitive devices.

200942-103—September 2007

Removal
NOTE: The VCC-Dilback is positioned in the diluter
case behind the diluters.
Figure 9.201:VCC-Dilback
1. Verify the instrument is switched off and the power

connection is disconnected.
2. Remove all diluters from the instrument.
3. Disconnect the cable leading to OPTIBO Freedom (J1).
Figure 9.202:VCC-Dilback
4. Remove VCC-Dilback fixing screws.
Installation
1. Verify the instrument is switched off and the power cable
is disconnected.
2. Ensure the BUS END jumper is present; it is located on the
rear of the board at the lower-left corner.
3. Install in reverse order of removal.

200942-103—September 2007
Section 9 Dilutors
Verification
• the following M&D checks:
– 50 µL Dispense Test
– 800 µL Dispense Test

200942-103—September 2007
Level Sensors
sensitive devices.
these procedures.
Overview
There are three unique level sensors on the instrument:
• system liquid
• system waste
• solid waste
Removal
2. Disconnect the sensor in question from the SMIO board
• system liquid (J18)
• system waste (J19)
• solid waste (J21)

200942-103—September 2007
Section 9 Level Sensors
Figure 9.203:Waste Sensor
3. Remove the two screws securing the level sensor to its

bracket
NOTE: Sensor position B is the sensor position
that is affected by using the photoelectric sensor.
Liquid waste
sensor
System liquid
sensor
Figure 9.204:Liquid Sensors
4. Remove the sensor and cable from the instrument.
Figure 9.205:Solid Waste Sensor

200942-103—September 2007
Installation
1. Install the sensor onto the bracket and secure with two
screws.
2. Route the cable up through the hole in the cabinet,
between the instrument and cabinet, over to the right
access door, and up to the SMIO board.
3. Plug the sensor cable into the appropriate connector.
• The system liquid sensor cable is labeled in green.
• The liquid waste sensor cable is labeled in red.
– J18 system liquid

– J19 system waste
– J21 solid waste
Figure 9.206:SMIO-SAFY
Sensor Adjustment and Calibration

Adjustments and calibrations are performed through the S&S
software. Refer to Calibrate and Verify System Liquid, Liquid
Waste, and Solid Waste Sensors on page 4–105.

200942-103—September 2007
Section 9 Door Locks
Door Locks
Removal
2. Open the front access panel and front worktable cover.
3. Loosen one screw (M3) securing the door lock.
4. Disconnect the cable at the door lock or disconnect the
door lock cable at the SMIO-SAFY board.
Figure 9.207:Door Lock
Figure 9.208:SMIO-SAFY Board
5. Remove the door lock

200942-103—September 2007
Installation
1. Open the front access panel.
2. Insert the door lock into position.
3. Finger tighten the socket head screw.
4. Connect the cable at the door lock or at the SMIO-SAFY
board.
• J5/J24 left door lock
• J6/J23 right door lock
5. Align the door lock to the catch so the door closes
smoothly.
6. Tighten the screw on the door lock.
7. Arrange the cables in the duct so they are not bent.
8. Close the front access panel.
Verification
Verification is performed through the S&S software. Refer to
Check Door Locks on page 4–115.

200942-103—September 2007
Section 9 1 mL Subsystem Assembly
1 mL Subsystem Assembly
CAUTION: Hot Surface. Heater zone 1 operates at a
temperature of 50°C and heater zone 2 operates at
75°C. Be careful of exposure to hot surfaces.
sensitive devices.
these procedures.

200942-103—September 2007
Complete 1 mL Subsystem Assembly
Removal
2. Disconnect the two 1 mL Subsystem cables from the 1 mL
Subsystem.
Figure 9.209:1 mL Subsystem
3. Carefully lift the 1 mL Subsystem from the worktable

surface.
Figure 9.210:1 mL Subsystem Cables

200942-103—September 2007
Installation
1. Align the left edge of the 1 mL Subsystem with grid 7.
Place the 1 mL Subsystem on the deck, aligning the
notches in the middle guide bar on the bottom of the 1 mL
Subsystem with the guide pins on grid 12.
2. Connect the two cables to the two heater boards, accessed
through the notched opening in the bottom cover of the
1 mL Subsystem.
Verification: Heater Block Temperature Check

Verification is performed through the S&S software. Refer to
Verify Temperature Performance of 1 mL Subsystem Heater
Blocks on page 4–119.
1 mL Subsystem Heater Block
Removal
2. Remove the 1 mL Subsystem from the worktable.
3. Remove the racks from the 1 mL Subsystem.
4. Turn the 1 mL Subsystem upside down and place it on the
bench.
5. Remove the eighteen outer and four inner screws (M2)
that secure the bottom cover in place.
Figure 9.211:1mL Subsystem Bottom Cover
6. Remove the cover.

200942-103—September 2007
7. Turn the 1 mL Subsystem over and remove the six larger

headed screws (M2.5) that hold the honeycomb-colored
cover in place over the heater block. Hold the heater block
in place to prevent it from falling.
Figure 9.212:Heater Block, Removed
8. Disconnect the heater cable.

9. Remove the heater block from the 1 mL Subsystem.
Installation
1. Place the new heater block in the 1 mL Subsystem.
Figure 9.213:Heater Block
2. Connect the heater cable to the heater block.

3. Attach the heater block to the 1 mL Subsystem frame with
six screws.

200942-103—September 2007
4. Turn the 1 mL Subsystem over and verify the black heater

cables are placed in the notches in the plastic dividers.
This ensures the cables are not pinched when the bottom
cover is installed.
NOTE: Some newer versions may have a clamp
that prevents the cable from becoming easily
disconnected from the connection.
5. Install the bottom cover, securing it in place with
twenty-two screws.
6. Place the rack back into the 1 mL Subsystem.
8. Connect the two 1 mL Subsystem cables coming from the
OPTIBO board to the 1 mL Subsystem.
Verification
Perform the 1 mL Subsystem Heater Block Temperature check.
Refer to Verify Temperature Performance of 1 mL Subsystem
Heater Blocks on page 4–119 for verification.
1 mL Subsystem Heater Boards

sensitive devices.
Removal
4. Turn the 1 mL Subsystem upside down and place it on the
bench.
5. Remove the eighteen outer and four inner screws (M2)
that secure the bottom cover in place.

200942-103—September 2007
6. Remove the cover.

7. Remove the four outer screws (M2), located on the end of
the 1 mL Subsystem closest to the opening in the bottom
cover, holding the heater boards in place.
8. Disconnect the two cables connecting the heater blocks to
the heater boards and remove the heater boards.
Figure 9.214:Heater Block Cable Connections
Installation
1. Ensure the board address is set to match the replaced
board. The address will be either 3 or 4.
2. Place the heater board assembly into the 1 mL Subsystem
and connect the two cables linking the heater blocks to
the heater boards.
3. Secure the heater board assembly to the side wall of the
1 mL Subsystem with four screws.
4. Install the bottom cover with four longer inner cover
screws and eighteen shorter perimeter screws.
5. Place the rack back into the 1 mL Subsystem.
7. Connect the two 1 mL Subsystem cables originating from
the OPTIBO board to the 1 mL Subsystem.

200942-103—September 2007
Verification
Perform the 1 mL Subsystem Heater Block Temperature Check.

200942-103—September 2007
1 mL Subsystem Internal Cables
Removal
4. Unscrew and remove the bottom cover as previously
described.
5. Disconnect the heater cable from the heater block and
heater board.
Installation
1. Connect the heater cable from the heater block to the
heater board.
2. Verify the black heater cables are placed in the notches in
the plastic dividers. This ensures the cables are not
pinched when the bottom cover is installed.
3. Install the bottom cover as previously described.
5. Connect the two 1 mL Subsystem cables originating from
the OPTIBO board to the 1 mL Subsystem.
Verification
Perform the 1 mL Subsystem Heater Block Temperature Check.
1 mL Subsystem Cables, from OPTIBO Board
Removal
2. Open the left access service door and disconnect the two
cables from CAN OPTION 3 and 4 on the OPTIBO board.

200942-103—September 2007
Figure 9.215:OPTIBO Board
3. Remove the two outer screws of the left worktable panel

that covers the FaWa assembly. Pull the FaWa assembly
partially out of the instrument—like a drawer—to access
the cables.
Figure 9.216:Worktable Side Panel
4. Lift the 1 mL Subsystem partially up and away from the

worktable, and disconnect the cables.
5. Open the front worktable cover and remove the sealing
strip enough to remove the cables.
6. Carefully remove the cables from below the instrument.

200942-103—September 2007
Installation
1. Route the 1 mL Subsystem cables through the notched
holes in the sealing strip, leaving enough length to
connect to the 1 mL Subsystem.
2. Route the cables underneath the worktable surface, along
the front edge of the FaWa assembly, and up to the left
access door.
Figure 9.217:1 mL Cables
3. Plug the cables into CAN OPTION 3 and 4 on the OPTIBO

board.
4. With the cables in place, carefully push the FaWa
assembly into place and secure the FaWa assembly to the
instrument frame with two screws.
6. Connect the two cables to the 1 mL Subsystem.
7. Feed any extra cable length back underneath the
instrument.
8. Verify the sealing strip is in place then close the front
worktable cover.
Verification
Perform the 1 mL Subsystem Heater Block Temperature check.

200942-103—September 2007
Section 9 Chiller/Output Assembly
Chiller/Output Assembly
sensitive devices.
accurate positioning of the system modules, and
carriers and racks on worktables. When operating the
instrument, it could be necessary to run the test with
the instrument’s safety panels open. Keep body parts
away from moving parts of the instrument (e.g., LiHa,
RoMa, tips, and gripper fingers) during setup and test
procedures.

these procedures.
Removal
2. Switch off the chiller using the on/off switch on the back
of the chiller, and disconnect the RS-232 communication
cable and the power supply cable from the back of the
chiller assembly
Figure 9.218:Chiller Power Switch

200942-103—September 2007
Section 9
3. Carefully lift the chiller/Output Deck assembly from the

worktable surface.
Installation
1. Install the Output Deck on grid locations 35 - 41. Ensure
that the cooling assembly engages the deck pins securely.
2. Plug the RS-232 and power supply cable into their
respective mating connectors on the chiller assembly.
3. Turn the chiller assembly on using the on/off switch on
the back of the chiller.
Verification
1. Turn the chiller on.
2. Log into the system as FSE.
3. Perform the M&D Chiller and Heater Temperature Check
on page 5–52. See Section 5, Maintenance and Diagnostic
Procedures for more information

200942-103—September 2007
Section 9 Hood Maintenance
Hood Maintenance
This section is applicable to hooded instruments only. Most
hood maintenance is performed using the latest revision of the
hood repair ISA, which includes procedures for all applicable
field replaceable parts.

200942-103—September 2007
CAN-BUS Resistor Test

After exchange or new installation of one of the following
boards, a CAN-BUS resistor test must be performed.
BOARD TEST
DILBACK (Dilutor Backplane)
BACKPLANE Liquid handling arm (LiHa) System CAN
CU-Board
OPTIBO
CU-Board
CU-Board PosID V2
OPTIBO
CC MAGS #3
CC MAGS #4 Option CAN
MPO
Backplane Robotic Manipulator Arm
SMIO
SMIO SAFY

2. Open the left service access door.
3. Depending on which boards were changed, check the
CAN-BUS resistor with an ohmmeter on the two
checkpoints on the OPTIBO as described below.

200942-103—September 2007
Section 9 CAN-BUS Resistor Test
Quick Check for Jumper Settings

Measure the CAN-BUS resistance on the OPTIBO (left access
door).
Figure 9.219: CAN-BUS Resistance on OPTIBO
Table 9.3: Jumper Settings
CAN-BUS Check Points Resistance Interpretation
System CAN_L/ 50 to 65 ⏲ Correct number of

CAN-BUS CAN_H jumpers
~ 40 ⏲ 1 jumper too many
~ 120 ⏲ 1 jumper too few
Option CANO-L/ 50 to 65 ⏲ Correct number of
CAN-BUS CANO-H jumpers
~ 40 ⏲ 1 jumper too many
~ 120 ⏲ 1 jumper too few
NOTE: If the value is incorrect, check relevant boards

and the number of jumpers.
4. Remove the ohmmeter then close and lock the left service
access door.

200942-103—September 2007
Table 9.4: System and Option CAN Bus Jumper Settings

Jumper Location
CAN-BUS Present
SYSTEM CAN
DILBACK Yes J10 (not labeled)
LiHa Yes J14
Backplane
CU Board No J1
OPTIBO No SW1 off
OPTION CAN
CU Board No J22
PosID 2 No J6/J8
OPTIBO No SW2 off
CC MAGS #3 No no jumper
CC MAGS #4 No no jumper
MPO No J2
RoMa Yes J2
Backplane
SMIO Yes J9 outer two pins
SMIO/SAFY No J9 inner two pins
Movement Check
Manually check movement of all (system) modules.

200942-103—September 2007
Section 9 Return of Parts
Return of Parts
Return of Parts to Abbott Molecular
Before an Abbott FSE performs any work on the instrument, or
before the instrument or any part is returned to Abbott, the
owner of the instrument must confirm in writing that
decontamination was performed properly and in accordance
with good laboratory practice guidelines. For this, the owner
must enclose a Decontamination Form. Refer to the Field
Decontamination Checklist on page 2–15.

200942-103—September 2007
Service Checklist
This form is a test requirement checklist for the FSE. Refer to
the m2000sp Service Manual for additional tests that might
be applicable for a specific replaced assembly or component.
Parts/Components Replaced
Gravimetric Test (50 or 800 µl)

S&S Ref. Posns. (LiHa/RoMa)
RoMa Deck and Shelf M&Ds

Heater Block Temp Check
Chiller/Heater Temp Test
RoMa 1mL Carrier M&D

CAN-BUS Resist Test
Z-Calibration Check
RoMa Mech. Adjust
Random Move Test
PosID Adjustment
FaWa Pump Test
Tightness Check
Door Lock Test

Sensor Test
PosID Test
CU PCB X X X X X X X X X X X X X
OPTIBO PCB X X X X X X X X
Power Supply X X
X-drive, X-slide, X-belt X X
LiHa Arm X X X X X X X X
LiHa Arm adjusted X X X X
LiHa Arm Belts X X X
LiHa Flex Cable X X X X
LiHa DC-Servo PCB X X X X X X X
LiHa DC-Servo Power PCB X X X X X X
LiHa Y-motors X X X
ILID Cable X
ILID VCC PCB X
ILID Board Flat Cable X X X X X
LiHa Backplane PCB X X X X X X
Tip Adapters X X X X X
DiTi Adapter (spare) X X X X X
RoMa Arm X X X X X X X
RoMa Arm aligned X X X X X X
RoMa Grippers X X X
Chiller X X
RoMa Arm Belts and Flex Cable X X X X X X

200942-103—September 2007
Section 9 Service Checklist



CAN-BUS Resist Test

Z-Calibration Check
RoMa Mech. Adjust
Random Move Test
PosID Adjustment
FaWa Pump Test
Tightness Check
Door Lock Test

Sensor Test
PosID Test
RoMa Rotator Motor, Gripper X X X X X X
Board
RoMa Y/R-, Z/G- DC- Servo X X X X X X

Motor PCBs
RoMa Y, Z Motors X X X X X X
RoMa Z-brake X X X X X X
RoMa Freedom Backplane X X X X X X X
RoMa CU PCB X X X X X X
RoMa X-DC-Servo Power PCB X X X X X X
RoMa 2 Backplane PCB X X X X X X X
PosID X X X X
PosID 2CU PCB X X X X
X-drive Assy (belt, motor, cable) X X
X-DC-Servo PCB X X X
Y/B PCB, Y/B-DC-Servo PCB X X
DSP Decoding PCB X X X
Scanner Assy (B-motor, head, X X X

and cable)
Y-drive Assy (Y-belt, gripper, X X

Y-motor)
No Tube Sensor X X X
Dilback VCC PCB X X
Dilutor X X X X X
Syringe X X X
3-way Valve X X X X
Pipetting Tubing X X X X
Interconnecting Tubing X X X X
Aspirating Tubing X X X X

200942-103—September 2007



CAN-BUS Resist Test

Z-Calibration Check
RoMa Mech. Adjust
Random Move Test
PosID Adjustment
FaWa Pump Test
Tightness Check
Door Lock Test

Sensor Test
PosID Test
Fast Wash Pump X X
Fast Wash Pump MPO PCB X X X
Fast Wash (MPO/FWO) Assy X X X
Cable to FaWa PCB X X
Pressure-Relief Valve X X
Tubing to Fast Wash Pump X X
Tubing to Pressure-Relief Valve X X
Worktable X X X X X
Worktable guide pins X X X
Door Locks X
System Liquid Sensor X
Liquid Waste Sensor X
Solid Waste Sensor X
SMIO/SAFY X X
SMIO X X
1 mL Subsystem Assy X X X X
1 mL Subsystem Heater Block X X
1 mL Subsystem Heater Boards X X
1 mL Subsystem Internal Cable X X
1 mL Subsystem OPTIBO Cable X X
Lower DiTi Eject Option X
Solenoid X
DC-DCPower Board X

200942-103—September 2007
Section 10: Shutdown, Storage, and Shipping
SECTION 10:
SHUTDOWN, STORAGE,
AND SHIPPING

200942-103—September 2007
Shutdown, Storage, and Shipping Section 10
NOTES

200942-103—September 2007
Table of Contents
TOC
Purpose of This Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
When to Decontaminate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5
Decontamination Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6
Instrument and Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7
SCC and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14

200942-103—September 2007

The following procedure is performed to prepare a system for
relocation. The FSE prepares the instrument for shipment.
Observe the following safety notices:

handling Abbott Laboratories sample preparation
protective eyewear.

200942-103—September 2007
Section 10 When to Decontaminate
When to Decontaminate
In addition to regular decontamination, the user must
thoroughly decontaminate the instrument according to
standard laboratory regulations in the following cases:
• before any maintenance or service is performed on the
instrument
• before an FSE performs on-site service on the instrument
• before the instrument is returned (e.g., for repair)
• prior to storage of the instrument
• prior to disposal of the instrument or parts of it
• in most cases, before the instrument or individual parts
leave the user’s site

200942-103—September 2007
Decontamination Method
The decontamination method must be adapted to the
respective application and associated substances used by the
operator. The owner assumes full responsibility for appropriate
decontamination of the entire instrument.
decontamination instructions, and refer to the Field
Decontamination Checklist on page 2–15 of Section 2 in this
manual.
WARNING: Potential Biohazard. Contamination
hazards exist if parts of the instrument are not
completely decontaminated. Components with direct
contact (or the potential for direct or accidental
contact) with chemical or biological material must be
treated, including the tubing system and all upstream
equipment.

200942-103—September 2007
Section 10 Instrument and Cabinet
Instrument and Cabinet

Perform the following steps prior to shipping/relocating the
instrument or prior to long-term shutdown (more than two
months).
NOTE: For long-term shutdown, the instrument and
hood (if applicable) do not need to be taken off the
cabinet and recrated, but all other steps should be
followed.
1. Disconnect system liquid tube from the system liquid
bottle and flush remaining liquid from the system before
performing the following procedure.
2. Power off the m2000sp. Unplug the m2000sp from the
power source (UPS or outlet).
3. Manually move the LiHa over the wash/waste station at
grid 18, and position the DiTis over the liquid waste chute.
4. If installed, remove and recrate the hood per TSB 605-018.
5. Open the upper access door on the top of the instrument
and unscrew and loosen each of the tubing connections at
the 1:4 manifolds.
6. Secure the tubing to the top of the instrument with tape.
7. Allow the water to drain completely out of the dispense
tubing.
8. Open the FaWa assembly door on the side of the m2000sp
and disconnect the tubing from the FaWa pump to allow
the fluid to drain.
9. It is the responsibility of the owner to dispose of solid and
liquid waste according to local regulations. Disconnect
and remove the solid waste container, and liquid waste
and system liquid bottles.
Clean the system liquid and liquid waste containers as
instructed in Clean Liquid System Procedures on page 8–8
of Section 8.
10. Remove all racks and carriers from the worktable surface.
11. Disconnect the two cables connected to the 1 mL
Subsystem and remove the 1 mL Subsystem from the
worktable surface. Remove the sealing strip and push the
two cables under the instrument.

200942-103—September 2007
12. Coil the 1 mL Subsystem cables, secure with tape or cable

ties, and place on the FaWa plate.
13. Disconnect the liquid and waste sensor cables from the
SMIO board.
14. Pull the sensor cables back to the sensors and secure to the
frame with tape or cable ties.
15. Disconnect the RS-232 cable from both the Optibo board
and SCC.
16. To protect the positioning pins, place two cardboard strips
between two rows on the worktable.
Figure 10.1: Cardboard Protection Strips
17. Install the left and right support brackets using two screws
to secure each bracket.

200942-103—September 2007
Figure 10.2: Support Bracket
18. Carefully move the PosID arms to the left.

19. Support the PosID by installing styrofoam pieces.
Figure 10.3: Styrofoam Supports
20. Carefully move the LiHa and RoMa arms to the left.
21. Support the LiHa and RoMa with styrofoam pieces.

200942-103—September 2007
Figure 10.4: Styrofoam Supports
22. Wedge a styrofoam block between the diluters and hotel,

and place two styrofoam blocks on the top ends of the
m2000sp as shown below.
Figure 10.5: Styrofoam Support Placement

200942-103—September 2007
23. With the assistance of others, carefully lift the m2000sp off
the cabinet and place it on a pallet. Use the lifting handles
to lift the m2000sp. Follow the instructions in Lifting the
Instrument on page 4–22 for proper use of the lifting
handles.
WARNING: The instrument is heavy. Four people
are required to carefully lift the instrument onto
the cabinet. While lifting, ensure the lift handles
remain engaged with the locking features of the
instrument.
Figure 10.6: Correct Placement on Pallet

200942-103—September 2007
24. Place the 1 mL Subsystem and accessories in the cardboard

accessories box and place the box inside the instrument
on the right side of the worktable.
Figure 10.7: Correct Placement of Boxed Components
25. Box the instrument. The shipper is responsible for

banding the package.
Figure 10.8: The Instrument Boxed

200942-103—September 2007
26. Place any remaining accessories into the cabinet storage

area and secure with tape and styrofoam.
27. Box the cabinet. The shipper is responsible for banding the
package.
Figure 10.9: Cabinet and Instrument Ready for Shipping

200942-103—September 2007
SCC and Accessories
1. Power off the SCC, monitor, printer, and UPS. Disconnect

the power cords from the power source.
2. Disconnect all cables from the rear of the SCC.
3. Remove the monitor, keyboard, SCC, Edgeport™, and
printer from the computer cart and place them in packing
boxes. Pack associated cabling with each component.
4. Place the computer cart in a sturdy packing box.
5. Place the UPS in a sturdy packing box.

200942-103—September 2007
Section 10 Storage
Storage
• Use a cover to protect the instrument against dust and
debris, and store the instrument under the following
conditions:
– Storage Temperature: 1 to 60°C/34 to 140°F
– Storage Humidity: 5 to 80% relative (non-condensing)
at 울 30°C/86°F
• Store the instrument in its original packaging. Store all
manuals and logbooks with the instrument.

200942-103—September 2007
NOTES

200942-103—September 2007
Section 11: Genesis Setup and Service Software
SECTION 11:
GENESIS SETUP AND
SERVICE SOFTWARE

200942-103—September 2007
Genesis Setup and Service Software Section 11
NOTES

200942-103—September 2007
Table of Contents
TOC
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
PC Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
Firmware Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9
Setup & Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-10
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-10
Starting and Finishing Setup and Service . . . . . . . . . . 11-10
Password Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11
Setup & Service Main Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12
Standard Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-14
Move Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-17
Operating Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-21
Normal/Simulation Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-22
System Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-23
Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-24
COM Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-25
Initialize Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-26
Load Worktable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-26
Test Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-28
Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-29
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-30
Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-32
Print Specific Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-32
Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-33
View and Tools Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-34
View Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-34
Instrument Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-35
Instrument Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-35
Basic Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-35
Serial Number Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-39
Firmware Download . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-41
EEPROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-42
Worktable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-44
Set X-drive Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-46
Set Machine Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-47
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-48
Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-50
Test Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-51
Command Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-52
Batch File Execution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-53
Command Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-53

200942-103—September 2007
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-57
Results Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-58
Information Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-62
Version Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-63
Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-64
System Devices Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-67
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-67
System Devices Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-68
Positive Identification Functions for PosID 2 . . . . . . . . . 11-69
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-69
Mechanical Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-72
Bar Code Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-88
Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-91
Movement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-101
Liquid Handling Arm (LiHa) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-103
LiHa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-104
Movement Axes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-105
Required Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-105
Before Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-105
Panel Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-106
Procedures and User Permission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-107
Directory, Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-107
LiHa Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-108
Channel Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-110
Move LiHa Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-114
Setup Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-116
Set Default Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-118
Determine Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-118
Determine Reference Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-121
Determine Spacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-123
Individual Z Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-124
Check Tip Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-124
Calibrate the Lower DiTi Eject Protocol . . . . . . . . . . 11-125
Dilutor Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-126
Information Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-133
Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-135
Test Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-136
Move Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-138
Range Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-140
Random Move Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-141
Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-143
Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-146
Test Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-148
Robotic Manipulator Arm (RoMa) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-149
RoMa Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-155

200942-103—September 2007
Move RoMa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-158

Setup Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-159
Set Default Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-160
Determine/Check Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-161
Set Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-163
Determine Reference Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-165
Adjust Rotator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-168
Information Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-169
Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-171
Test Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-172
Liquid System Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-174
Liquid System Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-175
DiTi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-176
Lower DiTi Eject Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-177
Liquid Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-181
Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-182
Normal Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-187
Fill/Flush . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-194
FaWa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-195
Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-196
Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-196
Options Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-206
Menu Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-206
Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-206
Access Status Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-207
Files, Directories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-207
Access Status Options Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-208
Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-208
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-208
Using the Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-209
Setup: Set Defaults in EEPROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-209
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-210
Test: Device Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-210
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-211
Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-215
Test Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-216
Incubation Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-217
Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-218
Burn-In of Heating Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-220
OPTIONAL Test: Heating Validation with TEMPO110 . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-221

200942-103—September 2007
SMIO for NAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-223

Calibration of the DiTi Waste Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-223
Rapid Sensor Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-227
Accurate Sensor Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-229

200942-103—September 2007
This section describes installation of the G-series Instrument

software (Setup & Service software) for the m2000sp
instrument on a target computer. Information in this section
should be thoroughly reviewed before starting installation.
Refer to Section 4, Installation for an installation checklist
and Section 2, Safety for instrument and non-instrument
related hazards and safety measures.

200942-103—September 2007
Introduction
PC Requirements
Genesis Instrument software must be installed on a target
computer which is or will be connected to an m2000sp
instrument. The installation of the Genesis Setup and Service
software occurs during the installation of system software.
Installation
Refer to the latest software TSB and/or ISA for installation
instructions.

200942-103—September 2007
Section 11 Firmware Compatibility
Firmware Compatibility
The Genesis Instrument software, Setup & Service was
validated with the firmware versions as defined in the
following table.
The following table lists firmware versions that were valid
when this manual was issued. It is possible some have
since changed. Contact your Abbott Representative for
the latest firmware list.
Table 11.1: Firmware Versions
File name
Device Download Firmware Comments
(--- = no file)
Genesis-CU Yes v1.63-12/2002 GENI163.hex Controls LiHa and
Control Unit machine
MPO Yes v2.00-11/99 MPO200.hex FaWa
Monitored Pump
Option
PosID 2 Yes v2.50-02/03 POS2_250.hex PosID 2
Positive
Identification
RoMa Yes v1.13-07/2002 dcuro113.hex RoMa on Device-CU
Robotic
Manipulator Arm
SAFY Yes v1.00-05/2001 ___sa100.hex SAFY
SMIO-SAFY Yes v1.01-11/99 SMIO101.hex SMIO-SAFY
VCC Yes v1.20-06/2000 vcc120.hex (for Dilutor type XP
Volume Control 3000 plus)
Center
MAGS Yes v1.30-01/2003 MAGS for 1 mL Subsystem
130.hex

200942-103—September 2007
Setup & Service

Purpose
This section describes the following:
• How to start the Setup & Service software
• The different password levels
• The GENESIS Setup & Service user interface
• General functions of the software
• The different operating modes
WARNING: Setup and calibration data affect the
performance of every instrument operation. Read this
manual when changing any of these settings, and
carefully follow instructions in relevant sections.
The m2000sp instrument or workstation was thoroughly
configured and tested at the factory site before it was shipped
to the customer. However, to check the settings after transport,
the setup procedure must be repeated after installation at
customers site to verify proper functioning of the m2000sp
instrument or workstation.
Starting and Finishing Setup and Service
Starting the Program

To start the Setup & Service software, log in to the application
as an FSE and navigate to <System><Setup and Service>.
The Setup & Service software starts with the GENESIS Setup &
Service Main window which displays an empty worktable.
NOTE: If there is no communication between the
computer and instrument, components could be
disconnected or communication is not working
properly. A message displays, prompting whether to
proceed. Check connections to the instrument!
The Genesis Instrument software uses standard Windows keys
and keyboard functions. The software can be controlled with
the mouse or keyboard. However, not all functions are
accessible to users without a mouse. There are no unique key
functions within Genesis Instrument software.

200942-103—September 2007
Section 11 Setup & Service
Finishing the Program

Perform the following step to finish the Setup & Service
software.
Select <System><Exit>. The Setup & Service Main window
closes and communication to the instrument is disconnected.
The entire SCC will shut down. Power on the SCC to restart
the m2000sp application.
Password Protection
Purpose
Access to the FSE level of Setup & Service is password protected
to prevent unauthorized use of the Setup & Service module of
the Genesis Instrument software.
Access Levels
There are two access levels:
• Operators—Operators can perform tests and validation
procedure without password entry. If so, some menu items
and controls are disabled. Operators cannot perform setup
and calibration procedures that could affect instrument
performance if performed incorrectly.
• FSEs—Setup and calibration procedures require the FSE
password because of restricted access. In this manual,
these procedures include the following note:
Entering the Password

Enter the FSE password with <System><Password>. Refer to
Password later in this section.

200942-103—September 2007
Setup & Service Main Window
Overview
The Genesis Setup & Service Main window is divided into
four sections as illustrated below.
Toolbar can be switched on/off Menu Bar

with View > Tool Bar
Worktable (empty)
Status bar can be switched

on/off with View > Status Bar

200942-103—September 2007
Menu Bar
The menu bar includes the following menus and commands.
Command Description
System System functions
View View functions
Instrument Instrument functions
System System devices
Devices
Liquid System Liquid system functions
Options Options 1 and 2, and Te-MO
Toolbar
The toolbar contains quick-access buttons for the most
frequently used functions.
1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6)
Figure 11.1: Toolbar
Button Description
1) <System><Password>
2) <System><Initialize Instrument>
3) <System><Load Worktable>
4) <System><Test Configuration>
5) <System><About>
6) <<System><iew><Worktable><Zoom Active>

200942-103—September 2007
Standard Panel
Description
Many Setup & Service functions open a function panel that is
subdivided into several pages. The following illustration
displays the Access Status panel.
• There are one or more tabs at the top of the window to

allow selection of several functions.
• The list box Available Devices in the Contents page
displays the selectable devices. Refer to Device Selection
later in this section.
• Usually, there are several checkboxes below the list box.
Selection of one or more checkbox (聺) defines desired
options in the instrument software.
– All can be checked at once to perform all possible
setups and tests in one run.
– Checkboxes can be selected one at a time to perform
each setup or test individually.
– If selecting checkboxes individually, the setups/tests
should be selected in a logical order, i.e., the topmost
checkbox is selected first then proceed down the list
with selections.

200942-103—September 2007
• The command buttons at the bottom are used to start and

stop selected actions, print reports, etc. Refer to
Command Buttons later in this section.
Device Selection
Available devices listed below are included in the Available
Devices section on the corresponding Contents page. The
behavior of the software depends on the number of connected
devices.
No of
Connected Behavior
Devices
0 The Start button is dimmed and the tabs are
visible.
1 The connected device is automatically
selected and its settings are read
automatically.
2 or more None of the connected devices are selected.
One device must be selected then its settings
are read.
Command Buttons
The command buttons near the bottom of the screen are used
to perform the desired action.

200942-103—September 2007
Button Description
Start Starts the desired procedure. This is possible:
- if a device is selected in the Available Devices
section.
- if at least one setup or test procedure is selected.
- if valid data were entered on the corresponding
pages.
- If more than one procedure is selected, they are
executed in the sequence as listed in the
Contents page. The topmost procedure is
executed first. After starting a procedure, Start
changes to Stop.
Stop Stops a running procedure. The procedures
executed are marked gray, those not executed are
black.
Execution can be resumed with Start if no settings
are changed.
Print Prints the test results or the Test report, if
implemented.
Save As Starts the standard Windows Save As dialog to
save the test configuration data in an appropriate
*.any file.
Enter the full file name (with extension.any).
Default Sets all parameters to their default values.
Undo Reverts to the previous settings.
OK Saves the defined values and closes the panel.
Cancel Closes the panel, but does not save any changes.
Close Closes the panel.
Apply Saves defined values, but does not close the panel.
The window remains open. After selecting Apply,
Cancel changes to Close and OK is dimmed.

200942-103—September 2007
Move Pages
Description
Panels for some system devices and options that contain
movable parts (e.g., LiHa, RoMa) contain a Move page. The
Move page allows movement of the whole device or parts of it
in certain movement axes. The following example illustrates
the Move LiHa page.
NOTE: In this section, only the movement buttons are
described. For other controls on a specific Move page,
refer to the description of the respective system device
or option.
Movement Buttons
Depending on the parts that can be moved, a Move page
includes some or all of the following movement buttons.
Button Description
Single step, in 1/10 mm or 1/10 degree,
movement/rotation buttons.
Ten steps, in 1 mm or 1 degree,

200942-103—September 2007
Button Description
Continuous movement/rotation buttons
when button is kept pressed.
Special buttons to move certain parts to
specific logical positions. Refer to the Move
page of the corresponding device for
details.
• Arrows on the movement buttons indicate the direction

that respective parts will move.
• If the mouse pointer is placed over a movement button,
text displays to explain the button’s function (“tool tip”).
Using the Keyboard

In addition to movement buttons, certain keys can also be
used to move parts as illustrated below.
Insert Home
Page Num
/ _
Up lock *
Delete End
Page 7 8 9
Down Home PgUp
+
4 5 6
1 2 3
End PgDn
Enter
0 .
Ins Del
Figure 11.2: Keyboard controls
Available keys are located:

• In the numeric keypad on the right side of the keyboard;
refer to NOTE below.
• To move LiHa and RoMa, keys in the key blocks to the left
of the numeric keypad can also be used.
NOTE: If keys of the numeric keypad will be used,
ensure the Num Lock is enabled; if there is a Num
Lock indicator lamp, it must be turned on.

200942-103—September 2007
Directions
The following table lists the axes and directions in which the
devices (LiHa and RoMa) can be moved.
Key in
Key (Left of Movement/
Numeric Pad Movement
Numeric Rotation Axes
(Num Lock Axes LiHa
Keypad) RoMa
Switched on)
6 X+ (right) X+ (right)
4 X- (left) X- (left)
2↓ Y+ front Y+ front
8 Y- (rear) Y- (rear)
Page Down PgDn 3 Z+ (down) Z+ (down)
Page Up PgUp 9 Z- (up) Z- (up)
a
Home 7 Home R+ (CW) ---
End 1 End R- (CCW) a) ---
b G+ (increase) c
Delete Delete G+ (open)
Insert 0 Insert G- (close) b) G- (decrease) c)
+ --- ---
- --- ---
a. RoMa - Rotation of gripper head clockwise/counterclockwise
b. RoMa - Open/close grippers
c. LiHa - Increase/decrease spacing between tips
Steps
Movable parts of the listed arms or options are moved as
described below.
• Each time one of the above keys is pressed, the part is
moved/rotated by one step, 0.1 mm or 0.1 degree.
• If the key is pressed and held down, the part is
moved/rotated continuously at a speed of two steps per
second.
• With LiHa and RoMa, the key can be pressed continuously
with the Ctrl key pressed at the same time. If so, the arm
is accelerated until it reaches a maximum speed.

200942-103—September 2007
Result Files
For newer functions, each time a test procedure is started, a
result file is created and test results (all information as on the
Test reports) are written to the directories listed.
Description
Saved in C:\Program Files\Tecan\Genesis
directory: Instrument Software\Results
File name: <function>_<serial_number>_<date>_<ti
me>.any
Example: LiHa_2209_29Mar2003_09-14-18.any
Log Files
Some functions create a log file to which measured values are
written.
Description
directory: Instrument Software\Log
File name: Function dependent, refer to corresponding
section
Test Configuration Files (*.any)

If test configuration data are saved with Save As, an
appropriate *.any file is created and written to the following
directory.
Description
Saved in directory: C:\Program Files\Tecan\Genesis
Instrument Software\Service
File name: <name>.any
Example: MyPosID.any
• Existing *.any files can be loaded from the user-defined

directory with <System><Test Configuration>.
The file name displays in the corresponding <function> Panel
Windows title bar and printed in the Test report as Test
Configuration: User Defined [file name].

200942-103—September 2007
Test Configuration Files (*.ini)

If Save is selected for test configuration data for older
functions, an appropriate *.ini file is created and written to
the directories listed.
Description
File name: <name>.ini
Example: MyPosIDTest.ini
• Load an existing *.ini file with <System>

<Test Configuration>.
Operating Conditions
Before operating Setup & Service, perform the following
verifications.
1. Ensure the correct firmware is downloaded; refer to
Firmware Compatibility, page 11-9.
2. To avoid movement crashes, verify the instrument is set
up with <Instrument><Basic Setup>.
NOTE: The correct worktable size is set
automatically when a worktable is loaded.
3. Some functions require an empty worktable free of all
obstacles. Observe the NOTES included in the
corresponding sections.
4. Do not start any function if the prerequisites or
requirements described are not fulfilled.

200942-103—September 2007
Normal/Simulation Mode
Operating Modes
The instrument software can run in two operating modes. This
section describes the normal mode of operation.
Normal Mode
This is the normal mode of operation of Setup & Service
software for all Genesis Instruments and workstations, with all
functions and menu entries enabled.
Simulation Mode
In the simulation mode, Setup & Service software can be run
without a physical instrument connected to the computer.
This mode allows telephone support personnel to simulate
certain features when no instrument is connected to their
computers. However, access to features is quite restricted in
this mode; therefore its use is not recommended.
If an instrument is not connected to the computer, the Setup
& Service software automatically starts in simulation mode.
Normal and simulation modes are possible for all supported
instrument types.
Switching to Normal Mode

To switch from Simulation back to Normal mode, ensure the
RS-232 cable is plugged in, power is on to the instrument, and
the port is set to COM 1.

200942-103—September 2007
Section 11 System Functions
System Functions
Description
The System menu includes all commands that apply to the
whole system and not to a particular function.
Commands
The System menu includes the following commands.
Command Description
RMP Enables operation in RMP mode; refer to
Operating Conditions, page 11-21. Not
applicable with the m2000sp instrument.
Password For entering the FSE password; refer to
Password, page 11-24.
Initialize Prepares the instrument for usage by
Instrument initializing each axis. After switching on the
instrument, it must be initialized.
Load Loads a predefined or edited worktable map;
Worktable refer to Load Worktable, page 11-26.
Test Loads an *.ini or *.any configuration file;
Configuration refer to Test Configuration, page 11-28.
Print Setup Starts the standard Windows dialog to set up
a printer.
Print Prints test configuration and test results;
refer to Print, page 11-29.

200942-103—September 2007
Command Description
About Opens a window that displays copyright,
version, and other information related to
the Setup & Service software.
Exit Terminates the Setup & Service software;
refer to Exit, page 11-33.
Password
Purpose
To prevent unauthorized use of the Setup & Service module of
the Genesis Instrument software, access to the FSE level of
Setup & Service software is password-protected. No other
passwords are required. The FSE password is always the same
because there is not an available function to change the
password.
Procedure
Perform the following steps to enter the FSE password.
1. Start the function with <System><Password> or select the
icon on the toolbar. The Password dialog displays.
2. Enter the FSE password in the Enter Password field.

Confirm with OK. The FSE functions are enabled and
accessible in menus and screens.

200942-103—September 2007
COM Port
Purpose
This function allows the communication port (e.g., COM 1, 2,
etc.) to be selected or changed. The computer communicates
with the instrument through the communication port.
NOTE: For m2000sp, the communication port should
always be set to COM1.
Procedure
Perform the following steps to select or change a
communication port.
1. Ensure the instrument is connected to the required COM
port connector, usually located on the rear side of the
computer. Consult the accompanying documentation of
the computer, if necessary.
Figure 11.3: COM Port Sub-menu
2. From the system COM port sub-menu, select the correct

port (COM 1, 2 etc.) The sub-menu lists all available COM
ports.
NOTE: In the sub-menu, the currently selected COM
port displays with a checkbox (聺).
NOTE: Depending on the selection, the computer
automatically leaves or enters the simulation mode, if
the instrument was connected to the “correct” COM
port before the simulation mode is entered and vice
versa.
NOTE: If the port does not save when set to COM 1
verify that the modem is not connected to COM 1.

200942-103—September 2007
Initialize Instrument
Purpose
This function initializes the instrument. During initialization,
all installed system devices (PosID, LiHa, and RoMa) are
moved to their initial positions:
• PosID RoMa and LiHa to the left side.
Procedure
Perform the following step to initialize the instrument.
1. Start the function with <System><Initialize Instrument>
or select the icon in the toolbar. The following message
displays:
The message box disappears when initialization is

complete.
Load Worktable
Purpose
To perform setups and tests, Setup & Service software requires
information about the location of carriers, racks, etc. on the
worktable. Tecan provides five predefined worktable maps
stored in the Genesis software database:
• NAT Worktable
– use for all m2000sp applications
• Default Worktable
• Empty Worktable
• Field Worktable NPS
• Liquid System Check Worktable
Additionally, Abbott provides the m2000sp worktable.

200942-103—September 2007
Procedure
Perform the following steps to load a worktable map.
1. Start the function with <System><Load Worktable> or
select the icon in the toolbar. The Select Worktable
dialog displays.
Figure 11.4:Select Worktable Dialog
2. Select the desired worktable (m2000sp or NAT MBS).

NOTE: For any instrument using m2000sp
Software Version 2.0 or higher, use the m2000sp
Worktable.
3. Load the worktable map with OK. The selected map loads
and displays on the screen.
Figure 11.5: m2000sp Worktable

200942-103—September 2007
Figure 11.6:NAT MBS Worktable
Test Configuration
Purpose
The Test Configuration function loads a *.any or *.ini
configuration file.
NOTE: Never alter configuration files. They contain
configuration specific data to perform all instrument
tests.
NOTE: For the m2000sp instrument it is not necessary
to load the Service.ini file because the file is loaded by
default.
Procedure
Perform the following steps to load a *.any or *.ini file.
1. Start the function with <System><Test Configuration>
or select the icon in the toolbar. The Open
Configuration dialog displays.
2. To load an *.any file, select the file type in the Files of
type list.
3. Select the appropriate file.
4. Load the file with Open.
• *.ini configuration files are normally located in the
C:\Program Files\Tecan\Genesis Instrument
Software\Service directory.
• *.any configuration files are saved in a user-defined
directory.

200942-103—September 2007
Print
Print Sub-menu
The Print sub-menu includes the following sub-menu
commands.
Command Description
Configuration Prints the configuration data stored in the
appropriate *.ini file; refer to Configuration,
page 11-30.
Test Prints test results of tests performed with the
instrument; refer to Test, page 11-32.
For older functions, specific configuration data or test results

can be printed by selecting Print for the corresponding
function (Print Specific Data, page 11-32).
Genesis Instrument software uses standard Windows printer
functions.

200942-103—September 2007
Configuration
Purpose
This function prints the configuration data stored in the
appropriate *.ini file. It opens the dialog displayed on the left.
The Common Print Information dialog includes the
following controls.

200942-103—September 2007
Control Description
Destination
Printer Checkbox to select the printer for output
destination.
File Checkbox to select a file for output
destination.
After selecting OK, the standard Windows
Save As dialog displays. Select the desired
folder and enter a file name. Save the
output with Save.
Header Fields for free text. The entries are not
Information checked against a database.
Operator Operator ID for header information.
Option x Option serial number x of the devices
Serial No currently used, e.g., the serial number of a
replaced device.
OK Starts printing.
Cancel Aborts the function without printing.
Procedure
Perform the following steps to print all configuration data.
1. Start with <System><Print><Configuration>. The
Common Print Information dialog displays.
2. Select the print destination(s) and enter the Header
Information.
3. Start immediate printing with OK.

200942-103—September 2007
Test
Purpose
This function prints the results of tests performed with the
instrument.
Procedure
Perform the following steps to print the results of tests
performed with the instrument.
1. Start with <System><Print><Test>. The Common Print
Information dialog displays.
Information. Refer to Configuration, page 11-30.
3. Start immediate printing with OK.
Print Specific Data

Perform the following steps to print configuration data, and/or
test results of a specific older function after any test was run.
1. Select Print on the corresponding screen. The Common
Print Information dialog displays.
Information; refer to Configuration, page 11-30. Confirm
entries with OK. The Test Specific Print Information
dialog displays.
Figure 11.7: Test Specific Print Information Dialog

200942-103—September 2007
The Test Specific Print Information dialog includes the

following controls.
Control Description
Print
Configuration Checkbox to select the configuration
data to be printed.
Detailed Checkbox to select detailed test
Results results to be printed. If the Detailed
Results checkbox is not selected, the
results printed will only be Test
passed or Test failed.
Comments Field for free comments.
OK Starts printing.
Cancel Aborts the function without
printing.
Help Provides help.
3. Select the data to be printed and enter any comments in

the Comments field.
4. Start immediate printing with OK. The Test Specific Print
Information dialog closes and the original screen is active
again.
Exit
Perform the following steps to finish the Setup & Service
software safely without data loss.
Select <System><Exit>.
Because changes to setup or test configurations are applied
immediately when selecting Apply or OK, there is no need for
<File><Save> or similar function in the Setup & Service
software.

200942-103—September 2007
View and Tools Functions

View Menu
The View menu includes the following commands.
Command Description
Worktable Refer to Figure 11.8 below.
Tool Bar Displays/hides the toolbar of the Main window.
Status Bar Displays/hides the status bar at the bottom of
the Main window.
The Worktable sub-menu includes the following three menu

commands.
Figure 11.8: Worktable Sub-menu
Command Description
Carrier Displays/hides carrier names in the worktable
Names map.
Rack Displays/hides rack names in the worktable
Names map.
Zoom Zooms the worktable map.
Active

200942-103—September 2007
Section 11 Instrument Functions
Instrument Functions
Instrument Menu
The Instrument menu includes the following commands.
Command Description
Basic Setup Sets up an instrument (initial setup); refer to
Basic Setup, page 11-35.
Command Allows for use of single commands or
Tool execution of batch files.
Information Provides detailed information about
installed system devices and options; refer
to Information, page 11-57.
Basic Setup
Purpose
The Basic Setup panel allows setup of the m2000sp instrument
for further use (initial setup). This setup must be performed in
the following cases:
• To set X-drive properties, e.g., changing a CU board
without restoring parameters stored in EEPROM.
• When new firmware will be downloaded.
• To backup or restore parameters stored in EEPROM.
• When serial numbers will be configured.
• To define possible cutouts in the worktable.

200942-103—September 2007
Basic Setup Panel

The Basic Setup panel provides several procedures to be
executed. Generally, it is necessary to perform the following
steps.
1. Start the panel with <Instrument><Basic Setup>.
2. Select the setup procedures to perform and modify the
corresponding settings.
Proceed in one of the following two ways:
• Select ALL Setup checkboxes at once and enter
necessary data on the corresponding pages. Select
Start and all setup procedures are performed in one
run.
• Select one or more Setup checkboxes and define the
necessary data as described. Select Start to perform
the currently selected setup procedures.
• If the second method is selected, start with the
topmost setup procedure and work downward. Use
the second method to repeat an individual setup.
Before starting any setup procedure, the Operator field
on the Printing page should be completed.
3. Start the desired procedure(s) with Start.
4. After performing any setup, consult the Information page
Information, page 11-48.
5. Print the setup results.
6. Finish with Close.

200942-103—September 2007
Functions and User Permissions

Refer to
Operator FSE
Section
Serial Number Setting X page 11–39
Firmware Download X page 11–41
EEPROM Backup/Restore X page 11–42
Worktable X X page 11–44
Set X-drive Properties X page 11–46
Set Machine Size X 11–47
Information X X page 11–48
Printing X X page 11–50
Test Report X X page 11–51
Directory, Files
The Basic Setup function can create the following files (refer
also to Setup & Service, page 11-10).
Description
directory Instrument Software\Results
File name BasicSetup_<serial_number>_<date>_<tim
e>.any
Pages
The Instrument Basic Setup Panel is subdivided into the
following pages.

200942-103—September 2007
Page Description
Contents General overview, procedure selection.
Serial Number Serial number data; refer to Serial Number
Settings Settings, page 11-39.
Firmware Configuration of the firmware to be
Download downloaded; refer to Firmware Download,
page 11-41.
EEPROM Backs up/restores contents of EEPROM; refer
to EEPROM, page 11-42.
Worktable Provides information about the worktable
layout; refer to Worktable, page 11-44.
Set X-drive For setting up the X-drive; refer to Set
Properties X-drive Properties, page 11-46.
Information Displays instrument properties, diagnostic
data, and device information; refer to
Information, page 11-48.
Printing Print selection for the Test report; refer to
Printing, page 11-50.
The Instrument Basic Setup Panel also includes the standard

command buttons. Refer to Standard Panel in this section for
details.
Controls
The Contents page includes several checkboxes for selection
(or omission) of the following procedures,
Checkbox Description
Serial Number Displays the serial number of all installed
Settings devices; refer to Serial Number Settings,
page 11-39.
Firmware Displays and downloads firmware for
Download installed devices; refer to Serial Number
Settings, page 11-39.
EEPROM Backs up/restores EEPROM parameters; refer
to Serial Number Settings, page 11-39.
Set X Drive Determines the order of the arms and arm
Properties type at each position, and sets the default
offset and displacement for each arm; refer
to Serial Number Settings, page 11-39.

200942-103—September 2007
Checkbox Description
Set Machine Determines the size of the instrument; refer
Size to Serial Number Settings, page 11-39.
Using the Basic Setup Panel

Perform the following steps to set up the m2000sp instrument.
1. Start the panel with <Instrument><Basic Setup>.
NOTE: The Instrument Basic Setup panel with
activated Contents page displays. After starting
the Basic Setup function, no checkboxes are
selected and not all tabs are visible.
2. Select the setup procedures to be performed, and define
necessary data as described in the appropriate section. All
setup procedures can be selected all at once, or one or
more at a time.
3. Before starting any setup procedure, switch to the
Printing page to complete the Operator and Comment
fields as desired.
4. Start the selected procedures with Start.
5. Perform one of the following:
• Switch to the Information page to view setup
information (Information, page 11-48).
• Switch to the Printing page to preview the Test report
(Printing, page 11-50).
Serial Number Settings

Purpose
The Serial Number Settings procedure displays serial numbers
for the installed devices. If no serial number is set for a device
(exception), it can also be entered.

200942-103—September 2007
Procedure
Perform the following steps to display serial numbers.
1. Select the Serial Number Settings checkbox (聺) and
switch to the Serial Number Settings page.
The Serial Number Settings page includes the following

control.
Control Description
Set for Checkboxes to select device addresses for
which the serial number will be set.
2. If no serial number is set for a device (0 displays instead of

a serial number), select the corresponding Set for
checkbox (聺) and type the serial number in the respective
field in the Serial Number column.
NOTE: Incorrect serial numbers are accepted by the
system and cannot be changed at a later time.
3. Save the entries with Start.

200942-103—September 2007
Firmware Download
Purpose
The Firmware Download procedure displays the current
firmware versions for the installed devices and downloads a
new or updated firmware version to the instrument.
Before starting the procedure refer to Firmware Compatibility
in this section to verify firmware compatibility.
Procedure
Perform the following steps to display the current firmware
version and to download a new one.
1. On the Contents page, select the Firmware Download
checkbox (聺) and switch to the Firmware Download
page.
Devices with firmware that cannot be downloaded do not

display on the Firmware Download page.
The Firmware Download page includes the following
controls.
Control Description
Do for Checkboxes to select the device address of
the firmware to download.
Replace List boxes to select the firmware files to
with download.
Browse Command buttons that start the standard
[…] Windows Open dialog to search the file to
download in a directory other than
C:\Program Files\Tecan\Genesis
Instrument Software\Firmware.

200942-103—September 2007
2. Perform the following to select new firmware:

• Select the corresponding Do for checkbox (聺).
• Select the firmware file from the Replace with list or
use the Browser […] button) to search the file.
3. Select Start to download the file.
4. If the message Please switch instrument off and on
displays:
• Switch off the instrument.
• Wait several seconds then switch it on again.
• Select OK at the Setup: Done prompt.
EEPROM
Purpose
The EEPROM function allows backup on disk of EEPROM
parameters of one or more devices, and/or restore such
parameters from disk. For example, backup of current device
parameters is recommended if an electronic board is replaced.
After the board is replaced, parameters can be restored so setup
or calibration procedures need not be performed again.
The EEPROM page includes the following controls.
Control Description
Do for Checkboxes to select the device addresses of
the EEPROMs to backup.

200942-103—September 2007
Control Description
Restore with Displays the names of the files selected with
the Browse […] buttons.
Browse […] Command buttons that start the standard
Windows Open dialog to search the files with
parameters to restore.
Backup
1. On the Contents page, select the EEPROM
Backup/Restore checkbox (聺) and switch to the
EEPROM page. The EEPROM page displays.
2. Select the checkboxes (聺) of the EEPROMs to be backed

up.
3. Select Start. Contents of the selected EEPROMs are written

to disk.
Restore
Perform the following steps to restore the contents of a file
previously backed up.

200942-103—September 2007
1. Select the checkboxes (聺) of devices that need parameters

restored.
2. Use the appropriate browser buttons […] to search the files
that need parameters restored. Names of the selected files
display in the Restore with column.
3. Select Start. When Start is selected, the following occurs:
• Before restore is started, a backup copy is made of the
EEPROM contents of each selected device. Backup
data are written to the C:\Program
Files\Tecan\Genesis Instrument Software\EEPROM
directory.
• Contents of files displayed in the Restore with
column are restored to the associated EEPROMs, i.e.,
written back into the respective EEPROMs.
Worktable
Purpose
The Worktable page is a tool that allows definition of possible
cutouts positions in worktables of the following instruments:
• m2000sp instrument
• Cutout left: none
• Cutout right: none

200942-103—September 2007
• Cutout board: not selected
The Worktable page includes the following controls.
Control Description
Upper part Picture that illustrates the worktable.
Selected cutouts display in the picture.
Frame Cutout Set of option buttons for definition of the
left cutout type on the left machine side.
None No cutout on this side.
Centrifuge Cutout for centrifuge below worktable.
Reader Cutout for reader below worktable.
Frame Cutout Set of option buttons for definition of the
right cutout type on the right machine side.
Refer above.
Frame Cutout Checkbox to select a cutout at the right
border edge of the worktable.
• Elements on the page cannot be activated if no cutouts are

possible for the specific instrument.
• Before using the Worktable page, define the machine size
with Set Machine Size.

200942-103—September 2007
Procedure
Perform the following steps to define cutouts in the
Worktable.
1. From the Main menu, select <Instrument><Basic Setup>.
2. If not previously done, set the machine size; refer to Set
Machine Size, page 11-47.
3. Select the Worktable tab. The Worktable page displays.
4. Use the option buttons and/or checkboxes to define the
m2000sp worktable.
• Cutout left: none
• Cutout right: none
• Cutout board: not selected
5. Select the appropriate command button to store or discard
the selections:
• Apply: selections are stored, the panel remains open.
• OK: selections are stored, the panel is closed.
• Cancel: discards selections and closes the panel.
Set X-drive Properties

This procedure is only performed when an arm, such as the

LiHa or RoMa, is replaced or a CU board is replaced and
EEPROM data are not restored.
Purpose
The Set X Drive Properties procedure determines the order of
the arms and arm type at each position, and sets the default
offset and displacement for each arm.
Before Starting
• Ensure the worktable is empty and free of obstacles at all
times.
• Verify each arm can be initialized.
• If the X-drive properties are set, the LiHa and RoMa setup
function must be performed afterward.

200942-103—September 2007
Procedure
Perform the following steps to set the X-drive properties.
1. On the Contents page, select the Set X Drive Properties
checkbox (聺). No other parameters are selected.
2. Start the procedure with Start.
3. At the end of the procedure, the values found are written
to the instrument.
Set Machine Size

This procedure should only be performed if the instrument is

not set at 150.
Purpose
The Set Machine Size procedure detects the instrument size or
worktable length.
Procedure
Perform the following steps to determine the machine size.
1. On the Contents page, select the Set Machine Size
checkbox (聺). No further parameters need to be defined.
3. At the end of the procedure, the values found are written
to the instrument.

200942-103—September 2007
Information
Purpose
The Information page summarizes current instrument
properties, diagnostics data, and device information.
Using the Page

1. Switch to the Information page.

200942-103—September 2007
The Information page displays the following data:
Description
Type Instrument type, e.g., Classic, Freedom
Instrument
Properties
Size Instrument size—100, 150, or 200 [cm]
Pos Position of arm installed—left to right
Arm Arm installed
Addr Address of arm
Power Ups Number of times the instrument was
switched on since first startupa
On Time Total power on time in hours
Diagnostics
RS-232 Host Connection to CU board

Error - Interrupts since last power up
interrupts - Overall (total number of interrupts since
first startup)a
Repeated - Repeated messages since last power up
messages - Overall (total number of messages since first
startup)a
Device Name Device name, e.g., LiHa, RoMa, etc.
Device Info
Addr Address of device

Firmware Current firmware version
Bootware Current bootware version
Serial Serial number
Number
a. first startup = time when instrument was run the first time
2. Print the setup results with Print or preview the Test

report (Printing, page 11-50).

200942-103—September 2007
Printing
Purpose
The Printing page allows configuration of reports to meet
laboratory requirements.
Figure 11.9: Printing Page
Controls
The Printing page includes the following controls.
Control Description
Detailed Print Section Configuration
Header Checkbox to select global data.
Instrument Checkbox to select instrument
Properties properties according to the
Information page.
Diagnostics data Checkbox to select the diagnostics
data displayed on the Information
page.
Multiple existing Data selection valid for all device data
Sections selected in the Detailed Print Section
Configuration section.
Operator Field for operator name. An entry is
recommended.
Comment Field for additional notes. An entry is
recommended.
Result Preview Allows preview of the report.

200942-103—September 2007
Control Description
Printer Setup Starts the standard Windows dialog to
set up a printer.
Use Paper Print in selected orientation.
Orientation of
Document
Print a Report
Perform the following steps to configure and print a report.
1. Switch to the Printing page (Figure 11.9).
2. Select the data to print in the Detailed Print Section
3. Preview the report onscreen with Result Preview.
4. Print the Test report with Print.
Test Report
Depending on selections, the Test report contains the
following data.
Header
• Global data such as software versions, instrument serial
numbers, date of creation and global test review (not
relevant)
• Signature section with operator name
Instrument Properties
Type, size, left arm, middle arm, right arm
Diagnostics Data
RS-232 host: error interrupts, repeated messages
Device Information
List which displays the following parameters for each
connected device: device name, address, firmware
version, bootware version, serial number

200942-103—September 2007
Command Tool
The Command tool allows input of single line and batch file
commands for troubleshooting.
The tool, for experienced Field Service Engineers, developers,
and the Tecan production department, provides the following
functions:
• Edit and execute single commands.
• Write, edit, and execute small batch programs (command
sequences). Such batch programs can be stored in a
directory and reloaded at a later time.
• These single commands and/or batch programs allow for
performance of special test sequences not accessible
through the normal menu.
Password Protection: Functions of the Command
Tool panel are password-protected and require the use
of the appropriate password.
There is a specific command set (also known as FCS =

Firmware Command Set) for each firmware. These sets can be
used to initialize, move, etc., various devices and options.
They are documented separately and are not described in this
manual.
Select <Instrument><Command Tool>. The Command Tool
panel displays.

200942-103—September 2007
Section 11 Command Tool
Batch File Execution

The first tab is the Batch File Execution page.
The Batch File Execution page contains all controls needed to

create, edit, run, store, retrieve, and delete command
sequences.
In the main field of the screen, a series of single line
commands can be strung together and executed as a batch
protocol.
The Batch File Execution page includes the following
controls.
Control Description
File Name Name of the currently loaded batch file.
Edit Window The large window is used to enter single
commands, that together compose a
command sequence. Commands can be
typed directly in the window. Each
command line must be terminated with the
Enter key.
Command Buttons
Command Description
Run All Select to execute all commands of the batch.
Stop Stops the execution of a batch.
Single Step Allows execution of the batch stepwise,
command line by command line.

200942-103—September 2007
Command Description
Resume Resumes the execution of a stopped batch,
starting at the current command line.
Reset Resets the internal logic after errors.
Load... Starts the Windows Open dialog where a
batch file containing a command sequence
can be selected.
Save Saves the current contents of the Edit
window.
Save As Starts the Windows Save As dialog where
contents of the Edit window are saved with
a different name.
Read Only Enables/disables write protection of batch
files. If this checkbox is selected, batch files
can be loaded from disk but not
overwritten.
Command Text field which displays the currently
executed command.
Response Text field which displays the response of the
instrument.

200942-103—September 2007
Section 11 Command Tool
Single Commands
Select the Single Commands tab. The Single Commands
page displays.
This page allows input of single command lines, a view of
instrument response, and the answer to the command.
The Single Commands page includes the following controls.
Control Description
Previous Displays previously requested single
command list: command lines. These commands can be
executed again later.
Timeout: The amount of time, in ms (milliseconds),
allowed for execution of the command.
Command: The single command line to be executed.
Answer: The response of the instrument to the single
command line.
Transmit Sends the command to the instrument and
executes the command.
NOTE: Commands entered on disk cannot be stored for

retrieval at a later time. Use the Batch File Execution
page for retrieval.
• To initiate this protocol, set the Timeout:
parameter to the desired time interval.
• Type the single command line to be executed in
the Command: field.

200942-103—September 2007
• Select Transmit.
• The instrument attempts to execute the
command.
If the command was executed successfully, the appropriate
response displays in the Command: field.
If the instrument is unable to execute the command

successfully, the specific error displays in the Answer: field.

200942-103—September 2007
Section 11 Information
Information
Purpose
The Information panel allows access of detailed information
regarding currently installed system devices and options
through a single panel. With this panel, screens or panels of
each individual system device or module are not opened to
obtain the required information.
No setups or tests can be performed through the Information
panel. Information panel functions are available to all users,
with no password required.
Pages
The Information panel includes the following four pages;
refer to the figures in the following paragraphs.
Page Description
Results Provides an overview of available test
results, grouped together by selectable
criteria.
Information Provides general information, parameters
and diagnostics data of installed device(s).
The displayed information depends on the
device type.
Version Provides information about the versions of
the installed system modules and panels.
Printing Configure and print the information
selected on the Results, Information or
Version pages.
Procedure
To access the Information panel: from the Main menu, select
<Instrument><Information>.

200942-103—September 2007
Results Page
Purpose
The Results page provides an overview of the stored test
results and helps to quickly locate results of a particular test.
Directory and Files

Test results are stored as follows:
Description
Directory: C:\Program Files\Tecan\Genesis Instrument
Software\Results
File name <module>_<serial_number>_<date>_<time>.an
structure: y
Example: TeVacS_1212_05Dec2001_15-47-24.any
The file name includes the following items of information

(separated by an underscore _):
• Module—Name of the module or device that was tested.
• Serial number—Number displayed depends on the test:
– Device test—the device serial number displays
– System test—the instruments serial number displays
• Date—Day/month/year when the test was performed.
• Time—Hour/minute/second when the test was concluded
(local time, 24-hour clock, i.e., 0:00:00 till 23:59:59 hours).

200942-103—September 2007
Selection Criteria
The module name, serial number, date, and time are used as
selection criteria on the Results page.
1st Selection
2nd Selection
3rd Selection
4th Selection
1st Selection
2nd Selection
3rd Selection
4th Selection
Figure 11.10: Results Page - Selection Criteria
Controls
The Results page includes the following controls.
Control Description
Upper-left list Tree view with four selection levels. It serves
box as a browser for quick selection of an
individual test. The nodes (small square
boxes with + or - sign) can be expanded or
collapsed to show or hide associated
sub-selections.
Right list box Lists available results for the item selected in
the left list.
List at bottom Definition or edit of the selection order.
OK Closes the panel.

200942-103—September 2007
Control Description
Cancel Closes the panel.
Print a Prints the results of the item(s) selected in
the right list.
a. Switch to the Printing page to print the results more
selectively.
Default Selection Order

Figure 11.10 illustrates the default selection order of test
results:
• 1st selection—by module (in the example above, RoMa tree
is expanded).
• 2nd selection—by serial number within 1st selection (in the
example above, there is one RoMa with serial number
1065).
• 3rd selection—by date within 2nd selection (in the example
above, tests with RoMa 1065 were run on 25 March 2003).
• 4th selection—by time within 3rd selection (the example
above illustrates the times when tests for RoMa were
concluded, 25 March 2003).
Changing the Selection Order

The selection order is given by the position of a selection
criterion in the small list below the tree view. The criterion at
the top is the first selection, the one at the bottom is the
fourth selection.
Perform the following steps to change the selection order.

1. Highlight the criterion whose position will be changed.
2. Use the arrow keys on the left side to move it up or down
the list.

200942-103—September 2007
Example
There are several available options to view results of all tests
run on a specific day. For example:
• Date criterion can be moved to the top of the list and
Time criterion to the second position.
• Serial Number criterion can be moved to the bottom of
the list and Module criterion to the third position.
The screen below illustrates an example of a Results page with
results grouped by date.
Figure 11.11: Results Page - Results Grouped by Date

200942-103—September 2007
Information Page
Purpose
The Information page allows selection and viewing of
detailed information regarding the entire instrument, a system
device, or an option. The type of information provided
depends on the selected item.
Figure 11.12: Information Panel
Controls
The Information page includes the following controls.
Control Description
Refresh Loads the current device and module
information, and sets the Sample Time to
the current time.
Sample Time Time when the device and module
information was last read.
Upper list Tree view of the devices or modules from
which information can be retrieved.
Lower list Displays information about the selected
item in the upper list. The number of
columns and column headings in this list
depend on the selected item.

200942-103—September 2007
Control Description
Print a Prints the results of the item selected in the
right list.
a. Also, switch to the Printing page and print the results
more selectively.
Version Page
Purpose
This page displays the current versions of the installed system
modules and panels.
Storage of Modules and Panels

The modules and panels are stored as *.dll or *.exe files in the
following directories:
• System modules: partly in C:\Program
Files\Tecan\Genesis Instrument Software\, partly in
<windrive>\Program Files\Common Files\Tecan\
• Panels: C:\Program Files\Tecan\Genesis Instrument
Software\Modules

200942-103—September 2007
Controls
The Version page includes the following controls.
Control Description
Upper list Lists the system modules and displays the
following for each module: File name,
Version, and Description.
Lower list As above for the panels.
Print a Prints the results of the selected item.
a. Also, switch to the Printing page and print the results
more selectively.
Printing
Purpose
This page allows selective printing of information regarding
items selected on the Results page. This provides
configuration of a report that meets laboratory requirements.
Select the necessary components for inclusion in the report,
and omit those not needed.
• The above applies only to information selected from the

Results page.

200942-103—September 2007
• If items on the Information or Version page are selected,

switch to the Printing page then all available information
regarding selected items prints. In this case, only the
report header, operator name, and possible comments can
be selected or omitted.
Controls
Control Description
Further Depends on selections made on the Results
checkboxes page.
Multiple Data selection valid for all device data
existing selected on the other pages.
Sections
Operator Field for operator name. Refer to the
following note.
Comment Field for additional notes. Refer to the
following note.
Result Preview Opens a Test report preview window.
setup a printer.
• If information selected on the Results page is printed,

nothing can be typed in the Operator or Comment fields!
Instead, these fields display text from the respective result
file.
• However, if information selected on the Information or
Version page should be printed, complete the Operator
and Comment fields (recommended).
Printing a Report
Perform the following steps to print a report with the Printing
page.
1. Perform one of the following:
• Go to the Results page and select the result file(s) to
print.

200942-103—September 2007
• Go to the Information page to print the respective

information.
• Go to the Version page to print the respective
information.
2. Switch to the Printing page.
3. Configure the report as necessary:
• Select the checkboxes of items to be included in the
report.
• Clear the checkboxes of items to be omitted.
4. Select Result Preview to preview the report onscreen.
5. Use Print Setup as necessary.
6. Select Print.

200942-103—September 2007
Section 11 System Devices Functions
System Devices Functions
Available Arms
The following robotic arms are installed on the m2000sp
instrument:
• Liquid Handling arm (LiHa) for liquid pipetting tasks.
• Robotic Manipulator arm (RoMa) Standard for plate
handling on and underneath the platform worktable.
Device Parameters
If an arm is set up, various device parameters were determined
and written to the device. Refer to the corresponding Results
page or Test report.
Reference Positions
m2000sp Instruments
There are a total of 45 grids on the m2000sp instrument. The
reference positions for the m2000sp are set at grids 1, 7, 22, 35,
41, and 45.
NOTE: Reference positions are defined separately for
each arm.

200942-103—September 2007
System Devices Menu

The System Devices menu includes the following commands.
Command Description
PosID Sets up a Positive Identification system.
Refer to Positive Identification Functions for
PosID 2, page 11-69 for PosID 2.
LiHa Sets up a Liquid Handling arm; refer to
Liquid Handling Arm (LiHa), page 11-103.
Move Test Determines if the LiHa, RoMa, and PosID
can reach the whole range (Move Test, page
11-138), and when the Random Move test is
used. Determines if the mechanics of the
PosID, RoMa, and LiHa work properly.
RoMa Sets up a Robotic Manipulator arm; refer to
Move Test, page 11-138.

200942-103—September 2007
Section 11 Positive Identification Functions for PosID 2
Positive Identification Functions for PosID 2
Purpose
The Positive Identification system (PosID) uses a bar code
scanner to read bar codes on carriers, racks, and containers on
both the primary side (e.g., sample tubes) and secondary side
(e.g., microplates).
PosID Type
Positive Identification is referred to as PosID 2 in the Genesis
Instrument software package. It is also referred to as PosID 2 in
this manual. This section describes the Setup & Service
functions for the PosID 2. The m2000sp instrument is
equipped with PosID 2.
Figure 11.13: PosID

200942-103—September 2007
Safety
against direct viewing into the bar code laser beam or
precautions for handling electrostatic discharge
sensitive devices.
• Discharge static electricity from your body prior to
Required Tools
The PosID Service Rack, illustrated below, is required for the
setup function of the PosID 2 system module.
Guideline
Calibration lines
Log File
Each time the test function is started, a log file is created to
which test results are written.
Description
directory: Instrument Software\Service Log
File name: <date>_<ongoing_no>.log
Example: 00123102.log
These log files can be helpful for troubleshooting if a serious

failure occurs and it cannot be repaired yourself. Contact your
Abbott Customer Support Center specialist for assistance.

200942-103—September 2007
Movement Axes
Movements of the PosID 2 are coordinated with other system
modules, such as the LiHa and RoMa. There are three
movement axes:
Range Movement
X movement Movement of PosID 2 left-right
Y movement Movement of PosID 2 gripper
forward-backward
X' movement Vertical rotation motion of PosID 2 scanner
head
B movement Horizontal rotational motion of PosID 2
scanner head
X X
Y
X
X Arm movement: left–right Y Gripper movement: for-

X Scanner head: vertical axis of ward–backward
rotation B Scanner head: horizontal axis
of
Figure 11.15: Movement Axes

200942-103—September 2007
PosID Menu for PosID 2

The PosID sub-menu for PosID 2 includes the following
commands.
Command Description
Setup Set up PosID 2.
Bar code Set bar codes.
Types
Test Check PosID 2 functionality and settings.
Movement Allow movement of PosID 2.
Mechanical Adjustment
Purpose
Mechanical accuracy must be verified before the PosID 2 can
be set up with Genesis Instrument software.
NOTE: Ensure the worktable is empty and free of
obstacles at all times.
Verifying Mechanical Accuracy

Perform the following steps to verify basic mechanical
accuracy.
2. Use a feeler gauge to check the gap between the release
finger of the PosID 2 and the workable surface as
illustrated below.
Fixing Screws
Release Finger
0.2mm

200942-103—September 2007
3. If necessary, loosen the two fixing screws and adjust the

release finger as illustrated above. Tighten the screws.
4. Place the Service Rack onto a grid position on the
worktable (refer to Figure 11.1).
5. Manually move the PosID 2 gripper into the Service Rack
as shown in Figure 11.16 on the right side.
6. Check the gap between Service Rack and gripper pin.
Adjust to approximately 0.5 mm as illustrated in
Mechanical Adjustment, page 11-73 on the left side.
7. Switch on the instrument and initialize it with <System>
<Initialize Instrument>.
Carrier
Adjusting Slot
Carrier
0.5 mm
Gap between Gripper Pin and Carrier
Figure 11.16:Mechanical Adjustment
Change Position
The change position is the transition position in which the
scanner head goes from moving around its vertical B'-axis to
moving around its horizontal X'-axis, or vice versa. Figure
11.11.17 on page 11-74 and Figure 11.11.18 on page 11-74
illustrate the change position.

200942-103—September 2007
(1) Carrier bar code reading position.
(2) Turning around B-axis to the change

position (refer to Figure 11.18).
(3) Turning around the X-axis to the rack

reading position.
Figure 11.17: Possible Scanner Head Positions and Movements
Incorrect change position:

• Note the gap between the scanner
head edge and X-axis.
Correct change position:

• In the correct position, there is almost
no gap between the scanner head
edges and X-/B-axes.
Incorrect change position:

• Note the gaps between the scanner
head edges and X-/B-axes.
Figure 11.18: Change Position of Scanner Head

200942-103—September 2007
X-, Y-, and B-axes Setup

During the Setup procedure (Setup Procedure, page
11-76)—when settings of the logical positions are configured
and stored in EEPROM— values for the offset and scale factor
are newly calculated according to the following tables.
Defaulta Basicb
X-offset no default 780
Scale Factor no default 10000

200942-103—September 2007
Logical
Default a Basic b
Position
Y-offset no default 15
Load 1 2220 2220
Remove 2 3170 3170
Max Read 3 0 0
Connect 4 3170 3170
Push Connect 5 3170 3170
Carrier Present 6 3000 3010
Check
Init Position 7 2850 2850
Test Rack 8 3100 3099
Logical
Default a Basic b
Position
B-offset 80 80
Carrier Read 1 0 0
Position
Horizontal Read 2 2610 2650
Position (MTP)
Vertical Read 3 1350 1350
Position
(Sample/Reagent)
Collision Avoidance 4 0 0
Position
Turn Position 5 1410 1410
a. Default values set in the Setup Procedure by software (refer
to Figure 11.11.19 on page 11-78).
b. Basic values, used when PosID 2 is new (factory set)
These values are hardcoded in the software. Logical positions

are indicated in steps.
Setup Procedure

200942-103—September 2007
Before Starting Setup

Ensure the following conditions exist:
• All installed arms (LiHa and RoMa) are set up correctly.
• The correct worktable size is set. Start <Instrument>
<Basic Setup><Worktable Size> to check/correct the
worktable size.
• The X-drive properties are set correctly. Start
<Instrument><Basic Setup><Set X-drive Properties> to
check/correct them.
• Mechanical adjustments (Mechanical Adjustment, page
11-72) were performed.
• The worktable is empty and free of obstacles at all times.
NOTE: Verify the PosID 2 was successfully set up and
configured, following this setup procedure. Inaccurate
settings can result in misreading, i.e., mistaking one
tube for another.
NOTE: When selecting the movement buttons within
the Setup function, do not click the mouse too fast. The
software could fail, then the Setup & Service software
and PosID 2 Setup function must be restarted.
Settings which provide meaningful results are permanently
saved in EEPROM.
Purpose
This procedure is used to set up the PosID 2 with the aid of the
Setup & Service software.

200942-103—September 2007
Starting Setup
Perform the following steps to set up the PosID 2.
1. Start with <System Devices><PosID><Setup>. The PosID
2 Adjustment dialog (Figure 11.19) displays.
Adjustment Dialog
Figure 11.19: PosID 2 Adjustment Dialog
Adjustment Procedure
1. Select Set to perform the following:
• Reset the default B-offset and the logical positions of
the bar code scanner head for the B-axis. The PosID 2
moves through all five logical positions.
• Reset the logical positions of the gripper for the Y-axis.
The gripper moves through all eight possible logical
axes.
• Store results in EEPROM.
2. Select Run. The PosID 2 runs in all axes to the end
positions to determine its range.

200942-103—September 2007
• Performs autorange function and calculates number

of grids.
• Store results in EEPROM.
3. Select Start to start the setup. A prompt displays to insert
the test rack in the defined position (in the example,
Figure 11.11.20 on page 11-79, the defined position is #1).
4. Slide the Service Rack into the recommended position
(Left Position). Do not push it to its stop position. Verify
it is approximately 1 cm in front of the stop position.
Figure 11.20:Insert Test Rack Message
5. Confirm with OK. The Move PosID: Move Gripper to

position 1 dialog displays.
Figure 11.21:Move PosID: Move Gripper to Position 1 Dialog
The Move PosID dialog includes the following controls.
Description
X List to select the movement step size,
in mm, in X-direction.
Left Moves the PosID 2 arm from right to left in
X-direction.

200942-103—September 2007
Description
Right Moves the PosID 2 arm from left to right in
X-direction.
Y List to select the movement step size,
in mm, in Y-direction.
Rear Moves the gripper from front to rear.
Front Moves the gripper from rear to front.
OK Confirms the adjustment.
onscreen Aborts the procedure without saving any
changes.

7. Check the position of the gripper pin to the adjusting slot
of the Service Rack. The pin must fit exactly in the slot as
illustrated in Figure 11.16.
8. If the position is incorrect, align it with the movement
buttons.
adjustment with OK. The message Please insert Test Rack
in Position x displays.
(Right Position). Do not push it to its stop position. Verify
it is approximately 1 cm in front of the stop position.
11. Confirm with OK. The Move PosID: Move Gripper to
position x dialog (similar to Figure 11.21) displays.
13. Check the position of the gripper pin to the adjusting slot
of the Service Rack. The pin must fit exactly in the slot as
shown in Figure 11.16.
14. If the position is incorrect, align with the movement
buttons.
15. When the gripper pin fits into the slot, confirm the
adjustment with OK. The message Please insert Test Rack
in Position x displays.
(Rack Position) into its stop position.

200942-103—September 2007
17. Confirm with OK. The mechanical adjustment starts with

the Move PosID: Mechanically adjust beam angle
vertical dialog (Figure 11.22).
Scanner Head Mechanical Adjustment

The following procedure describes mechanical adjustment of
the scanner head.
During the mechanical adjustment, all movements using the
command buttons are not stored. The software adjustment
follows later starting with step 1.
Figure 11.22: Move PosID: Mech. Adjust Beam Angle
Vertical Dialog
1. The laser beam must be parallel to the vertical guideline

on the Service Rack (refer to Figure 11.23).
Carrier ID Read Position
Guideline
Laser Beam
Correct Incorrect
Figure 11.23: Vertical Laser Beam Adjustment

200942-103—September 2007

screws for the vertical adjustment with a 2.5 mm Allen
key, and adjust the scanner head accordingly. Tighten
both screws after the adjustment is complete.
Fixing Screws for Horizontal Adjustment
(Step x)
Fixing Screws for Horizontal and

Vertical Adjustment (Step x)

(Step x)

(Step x)
Figure 11.24:Scanner Head Adjustment Screws
3. Confirm with OK. The gripper finger moves the Service

Rack to its center position. The Move PosID:
Mechanically adjust head vertical dialog displays.
Figure 11.25:Move PosID: Mech. Adjust Head Vertical

Dialog

200942-103—September 2007
The laser beam must be parallel to the vertical calibration line

Service Rack
Horizontal Calibration
Line
Vertical Calibration Line
Laser Beam
Correct Incorrect
Figure 11.26: Vertical/Horizontal Scanner Head Adjustment

screws for horizontal and vertical adjustment with an
Allen key, then adjust the scanner head as necessary.
Tighten both screws after the adjustment is complete.
5. Confirm with OK. The Move PosID: Mechanically adjust
beam height dialog displays.
Figure 11.27:Move PosID: Mech. Adjust Beam Height

Dialog
The Move PosID dialog includes the following controls.
Control Description
Beam Angle List to select the rotation step size, in
degrees, in B-direction.
CCW Rotates the scanner head
counterclockwise.

200942-103—September 2007
Control Description
CW Rotates the scanner head clockwise.
OK Confirms the adjustment.
Cancel Aborts the procedure without saving any
changes.
The laser beam must be parallel and flush to the

horizontal calibration line on the Service Rack (similar to
Figure 11.26).
6. Perform the parallel adjustment with the movement
buttons.
NOTE: Because of the play (hysteresis), movement
should be done from clockwise direction only.
Therefore, first move the scanner head with CCW
and back to the correct position to the calibration
line with CW.
7. If the beam is not in line with the horizontal calibration
line, insert an Allen key through the access hole and move
the scanner head until the beam is flush with the
horizontal calibration line.
8. Confirm with OK. The mechanical adjustment is executed
and the position of the bar code reader is stored. The Move
PosID: Adjust carrier reading position dialog displays.

200942-103—September 2007
Scanner Head Software Adjustment

The laser beam must be parallel (adjusted in step 3 of the
previous procedure) and flush with the vertical guideline on
the Service Rack. Refer to Figure 11.23.
1. Perform the adjustment using the rotation buttons.
Figure 11.28:Move PosID: Adjust Carrier Reading

Position Dialog
2. Confirm with OK. The Move PosID: Adjust change

position dialog displays.
Figure 11.29:Move PosID: Adjust Change Position

Dialog

200942-103—September 2007
The change position is the transition position in which

the scanner head changes from moving around its
vertical B-axis to moving around its horizontal X-axis, or
vice versa. Refer to Mechanical Adjustment, page 11-72
for details.
NOTE: Because mechanical movement always has
play (hysteresis), it is important to start the
adjusting procedure from the same direction.
NOTE: Always rotate the scanner head with CCW
back to the correct position to avoid any
mechanical problems (collisions).
3. With the Beam Angle list, set the step size to 1.0.
4. Rotate the scanner head counterclockwise with CCW until
it rotates, to ensure it is not already in the change position.
5. Rotate the scanner head clockwise with CW until it stops
rotating in the vertical B'-axis.
6. Count the number of steps necessary until the scanner
head starts to rotate into the horizontal X'-axis.
7. Go back counterclockwise, half the number of steps
counted plus two additional steps.
NOTE: These two additional steps are necessary to
compensate for space in the mechanical system.
8. Repeat these two steps but clockwise, to arrive exactly at
the change position.
9. If the change position is still incorrect, the adjustment
must be performed again (steps 34 to 39) with a step size
of 0.1 mm.
10. Confirm with OK.
11. The PosID starts with the No Tube Sensor test. The gripper
finger slowly moves the Service Rack backward in the
Y-direction until the No Tube sensor passes all three slots
in the Service Rack.
12. If the No Tube Sensor test passed, the following four
checkboxes are selected (聺) in the PosID 2 Adjustment
dialog.
• Slot begin
• Slot end

200942-103—September 2007
• Check sensor upper limit

• Check sensor lower limit
13. If the No Tube Sensor test failed, the No Tube sensor is
damaged and must be replaced.
14. The setup procedure continues. The gripper finger moves
the Service Rack to its center position and the Move
PosID: Adjust tube reading position dialog displays.
Figure 11.30:Move PosID: Adjust Tube Reading

Position Dialog
The laser beam must be in line with the vertical

calibration line of the Service Rack.
15. If the laser beam is out of line, adjust the scanner head
with the rotation buttons. Confirm with OK. The tests for
Adjust scan line start and Adjust scan line stop (refer to
Figure 11.19) are performed automatically.

200942-103—September 2007
16. The PosID 2 adjustment was completed successfully and

the message Adjust passed displays.
Figure 11.31:Adjust Passed Message
17. After passing the Setup procedure successfully, the

PosID 2 Adjustment dialog (Figure 11.19) displays again.
Except for the Adjust failed checkbox, checkboxes are
checked (聺) to indicate all appropriate tests were
completed.
If the setup procedure failed, the Adjust failed checkbox
is checked (聺), and the setup procedure must be
repeated.
Bar Code Types

For the m2000sp instrument, bar code setting is accomplished
within the m2000sp software.
Introduction
Default bar code settings are reloaded with each cycling of the
power. The PosID 2 is capable of simultaneously reading six
different bar codes in a run, although m2000sp only supports
five bar code types.

200942-103—September 2007
Twenty-two different bar codes are stored in the Setup &

Service software.
Table 11.32: Bar codes Stored by Setup & Service Software
Bar code Check Start-Stop
Length Digit Mode Character
Code 2 of 5 enabled enabled -
interleaved
Code 39 Standard enabled enabled enabled
Code 39 Full ASCII enabled enabled enabled
Code 32 fixed 9 - -
C.I.P. enabled - -
Codabar enabled enabled enabled
Code 128 enabled - -
EAN 128 enabled - -
Code 93 Standard enabled - -
Code 93 Full ASCII enabled - -
EAN 13 fixed 13 - -
EAN 8 fixed 8 - -
UPC A fixed 12 - -
UPC E fixed 8 - -
EAN 13 add on 2 fixed 15 - -
UPC A add on 2 fixed 14 - -
UPC E add on 2 fixed 10 - -
UPC A add on 5 fixed 17 - -
UPC E add on 5 fixed 13 - -
NOTE: Bar code settings can be loaded from three

sources: from the PosID, *.ini file, and Setup & Service
software (default values).
However, only the *.ini file can be stored in a
non-volatile memory. All other settings default to the
original configuration after switching off the
instrument.

200942-103—September 2007
The following bar code types are supported by the m2000sp

software and will override any settings mode in S&S.
Start Stop
Bar code Check Digit
Bar code Type Character Active
Length Mode
Transmission
Code 2/5 2,4,6,8,....,20* ON with or No setting Yes
Interleaved without
transmission or
OFF
Code 39 1-20 ON with or No setting Yes
Standard without
transmission or
OFF
CODABAR flexible 1-20 ON with or ON with or Yes
without without
transmission or transmission or
OFF OFF
Code 128 flexible No setting No setting Yes
Code 93 flexible 1-20 No setting No setting Yes
Example
The following schematic shows a bar code of type Code 39
Standard. Information about bar codes can be found in
literature supplied by the bar code or test kit manufacturers,
respectively.
*1234567890123456N*
Stop character
Check digit
bar code
Start character
Figure 11.33: Key to Bar code “Code 39 Standard”

200942-103—September 2007
Bar code Setting Procedure

Bar code configurations are set in the m2000sp software. Setup
and service software should not be used for this function.
NOTE: For FSE Troubleshooting. When power to the
instrument is turned off, the bar code settings are not
stored permanently by the PosID. To troubleshoot bar
code reading issues, the '*.ini file' established during
instrument installation must be reloaded then sent to
the PosID. Go to <System Devices><PosID><Bar code
Types> and select Reload from Ini File. Verify the bar
code settings reflect what is used in the laboratory.
Select Send to PosID to send the settings to the PosID.
Functionality of the bar code scanner can now be tested
based on bar codes in use in the laboratory.
Test
Purpose
The Test function verifies proper functioning of the bar code
scanner.
To run the Test function, at least two carriers (e.g., tube rack,
microplate carrier, etc.) must be available. The carriers must
have correctly placed bar code labels.
Test Sequence
During the test, the carrier and container bar codes are read in
the following sequence:
• Carrier ID, and if desired, user ID bar code of all carriers
(Reference Read).
• Bar codes on every container on every carrier (Reference
Read).
• Steps 1 and 2 for the defined Number of cycles (Actual
Read).

200942-103—September 2007
Test Procedure
Perform the following steps to check functionality of the
PosID.
1. Start the function with <System Devices><PosID><Test>.
The PosID 2 Test Configuration dialog displays.
Figure 11.34:PosID 2 Test Configuration Dialog

200942-103—September 2007
The PosID 2 Test Configuration dialog includes the

following controls.
Control Description
Number of cycles Field for the number of Actual Reads
to be performed.
To pass the test, at least 5 cycles
must be performed.
Grid Positions Field to define the range from…to
where the PosID test will run.
Carries Codes Checkboxes to specify which bar
codes are read.
Read Carrier Carriers and containers.
Only Carrier Only carriers (no containers, e.g.,
ID tube, microplate, and trough bar
codes).
Read User ID User identifications.
Operator/Logfile Fields for operator name, PosID SN,
and log file.
required.
Serial number Field for PosID serial number.
Logfile Field to define the log file directory.
An entry is required. The default
path is C:\Program
Files\Tecan\Genesis Instrument
Software\Service Log.
The log file name itself is based on
the date and an ongoing number,
e.g., 00123102.log, and contains a
summary of the test results.
Logfile Starts the standard Windows dialog
Directory to browse and find a directory for
the log file.
Run Opens an empty PosID 2 Test Results
window to start the test procedure.
Close Finishes the function and saves the defined
values.
Cancel Aborts the function without saving any
changes.

200942-103—September 2007
Control Description
Save Starts the standard Windows Save As dialog
to save the data in an appropriate *.ini file in
the C:\Program Files\Tecan\Genesis
Instrument Software\Service directory.
Print Prints the test results stored in the defined
log file. It is enabled only if a test was run.
More Opens the PosID 2 Test - Advanced
Configuration dialog for advanced
configuration; refer to Advanced
Configuration on page 11–98. For FSEs only
and requires the appropriate password.

2. Set the appropriate start parameters and enter the operator

name in the Operator field.
3. Place the carriers for the test on the worktable. Ensure the
bar code labels are placed correctly. The carriers must be
placed within the grid positions as defined under Grid
Positions.
4. If definition of an advanced configuration is desired,
continue with More.
5. Start the test with Run. An empty PosID 2 Test Results
window (Figure 11.35) displays.
6. Begin the test procedure with Start. The instrument
initializes and the PosID starts checking the carriers and
containers.

200942-103—September 2007
Test Results
During the test, values in the PosID 2 Test Results window are
continuously updated.
Figure 11.35: PosID 2 Test Results Window for Container

Reads

200942-103—September 2007
Data on Results Window

The PosID 2 Test Results window includes the following data.
Description
Heading Number of reads done/defined and worktable
Line position, for which results display in the table.
The position can be switched with the scroll
bar.
NT Reading result of the No Tube sensor during
the Reference Read.
T Tube found.
N No tube found.
Reference Bar codes read in the Reference Read.
Read *** No reading possible, but tube is placed
correctly.
$$$ No tube found in this position.
NT Reading result of the No Tube Sensor during
the Actual Reads.
Actual Read Bar codes read in the Actual Reads.
NT No Tube: no tube found in the read attempt.
NR No Read: no bar code(s) were read, but tubes
were placed correctly.
WR Wrong Read: bar code(s) read do not match bar
code(s) read in the Reference Read.
Total Errors Total number of errors that occurred during a
test run. For the pass/fail criteria, see below.
Controls on Results Window

The PosID 2 Test Results window includes the following
controls.
Field Description
Run
Start Starts the PosID test procedure.
Stop Stops a running test procedure; the current
Actual Read is completed before
interrupting the test.
Close Finishes the function.
Reference Read

200942-103—September 2007
Field Description
Save Saves the Reference Read data in the
PId2000.ini file in the C:\Program
Files\Tecan\Genesis Instrument
Software\Service directory.
Load Loads the Reference Read data from the
PId2000.ini file. No new Reference Reads
are done.
Show Carrier Option to select the carrier reads data view.
Reads Only the carrier read data for all defined
worktable positions are displayed in one
table.
Show Option to select the carrier read and
Container container read data view (refer to Figure
Reads 11.11.35 on page 11-95).
Completion of Test
When the test is completed, the message PosID 2 Test passed
or PosID 2 Test failed displays.
1. Confirm with OK. The list of values in the PosID 2 Test
Results window is complete.
2. After finishing the test, select Close to close the window.
The PosID 2 Test Configuration dialog is active again.
3. Print the test results with Print and/or finish the function
with Close.
Pass/Fail Criteria
The test passed after meeting the following requirements (refer
to Figure 11.11.35 on page 11-95, Total Errors section).
No Tube: 0 errors
No Read: not more than 5 errors
Wrong Read: 0 errors
At least 5 Actual Reads (Number of cycles) must be
performed.
If the test failed, check for correct positioning of the bar code
labels and bar code types (Bar Code Types, page 11-88), and/or
setup of the PosID (Positive Identification Functions for PosID
2, page 11-69).

200942-103—September 2007
If the test fails again, contact your local Abbott customer

support representative.
Advanced Configuration
This function allows FSEs to define or change additional
parameters.
Perform the following step to enter advanced configuration

data.
Select More on the PosID 2 Test Configuration dialog. The
PosID 2 Test - Advanced Configuration dialog displays.
Figure 11.36: Advanced Configuration
Controls
The PosID 2 Test - Advanced Configuration dialog includes
the following controls.
Control Description
Carrier List to select a specific carrier to change its
Parameter parameters: Reading Speed and Decode
Safety can be set individually for each
carrier. The Reference Read Speed Factor
remains the same for all carriers.
Reading Field for movement speed, in 1/10 mm/s,
Speed in X- and Y-direction during the read
procedure.

200942-103—September 2007
Control Description
Decode Field to set the number of times the
Safety scanner reads the bar codes. This sets the
number of matching decodes required
until a bar code read is accepted as
successful. Range: 1 (low) to 10 (high). The
default setting is 2.
The ratio of Decode Safety and Reading
Speed must be either: high Decode Safety
and low Reading Speed; or low Decode
Safety and high Reading Speed. If not, an
error message displays.
Scan Scanner head-specific parameters; not
Window Min editable.
Scan Scanner head-specific parameters; not
Window editable.
Max
Set default Sets Reading Speed and Decode Safety to
the default values for the selected Carrier
Parameter.
Reference Read Option buttons to reduce the Reading
Speed Factor Speed during the Reference Read to the
selected fraction for a safer read of the bar
codes. For the remaining Actual Reads, the
read is done with the defined Reading
Speed.
Global Checkboxes to eliminate the safety
Optimization movements in B- and Y-directions for a
faster run.
Options
Send bar Checkbox to send the bar code setting
code settings defined with <System Devices><PosID>
on start <Bar code Types> (Bar Code Types, page
11-88) to the PosID at the start of the test
run.

200942-103—September 2007
Control Description
Use If this checkbox is selected, the No Tube
NT-Sensor (NT) sensor is switched off during the read
alternate procedure (i.e., when the gripper finger
moves the rack backward). The No Tube
sensor is activated when the gripper finger
returns the rack to its position. This
procedure reduces the risk of read failures,
because the No Tube sensor and the
scanner usually work concurrently.
Set bar Opens the Bar code Settings dialog to set
codes the bar codes (refer to Bar Code Types, page
11-88).
OK Finishes the advanced configuration and
saves the defined values.
Cancel Aborts the advanced configuration without
saving any changes.
4. Enter the advanced configuration data.

5. Confirm the entries with OK. The PosID 2 Test
Configuration dialog is active again (refer to Test, page
11-91).

200942-103—September 2007
Movement
Purpose
The Movement function allows movement of the PosID
according to the entries.
Moving the PosID 2

Perform the following steps to move the PosID.
1. Start with <System Devices><PosID><Movement>. The
Move PosID window and PosID Test Movements dialog
open simultaneously (Figure 11.37).
Figure 11.37:Move PosID Window and PosID Test

Movements Dialog
The Move PosID window includes the following controls.
Control Description
Move X List to select the movement step size,
in mm, in the X-direction.
Left Moves the PosID arm from right to left
in the X-direction.
Right Moves the PosID arm from left to right
in the X-direction.
Move Y List to select the movement step size,
in mm, in the Y-direction.
Rear Moves the PosID gripper from front to
rear.
Front Moves the PosID gripper from rear to
front.

200942-103—September 2007
Control Description
Move Beam List to select the rotation step size, in
Angle degrees, in the B-direction.
CCW Rotates the scanner head
counterclockwise.
CW Rotates the scanner head clockwise.
2. Use the command buttons to move the PosID as needed.

3. Finish with OK.

200942-103—September 2007

Contamination hazard due to parts of the instrument,
which are not completely decontaminated. Wear
appropriate personal protective equipment such as
gloves, lab coat, and protective eye wear.
reagents. The exposure to hazardous chemicals is
protective eye wear.
instruments safety panels open.
these procedures.

200942-103—September 2007
LiHa
The m2000sp instrument is equipped with one 8-tip Liquid
Handling arm (LiHa). The LiHa is used for pipetting actions in
different volume ranges. Volumes depend on the tip types
used and features of the liquid system.
Liquid Handling
Arm
Figure 11.38: Liquid Handling Arm (LiHa)

200942-103—September 2007
Movement Axes
LiHa movements are coordinated with other system devices
such as the RoMa. There are four different movement axes.
Ys
Y Z
X Arm movement: left–right Ys Horizontal spacing

Y Tip movement forward–back- Z Tip movement up–down
ward
Figure 11.39: Movement Axes
Required Tools
Tools required for performing the adjustments and tests
described in this section depend on the installed tips:
• Reference tip—The reference tip is necessary for checking
the Z-range and the reference positions in the X- and
Y-axis.
IMPORTANT: There are now two LiHa reference tip
! types available. Either can be used for S&S functions;
however, procedures for mounting each type differ
significantly. Refer to Reference Tips on page 4–54 of
Section 4.
Before Starting
During some of the following setup and test procedures, the
LiHa moves to different positions on the worktable. Ensure no
objects are installed that could be in the way during these
procedures.

200942-103—September 2007
Verify the instrument is set up correctly with <Instrument>

<Basic Setup>.
Panel Description
The LiHa panel provides several procedures to be executed.
Generally, the following steps are performed.
1. Start the LiHa panel LiHa Panel, page 11-108.
2. Select the setup/test procedures to be performed and
modify the corresponding settings.
There are two ways to proceed:
• Select ALL Setup and Test checkboxes (聺) at the same
time and enter the necessary data by selecting the
corresponding tabs. Select Start then all setup/test
procedures are performed in one run.
• Select one or more Setup or Test checkboxes and
define the necessary data as described. Select Start to
perform the currently selected setup procedures.
Before starting any setup procedure, the Operator field
on the Printing page should be completed.
3. Start the desired procedure with Start.
4. After performing any test, refer to Information Page, page
11-133.
5. Print the test results. Refer to Printing, page 11-135.
6. Exit the panel with Close.

200942-103—September 2007
Procedures and User Permission
Refer to
Operator FSE
Section
Set Default Parameters X Set Default
Parameters,
page 11-118
Determine Range X Determine
Range, page
11-118
Calibrate Lower DiTi Eject X Calibrate the
Lower DiTi
Eject
Protocol,
page 11-125
Determine Reference X Determine
Positions Reference
Positions,
page 11-121
Determine Spacinga Determine
Spacing, page
11-123
Individual Zb X X Individual Z
Alignment,
page 11-124
Arm Position Accuracya
Tip Adapter X X
Information X X Information
Page, page
11-133
Printing X X Printing,
page 11-135
Test Report X X Test Report,
page 11-136
a. This function is for production only and is not accessible to FSEs.
b) Not used with the m2000sp.
Directory, Files
The LiHa function can create the following files. Refer to
Liquid Handling Arm (LiHa), page 11-103 for details.

200942-103—September 2007
• Result Files
Description
Saved in C:\Program Files\Tecan\Genesis Instrument
directory: Software\Results
File name: LiHa_<serial_number>_<date>_<time>.any
LiHa Panel
Pages
The LiHa panel is subdivided into the following pages.
Page Description
Contents General overview, procedure/test selection.
Channel Setup/check of tips (length/types) and
syringe sizes.
Setup Definition of tips and other parameters for
the test.
Test For Tip Adapter and Arm Position Accuracy
Configuration tests; Arm Accuracy test is for production
only.

200942-103—September 2007
Page Description
Information Device parameters and diagnostic data; refer
to Information Page, page 11-133.
Move LiHa Movement tool.
Dilutor Tool used to check dilutors and tubings.
Controls
The Contents page includes the following controls.
Control Description
Available Devices Shows the connected LiHa.
Set Default For setting default values.
Parameters
Determine Range For determining Y and Z range; refer
to Determine Range, page 11-118.
Determine Reference For determining/checking reference
Positions positions; Determine Reference
Positions, page 11-121.
Determine Spacing For calculating spacing. Not used on
the m2000sp.
Arm Position Production function, not accessible
Accuracy to operators and FSEs.
Tip Adapter Tip adapter test.
Individual Z For determining/checking Z-range
of each individual tip. Not used on
the m2000sp.
384 Well Tip Adjust Not used on the m2000sp.
384 Well Tip Verify Not used on the m2000sp.
It also contains the standard command buttons; refer to LiHa

Panel, page 11-108.
Using the LiHa Panel

Perform the following steps to set up the LiHa.

200942-103—September 2007
1. Start panel with <System Devices><LiHa>. The Contents

page displays.
2. Select the LiHa in the Available Devices section and set
the valid Serial Number of the LiHa (refer to NOTE below).
3. The LiHa’s serial number is not stored, and is lost when
the instrument Setup & Service software is exited. The
serial number must be entered each time the LiHa panel is
started.
4. Use the serial number of the instruments.
5. Before continuing, select the Channel page and verify
that tip types and lengths, syringe sizes, etc. are set
correctly. Refer to Channel Page, page 11-110 for details.
6. Select the setup and test procedures to be performed and
define necessary data as described in the appropriate
section. All setup/test procedures can be selected, or one or
more for the desired run. Refer to Panel Description, page
11-106 for details.
7. Before starting any setup/test procedure, switch to the
Printing page (LiHa Panel - Printing Page, page 11-135) to
complete the Operator and Comment fields.
9. Switch to the Information page to view diagnostics data
(Information Page, page 11-133) or switch to the Printing
page to preview the Test report (Printing, page 11-135).
Channel Page
Purpose
The Channel page allows the operator to check and define the
following:
• Tip configuration
• Lengths of user-defined tips (FSE password required)
• Syringe size (FSE password required)

200942-103—September 2007
• Low Volume option (not used with the m2000sp

instrument)

200942-103—September 2007
Controls
The Channel page includes the following controls.
Control Description
Ch Channel number.
Type Type of the installed tip.
Length Length difference, in mm, of the tip relative
to the reference tip. A positive value
indicates the tip is longer than the reference
tip, a negative value that it is shorter.
DiTi Can be checked if the respective tip is a
DiTi.
Pinch Checkboxes for selecting LowVol tips. Not
used with the m2000sp instrument.
Active Indicates the tip is an active tip; the
checkbox cannot be set and the system
automatically determines if the tip is active.
Not used with the m2000sp instrument.
Syringe Syringe volume in µL (microliter).
Group Checkboxes to set identical parameters for
multiple channels. In this case, channels
1 to 8 have identical parameters. Set the
parameters for channel 1 and select the
Group boxes. Parameters of subsequent
channels (if their Group boxes are not
selected) are set to equal those of channel 1.
Mixed Tip Configurations

The m2000sp instrument uses 200 µL and 1000 µL filtered
Eppendorf tips. Any combination of tip types is possible.
However, grouping together tips of the same type is
recommended
Tips of the same type can be selected together for a test. If tip
types differ, the test can be run once per tip type, testing all
the tips of one type each time.
Setting Tip Configuration

Perform the following steps to configure tips that are
physically installed.

200942-103—September 2007
1. Start the LiHa panel with <System Devices><LiHa> and

switch to the Channel page.
2. Configure the tips according to the installed types.
3. Confirm the entries:
• Select OK to store the configuration then exit the
LiHa panel.
• Select Apply to save the entries then perform further
setups/tests within the LiHa panel.
Setting Tip Length

The tip length can be set on the Channel page. Tip lengths do
not require edits if the tips are supplied by Tecan.
Perform the following steps to set the tip length.
1. If not already done, start the LiHa panel and select the
Channel page.
2. Check the length of the tips in use and enter the difference
between the reference tip in the appropriate field.
• Select OK to store the configuration then exit the
LiHa panel.
setup/test procedures within the LiHa panel.
Setting Syringe Size

The Channel page contains eight fields which allow setting of

syringe volumes for each individual dilutor. The m2000sp
instrument uses 1.0 mL syringes.
CAUTION: Ensure the syringe sizes are set properly.
Incorrect syringe volumes could lead to incorrect
results.
Perform the following steps to set the syringe sizes.

200942-103—September 2007
1. If not already done, start the LiHa panel and select the
Channel page.
2. Check the volumes of syringes installed on the
instrument. To set the correct values, use the up or down
arrows of the corresponding spin boxes.
• Select OK to store the configuration then leave the
LiHa panel.
setup/test procedures within the LiHa panel.
Move LiHa Page
Purpose
The Move LiHa page allows movement of the whole LiHa or
parts of it in the appropriate axes: X, Y, XS, Z1 to Z8. Refer to
Move LiHa Page, page 11-114 and LiHa, page 11-104for details.
Controls
The Move LiHa page includes the following controls.
Control Description
All Tips/Tip1/ Checkboxes to select the tips to be moved in
Tip8 the Z-direction.

200942-103—September 2007
Control Description
Single step, in 1/10 mm, movement
buttons.
Ten steps, in 1 mm, movement buttons.
Continuous movement buttons when

button is kept pressed.
Buttons to increase or decrease spacing to
logical positions (9/18/27/36 mm).
Free Moves the RoMa and PosID to their extreme
positions.
X, Y, YS Text boxes that indicate the X/Y-position of
the frontmost tip with respect to reference
position #1, and spacing.
Text boxes left Show the Z-position of each individual tip
of Tips (distance from worktable).
checkboxes
• Arrows on the movement buttons indicate the direction in

which the respective parts will move.
Keyboard Control
The keyboard can also be used for movements in the various
axes. Refer to View and Tools Functions, page 11-34 for details.

200942-103—September 2007
Setup Page
Purpose
The Setup page provides controls for setting the parameters for
the various setup procedures.

200942-103—September 2007
Controls
The Setup page includes the following controls.
Control Description
Determine Frame with controls to specify the
Reference conditions for determining the reference
Positions positions.
automatically Option button for automatic determination.
manually Option button for manual determination.
Verify with Checkbox selected if the “normal” tip is
mounted tip used for manual verification instead of a
reference tip. Not used with the m2000sp
instrument.
Reference Frame to set the reference positions.
Positions
Grid Spin boxes to set the left and right reference
grid positions.
Use for Y Option buttons that specify if the reference
positions in the Y-axis should be determined
at the left or right reference position.
4/8 Reference Checkbox selected if a references tip is
Tips Available mounted at each tip adapter.
Use Y-backlash Checkbox must be selected for the m2000sp
instrument.
Input box cannot be set by FSE.
ABD arm For production only, cannot be set by FSE.
Not used with the m2000sp instrument.
Initialize Position Spin box used if a Te-MO is installed on the
X instrument. Defines the position relative to
grid 1 at which the arm is initialized. The
position must be chosen to eliminate
possible collisions with the Te-MO. The
position can be set with an accuracy of
0.1 [mm]. Not used with the m2000sp.
Table below Shows current speed and acceleration in X-,
Reference Y-, and Z-axes.
Positions
NOTE: Ensure all parameters are set correctly. Refer to

descriptions of the respective setup procedures for
additional information about the entries.

200942-103—September 2007
Set Default Parameters

NOTE: Do not start this function unnecessarily. After

performing this function, it is necessary to readjust all
ranges, reference positions, offsets, and spacings.
Purpose
This function resets drive properties to the default values. It
should only be used:
• When a new instrument is set up the first time.
• After certain repairs from which maladjustment could
result, e.g., removal and reinstallation of the worktable,
replacement of entire LiHa, etc.
Procedure
Perform the following steps to set the default parameters.
1. On the Contents page, select the Set Default Parameters
checkbox (聺) then select Start.
2. When finished, all ranges, reference positions and
spacings must be adjusted with the respective functions.
Determine Range
Purpose
The Determine Range procedure performs the following:
• Moves all tips back and forth in the Y-direction to
determine the available Y-range.
• Moves the tips one by one in the Z-direction to determine
available Z-ranges. A reference tip must be mounted at the
tip position whose Z-range is being determined.
• Determined values are written to the LiHa.

200942-103—September 2007
Procedure
Depending on the quantity of reference tips available, the
following instructions can vary slightly.
• If there is only one reference tip available, the software
prompts when to mount it to a particular tip position.
• If there are enough reference tips available for all tip
positions, a reference tip can be mounted to each position
before starting the test.
NOTE: There are two reference tip types available.

Refer to Reference Tips on page 4–54 of Section 4.
Perform the following steps to determine the range.
1. On the Contents page select the Determine Range
checkbox (聺) and switch to the Setup page (Figure 11.40).
2. Select the 4/8 Reference Tips Available checkbox (聺) if
there are enough reference tips available for all tip
positions. If not, clear the checkbox (□).
The Use backlash checkbox is selected by default for
m2000sp Instruments. Do not clear it!
Figure 11.40:LiHa Panel - Setup Page - Reference Page
3. Set the Left and Right grid positions in the corresponding

Grid spin boxes in the Reference Positions frame to 1 and
41, respectively.
4. With the Use for Y option buttons, select the grid position
where the Y-range will be determined. Use for Y is set to
Left by default.

200942-103—September 2007
• If there is only one reference tip available, the

software prompts when to mount it to the first tip
position.
• If the 4/8 Reference Tips Available checkbox on the
Setup page is selected, a prompt displays to mount a
reference tip to each tip position.
6. Ensure the reference tip(s) are mounted to the required
position(s) then confirm with Done.
7. Starting with the first position, one tip adapter after the
other is moved downward until the reference tip mounted
to it touches the worktable surface. After the Z-range is
determined, the respective tip is moved up again.
• If there is only one reference tip available, the
software prompts when to attach it to the next
position. Confirm with Done. The program continues
with the next position.
• If there is a reference tip at each position, the software
automatically continues with the next position.
8. After the Z-ranges of all tip positions are determined, the
operator is prompted to remove the reference tip(s).

200942-103—September 2007
9. Confirm with OK. The procedure is completed and the

values are written to the LiHa.
Determine Reference Positions

Purpose
The Determine Reference Positions procedure moves the
LiHa with the driven tips to the selected reference positions in
sequence.
• To adjust tips and to calibrate the X- and Y-axes.
• To write the results to the LiHa.
NOTE: The “driven” tips are tips 1 and 3 on 4-tip
instruments, tips 3 and 7 on 8-tip instruments.
Reference Positions
Reference Tip
Reference Point
Reference Pin on Worktable
Figure 11.41: Reference Position

200942-103—September 2007
Procedure
Perform the following steps to determine the reference
positions.
1. On the Contents page select the Determine Reference
Positions checkbox (聺) and switch to the Setup page
(Figure 11.11.40 on page 11-119).
2. Select the 4/8 Reference Tips Available checkbox (聺) if

there is a reference tip for each required tip position, if not
clear it (□).
NOTE: There are two reference tip types available.
Refer to Reference Tips on page 4–54 of Section 4.
3. In the Determine Reference Positions frame, select the
mode to determine the reference positions:
• Select the Manually option if the reference positions
will be determined manually. Select the Verify with
mounted tip option if an “ordinary” tip will be used
for the verification instead of a reference tip.
• Select the Automatically option button if the
reference positions will be determined automatically.
Automatically is the default setting.
4. In the frame Reference Positions, set the Left and Right
grid positions in the corresponding Grid spin boxes 1
and 41, respectively.
5. Select the grid position needed to determine the Y-range
with the Use for Y option buttons. Use for Y is set to Left
by default.

200942-103—September 2007
• If there is only one reference tip available, a prompt

displays to mount it to the first tip position,
position 1 on a 4-tip instrument, position 3 on an
8-tip instrument.
• If the 4/8 Reference Tips Available checkbox (聺) is
selected, a prompt displays to mount a reference tip to
the required tip positions. Ensure there are reference
tips at positions 3 and 7.
7. Confirm the reference tip(s) is in the correct position(s)
with Done.
8. If Automatically is selected on the Setup page, the driven
tips search the reference positions automatically.
• If only one reference tip is mounted, the software
prompts when to mount it to another position.
• Continue with step 13.
9. If Manually is selected on the Setup page, the Move LiHa
page is activated (refer to Move LiHa Page, page 11-114)
and the message Use move tool to determine first
reference point displays.
10. Adjust the position in X- and Y-direction according to
Figure 11.41.
• If only one reference tip is mounted, the software
notifies when it should be mounted to another
position.
11. If the reference tip is in the correct position, confirm with
Done.
12. Repeat steps 10 and 11 for all required positions.
13. After checking all reference positions, the message Please
remove reference tips displays. Confirm with Done.
Determine Spacing
Based on results of the previous procedure, spacing is
calculated automatically. No further adjustments are required.
The results are written to the LiHa.

200942-103—September 2007
Individual Z Alignment
Purpose
This alignment is not used when running m2000sp software.
Additional alignments on the worktable are performed using
m2000sp software. The purpose of the Individual Z is to set
the bottom ends of non-active tips to the same height.
Check Tip Adapter
Purpose
The Check Tip Adapter function checks the electrical contact
for the DiTi and Liquid Detection functions.
Procedure
Perform the following steps to check the tip adapters.
1. On the Contents page, select the Tip Adapter checkbox
(聺).
2. Remove all DiTis from the DiTi adapters.
3. Switch to the Test Configuration page (refer to Figure
11.42).
Figure 11.42:LiHa Test Configuration Page, Tip

Adapter Test
4. Select ALL to test all DiTi adapters and select Start.

5. A prompt displays to move up the first tip adapter.
6. Push it upward and hold in the contact position.

200942-103—September 2007
7. Observe the process prompt displayed on the screen.

When the tip adapter is in the contact position, the blue
progress bar must display on the process prompt as
illustrated.
Figure 11.43:Tip Adapter Test
8. If the tip adapter works properly, confirm with Next. If

not, select Cancel.
9. Repeat steps 6 through 8 until all tip adapters are tested.
Calibrate the Lower DiTi Eject Protocol

1. Initiate the procedure by selecting <System
Device><LiHa>. The LiHa Panel/Contents page displays.
2. Select the Calibrate Lower DiTi Eject checkbox (聺).
Figure 11.44:LiHa Panel (Built In)
3. Select Start.

200942-103—September 2007
4. Enter the serial number of the instrument in the Device

Serial Number field.
Figure 11.45:Enter Serial Number Dialog
5. The test proceeds automatically and requires no user

intervention.
6. At the LiHa Process Prompt screen, select OK.
7. Select Close again to return to the Main menu.
Dilutor Tool
Description
The Dilutor tool checks the dilutors and associated tubings.
Each dilutor can be activated individually. For example, this
tool allows the FSE to determine the following:
• If the dilutor address switches are set correctly. For
example, if the same address is assigned to two different
dilutors, one of them cannot be activated.
• If each dilutor is connected (via the tubing) to the correct
LiHa channel. For example, if liquid coming from
dilutor #1 is dispensed through tip #3, it is connected to
the wrong channel.

200942-103—September 2007
• The Dilutor tool can also be used to fill/flush the liquid

systems with system liquid connected, or empty the liquid
system with the system liquid supply disconnected.
The Dilutor tool does not set or adjust any values stored in
memory. No password is required to operate the Dilutor tool.
The Dilutor tool is subdivided into eight channels associated
with the corresponding dilutors, tubings, and tips. The control
elements of those channels at which no dilutor is recognized
(because it is not installed, wrongly addressed or otherwise
malfunctioning) are not enabled.

200942-103—September 2007
Controls
The Dilutor tool includes the following controls.
Control Description
Sliders 1 to 8 There is one slider per channel. The sliders
aspirate and dispense liquid through the
associated dilutors.
Init buttons 1 to For initializing dilutors individually.
8
Text fields 1 to 8 Displays the volume, in µL, aspirated or
Volume to dispensed by the respective dilutor. If the
aspirate/dispen indicated value is positive, the indicated
se [µL] liquid quantity is aspirated; if negative, it
is dispensed.
Flush tips once Initializes the dilutors one by one. The
sequentially syringe volume is aspirated then dispensed
through the respective tip.
Flush Flushes or empties the liquid system.
Wash station Location of the wash station.
Grid:
Position: Position of the wash station.
Use Fast Wash Select to use the FaWa pump to flush.
Pump:
Fill Duration Duration of the filling.
Flush Initialize the flush protocol.
NOTE: When the Dilutor tool is used, the selected

dilutor always aspirates system liquid and dispenses it
through the associated tip. It never aspirates liquid
through the tip, and therefore does not contaminate
the system liquid.

200942-103—September 2007
Initializing the Dilutors

NOTE: It is necessary to install a wash station on the
worktable at grid 18, and to move the LiHa over the
wash station before initializing or testing the dilutors.
This ensures that liquid dispensed during the
subsequent initialization and test procedures does not
splash over the worktable.
The dilutors must be initialized before they are used.
1. Select the Init button of the respective channel. Only one
channel at a time can be selected.
NOTE: Depending on the dilutor type, initialization
can take time. It is possible for liquid to be aspirated
and dispensed during initialization.
Aspirating and Dispensing with Dilutors

The arrows in Figure 11.46 indicate the direction a slider must
be dragged to aspirate or dispense liquid.
Down arrow—determines the system liquid quantity
aspirated.
Up arrow—determines the quantity dispensed.
Refer to the following procedures for details.
Figure 11.46: Aspirating/Dispensing Liquid

200942-103—September 2007
Perform the following steps to aspirate system liquid.

1. Use the mouse to point to the respective slider and drag
the slider downward () until the text box below displays
the desired volume.
2. Release the mouse button. The dilutor aspirates the
defined quantity of system liquid.
3. Verify the correct dilutor is activated.
• If slider #1 was dragged, the left-most dilutor must
aspirate liquid.
• If slider #8 was dragged, the right-most dilutor must
aspirate liquid.
Perform the following steps to dispense aspirated liquid.
1. With the mouse, point to the desired slider and push it
upward () until the associated text box displays the
required quantity.
2. Release the mouse button. The dilutor presses the defined
quantity through the respective tubing and tip into the
wash station.
3. Verify the correct dilutor is activated and the liquid
emerges from the correct tip.
• If slider #1 was pushed up, liquid must be pressed out
of the rear-most tip (channel #1).
• If slider #8 was pushed up, liquid must emerge from
the front tip (channel #8).
Error Handling
Errors occur:
1. If the wrong dilutor reacts, check the address settings.
Note the address number corresponds to:
• Dilutor # minus 1 (i.e., dilutor 1 has address 0, dilutor
8 has address 7).
2. If liquid emerges from the wrong tip, check the
connection of tubing between the dilutors and tips.
3. Check the tubing for leaks, and to verify they are not
kinked or damaged. Replace damaged parts.

200942-103—September 2007
Flushing Dilutors Sequentially

The large command button Flush tips once sequentially
below the text boxes allows aspiration and dispense of liquid
sequentially. When this button is selected:
• Dilutor #1 (on the left side) is initialized. After
initialization, it aspirates 1/3 of the maximum syringe
volume (e.g., if the syringe volume is 1000 µL, 330 µL is
aspirated) and dispenses the aspirated quantity.
• The program continues with the next dilutor until all
dilutors recognized by the software are flushed.
Perform the following steps to flush the dilutors.

1. Select the Flush tips once sequentially button.
2. The prompt Do you want to move the LiHa above
Washstation? displays. Select Yes.
3. The prompt Please set Grid Position of Washstation

displays. Select OK.
4. Set the Washstation Grid Location to 18 and the

Position to Waste.
5. Select Flush tips once sequentially.
6. The protocol initiates and flushes each tip sequentially.
Perform the following steps to flush all tips together at one
time.
1. Under Flush Tips, select the Use Fast Wash Pump
checkbox (聺).
2. Enter the fill duration.
3. Select Flush.
4. All eight tips are flushed.

200942-103—September 2007
Filling/Emptying Liquid from Instrument

The LiHa Dilutor page is also used to fill or empty liquid from
the instrument.
1. Connect (disconnect to empty) the tubing at the system
liquid container.
2. Select <LiHa><Dilutor> from the menu.
3. Set the Wash Station Grid to 18 and the Position to

waste.
4. Select Use Fast Wash Pump.
5. Set the Duration to 10 seconds.
6. Select Flush.
7. For emptying: repeat the protocol if necessary, with a
shorter time duration to flush any liquid remaining in the
instrument.

200942-103—September 2007
Information Page
Purpose
The Information page summarizes device parameters and
diagnostics data.
Figure 11.47: Information Page
Data
Control Description
Refresh Reloads the diagnostic data and refreshes
the Sample Time.
Sample Time Snap shot time, e.g., time when the
diagnostic data were read.
Device Parameters
Axes Movement axis: X, Y, Ys, Z1 to Z8.
Offset Offset for each axis, in mm.
Displ Displacement for each axis, in mm.
Range Range for each axis, in mm.
Scale Scale factor.
Accel Acceleration for each axis, in mm per
square sec.

200942-103—September 2007
Control Description
Speed High speed of each axis, in mm per sec.
Move Speed Working speed of each axis, in mm per
sec.
Diagnostics Data
Moves Number of overall moves per axis.
Moves Number of clearable moves per axis.
Distance Total moved distance, in meters, per axis.
No-Loads Total number of no-loads, e.g., axis
crashed.
Fetched DiTis Total number of fetched DiTis per tip.
Piercings Total number of piercings per tip.
Status The status of the axis in question (ready,
initialization error, not implemented,
not initialized, not loaded, unknown).
Viewing Data
Perform the following steps to access the Information page.
1. Switch to the Information page (Figure 11.11.47 on page
11-133).
2. Select Refresh.
3. View the data.

200942-103—September 2007
Printing
Purpose
The Printing page allows formatting of a Test report to meet
Figure 11.48: LiHa Panel - Printing Page
Controls
Control Description
Device Checkbox to select device data.
Configuration Checkbox to select configuration data
as shown on the Information page
(Figure 11.47).
Parameters Checkbox to select device parameters
as shown on the Information page
(Figure 11.47).
Diagnostics Checkbox to select diagnostic data as
shown on the Information page
(Figure 11.47).
Setup Results For printing the setup results.

200942-103—September 2007
Control Description
Tip Adapter Checkboxes to select tip adapter
results.
Detailed
Results
Arm Position Not relevant (manufacturer
Accuracy procedure).
recommended.
recommended.
setup a printer.
Printing a Report
Perform the following steps to print a report.
3. Preview the Test report onscreen with Result Preview.
4. Select Print to print the Test report.
Test Report
Depending on selections, the Test report includes the
following data.
Description
Header Global data such as software versions,
LiHa and instrument serial numbers, date
of creation, and global test review (not
relevant).
Signature section with operator name.

200942-103—September 2007
Description
Device
Configuration Address, firmware and bootware version,
number of tips, spacing.
Device Axes, offset, displacement, range, scale,
Parameters acceleration, speed, move speed.
Diagnostics Same values as on the Diagnostics page:
Axes, moves, distance, no-loads, fetched
DiTis, piercings, status.
Setup Results
Deviation: Shows deviations of the arm for
movements in xa and y directionb.
Arm Position Not done (manufacturer procedure).
Accuracy:
Tip Adapter Detailed results, test configuration,
configuration details.
a. Deviation in X-axis: Note that two values are shown, one
per driven tip (tips 1 and 3 on 4-tip instruments, tips 3 and
7 on 8-tip instruments).
- If the X-deviation is 0, the arm moves exactly at a right
angle (90°) to the front edge of the worktable.
b. Deviation in Y-axis is 0 if the arm moves exactly parallel to
the worktable in the X-axis.

200942-103—September 2007
Move Test
instruments safety panels open.
these procedures.
Purpose
The Move Test function verifies correct functioning of the
drives of the LiHa, RoMa, PosID, and Dilutors. For other
options, a range test (Range Test, page 11-140) and/or a
Random Move Test (Random Move Test, page 11-141,
corresponds to the burn-in or validation procedure) can be
performed.
NOTE: Before starting the Move Test function, ensure
the worktable is empty and free of obstacles at all times
since the drives move with high speed.
Panel Description
The Move Test function provides two procedures to be
executed. Generally, the following steps must be performed:
1. Start the Move Test panel Move Test Panel, page 11-139.
2. Select the test to be performed and modify the
corresponding settings, if necessary.
NOTE: Before starting any test procedure, the Operator
field on the Printing page should be completed.
4. After performing any test, check the test results Results,
page 11-143.
5. Print the test results Printing, page 11-146.

200942-103—September 2007
Section 11 Move Test
Files, Directory
The Move Test function creates the following files. Refer to
Section 4, Installation for additional information.
Description
Result files Directory C:\Program
Files\Tecan\Genesis
Instrument Software\Results
Name MoveTest_<serial_number>_<
date>_<time>.any
Configuration Directory C:\Program
files Files\Tecan\Genesis
Instrument Software
Name <name>.anya
a. Enter the full file name (with extension.any)
Move Test Panel
Figure 11.49: Move Test Panel - Contents Page
Pages
The Move Test window is subdivided into the following pages.
Page Description
Contents Test selection.
Test Configuration of the random move test.
Configuration
Results Test results summary; refer to Results, page
11-143.
It also includes the standard command buttons.

200942-103—September 2007
Controls
Control Description
Range Performs a Range test; refer to Range Test,
page 11-140.
Random Performs a Random Move test; refer to
Random Move Test, page 11-141.
Using the Panel

Perform the following steps for the Range or Random Move
test.
1. Start the panel with System Devices > Move Test. The
Move Test Panel window with activated Contents page
(Figure 11.49) displays. After starting the Move Test
function, no checkbox is selected and not all tabs are
visible.
2. Select the test to be performed, and define the necessary
data as described in the given section.
3. Before starting any test procedure, switch to the Printing
page (Figure 11.53) to complete the Operator and
Comment fields.
5. Switch to the Results page to check the test results
(Results, page 11-143) or switch to the Printing page to
preview the Test report (Printing, page 11-146).
Range Test
Purpose
The Range Test procedure determines if the installed LiHa,
RoMa, and PosID can reach the whole range. Each device
moves along its axes to its extreme positions. The evaluated
range is compared to the stored ranges. The tests pass if the
difference between the determined and stored values are
within the deviation limits. The test lasts approximately 5 to
10 minutes, depending on the installed devices.

200942-103—September 2007
Before Starting Range Test

The Range Move test can be performed with the DiTi adapters
mounted.
Procedure
Perform the following steps for the Range test.
1. Select the Range checkbox (聺). No other parameters must
be defined.
2. Start the procedure with Start. The message Ranges Move
Test progress displays.
3. At the end of the test, a message Range Move Test: Passed
or Range Move Test: Failed displays.
4. Confirm with OK.
Pass/Fail Criteria
The test passed if the evaluated Deviation does not exceed the
specified Deviation Limit, e.g., Range = ok.
If the test fails:
• For the LiHa, perform the Determine Range and Spacing
procedures in this section.
• For the RoMa, perform the Determine Range procedure in
this section.
• For the PosID, perform the Autorange procedure in Setup
Procedure, page 11-76.
Random Move Test


200942-103—September 2007
Purpose
The Random Move Test determines if the mechanics of the
LiHa, RoMa, and PosID work properly. All devices are moved at
random for the defined number of cycles; the default setting is
7500 and lasts approximately 8 to 16 hours. After a defined
number of moves (default setting is 200), an initialization is
performed and the number of lost steps is evaluated for each
axis.
Before Starting Random Move Test

• Ensure the worktable is empty and free of obstacles at all
times.
• The DiTi adapters can remain mounted.
• If the RoMa is equipped with eccentric gripper fingers,
remove them from the gripper module.
Procedure
Perform the following steps for the Random Move test.
1. Select the Random checkbox (聺) and switch to the Test
Configuration page (Figure 11.50).
2. Enter the number of cycles to be performed in the
Duration field. The default setting is 7500, which lasts
approximately 8 to 16 hours.
Figure 11.50:Move Test Panel - Test Configuration

Page

200942-103—September 2007
3. Enter the number of cycles then an initialization is

performed in the Re-Init Interval field. The default setting
is 200.
4. Start the procedure with Start. The process prompt
Random Move Test displays.
5. At the end of the test, the message Random Move Test:

Passed or Random Move Test: Failed displays.
6. Confirm with OK.
Pass/Fail Criteria
The test passed if the evaluated Maximal Deviation does not

exceed the specified Deviation Limit, e.g., if Exceed
Counter = 0.
If the test fails, perform the corresponding setup functions.
There is a mechanical problem if the test fails again.
Results
Purpose
The current test results are summarized on the Results page.
Using the Test Results option buttons, results for the
corresponding test can be displayed.
Perform the following steps to view the results.
1. Switch to the Results page (Figure 11.51).
2. Use the option buttons in the Test Results frame to select
results to view. The Range option button is selected by
default.

200942-103—September 2007
Results of Range Test
Figure 11.51: Move Test Panel - Results Page for Range Test
The Results page, with the Range option button selected,

displays the following data.
Description
Device Name and address of the tested device.
Axis Tested axis.
Range Result of Range Move test. Tip mounted
indicates the corresponding Z-axis could not be
tested for the whole range, because a tip was
mounted.
Deviation Difference between the distance evaluated
during initialization and the expected distance.
Deviation Allowed difference between the evaluated and
Limit expected distance.
Within Compare result for Deviation less than
Limit Deviation Limit.

200942-103—September 2007
Results of Random Move Test
Figure 11.52: Move Test Panel - Results Page for Random

Move Test
The Results page, with the Random option button selected,

displays the following data.
Description
Device Name and address of the tested device.
Axis Tested axis.
Maximal Biggest difference between the distance
Deviation evaluated while initialization and the
expected distance.
Deviation Allowed difference between the evaluated
Limit and expected distance.
Exceed Incremented each time the allowed
Counter Deviation Limit is exceeded.

200942-103—September 2007
Printing
Purpose
Figure 11.53: Move Test Panel - Printing Page

200942-103—September 2007
Controls
Control Description
Range Move Test Checkboxes to select the tests to print.
Random Move Test Each test contains a substructure (expand
with [+]) with the same data selection
properties as the Multiple existing
Sections section.
Multiple existing Data selection valid for all tests selected in
Sections the Detailed Print Section Configuration
section.
Detailed Results Checkbox to print detailed test results.
several devices or Checkbox to print the test results for a
axis specific device or axis.
Operator Field for operator name. An entry is recommended.
Comment Field for additional notes. An entry is recommended.
Result Opens a Test report preview window.
Preview
Printer Setup Starts the standard Windows dialog to setup a printer.
Printing a Report
Perform the following steps to print a Test report.

200942-103—September 2007
Test Report
Depending on selections, the Test report includes the
following data.
Test Report
Header
Global data, e.g., software versions, instrument serial number, date of
creation, and global test review such as:
Test Result: Passed, if all tests passed; if not, Failed.
Tests done: All or Not all
Test Configuration:Default or User Defined/User Defined [<file
name>], if there were deviations to the default values.
Device Default Settings: not relevant.
Signature section with operator name.
Range Move Test: Passed or Failed or Not Done
Detailed Results Same data displayed on the Results page,
(Results of Range Test, page 11-144)
subdivided into devices.
Random Move Test: Passed or Failed or Not Done
Test Configuration Detailed configuration data.
Details
Detailed Results Same data displayed on the Results page,
(Results of Random Move Test, page 11-145)
subdivided into devices.

200942-103—September 2007
Section 11 Robotic Manipulator Arm (RoMa)
Robotic Manipulator Arm (RoMa)

and protective eye wear.
these procedures.
Purpose
The Robotic Manipulator arm (RoMa) is used to transport
objects of the format of microplates, such as reagent blocks,
deep well plates, etc. to different positions or for storage onto
the shelf.
The RoMa types, gripper fingers, and rotation
directions—described in the following sections—are important
for correct setup of the RoMa.

200942-103—September 2007
RoMa Types
• RoMa with eccentric gripper fingers
Figure 11.54:RoMa for m2000sp Instrument
RoMa for Freedom. Two types of RoMa can be installed

on Genesis Freedom instruments. Note they cannot be
installed on a Genesis Classic, because a different X-drive
is required.
• RoMa Freedom (Figure 11.55) is used for plate
handling on the worktable. This type is normally
equipped with eccentric gripper fingers.
• RoMa Long with long Z-axis for plate handling on and
underneath the worktable (e.g., for loading a
centrifuge placed underneath the instrument). RoMa
Long is equipped with centric or eccentric gripper
fingers.
• The m2000sp instrument is configured with the RoMa
Long with the eccentric gripper fingers.

200942-103—September 2007
• RoMa Freedom with eccentric gripper fingers
Figure 11.55:RoMa for m2000sp Instrument
Movement Axes
The RoMa’s movements are coordinated with other system
devices such as the LiHa. There are five different movement
axes.
Axis Description
X-axis Movement of the RoMa left-right.
Y-axis Movement of the RoMa forward-backward.
Z-axis Movement of the RoMa gripper head
up-down.
G-axis Movement of the RoMa gripper fingers
open-close.
R-axis Rotational motion of the RoMa gripper
head.
Rotation Directions
Possible rotation directions depend on the RoMa type:
• The RoMa Long can be set mechanically to rotate two
directions:
CW (clockwise) within a range 0° to 270°, start position: 0°
(Figure 11.56, right side). Used for the m2000sp instrument.

200942-103—September 2007
– CCW (counterclockwise) within a range 360° to 90°,

start position: 360° (Figure 11.56, left side). Not used
with the m2000sp instrument.
90° 270°
Counterclockwise (CCW) Clockwise (CW)

360° 0°
Figure 11.56:RoMa Rotation Directions
Y Z
G
X
X Arm movement: left–right Z Gripper head movement:

Y Arm movement: for- up–down
ward–backward G Gripper finger: open–close
R Gripper head: axis of rota-
Figure 11.57:RoMa Movement Axes

200942-103—September 2007
Gripper Types
Different types of gripper fingers can be mounted on the
rotator of a RoMa.
• Eccentric gripper fingers, Figure 11.58, can be used for all
types of RoMa.
Figure 11.58:Gripper Types - Eccentric Gripper Fingers
NOTE: This configuration is used for the m2000sp

instrument.
• Centric gripper fingers, Figure 11.59
Figure 11.59:Gripper Types - Centric Gripper Fingers
NOTE: Not used with the m2000sp instrument.
Required Tools
The RoMa Reference tool and the RoMa Test Plate (Figure
11.60) are required for RoMa function.
Reference Tool
Test Plate
Figure 11.60: RoMa Reference Tools and Test Plate

200942-103—September 2007
The eccentric gripper fingers do not require removal to install

the reference tool.
Panel Description
The RoMa panel provides several procedures to be executed.
Generally, the following steps must be performed:
1. Start the RoMa panel Move Test Panel, page 11-139‘’.
2. Select the setup procedures to be performed (refer to Table
61) and modify the corresponding settings.
There are two ways to proceed:
• Select ALL Setup checkboxes (聺) at the same time and
enter the necessary data by clicking the corresponding
tabs. Press Start and all setup procedures are
performed in one run.
• Select one or more Setup checkboxes (聺) and define
the necessary data as described. When Start is pressed,
the currently selected setups are performed.
• Before starting any setup procedure, the Operator
field on the Printing page should be completed.
4. After performing any setup, check setup results Results,
page 11-143.
5. Print setup results Printing, page 11-146.

200942-103—September 2007
Procedures, User Permissions

Table 11.61: RoMa procedures and user permission
Refer to
Operator FSE
Section
Determine Range. Remove X
gripper fingers if necessary!
Set Type X
Determine Reference X
Positions
Adjust Rotator X
Move RoMa X X
Results X
Printing X X
Test Report X X
Files, Directories
The RoMa function creates the following files.
Description
File name: RoMa_<serial_number>_<date>_<time>.a
ny
RoMa Panel
Figure 11.62: RoMa Panel - Contents Page

200942-103—September 2007
Pages
The RoMa window includes the standard command buttons,
and is subdivided into the following tabs.
Tab Description
Contents General overview, setup selection.
Setup RoMa configuration.
Test For configuring the Reference Plate test.
Configuration
Printing Print selection for the Test report (Test
Report, page 11-172).
Move RoMa Movement tool (Move RoMa, page 11-158).
Information Device parameters and diagnostics data
(Information Page, page 11-169).
Controls
Control Description
Available List of connected RoMas (two RoMas
Devices possible on a Genesis Freedom).
Set Default Sets default values.
Parameters
Determine Determines Y and Z range; refer to
Range Determine/Check Range, page 11-161.
Set Type Sets the RoMa type; refer to Set Type, page
11-163.
Determine Determines or checks reference positions;
Reference refer to Determine Reference Positions, page
Positions 11-164.
Adjust Rotator Adjusts the rotator’s offset and scaling; refer
to Adjust Rotator, page 11-168.
Reference Tests if plates are picked up/placed correctly.
Plate

200942-103—September 2007
Using the Panel

CAUTION: Because the RoMa moves at high speed,
ensure the worktable is empty and free of obstacles at
all times. Keep the safety door up. Door locks do not
need to be removed.
Ensure the instrument was setup with <Instrument>
<Basic Setup>.
Perform the following steps to setup the RoMa.
1. Start the panel with <System Devices><RoMa>. The
RoMa Panel window with activated Contents page
(Figure 11.49) displays. After starting the RoMa function,
no checkbox is selected and not all tabs are visible.
2. If there is more than one device listed in the Available
Devices section (possible on a Genesis Freedom
instrument), select the desired RoMa to setup.
3. Select the setup procedures to be performed and define
necessary data as described in the given section. All setup
procedures can be selected, or one or more for the desired
run. Refer to Panel Description, page 11-154 for details.
4. Before starting any setup procedure, switch to the
Printing page (Figure 11.53) to complete the Operator
and Comment fields.
6. Switch to the Results page to view the setup results
(Information Page, page 11-169) or switch to the Printing
page to preview the Test report (Test Report, page 11-172).
CAUTION: If there is a RoMa listed without a valid
serial number, it is not automatically selected. A
selection is only possible if a valid serial number was
previously entered (requires the FSE password).

200942-103—September 2007
Move RoMa
This function works only if the RoMa was previously selected
on the Contents page.
Purpose
The Move RoMa page allows movement of the whole RoMa,
or parts of it in the appropriate axes: X, Y, Z, G and R..
Controls
The Move RoMa page includes the following controls.
Control Description
Single step, in 1/10 mm or 1/10 degree,
Ten steps, in 1 mm or 1 degree,
Continuous movement/rotation buttons
when button is kept pressed.
To logical positions (90°/180°/270°) rotation
buttons.
Free Moves all arms to their extreme positions.

200942-103—September 2007
Control Description
Grip Grips the test plate.
X, Y Text boxes indicating the current position of
the rotation axis with respect to grid
position #1.
Z Current position in Z-axis (distance of
grippers from worktable).
R Current rotational angle of gripper module.
G Current distance between grippers.
• Arrows on the movement buttons indicate the direction in

which the respective parts are moved.
Keyboard Control
It is possible to also use the keyboard for movements in the
various axes.
Setup Page
Purpose
The Setup Page provides controls for setting parameters for the
various setup procedures.

200942-103—September 2007
Controls
The Setup page includes the following controls.
Control Description
Rotator Type For specifying the rotation direction.
Gripper Type For specifying the gripper type.
Z-range For specifying the Z-range.
Reference Frame for setting the reference positions.
Positions
Grid Spin boxes for setting left and right
reference grid positions.
Use for Y Option buttons to specify if reference
positions in the Y-axis should be
determined at the left or right reference
position.
Ref. Plate Pos. Spin box to set the grid position of the
Grid reference plate.
Initialize Spin box used if a Te-MO is installed on
Position X the instrument. Defines the position
(relative to grid position #1) at which the
arm is initialized. The position must be
chosen to eliminate possible collisions
with the Te-MO. The position can be set
with an accuracy of 0.1 [mm].
Table on right Current speed and accelerations in X-, Y-,
side Z-, R-, and G-axes.
NOTE: Ensure all parameters are set correctly.
Refer to the respective setup procedures for additional

information regarding entries to be made.
Set Default Parameters


200942-103—September 2007
NOTE: Do not start this function unnecessarily. After

performing this function, it is necessary to readjust all
ranges, reference positions, rotation ranges etc.).
Purpose
This function resets reference positions, ranges, and offsets to
the original (factory-set) values. It should be used only:
• When a new instrument is set up the first time
• After certain repairs from which maladjustment could
result (e.g., removal and reinstallation of the worktable,
replacement of whole RoMa etc.).
Procedure
Perform the following steps to set the default parameters.
1. On the Contents page select the Set Default Parameters
checkbox (聺) and select Start.
2. When finished, all ranges, reference positions, and
rotation ranges with the respective functions must be
adjusted.
Determine/Check Range
Purpose
The Determine Range procedure moves the RoMa in Y-, Z-, G-,
and R-direction to its extreme positions to find the available
ranges. The determined values are then written to the RoMa.
To mount the reference tool, the gripper fingers must be
removed from the rotator. Refer to Table 61.

200942-103—September 2007
Procedure
Perform the following steps to determine the range.
1. On the Contents page, select the Determine Range
checkbox (聺) and switch to the Setup page.
Figure 11.63:RoMa Panel - Setup Page
2. In the Reference Positions frame, configure the

following:
• Use the Grid spin boxes to set the left and right grid
positions to 7 and 45, respectively.
• Select the appropriate Use for Y option button to
select the reference position (Left or Right) where the
Z-range will be determined.
3. Perform the procedure by selecting Start. The message
Mount Reference Tool displays.
4. Hold the reference tool against the gripper module and
select OK. This opens the grippers to hold the reference
tool.
5. Confirm the message Ready to proceed with OK.
6. After determining the range, the message Unmount
Reference Tool displays.
7. Hold the reference tool in the gripper then select OK. The
reference tool is released and the determined values are
written to the RoMa.
8. Select OK at the prompt then select OK again at the
Setup:Done prompt.

200942-103—September 2007
Set Type
Purpose
The Set Type procedure allows definition of the following:
• Rotation direction of gripper head
• Gripper finger types
• RoMa type to set up (RoMa Standard or RoMa Long)
Procedure
Perform the following steps to set the RoMa type.
NOTE: Refer to Orientation RoMa Standard on page
3–12 of Section 3, Technical Data to verify screw
position for CW rotation.
1. Select the Set Type checkbox (聺) and switch to the Setup
page (Figure 11.50).

200942-103—September 2007
2. Use the option buttons in the Rotor Type, Gripper Type,

and Z Range frames to make the selection. Refer to the
following table.
Description
Rotator Type Configures the rotator type.
CW Select this option button so the gripper
head rotates clockwise. The m2000sp
instrument must be set to CW.
CCW Select this option button so the gripper
head rotates counterclockwise. Not used
Gripper Type Configures the gripper type.
Eccentric Select this option button to define
installation of the eccentric gripper
fingers. The m2000sp instrument uses
eccentric gripper fingers.
Centric Select this option button so the centric
gripper fingers are installed. Not used
Z Range Configures the Z-range of the gripper
arm.
Normal Option button to define the RoMa in
(standard) question as a RoMa Freedom (with a
standard Z-drive). The m2000sp
instrument uses a RoMa standard.
Extended Option button to define the RoMa in
(long) question as a RoMa Long (with a long
Z-drive).
Reference Not used in this context; refer to Adjust
Plate Rotator, page 11-168.
Position
3. Save the selections with Start. A message with the changes

displays.
4. Confirm the changes with OK. The values are written to
the RoMa.
Determine Reference Positions


200942-103—September 2007
Purpose
The Determine Reference Positions procedure moves the
RoMa to the selected reference positions in sequence:
• To adjust and determine the X- and Y- scale factors, and
X- and Y-displacements.
• To check reference positions.
• To mount the Reference tool, the gripper fingers must be
removed from the rotator as illustrated below.
Reference Tool
Reference Pin
Figure 11.65:Reference Position
Procedure
Perform the following steps to determine reference positions.
1. Select the Determine Reference Positions checkbox (聺)
and switch to the Setup page.
Figure 11.66:RoMa Panel - Reference Positions Page
2. Set the Left and Right reference position for the RoMa at
7 and 45, respectively.
3. With the Use for Y option button, select the Left or Right
reference position for movement in Y-direction.
4. Start the procedure with Start. The message Mount

200942-103—September 2007
5. Hold the reference tool against the bottom of the gripper

module then select OK. This opens the gripper to hold the
reference tool.
6. Confirm the message Ready to proceed with OK. The
Move RoMa page is active (refer to Move RoMa, page
11-158) and the message Use move tool to determine
first reference point displays.
7. Adjust the position in X- and Y-direction according to
Figure 11.65.
8. If the reference tool is in the correct position, confirm with
Next.
9. Repeat steps 7 and 8 for all indicated positions.
10. After all reference positions are adjusted, the message
Unmount Reference Tool displays.
reference tool is released and the values found are written
to the RoMa.
12. Select OK to proceed.
13. Select OK at Setup:Done prompt.
14. If the RoMa is significantly out of alignment or the test
fails, reset the default parameters and perform the Set
Type, Determine Range, Determine the Reference
Positions, and Adjust the Rotator procedures.
NOTE: Be sure to reinstall gripper fingers. However, if
the Determine Range procedure in this section is
performed, it should be performed before mounting the
gripper fingers.

200942-103—September 2007
Check Reference Positions

The following procedure is similar to the one used to
determine the reference positions, described earlier in this
section. The difference is that the procedure described in this
section only checks the reference positions, but does not
readjust them.
Perform the following steps to check the reference positions.
1. On the Contents page, select the Determine Reference
Positions checkbox (聺) and switch to the Setup page
(Figure 11.66).
2. Set the Left and Right reference positions at 7 and 45,
respectively.
3. With the Use for Y option buttons, select the Left or Right
reference position for movement in Y-direction.
4. Start the procedure with Start. The message Mount
5. Hold the reference tool between the grippers and select OK
to grip the reference tool.
6. Confirm the message Ready to proceed with OK. The
Move RoMa page is activated (refer to Move RoMa, page
11-158) and the message Use move tool to determine
first reference point displays.
7. Check the reference position using only the command
buttons in Z-direction. If the command buttons are not
used for X- and Y-direction, adjustment of the reference
positions is not changed.
8. To check the next position, confirm with Next.
9. Repeat steps 7 and 8 for all indicated positions.
10. After all reference positions are checked, the message
Unmount Reference Tool displays.
reference tool is released.
NOTE: Remember to reinstall gripper fingers. However,
if the Determine Range procedure in this section is
performed, it should be performed before mounting the
gripper fingers.

200942-103—September 2007
Adjust Rotator
Perform the following steps to adjust the rotator’s offset and

scaling.
1. On the Contents page, select the Adjust Rotator
checkbox (聺) and switch to the Setup page (Figure
11.67).
2. Use the Reference Plate Position spin box to set the

position of the test plate (front left corner) to grid 25.
3. Install the procedure by selecting Start. The message
Mount Gripper displays.
4. Mount the gripper fingers if they were removed and
confirm with OK. The message Make sure the reference
plate is on Grid 25 displays.
5. Put the test plate on the worktable at the selected grid
position (front left corner) and continue with OK. The
rotator is now adjusted and the values found are written to
the RoMa. Select OK when the test is completed.
6. Verify the setup by performing the Reference Plate test.
7. Select Close to exit the RoMa panel.

200942-103—September 2007
Information Page
Purpose
The Information page summarizes device parameters and
diagnostics data.
Figure 11.68: Information Page
Controls, Data
Control Description
Refresh Reloads diagnostic data and refreshes the
Sample Time.
Sample Time Snap shot time, e.g., time when diagnostic
data were read.
Device Parameters
Axes Axis for which the test was done.
Offset Offset, in mm, for each axis.
Displ Displacement, in mm, for each axis.
Range Range, in mm, for each axis.
Scale Scale factor.
Accel Acceleration, in mm per square sec., for
each axis.
Speed Normal speed, in mm per sec., for each axis.

200942-103—September 2007
Control Description
Move Speed Speed, in mm per sec., at which the RoMa
was actually moved in each axis.
Diagnostics Data
Axis Axis in which the RoMa was moved.
Moves Number of moves per axis.
Moves Number of clearable moves per axis.
Distance Total moved distance, in meters, per axis.
No-Loads Total number of no-loads, e.g., axis crashed.
Status Status of the axis in question (ready,
initialization error, not implemented, not
initialized, not loaded, unknown).
Viewing the Data

Perform the following steps to access the Information page.
1. Switch to the Information page (Figure 11.51).
2. Select Refresh. View the data.

200942-103—September 2007
Printing
Purpose
Figure 11.69: RoMa Panel - Printing Page
Controls
Control Description
Diagnostics Checkbox to select diagnostic data as
shown on the Information page (Figure
11.51).
Configuratio Checkbox to select the configuration
n data (address, firmware version,
bootware version, Z-range, orientation,
gripper type).
Parameters Checkbox to select device parameters as
shown on the Results page (Figure
11.51).

200942-103—September 2007
Control Description
recommended.
recommended.
setup a printer.
Printing a Report
Perform the following steps to print a report.
Test Report
Based on the selections, the Test report includes the following
data.
Test Report
Header
Global data such as software versions, RoMa and
instrument serial numbers, date of creation, and global test
review (not relevant). Signature section with operator
name.
Device
Diagnostics: Same table as displayed on the Information
page (refer to Figure 11.51).
Configuration: Address, firmware version, bootware
version, Z-range, orientation, gripper type.
Parameters: Same table as on the Results page (refer to
Figure 11.51).

200942-103—September 2007
Test Report
Setup Results
Deviation: Shows the deviations of the arm for movements
in X- and Y-directiona
a. Deviations in X- and Y-direction
Y-deviation: is 0 if the arm moves exactly parallel to the
worktable in the X-axis.
X-deviation: is 0 in the Y-axis if the arm moves exactly at a
right angle (90°) to the worktable in the Y-axis.

200942-103—September 2007
Liquid System Functions


200942-103—September 2007
Section 11 Liquid System Menu
Liquid System Menu

The Liquid System menu includes the following commands.
Command Description
DiTi DiTi (disposable tips) functions; refer to
DiTi, page 11-176.
Liquid Liquid detection functions; refer to DiTi,
Detection page 11-176.
Gravimetric Checks the precision and accuracy of a
Test liquid transfer. Not used with the m2000sp
instrument.
FaWa FaWa functions; refer to DiTi, page 11-176.
6-way valve Checks if the 6-way valve works correctly
and if the valve and its connector are
completely tight. Not used with the
m2000sp instrument.
Licos MPO Licos on MPO functions. Not used with the
m2000sp instrument.
Licos Licos on supervisor PCB functions. Not used
(Supervisor) with the m2000sp instrument.
Balance Sets up balance. Not used with the m2000sp
instrument.

200942-103—September 2007
DiTi
these procedures.
DiTi Sub-menu
The DiTi sub-menu includes the following commands.

200942-103—September 2007
Section 11 DiTi
Command Description
DiTi Eject Test Checks the positioning accuracy of the DiTis
and DiTi ejection procedure.
Lower DiTi Tests the put back and disposal ejection
Eject Test heights for the Lower DiTi eject.
Requirements
To execute the Lower DiTi Eject test, the m2000sp worktable
map must be loaded and tips currently in use must be
configured.
Loading a Worktable
Perform the following step to load a worktable.
Load the suitable worktable map with <System><Load
Worktable>.
Figure 11.70:m2000sp Worktable

Purpose
The Lower DiTi Eject Test function tests the putback and
disposal ejection heights for the Lower DiTi Eject. The
calibration function must be performed before the Lower DiTi
Eject test is used.

200942-103—September 2007
Before Starting the Lower DiTi Eject Test

• Ensure requirements at the beginning of DiTi, page 11-176
are met.
• Ensure the Calibrate Lower DiTi option was executed.
Procedure
Perform the following steps for the Lower DiTi Eject test.
1. Go to <Liquid System><DiTi><Lower DiTi Eject Test>.
2. Load the m2000sp worktable:
• Place the DiTi Rack carrier at grid 21.
• Place the wash/waste station and DiTi slide in the
cutout at grid 18.
• Place a full rack of 1000 µL DiTis on the rear position
of the carrier.
• Place an empty rack on the center position of the
carrier.
Figure 11.71:Lower DiTi Eject Test Dialog
3. The Lower DiTi Eject Test screen displays.

4. Configure the Lower DiTi Eject Test as shown:
NAT MBS m2000sp

DiTi Type 1000F EDiTi 1000F EDiTi
Source Rack DiTi.RR C12.RR
First DiTi Position 1 1
Destination Rack DiTi.RM C12.RM
Waste Rack W1.DiTi Waste C11.DiTi Waste
For both setups:

• Leave <Put back DiTi on lower position> blank
• Enter the operator name (required)

200942-103—September 2007
Section 11 DiTi
5. Click Select Tips and verify all eight DiTi tips are 1000 µL
DiTi with filter.
Figure 11.72:Select Tips
6. Select OK.
7. Initiate the test by selecting Run. The status changes to
Test Running.
8. When the test is completed, the status changes to Test
Passed.
9. Select Close to finish the test.

• Check the Tip adapters.
11. Remove the carrier, DiTi Slide, and wash/waste station
from the worktable.

200942-103—September 2007

• Check the Tip adapters.
• Perform the Individual Z Alignment
• Calibrate the Lower DiTi Eject.

200942-103—September 2007
Section 11 Liquid Detection
Liquid Detection
these procedures.
The Liquid Detection sub-menu includes the following.

200942-103—September 2007
Command Description
Setup Defines new Liquid Level Detection setups
for user-defined tests.
Normal Test Ensures the Liquid Detection feature works
correctly.
Extended Test This sub-item can only be performed at
manufacturer’s site and is disabled for use by
operators and Field Service Representatives.
Setup
Purpose
The Setup function defines Liquid Level Detection (LLD)
setups to use with user-defined tests. The LLD setup is not used
by Tecan’s application software such as Gemini and Logic.
Because most liquids used have different capacitive dielectric
properties, the relevant parameters are defined within the
(LLD) Setup. Tests within Setup & Service can use one of
10 pre-defined setups (range 1 to 10) or one of 20 user-defined
setups (range 11 to 30). Each setup defines the LLD procedure,
sensitivity, phase, and In and Out parameters.

200942-103—September 2007
Procedure
Load the m2000sp Worktable and perform the following steps
to define LLD setups.
1. Start the function with <Liquid System><Liquid
Detection><Setup>. The Liquid Detection Setups
window displays.
Figure 11.73:Liquid Detection Setups Window
The Liquid Detection Setups window is divided into the

following sections.
Command Description
Default setups Ten pre-defined LLD setups.
These settings (refer to Table 11-1) cannot be
altered.
User-defined Twenty user-defined LLD setups.
setups
Proc Number of the liquid detection procedure. The
procedure that the liquid detection follows describes
the various steps executed by the LLD.
Sens Detection sensitivity of the liquid detector electronics.
NOTE: Liquids of low conductivity require very
high detection sensitivity (2), and vice versa.
0 Low or standard sensitivity
1 High sensitivity
2 Very high sensitivity

200942-103—September 2007
Command Description
Phase This feature is provided because the detection signal of
a tip can interfere with the check function of adjacent
tips at a very high sensitivity level. This especially can
occur if the latter tips enter the same liquid
simultaneously (e.g., in an additive trough rack).
0 0° (in phase). Causes the detector electronics to
check all tips involved in the detection
simultaneously.
1 180° (out of phase). Not used with the m2000sp
instrument.
Causes odd tip numbers to be checked a
fraction of a second later than even tip
numbers.
In Flag to enable the liquid entry signal monitoring
(liquid level detection).
Yes Enabled
No Disabled
Out Flag to enable the liquid exit signal monitoring (clot
detection).
Yes Enabled
No Disabled
Use Trough Checkbox to activate a special liquid detection
Detection Mode mode for containers simultaneously accessed
by several tips.
Save Saves the LLD setups in the LLDSETUP.ini file in the
<install_path>\Service directory.
Print Opens the Common Print Information dialog to
print the LLD setups.

200942-103—September 2007
2. Define the LLD setup within the User-defined setups

table.
• Select Use Trough Detection Mode checkbox (聺) to
activate a special liquid detection mode for containers
simultaneously accessed by several tips. If
selected—when encountering such a container—the
first tip moves down to detect liquid, registers the
liquid level, then all other activated tips move down
to the same liquid level. Different tips are considered,
according to the tip configuration.
• For the m2000sp instrument, Phase must be set to 0.
3. Save data with Save. A message displays that setup data are
stored in the Toolbox and Liquid Detection Setup file.
4. Confirm with OK to finish.
Liquid Detection Procedures

The following table defines the various test procedures.
Double
Proc Description
Detection
Detects with all selected tips
0 no
simultaneously.
Detects with all selected tips
simultaneously. Stores the position of
the first successful detection, retracts
then redetects. The second detection
1 yes
must be within ± 50% of the retract
distance—if not, detection is restarted.
After four unsuccessful detection
attempts an error message displays.
Detects simultaneously with all odd
(1,3,5,7) of the selected tips, and
2 no afterward with all even (2,4,6,8) of the
selected tips.
Otherwise, same as procedure #0.
Detects simultaneously with all odd
(1,3,5,7) of the selected tips, and
3 yes afterward with all even (2,4,6,8) of the
selected tips.

200942-103—September 2007
Double
Proc Description
Detection
Tip after tip until all selected tips are
4 no through.
Tip after tip until all selected tips are
5 yes through.
Tip after tip with 80 ms delay in
between, until all selected tips are
6 no through.
Tip #1 moves down, detects, then
7 yes retracts 10 mm. The next tip then
moves down.
Double Detection
no Only one detection.
yes Double detection for increased accuracy
(recommended by Tecan).
Genesis Default Liquid Level Detection Setups
Tab. 11-1 Genesis Default LLD Series
LLD Double Container

Conductivity Proc Sens Phase In Out
Setup Detection Form
1 no Tube like high 2 0 0 yes yes
2 no Tube like low 2 2 0 yes yes
3 no Tube like medium 2 1 0 yes yes
4 no Well like all liquids 6 2 0 yes yes
5 yes Tube like high 3 0 0 yes yes
6 yes Tube like low 3 2 0 yes yes
7 yes Tube like medium 3 1 0 yes yes
8 yes Trough all liquids 7 2 0 yes yes
like
9 0 0 0 yes yes
10 0 0 0 yes yes

200942-103—September 2007
Normal Test
Description
Container Form
Tube like Tube is a strip rack or any other rack with
diameter greater than 8 mm.
Well like Microplate well or any small tube with
diameter smaller than 8 mm.
Trough like Reagent bottle or trough accessed by more
than 1 tip.
Conductivity Conductivity of the detected liquid.
Non-conductive liquids, e.g., oil, are not
detected.
NOTE: Liquids of low conductivity
require very high detection sensitivity
(Sens), and vice versa.
low Liquid of low conductivity, e.g., DMSO,
alcohol, deionized water.
medium Liquid of high or medium conductivity, e.g.,
blood, salty water, deionized water.
high Liquid of high conductivity, e.g., blood,
salty water.
all liquids Liquid of high, medium or low
conductivity, e.g., blood, salty water,
deionized water, DMSO, alcohol.
Purpose
The Normal Test function verifies the Liquid Detection feature
is working properly. It is also frequently used to check if Liquid
Detection is able to detect a certain (usually small) volume of a
specific liquid.
In addition, there is an Extended test, which is performed
before the instrument is shipped. It cannot be executed in the
field and is not described here.
NOTE: Tubing should be free of all bubbles. Perform
the Fill/Flush test to remove bubbles.

200942-103—September 2007
Procedure
Perform the following steps for the Normal Test function.
1. Load the m2000sp worktable map with <System><Load
Worktable>.
NOTE: If you have loaded the m2000sp worktable, you
must run the test with 200 mL reagent carriers and
troughs.
2. Fill a clear reagent trough with 20 to 30 mL of water. Place
the trough into the first position (RF) of a reagent carrier
and load the carrier on grid 20 of the worktable.
3. Place a full rack of 1000 µL DiTis in the rear position (RR)
of a DiTi carrier and place the carrier on grid 21 of the
worktable.
4. Place a rack with eight clean and dry tubes in positions
1 to 8 on grid 1 of the worktable.
5. Select <Liquid System><Detection Mode> option. Select
Save. Select OK. Select Close.
6. Start with <Liquid System><Liquid Detection><Normal
Test>. The Liquid Detector Test Configuration dialog
displays.

200942-103—September 2007
7. The Liquid Detector Test Configuration dialog includes

Control Description
Cycles Field for the number of cycles performed.
Enter 15.
Submerge Field for the distance the tip dips into the
liquid. Enter 10.
Is the Liquid Checkbox to define that the liquid source is
Source a Rack? a rack. Select this option.
Source Rack List to select the position of the rack
holding container(s) out of which liquid is
aspirated. Use T1.RF.
Flush Rack List to select the position of the flush carrier
within the wash rack. Select W1.Waste,RM.
Destination List to select the position of the destination
Rack rack. For non-NPS instruments, ensure the
tubes of C4.R1 are empty.
First Dest Field for the destination start position.
Position Position 1 is the upper tube. Enter 1.
Diti Waste List to select the position of the waste
Rack carrier within the DiTi rack. Select
W1.DiTi.Waste.
DiTi Type List to select tip type. Select 1000F EDiTi.
DiTi Tip type.
Diti Rack List to select the position of the DiTi carrier
within the DiTi rack. Select DiTi.RR.
First DiTi Field for the DiTi start position. Position 1
Position is the first one in the upper left. Enter 1.
Run Opens an empty Liquid Detector Test Results
window (Figure 11.74) to start the test
procedure.
Cancel Aborts the function and resets all values.
Save Starts the standard Windows Save As dialog to
save the data in an appropriate *.ini file in the
Print Opens the Common Print Information dialog
to print configuration data and/or test results.

200942-103—September 2007
Control Description
More Opens the Liquid Detector Test—Advanced
Configuration dialog for advanced
configuration (refer to Advanced Configuration
on page 11–192). For FSEs only and requires the
Select Tips Opens the Select Tips dialog to select the tips
used.
Fill/Flush Opens the Fill/Flush dialog to fill/flush the
liquid dispense system.

worktable map.
9. If definition of an advanced configuration is needed,
continue with Advanced Configuration.
10. If tips used for the test need to be reduced, click Select Tips
then make the selection.
11. Start the test with Run. An empty Liquid Detector Test
Results window (Figure 11.74) displays.
12. Start the test procedure with Start. The message Do flush
Step? (First cycle with all tips) displays.
13. Confirm with Yes or No. If confirmed with Yes, the
message Repeat flush step? displays. If No is selected, the
test starts running.
14. During the test, results display continuously on the
Liquid Detector Test Results window as shown.
Figure 11.74:Liquid Detector Test Results Window

200942-103—September 2007
The Liquid Detector Test Results window includes the

following data.
Description
Tip-in Results when tip enters liquid.
CurrLevel Current Z-value, in 1/10 mm (measured
from bottom).
MeanLevel Average of all detected liquid levels.
Min-Max Largest difference, in 1/10 mm, between
min. and max. level.
LiqErrs The value is incremented if:
• no liquid is detected when the tip dips
into the liquid (no dip in signal
• no dip out signal is detected double
detection mode)
Level Err Set to yes. If the no dip in signal received
within the required distance, e.g., if the
allowed Liquid Det. Error Limit (Advanced
Configuration) is exceeded.
Tip-out Results when tip leaves liquid.
MeanLevel Average of all detected liquid levels.
ClotErrs Numbered errors, if no dip out signal
received within retract distance, e.g., if the
allowed Clot Det. Error Limit is exceeded. A
dip out signal occurs as the tip leaves the
liquid.
No Exit Numbered errors, if no dip out signal
received.
TotErrs Sum of all errors.
15. After finishing the test, the message Liquid Detector Test
passed or Liquid Detector Test failed displays. Confirm
with OK. The Liquid Detector Test Results window with
the final test results is active.
16. Close the window with Close. The Liquid Detector Test
Configuration dialog is active again.
17. Print the test results with Print and/or finish the test with
Close.

200942-103—September 2007
Pass/Fail Criteria
The test passes if TotErrs = 0.
If the test fails:
• Verify all tips are the same height. If not, correct with
<LiHa><Setup><Individual Z>.
• Recheck the liquid system for air bubbles.
Field service representatives can use an advanced test
configuration.
Procedure
Perform the following steps to enter Advanced Configuration
data.
1. Select More in the Liquid Detector Test Configuration
dialog. The Liquid Detection Test - Advanced
Configuration dialog displays.
Figure 11.75:Liquid Detection Test - Advanced

Configuration Dialog

200942-103—September 2007
The Liquid Detection Test - Advanced Configuration

dialog includes the following controls.
Control Description
Liquid
Detection
LLD Setup Fields to define the LLD Setup number
(refer to Setup, page 11-182) for dip in
(Liquid) and dip out (Clot).
Detect Fields to define the detect speeds, in
Speed 0.1 mm/s, for dip in (Liquid) and dip
out (Clot).
Det. Error Fields to define allowed deviations, in
Limit 0.1 mm, to not lead to LiqErrs
(Liquid) or ClotErrs (Clot).
Prefill Prefill parameters (used only for
non-NPS instruments).
LLD Setup Field to define the LLD Setup number
used for prefill.
Volume Field to define the prefill volume, in
mL.
Speed Field to define the dispense speed of
the liquid, in mL/s.
Air Gap Field to define the air volume between
system liquid and prefill liquid.
Tip Usage List to select the tips used.
OK Finishes the advanced configuration and
saves the values defined.
Cancel Aborts the advanced configuration without
saving any changes.
2. Enter advanced configuration data.

3. Confirm entries with OK. The Liquid Detector Test
Configuration dialog is active again (back to Procedure).

200942-103—September 2007
Fill/Flush
1. From the Liquid Detector Test Configuration screen
select Fill/Flush.
2. The Fill Liquid System screen displays.
3. Select the Use Fast Wash Pump checkbox (聺).

4. Depending on the worktable you are in, select
W1.WASTE,RM or C11.Waste,RM in the Flush Station
list.
5. Select W1.DiTiWASTE or C11.DiTiWaste in the DiTi
Waste Rack field.
6. Set the System Liquid Aspirate Speed to 1000 µL/s.
7. Set the Fill Speed to 1000 µL/s.
8. Set the Fill Liquid Volume to 30000 µL.
9. Select Fill System to initiate the Fill/Flush protocol.

200942-103—September 2007
Section 11 FaWa
FaWa
The Fast Wash pump (FaWa) is used to pump large amounts of
liquid at high speed through the system, normally to rinse the
tips. The Monitored Pump option (MPO) consists of FaWa and
Licos. The m2000sp instrument only uses the FaWa pump and
the common board for the MPO, and does not use the Licos
system.
The FaWa sub-menu includes the following commands.
Command Description
Setup Configures the Fast Wash pump; refer to Setup,
page 11-196.
Test Checks the throughput of liquid in the entire
Genesis liquid system tubing; refer to Test,
page 11-196.

200942-103—September 2007
The FaWa command is enabled only if a Fast Wash pump is

installed.
Setup
Purpose
The Setup function configures the Fast Wash pump (number
of pumps and tips for each pump).
Procedure
Perform the following steps to configure the Fast Wash pump.
1. Start the function with <Liquid System><FaWa><Setup>.
The Fast Wash Pump Setup dialog displays.
Figure 11.76:Fast Wash Pump Setup
2. In the Number of Pumps list select the number of pumps.

There is only one Fast Wash pump installed on the
m2000sp instrument.
3. In the Pump1 list, select 8 as the number of tips served by
the installed pump.
4. Confirm entries with OK.
5. If any data were changed, the message Write results to
MPO EEPROM displays. Confirm with Yes.
Test
Purpose
The Test function checks the throughput of liquid in the
entire m2000sp liquid system tubing.

200942-103—September 2007
Section 11 FaWa
If the tip type is not recognized, the operator is prompted to

enter user-defined values as shown in the following table.
Test Principle
The following figure illustrates the principle of the liquid level
check with the Fast Wash Pump test.
8-Tip Instruments
Tip type, built-in Duration of Min. throughput
configurations pump… to pass test (µL/s)
(0.1 s)
1000 µL DiTi 30 1600
200 µL DiTi 30 1600
Liquid Level
after second
liquid burst
Cylindrical part Prefilled

of liquid level liquid, first
(volume liquid burst
500 mL)
Figure 11.77: Liquid Level Check
Test Sequence
The Fast Wash Pump test performs the following procedure to
test the throughput of the pump through the tips or DiTi
adapters.
• Tubes are pre-filled, using Dilutor and without DiTis if the
instrument has DiTi adapters.
• DiTis are picked up.
• DiTi actions only take place if the selected tips are a DiTi
type.
• Level of the pre-fill is measured, using Liquid Detection.
• DiTis are removed.

200942-103—September 2007
• Tubes are filled using the Fast Wash pump.

• DiTis are picked up.
• The height increase of liquid is measured using Liquid
Detection.
• The height increase is checked; it must be within the
expected minimum throughput value.
Before Starting the FaWa Test Function

• To avoid overflow of liquid during the test, use only tubes
with a 13 mm diameter and at least 100 mm tube length.
Ensure tubes are empty and clean.
• Ensure no other Liquid System Check Worktable map was
loaded; if not load it with <System><Load Worktable>.
• Verify the system liquid bottle is full and at the same
height as the worktable.
• The liquid system must be filled with <FaWa><Test><Fill
Flush>. Ensure the entire liquid system is free of air
bubbles.
Procedure
1. Start with <Liquid System><FaWa><Test>. The Fast
Wash Pump Test Configuration dialog displays.
Figure 11.78:Fast Wash Pump Test Configuration
2. If no worktable map was previously loaded, the Select

Worktable dialog displays to load an appropriate
worktable map. Select m2000sp Worktable and select OK
to load.

200942-103—September 2007
Section 11 FaWa
The Fast Wash Pump Test Configuration dialog includes

Control Description
Prefill Field for prefill volume in µL. Set the value
Volume so the liquid level reaches the cylindric
part of the destination tube. Required for a
proper liquid level check. The default
setting is 600.
Destination List to select the position of the
Rack destination liquid rack. Select C3.R1 at
grid 4.
Flush Rack List to select the position of the flush
carrier within the wash rack. Select
W1.WASTE,RM.
DiTi List to select the type of DiTi used. Select
Type 1000F EDiTi.
DiTi Rack List to select the position of the DiTi
carrier within the DiTi rack. Select
DiTi.RR. Place the carrier at grid 21.
DiTi Waste List to select the position of the waste
Rack carrier within the DiTi rack. Select
W1.DiTi Waste.
First DiTi Field for the DiTi start position. Position 1
position is the first one in the upper left. Enter 1.
Select Tips Opens the Select Tips dialog to select the
tips used.
More Opens the Fast Wash Pump Test - Adv.
Configuration dialog for user-defined test
configuration.
Fill/Flush Opens the Fill Liquid System dialog.
Run Opens an empty test result window
(Figure 11.79) to start the Fast Wash Pump
test.
Close Finishes the function and saves the values
defined.
Cancel Aborts the function without saving any
changes.

200942-103—September 2007
Control Description
Save As Starts the standard Windows Save As
dialog to save the data in an appropriate
*.ini file in the
[Print] Opens the Common Print Information
dialog to print the configuration data
and/or test results. Refer to Printing, page
11-135 for details.

worktable map.
4. To define a user-defined test, continue with Advanced
Configuration by selecting More. Refer to Advanced
Configuration, page 11-201 below.
5. Start the test with Run. An empty Fast Wash Pump Test
Results window (Figure 11.79) displays.
Figure 11.79:Fast Wash Pump Test Results
6. Start the test procedure with Start. The test begins

running.
7. After finishing the test, the message Fast wash pump test
passed or Fast Wash Pump Test failed displays. Confirm
with OK. The Fast Wash Pump Test Results window with
the final test results is active.
8. Close the window with Close. The Fast Wash Pump Test
Configuration dialog is active again.
9. Print the test results with Print and/or finish the function
with Cancel.

200942-103—September 2007
Section 11 FaWa
Pass/Fail Criteria
The test passed when the Throughput value is > the minimal
throughput value displayed in brackets in the Tip column. If
Throughput is < the minimal throughput value (in the
example < 1600 µL), the test failed.
The minimal throughput values are user-defined within the
Fast Wash Pump Test - Adv. Configuration dialog (in the
example > 1600 µL).
If Test Fails
1. Verify tips are not blocked.
2. Recheck the liquid system for air bubbles.
Perform the following steps to enter user-defined test data.
1. Select More in the Fast Wash Pump Test Configuration
dialog. The Fast Wash Pump Test - Adv. Configuration
dialog (Figure 11.80) displays.
Figure 11.80:Fast Wash Pump Test - Adv.

Configuration Dialog

200942-103—September 2007
The Fast Wash Pump Test - Adv. Configuration dialog

includes the following controls.
Control Description
6-way valve Indicates if a 6-way valve is installed. Not used
installed with the m2000sp instrument.
LLD Setup Field for the LLD Setup number; refer to Setup,
page 11-182. The LLD Setup should not be
altered.
User-defined
.. user-defined Checkbox to activate the user-defined test.
test
Name of … Field for a test configuration name, e.g., FaWa.
Duration Field for the duration of the pump sequence,
in 0.1 s.
If changing the duration to a higher value, be
sure to place an appropriate tube with a bigger
volume, e.g., 30, in the destination rack to
avoid an overflow.
Minimal Field to define the minimal expected
Throughput throughput, in µL/s, to pass the test (usually
1600).
Test settings Displays the current test settings.
Select Tip Type Displays the current selected tip, e.g., 1000 µL
DiTi with filter.
Number of Used Specifies the number of tips used.
Tips
Duration Duration of the test.
Minimal Set fill rate to pass test.
throughput to pass
Test
OK Finishes Advanced Configuration and saves the defined
values.
Cancel Aborts Advanced Configuration without saving any
changes.

200942-103—September 2007
Section 11 FaWa
2. To reduce the number of tips used for the test, click Select
Tips. The Select Tips dialog displays.
Figure 11.81:Select Tips Dialog
3. When using a custom-defined tip configuration, select the

positions accordingly. Confirm entries with OK.
If a selection is made, the message This is not one of the
standard configurations displays:
Figure 11.82:FaWa Test
4. Confirm entries with OK. One of the following messages

display: Your user-defined configuration is accepted.
FaWa-Test will run or Program chosen default
configuration. FaWa-Test will run.
5. Confirm with OK. The Fast Wash Pump Test
Configuration dialog is active again (back to Fast Wash
Pump Test - Adv. Configuration Dialog).
6. Start the test with Run then Start. The test proceeds as
previously described.

200942-103—September 2007
Fill/Flush
1. Load the m2000sp Worktable if not loaded.
2. Select <Liquid System><FaWa> Test from the menu.
The Fast Wash Pump Test Configuration screen displays.
3. Select 1000F EDiTi as the DiTi Type.

4. Select Fill/Flush. The Fill Liquid System screen displays.
5. Check the Use Fast Wash Pump checkbox (聺).
6. Select W1.WASTE, RM from the pull down menu for the

Flush Station, and W1.DiTiWaste for the DiTi Waste
Rack.
7. Set the System Liquid Aspirate Speed to 1000 µL/s.
8. Set the Fill Speed to 1000 µL/s.
9. Set the Fill Liquid Volume to 30000 µL/s.
10. Select Fill System to initiate filling of the dispense system.
Elimination of bubbles:
11. To run this procedure to eliminate bubbles from the
dispense tubing and syringes, uncheck the Use Fast Wash
Pump checkbox (□), reduce the Fill Liquid Volume from
30000 to 3000, then select Fill System.

200942-103—September 2007
Section 11 FaWa
12. When the test is running, tap the liquid lines to dislodge
any bubbles lodged in the dispense tubing network.

200942-103—September 2007
Options Menu
Menu Items
The following menu displays items that can be included in the
Options menu.
Items included in the Options menu are described in this

section.
Commands
The Options menu includes the following commands.
Command Description
Easy Option Uninstalls an easy option. Not used with the
m2000sp instrument.
Heated Heated incubator functions. Not used with
Incubator the m2000sp instrument.
Plate Washer Plate washer functions. Not used with the
m2000sp instrument.
Access Status Checks door locks functionality.
Options
Incubation Calibrates and checks the 1 mL Subsystem.
Device
SMIO for NAT Calibrates and checks the system liquid and
waste sensors.

200942-103—September 2007
Section 11 Access Status Options
Access Status Options
The Access Status Option function tests Access and Status

options such as the main door locks. The m2000sp instrument
does not use alarm devices or the pause/resume button.
Door Lock V2
Figure 14.2: Door Lock
Files, Directories
The Access Status Option function creates the following files
(refer also to Setup & Service, page 11-10).
Description
Result Files Directory: <install_path>\Results
File name: AccessStatusOption_<serial
_no>_<date>_<time>.any
Test Directory user-defined
Configuration File name <name>.any (Enter the full file
Files name (with extension .any)

200942-103—September 2007
Access Status Options Panel
Pages
The Access/Status Panel window includes the standard
command buttons and is subdivided into the following pages.
Page Description
Contents General overview, device, and procedure
selection.
Configuration Test configuration settings and tool buttons.
& Tools
Controls
Control Description
Available List of all devices to which Access and Status
Devices options can be connected.
Genesis-CU Front door locks connected to the CU
board.
Access Status Door locks, alarm device V3, and/or
Pause/Resume button connected to the
Access Status Options board.
Setup Setup procedure for supervisor board. Not
used with the m2000sp instrument.
Set Defaults Sets Tecan defaults; refer to EEPROM,
in EEPROM page 11-42.

200942-103—September 2007
Control Description
Test Test procedure.
Device Test Tests Access and Status options.
Using the Panel

Perform the following steps to use the Access Status Option
panel.
1. Start with Options Access Status Options. The
Access/Status Panel window with activate Contents page
displays.
2. In the Available Devices section, select the device to test
to which Access and Status option(s) are connected.
Continue as described in the appropriate section.
NOTE: If another device is selected, current test
results are deleted.
3. Before starting any test procedure, switch to the Printing
page to complete the Operator and Comment fields.
5. Print the test results with Print or switch to the Printing
page to preview the Test report.
Setup: Set Defaults in EEPROM

Purpose
The Set Defaults in EEPROM procedure sets internal
configuration data of Access Status options connected to the
SMIO-SAFY board to Tecan defaults. This must be done once if
a new software version is installed.
NOTE: This procedure is only enabled and executable if
the SMIO-SAFY board is selected in the Available
Devices section.

200942-103—September 2007
Procedure
Perform the following steps to set the Tecan defaults.
1. On the Contents page, select the following:
• SMIO-SAFY entry in the Available Device section.
• Select the Set Defaults in EEPROM checkbox (聺). No
further parameters need definition.
2. Download the default values to the SMIO-SAFY board and
select Start to have them reread by the Setup & Service
software.
3. Confirm the message Setup: Done with OK.
Test: Device Test


200942-103—September 2007
Procedure
Perform the following procedure to test the front door locks.
1. Select Access Status Options from the Options menu.
2. The Access/Status Panel displays. Select Access Status

under Available Devices. Select the Device Test under
Test.
3. Select the Configuration & Tools tab from the menu.

Select 'Door Lock (left) and Door Lock 2 (right) from the
Configuration menu. Select Apply to save the
configuration.
4. Check the door lock function of the desired lock by
selecting Lock then Unlock. Troubleshoot the door lock if
it does not respond to the command with an audible click.

200942-103—September 2007
5. Select Start to formally check the door lock function.
6. The prompt Please close the main door for Door Lock 1
(left) displays. Select OK.
7. The prompt Check if the left side is locked now displays.

Select OK if successful, if not select Cancel. If Cancel is
selected because the lock is not functioning, troubleshoot
the lock. Select OK.

200942-103—September 2007
8. The prompt Check if it is unlocked now displays. Select

OK if successful, if not select Cancel. If Cancel is selected
because the lock is not functioning, troubleshoot the lock.
Select OK.
9. The prompt Please close the main door for 'Door Lock 2
(right)' displays. Select OK.
10. The prompt Check if the right side is locked now

displays. Select OK if successful, if not select Cancel. If
Cancel is selected because the lock is not functioning,
troubleshoot the lock. Select OK.

200942-103—September 2007
11. The prompt 'Check if it is unlocked now displays. Select

OK if successful, if not select Cancel. If Cancel is selected
because the lock is not functioning, troubleshoot the lock.
12. Select OK if successful, if not select Cancel. If Cancel is

selected because the lock is not functioning, the test fails.
Troubleshoot the lock. The operator is notified the test
passed.
13. Select OK to end the test. The prompt Access Panel

displays.

200942-103—September 2007
Printing
laboratory requirements. It can be viewed onscreen and
printed.
1. Switch to the Printing page.
Control Description
recommended.
recommended.
Printer Setup Starts the standard Windows dialog to set up
a printer.

3. Preview the Test report (refer to Test Report, page 11-216)
onscreen with Result Preview.
4. The Test report can be printed with Print.
NOTE: If another device is selected, the current Test
report is deleted.

200942-103—September 2007
Test Report
Depending on the selection, the Test report includes the
following data.
Test Report
Header
Global data such as software versions, device and
instrument serial numbers, date of creation, and global
test review such as:
Test Result: Passed, if all tests passed, otherwise Failed
Tests done: All or Not all
Test Configuration: not relevant
Device Default
Settings: not relevant
Signature section with operator name
Device
Configuration: firmware version and bootware version
Access/Status Test: Passed or Failed or Not Done
Detailed Results
Depending on the tests performed, the following
results are printed:
Door Lock 1 (left): Passed or Failed
Door Lock 2 (right): Passed or Failed
Door Lock 3 (aux): Passed or Failed
Door Lock 4 (aux): Passed or Failed
RT-Incubator 1 (right) Front Door: Passed or Failed
RT-Incubator 1 (right) Slots: Passed or Failed
RT-Incubator 2 (left) Front Door: Passed or Failed
RT-Incubator 2 (left) Slots: Passed or Failed
Alarm Device: Passed or Failed
Alarm Green: Passed or Failed
Alarm Red: Passed or Failed
Pause/Release Button: Passed or Failed

200942-103—September 2007
Section 11 Incubation Device
Incubation Device
CAUTION: Hot Surface. Identifies an area where the
FSE could be exposed to hot surfaces, such as heater
zones 1 and 2. Allow the area to cool before servicing.
NOTE: This section can only be used with a TEMPO
110 measuring device. Refer to Section 9, Repair,
Replacement of Spare Parts, for an alternate method
for checking heater block temperature.
The Incubation Device panel provides for setup, installation,
and verification of the heating plates that are part of the 1 mL
Subsystem.

200942-103—September 2007
Setup
1. From the Main menu, select Options Incubation
Device. The Incubation Device panel displays.
2. Select the device to set up and highlight the device in the

Available Devices: window.
3. Select the Install Plates/Create or Edit Custom Plates
checkbox (聺) under Setup:.
4. Two additional tabs, Plate Installation and Setup
Settings are available.
5. Select the Plate Installation tab. The following page

displays.

200942-103—September 2007
6. From the Available Plates dialog of the Plate Installation

tab, select the NAT 50/75 plate.
7. Use the right arrow key () to move the NAT 50/75 plate
from the Available Plates: window to the Installed
Plates: window.
8. Select the TEMPO110 option under the Heating Block
Calibration by. menu.
9. Set the Lower temperature: to 50°C and the Upper
temperature: to 75°C.
10. Select Apply to apply the settings.
11. Select Start to initiate the protocol. The operator is
prompted to connect the TEMPO110 measuring device to
the instrument.
12. The operator is notified the procedure is proceeding.
13. On completion of the test, the operator is notified if the
procedure passed or failed.
14. Select OK.

200942-103—September 2007
Burn-In of Heating Test

The Burn-In of Heating test is used when a new heating block
is installed.
1. From the Contents tab select the Burn-In of Heating Test.
2. Select the Test Configuration tab and select the heating

block to burn in.
3. Select Start to initiate the procedure.

4. The procedure takes approximately 2.5 hours.

200942-103—September 2007
OPTIONAL Test: Heating Validation with TEMPO110

This test is used to verify heater block performance using the
TEMPO110 measuring device.
1. From the Main menu, select <Options><Incubation
Device>. The Incubation Device panel displays.
2. From the Contents tab select the Heating Validation

with TEMPO110 (optional) checkbox (聺) under Test:.
3. Switch to the Test Configuration tab.
NOTE: The temperature device default setting is
50°C.
4. If 50°C is not the desired temperature, double click on the

50°C device and change to 75°C.
5. Enter a two to four character name in the 'Operator Alias'
field. Select Apply to save the settings.
6. Select Start to initiate the protocol.
7. The operator is prompted to connect the TEMPO110
temperature measuring device.
8. The test takes about 45 minutes to finish. When the test is
completed, the operator is notified that the test passed or
failed.

200942-103—September 2007
9. The outcome of the test can be viewed in the Results page.

Criteria for passing:
• Limit 50°C = ± 1.4
• Limit 75°C = ± 2.3
• Timeout = 45 minutes
10. Results of the test can be printed by selecting the Print
checkbox (聺).
11. Results of the test can be saved by selecting the Save As
key.

200942-103—September 2007
Section 11 SMIO for NAT
SMIO for NAT

Calibration of the DiTi Waste Sensor

1. Go to the <Options><SMIO for NAT> menu.
2. Select DiTi Waste Sensor Calibration under Setup.

200942-103—September 2007
3. Go to the Tools & Configuration tab.

4. Verify the Device Type is NAT. If not, select NAT from the
pull down menu. Select Diti Waste Full. Clear the other
checkboxes.
5. Select Start. The prompt Place a reflecting plate at about

120 (mm) below the ultrasonic sensor displays. Instead
of placing the plate at 120 mm, place the plate at 300 mm
below the sensor.
6. Select Next. The prompt Turn both potentiometers

counterclockwise to their stop positions displays.

200942-103—September 2007
7. Select Next. The prompt Adjust the distance

the integrated LED just lights up displays.
8. Select Next. The prompt Setup: Done displays.
9. Select OK.
NOTE: If the calibration fails, replace the sensor.
Adjustment of System Liquid Level Sensors

Potentiometers
NOTE: System liquid level sensing is accomplished by
changes in capacitance. Water droplets on the inside
and outside of the liquid container can adversely affect
potentiometer adjustment and sensor calibration. The
waste liquid sensor is an optical sensor.
1. Remove the two screws securing the potentiometer to the
bracket.
2. Pour 1 L of water into the container and allow the water to
settle.
3. Move the sensor to the left to access the potentiometer
adjustment screw located on the rear face of the sensor.

200942-103—September 2007
4. Keep the sensor at the same level of the mounting

brackets.
5. Hold the sensor in place with one hand or use the
container to hold the sensor in place against the bracket.
6. With the container in place, adjust the potentiometer so
the sensor light is off.
7. Adjust the potentiometer in the opposite direction until
the light comes on.
8. Add 1 L of liquid to the container, for a total of 2 L in the
container.
9. Verify the sensor light is off.
10. Attach the sensor to the bracket and perform the sensor
verification procedure detailed below.
Waste Liquid Sensor Potentiometer Adjustment

1. Disconnect the waste container hoses and remove the cap.
2. Pour 8.5 L of water into the container and allow the water
to settle.
3. Switch the instrument on.
4. Adjust the potentiometer, located on the end of the
sensor, counter clockwise until the sensor LED goes out.
5. Turn the potentiometer clockwise slowly until sensor LED
turns on.
6. Turn the potentiometer clockwise another 180 degrees
(half turn).
7. Add 1.5 L of liquid to the container, for a total of 10.0 L in
the container.
8. Verify the sensor LED is on.
9. Pour out the liquid. Dry the outside surface of the
container, but leave the inside wet.
10. Place the container back in position and check to ensure
the sensor light is off.
11. If the sensor is on perform a minor adjustment of the
potentiometer until the sensor is off.
12. Repeat steps 1 through 11 to verify accuracy of the
potentiometer adjustment.
13. Perform the Sensor Verification Procedure detailed below.

200942-103—September 2007
14. Replace the sensor only after two (2) consecutive failed
adjustment attempts.
Rapid Sensor Test

2. Go to the Tools & Configuration tab and select the

box(es) of the sensor(s) to check.
NOTE: If more than one checkbox is selected, tests
are performed sequentially. If a test fails, continue
with Accurate Sensor Verification.
System Bottle Empty

1. Remove the system bottle. The panel displays yes and the
box is darkened.
2. Place your hand in front of the sensor. The panel changes

to no.
NOTE: If the change occurs, the sensor is
functioning.

200942-103—September 2007
Wash Bottle Full

1. Remove the wash bottle and place your hand in front of
the sensor.
2. The panel changes from no to yes' and the box is
darkened.
NOTE: If the change occurs, the sensor is

functioning.
DiTi Waste Full

Hold your hand just below the sensor. The panel changes from
no to yes and the box is darkened.
NOTE: If the change occurs, the sensor is functioning.

200942-103—September 2007
Accurate Sensor Verification
System Bottle
2. Select the Sensors Test checkbox (聺).
3. Go to the Tools & Configuration tab and select the

System Bottle Empty checkbox (聺).
4. Select Start. The prompt Fill system bottle with 1.0 [liter]
of liquid displays.
5. Select Next. The prompt Add 2.0 [liter] of liquid displays.

200942-103—September 2007
6. Select Next. If the test was successful, the prompt Sensor

Test: Passed displays.
7. If the test fails, adjust the system liquid sensor

potentiometer as described in the previous section.
Liquid Waste Bottle

2. Select the Sensors Test checkbox (聺).
3. Go to the Tools & Configuration tab and select the Wash
Bottle Full checkbox (聺).
4. Select Start. The prompt Fill waste bottle with 8.5 [liter]
of liquid displays.
5. Select Next.
6. The prompt Add 2.0 [liter] of liquid displays.
7. Select Next.

200942-103—September 2007
8. If the test was successful, the prompt Sensor Test: Passed

displays.

1. Go to <Options><SMIO for NAT>.
2. Select the Sensors Test box.
3. Go to the Tools & Configuration tab and check the DiTi
Waste Full box.
4. Select Start. The prompt Place a reflecting plate at
180 [mm] below the sensor displays. Instead of placing
sensor.
5. Select Next. The prompt Place the plate at 120 [mm]

below the sensor displays. Instead of placing the plate at

200942-103—September 2007
6. Select Next. If the test was successful, the prompt Sensor

Test: Passed displays.

200942-103—September 2007
Section 12: Spare Parts and Accessories
SECTION 12:
SPARE PARTS AND
ACCESSORIES

200942-103—September 2007
Spare Parts and Accessories Section 12
NOTES

200942-103—September 2007
Table of Contents
TOC
Spare Parts List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-5
Worktable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-5
System Electronics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-5
Power Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6
X-Drive Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6
Liquid Handling Arm (LiHa) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-7
RoMa Standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-9
PosID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-9
Liquid System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-11
Fast Wash (FaWa) Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-11
Dilutors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-11
Access Option and Waste Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-12
1 mL Heat-Mag Subsystem (1 mL Subsystem) Components
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-12
Computer, Monitor, and Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-13
Cabinet and Instrument Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-14
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-15
Preventive Maintenance Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-15
Accessories and Commodities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-16
Output Deck. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-16
Upgrade Kits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-17
Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-17
Abbottlink and MxN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-17
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-17

200942-103—September 2007
This section lists and identifies spare parts and accessories

needed for maintenance and repair of the m2000sp G-series.
Ordering information is also included.
NOTE: The Field Replaceable Unit Database found on
the Global Service and Support website maintains the
most current part numbers and descriptions.

200942-103—September 2007
Section 12 Spare Parts List
Spare Parts List

Green shading indicates parts that can be used on both the
E-series and the G-series models.
Worktable
Part Description Number
WORKTABLE, ASPS Stainless steel; worktable cutout at 619730
grid 18
PIN SET GENESIS Includes 25 guide pins, 20 stop pins, 04J97-36
5 reference guide pins, and 5 carrier
lock reference pins
PIN LOCK FROG 100 PCE Set of 100 619017
GENESIS/MINI PREP
COVER SCREW WHI. 20 PCE, Screw covers for the worktable; set of 619103
WORKTABLE GENESIS 20
STRIP 200CM SEAL WASTE CHANNEL Rubber sealing strip for the worktable; 619003
WORKTABLE 200 cm
WASH STATION Includes tube connectors 04J72-28
Metal Guide Pins Set 50-148040
PIN LOCK FROG SET 16 PCE 10619007
PIN STOP 100 PCE. GENESIS 10619030
WORKTABLE
PIN GUIDE SET 25 PCE. WORKTABLE 10619439
System Electronics
PCB OPTIBO FREEDOM 619856
FUSE 6.3 AT SET 10 PCE 6.3 AT, set of 10 619821
FUSE 8A 10 PCE 8 AT, set of 10 619823
PCB CU GENESIS 619828 or
10619301
CABLE PC-OPTIBO 619232

200942-103—September 2007
Power Module
POWER SUPPLY 2 960W RWS/FREEDOM 100-240 VAC, 50-60 HZ, 960 W power 619844
150/200 supply, complete with bracket, lamp
and switch
POWER CABLES, SWISS 04J97-16
POWER CABLES, EUROPE 04J97-18
POWER CABLES, USA 04J97-20
POWER CABLES, UK 04J97-22
X-Drive Assembly
X-DRIVE COMPLETE GENESIS 619854
FREEDOM
X-BELT 16/250 GENESIS FREEDOM 619855

200942-103—September 2007

ARM LIHA 8CH. REPL. Genesis Freedom Includes 8 Z-racks and 8 Tip Adapter 619860
Y-BELT LIHA ARM 2 PIECE GENESIS Y-belt for LiHa Freedom; set of 2 619215
PCB DC SERVO 1 For LiHa; RoMa; Z,Y; PosID; Y/B 619303
PCB DC SERVO POWER 1 GENESIS For LiHa and RoMa 619829 or
10626201
PCB LIHA ARM GENESIS FREEDOM 619864
PCB ILID FIRST LIHA FDM EVO-2 30014383
CABLE ILID PCB-BACKPLANE GENESIS ILID board to Backplane 619861
FREEDOM
CABLE ILID SET 4 PCE GENESIS Set of 4 619863
FREEDOM
CABLE FLEX LIHA/ROMA 13 PIN Flex cable for LiHa/RoMa; 13 pins 619866
FREEDOM 150
MOTOR COMPLETE Y-AXIS LiHa Servo motor for LiHa Y-axis 30019824
GENESIS
TUBING SUPPORT LIHA SET 4 P 30014387
GENESIS FDM
MOTOR DC LIHA ARM Z-AXIS + POSID Servo motor for LiHa Z-axis and 619323
Y-AXIS PosID 2 Y-axis
DITI Spare Set Includes 8 steel adapters, 8 plastic 04J97-38
(Option DiTi Cone ASPS) tubes, 8 needles, 8 cones, 8 O-rings,
and 8 separator rings. For V.1 DiTi
cones
OPTION DITI CONE ASPS V2 Includes 8 steel adapters, 8 plastic 30027324
tubes, 8 needles, 8 cones, and
10 O-rings. For V.2 DiTi cones
ADAPTER TIP GENESIS FREEDOM 619893
CABLE ROUND LIHA GENESIS 619876
FREEDOM 100/150
OPTION LOWER EJECTION DITI Lower DiTi eject option 612550
MAGNET LOWER EJECTION DITI Solenoid for the lower DiTi eject 619520
OPTION option
COVER SLIDE DITI WASTE 10613030
KIT LOWER DITI UPDATE 10619361
OPTION DITI CONE 8 PCE AND 30026919
WRENCH V2

200942-103—September 2007

O-RING DITI 10 PC V2 Includes 10 O-rings. For V.2 DiTi 30026922
cones.
DITI SLIDE For wash station 04J72-29
RING SEAL SET 8P. + O-RING 8P. DITI Includes 8 O-rings and 8 separator 619508
OPTION rings. For V.1 DiTi cones.
NO DITI WRENCH LABEL 50-148319
GUIDE TUBING GENESIS FREEDOM 619853
m1000/m2000sp Support Tubing 30014404
Upgrade
SHAFT DRIVE STAR-SHAPED LiHa 4 PCE. 30026358
PINION Z-GEAR STAR-SHAPED SHAFT 4 30026360
PCE.

200942-103—September 2007
RoMa Standard
Roma Grippers RoMa fingers, screws, and 3M tape 50-148125
PCB GRIPPER ROMA Gripper board 619300
MOTOR ROTARY DC SERVO ROMA Rotator motor 619345
OPTION
CABLE FLEX 10 PIN LONG ROMA For gripper interface; 1.61 m, 10 pins 619877
GENESIS FDM
PCB DC SERVO 1 For LiHa; RoMa Z, Y; and PosID Y/B 619303
PCB ROMA GENESIS FREEDOM 619868
Y-BELT ROMA OPTION Y-belt, RoMa 619513
MOTOR COMPLETE Y-AXIS ROMA Motor for LiHa Z-axis and PosID 2 30019825
Y-axis
Z-MOTOR ROMA OPTION Z-motor 619346
BRAKE SOLENOID Z-AXIS COMPLETE Active brake 30027047
ROMA-3
SET ROMA Z BRAKE M2000EVO Brake shoe and spring only 30031034
CABLE FLEX LIHA/ROMA 13 PIN Flex cable for LiHa/RoMa; 13 pins 619866
FREEDOM 150
PCBA DEVICE CU BOARD 1 619050
ARM ROMA SPARE GENESIS FREEDOM RoMa arm, excluding gripper finger 10619888
and flex cable
PCB BACKPLANE ROMA 2 OPTION 619343
PCB DC SERVO POWER 1 GENESIS 619829 or
10626201
Cable Flex Y-axis Back-back Roma FDM. Flex cable Y-axis backplane to RoMa 619339
Freedom backplane
GRIPPER MP OBJECTS OPTION ROMA 612601
ARM
PosID
Option PosID2 Genesis Entire assembly with pan and X-drive 10612412
X-BELT 5M POSID2 X-belt for PosID 2; 5 m 619611
CABLE FLEX POSID2 GENESIS 100/150 Flex cable 619602

200942-103—September 2007

MOTOR COMPLETE X-AXIS POSID2 Servo Motor for LiHa Y-axis and PosID 30019821
2 X-axis
PCBA CU POSID2 Control unit 619600
PCB Y/B POSID2 619605
PCB DC SERVO 1 For LiHa; RoMa Z,Y; PosID Y/B 619303
PCB DSP POSID2 Decoder board 619607
MOTOR DC SCANNER DRIVE POSID2 Scanner motor for PosID 2 B-axis 10619601
SCANNER LASER POSID2 Laser scanner without DSP board 619610
CABLE SCANNER POSID2 Scanner cable 619609
Y-BELT POSID2 Y-belt 619612
GRIPPER POSID2 PosID rack gripper 619622
MOTORS COMPLETE Y-AXIS POSID2 Servo motor for LiHa Z-axis and 30019823
PosID 2 Y-axis
SENSOR TUBE POSID2 Includes casing, sensor, and cable 619606
POSID MODULE W/O POSID Base and X-drive not included 619608
BASE/X-DRIVE

200942-103—September 2007
Liquid System
Y-Distributor 2 Out. MPO Set 5P Genesis 10 mm Y-distributor; set of 5 619410
Tube Aspirating PVC 6.9 MM 5000 MM 619401
Genesis
BLOCK CONNECTOR LIQUID POM 1:4 619406
1/0 M6
TUBE INTERCONNECTING M6 650 MM Tubing to dilutor 619402
GENESIS
Tube Pipetting FEP M6 2.5 1.5 mm 2800 Pipetting tubing 619403
mm
Clamp 9.1 + 9.6 mm 2 SET 10 Pce. 9.1 and 9.6 mm diameter tubing 619414
Genesis clamp sets; 10 each
Fast Wash (FaWa) Pump

FWO 4/8 TIP Complete 612704
PUMP MEMBRANE PP/FFPM Spare fast wash pump 619509
REPLACEMENT FWO
PCB MPO FAST WASH + LICOS For FaWa pump 619312
CABLE CONNECT FWO/MPO RIGHT OPTIBO to MPO board cable 619415
RSP 100/150
Y DISTRIBUTOR 2 OUT.MPO SET 5P. 619410
GENESIS
CONTACT STRIP MPO 12CM Copper MPO grounding strip 619898
Tube FaWa Silicon 5.8mm 5000mm 619405
Genesis
VALVE PRESSURE-RELIEF PP 15.5N/CM2 10619523
KIT FAWA MAINT. SINGLE HEAD PUMP 10619434
GENESIS
TUBE WASTE PVC 9*12MM 2500MM 10619404
GENESIS
Dilutors
DILUTOR XP SMART Includes M6 fittings 10649015

200942-103—September 2007

VALVE 3-WAY 120° M6 DILUTOR XP 10649016
SMART
PCB VCC 8 DILUTOR XP3000 PLUS Backplane for all 8 dilutors 619259
SYRINGE 1.0 mL 04J97-44
Access Option and Waste Monitoring

LOCK DOOR L+R FRONT Right and left front shield 619847
SH.RSP/RWS/NPS/FDM
PCB SMIO GENESIS SMIO-SAFY Board for door locks 619850
RSP/RWS/NPS/FREEDOM
CABLE COMMUN. SMIO PCB GENESIS CAN-BUS Cable from OPTIBO Board 619894
FREEDOM to SMIO/SAFY Board
PCB SMIO GENESIS FE500 SMIO for sensors 10626207
CABLE, CAN 0.6M CAN-BUS Cable from SMIO/SAFY 619740
Board to SMIO Board
SENSOR CAPACITIVE 3M ASPS Sensor for System Liquid Container 619741
SENSOR ULTRASONIC 2 MASPS Sensor for Solid Waste Container 619742
SENSOR OPTICAL 3M ASPS Sensor for Liquid Waste Container 619777
1 mL Heat-Mag Subsystem (1 mL Subsystem) Components

MAG.HEAT SUBSYSTEM Complete 1 mL Subsystem, without 619743
OPTIBO Cables
CABLE SUBSYSTEM ASPS Cable connecting the OPTIBO to the 619749
CC Board; quantity: 1
PCBA COMPLETE TE-MAGS. Control Center Board 760712
BLOCK MAGNET ASPS Magnetic Block and Cover 619745
BLOCK HEAT ASPS 619744
COVER RT BLOCK ASPS RT Block 619746
CABLE HEAT BLOCK ASPS Cable Connection for Heater Block 619750
SUBSYSTEM CARRIER 04J97-50
SUBSYSTEM CARRIER COV 04J97-51
COVER HEATING BLOCK ASPS 619757

200942-103—September 2007
Computer, Monitor, and Printer

m2000 SCC RAD945, CPU 01L67-02
FLAT PANEL DISPLAY 09K99-01
Keyboard – English, Tec 04J72-94
m1000 m2000 System Keyboard, SCC 04J72-96
(Spanish)
(French)
(Italian)
(German)
m2000 Keyboard SCC (with optical KEYBOARD, SCC 01N04-01
mouse)
m2000 Keyboard (with optical mouse) KEYBOARD, SCC SPANISH 01N03-01
(SPANISH)
m2000 Keyboard (with optical mouse) KEYBOARD, SCC FRENCH 01N00-01
(FRENCH)
m2000 Keyboard (with optical mouse) KEYBOARD, SCC ITALIAN 01N02-01
(ITALIAN)
m2000 Keyboard (with optical mouse) KEYBOARD, SCC GERMAN 01N01-01
(GERMAN)
m1000 m2000 System SCC Component 06L77-01
Stand
m1000 m2000 Printer 220V 06L79-02
m1000 m2000 Printer 110V 06L79-01
M2000 Mouse 03L33-01
PARALLEL PRINTER CABLE 50-148129
NETWORK CROSSOVER CABLE, 15M 50-148060
NETWORK CROSSOVER CABLE, 100M 50-148065
5-port Ethernet Switch 50-148070
PC Anywhere and XPe License Labels 50-148200
EDGEPORT FOR CHILLER 50-148128

200942-103—September 2007
Cabinet and Instrument Covers

VS Cabinet Assembly 04J72-06
Door Left Cabinet Asps Plexiglas 619732
Door Right Cabinet Asps Plexiglas 619733
GUIDE RAIL DRAWER WASTE ONE PAIR 619734
CHAIN ENERGY WASTE DRAW 619735
Magnet Waste Drawer 10 PCE Set of 10 619736
HINGE SET 10 PCE. ACRYLIC GLASS Front cover hinges; set of 10 619463
COVER
GUIDE TUBING GENESIS FREEDOM 619853
BLIND WASTE FRONT GENESIS RSP 150 Waste blind 619437
System Liquid Assembly Includes tubing and connections 04J72-12
Liquid Waste Assembly Includes tubing and connections 04J72-10
(labels not included: order #
04J97-62)
Container, 10L Liquid For system liquid or liquid waste 04J72-08
(labels not included: order #
04J97-62)
Container 50 L Sld Wast Includes cover 04J72-14
HANDLES AND BRACKET FRONT 619049
COVER ASPS
STRIP 200CM SEAL WASTE CHANNEL 619003
WORKTABLE
PANE LEFT/RIGHT ACRYLIC GLASS 30016640
M2000™
PANE TOP ACRYLIC GLASS M2000 30016642
PANE FRONT ACRYLIC GLASS M2000 30016644
SPRING GAS FRONT PANEL FREEDOM 10649031
EVO
SCREW SHELF POSITION 18 PCE 30016645

200942-103—September 2007
Tools
ROMA GRIPPERS TAPE 3M Tape for Reference Plate 50-148126
TIP REFERENCE STEEL SHORT LiHa Reference Tip (1 pc) (new style) 30026915
TUBE GREASE 2 PCE. SYS GENESIS Lubrication Grease 10626104
FE500
TOOL CALIBRATING ROMA RoMa Calibration Tool 612622
TOOL ADJUSTMENT ROMA RoMa Teach Plate 613101
RACK SERVICE POSID 613100
HANDLE TRANSPORT SET GENESIS Transport handle set 612003
SCREW SET ASPS Includes 5 each of the following: 619751
M 2x6 mm, M 2x8 mm, M 2.5x6 mm,
M 3x5 mm, M 3x8 mm, M 3x10 mm,
M 4x10 mm, M 4x12 mm,
M 3x12 mm, M 4x8 mm, and
M 4x20 mm
LIHA WRENCH HOLDER 8-69545-01
LIHA Y-SPREAD AID 8-69546-01
REAGENT NEST CALIBRATION TOOL 50-148020
LOCK TRANSPORTATION FREEDOM 30024075
EVO 2 PCE.
PACKAGING BOX GEN.FRDM & FREE- 30024077
DOM EVO
Preventive Maintenance Kit

KIT PREVENTIV MAINTENANCE ASPS Kit includes all replacement parts 619912
required to perform routine 6 month
and annual maintenance, with the
exception of DiTi cones. Includes
old-style Dilutor valves (04J97-42)
VALVE 3-WAY 120° M6 DILUTOR XP 10649016
SMART
DITI Spare Set 04J97-38
OPTION DITI CONE ASPSV2 30027324

200942-103—September 2007
Accessories and Commodities

Carrier Additiv Trough 100 mL trough for m1000 04J72-24
Assy. Carrier 200 ML Reagent Vessel D-57226-103
Carrier, Mp Roma Wide 04J72-26
Wash Station 04J72-28
Rack, Robotic DiTi 200 04J72-30
Rack, Robotic DiTi 1000 04J72-32
Rack, DiTi Reuse 1000 04J72-34
Striprack 13 mm Tubes 04J72-82
Striprack 16 mm Tubes 04J72-86
Deepwell Plate, DiTi Reuse 04J97-28
ASPS 1000 µL (1 mL) Pipette Tip 04J71-10
200 µL Pipette Tips 04J71-17
Labels, Barcode 04J97-52
Labels, Container 04J97-62
m2000sp Sample Rack Label Kit 30019855
TSB label 50-602396
Promega RNA Labels 50-148301
m2000 System 13 mm PoSt set Set includes 6 standard + 6 custom 01N93-01
m2000 System 16 mm PoSt set Set includes 6 standard + 6 custom 01N94-01
Output Deck
Peltier Output Deck Assy. Chiller unit D-57217-104
m2000sp Reagent Nest 50-148050
PCR PLATE FOAM INSULATION, 01N98-01
REPLACEMENT
CABLE CHILLER PSU 12V 10619928
PCR Bumpstop 50-148131

200942-103—September 2007
Upgrade Kits
m2000 m1000 Upgrade Kit 09K13-01
m2000sp Worktable Kit 6L60-03
Wheels 8-200918-01
m2000 System Hardware Kit 50-148320
Software
m2000sp System Software, SCC Series D, 50-148133
Release 3.0
m2000sp System Software, SCC RAD945, 50-148132
Release 3.0
P24 BIOS Upgrade, SCC Series D 50-148140
Abbottlink and MxN

m2000 Abbottlink Setup 02N37-01
m2000 System Network 02N83-01
Abbottlink PC 50-148332
Hardware Firewall 50-148333
RJ-45 to RJ-45 Cat53 LAN cable (50 ft) 50-148334
Hood
m2000sp Hood Assembly G-Series 02N29-01
Hood Patlite Signal Tower with 50-148340
connector
Hood assembly, gullwing door 50-148341
Hood assembly, C-arm support with 50-148342
window

200942-103—September 2007

Hood molecular control board AMC_1 50-148330
Hood power cable assembly 50-148344
Hood serial cable for patlite signal tower 50-148345
Hood assembly window front 50-148346
Hood light switch jumper cable 50-148347
Hood lamp fluorescent 50-148348
EMC Upgrade for hood G-Series 50-148349

200942-103—September 2007
Appendix Passwords
APPENDIX:
PASSWORDS
m2000sp G-series Service Manual Appendix-1

200942-103—September 2007
Appendix
Appendix
NOTES
Appendix-2 m2000sp G-series Service Manual

200942-103—September 2007
m2000sp User Account Passwords
m2000sp USER ACCOUNT PASSWORDS

Day FSE CSC
1 8151 11
2 9321 12
3 9101 13
4 7291 14
5 7112 15
6 3331 16
7 5361 17
8 7312 18
9 1421 19
10 8291 20
11 8122 21
12 4261 22
13 7271 23
14 3131 24
15 7212 25
16 9381 26
17 5271 27
18 7251 28
19 0222 29
20 5301 30
21 0381 31
22 2341 32
23 9322 33
24 2181 34
25 4171 35
26 9191 36
27 9251 37
28 3301 38
29 3122 39
30 2331 40
31 3181 41
CONFIDENTIAL! NOT TO BE GIVEN TO OR LEFT WITH CUSTOMERS!
m2000sp G-series Service Manual Appendix-3

200942-103—September 2007
Appendix
NOTES
Appendix-4 m2000sp G-series Service Manual

200942-103—September 2007

m2000sp Service Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

m2000sp Service Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

G-series

© 2007 Abbott Laboratories

Abbott Molecular Inc.

ii m2000sp G-series Service Manual

Document Revision Section(s) Pages Revised, Software

200942-101 11/2005 New Document New Document 1.0

m2000sp G-series Service Manual iii

Revision Status continued

ISAs Incorporated in this Revision TSBs Incorporated in this Revision

iv m2000sp G-series Service Manual

m2000sp G-series Service Manual v

• No part of this media may be reproduced, stored,

vi m2000sp G-series Service Manual

m2000sp G-series Service Manual vii

m2000sp Operations Manual

viii m2000sp G-series Service Manual

Refer to Consumables on page 8–6 of Section 8 for more

m2000sp G-series Service Manual ix

Operators exposed to biohazardous or potentially infectious

CAUTION: Personal Injury Risk. Take care to avoid

x m2000sp G-series Service Manual

Section 1: About This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

Section 2: Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

Section 3: Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

Section 4: Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

Section 5: Maintenance and Diagnostic Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

Section 6: Upgrade Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

Section 7: Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

Section 8: Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

Section 9: Repair, Replacement of Spare Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1

Section 10: Shutdown, Storage, and Shipping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1

Section 11: Genesis Setup and Service Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

Section 12: Spare Parts and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

Appendix: Passwords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix-1

m2000sp G-series Service Manual Table of Contents-1

Table of Contents-2 m2000sp G-series Service Manual

m2000sp G-series Service Manual 1-1

1-2 m2000sp G-series Service Manual

m2000sp G-series Service Manual 1-3

This manual is intended to assist Abbott Field Service

Previous View Next View

1-4 m2000sp G-series Service Manual

Purpose of This Manual

m2000sp G-series Service Manual 1-5

Field Service Engineers

1-6 m2000sp G-series Service Manual

Conventions Used in This Manual

m2000sp G-series Service Manual 1-7

Abbreviations Used in This Manual

1-8 m2000sp G-series Service Manual

m2000sp G-series Service Manual 1-9

Additional reference documents are listed below but not

1-10 m2000sp G-series Service Manual

m2000sp G-series Service Manual 2-1

2-2 m2000sp G-series Service Manual

m2000sp G-series Service Manual 2-3

Purpose of This Section

Significance of These Safety Instructions

2-4 m2000sp G-series Service Manual

Notices and Symbols

WARNINGS Used in This Manual

WARNING: Potential Biohazard.

WARNING: Class 2 Laser Product.

WARNING: Pinch Point.